Normal view

Before yesterdayTechRadar - All the latest technology news

How to watch The Open 2026: Free Live Streams, TV Channels & Preview — Round 1

Watch The Open 2026 live streams, as the oldest golf tournament in the world returns for its 154th staging, at the links of Royal Birkdale. Scottie Scheffler will defend his crown won 12 months ago, while Rory McIlroy and local favorite Tommy Fleetwood – born minutes away in nearby Southport – are also among the leading contender's for golf's original major.

After winning by four strokes at Royal Portrush in 2025, Scheffler is trying to become the first Open champion to successfully defend their crown since Padraig Harrington in 2008-09. Yet the world number one will be smarting from missing his first cut in 78 tournaments after failing to make the weekend at the Scottish Open a week ago. He'll tee it up with world number three Matt Fitzpatrick and 2024 champion Xander Schauffele.

Fleetwood is seeking to become the first English winner of the Claret Jug since Nick Faldo in 1992. He goes out in a stellar group with 2021 champion Jon Rahm and Jordan Spieth, who won the last time the tournament was held at Royal Birkdale in 2017. Further home hopefuls include Aaron Rai, the reigning PGA Champion, and Justin Rose who exploded as an amateur here in 1998.

Rory McIlroy will also fancy his chances. The two-time reigning Masters champion finished strongly at the Scottish Open last weekend, with a final-round 64.

Blessed with a beautiful art deco clubhouse, the course is a cracker and conditions are set to be warm, which will bring its own challenge of controlling the ball on a links course by the sea.

Read on for our guide on where to watch The Open 2026 online, on TV and potentially for free wherever you are. Scroll down for the Round 1 tee times.

Can you watch The Open 2026 for free?

The Open coverage is predominantly locked behind a paywall, but there are a couple of ways to watch some free live streams from Royal Birkdale.

The Open app (available via the Apple Store and Google Play) will show coverage from Featured Groups over the course of the four days.

That will focus solely on those particular three or four groups, though, so for more exhaustive coverage, you'll have to look elsewhere. In the US there are free trials available that will let you tune in for nothing.

The tournament is being shown on NBC and USA Network, which are both carried by YouTube TV (10-day free trial), DirecTV Stream (5-day free trial) and Hulu+Live TV (3-day free trial).

Alternatively, you can live stream The Open 2026 on Peacock for next to nothing by taking advantage of the Walmart Plus 30-day trial for $1.

In Australia, Kayo Sports has a 7-day free trial to watch the tournament.

Traveling abroad right now? You can use a VPN to watch the Open Championship 2026 for free as if you were right at home.

Use a VPN to watch The Open 2026 live streams

A VPN is handy piece of software that can make your device appear as if it's back in your home country, so you can unlock your usual service. The best VPN right now? We recommend NordVPN – it does everything and comes with up to 75% off.

🟩 NordVPN – get the world's best VPN

Not having a VPN is like leaving your front door wide open in a busy city – anyone can walk right in and take a peek.

TechRadar regularly reviews all the biggest and best VPN providers and NordVPN is our #1 choice.

Up to 75% off today
3 extra months free
Unlocks all necessary streaming services

Get NordVPN and stream The Open 2026 from anywhere.View Deal

How to watch The Open 2026 live streams in the US

US flag banner

The Open 2026 coverage is shared between NBC, USA Network and Peacock in the US. All NBC coverage is being simulcasted on Peacock.

Rounds 1 and 2 air on NBC Sports Network/Peacock from 1.30am-4am, and on USA Network from 4am-3.30pm. Round 3 airs on USA from 5am-7am, and on NBC/Peacock from 7am-3pm. Round 4 airs on USA from 4am-7am, and on NBC/Peacock from 7am-finish. All times ET.

The Peacock price starts at $10.99/month or $109.99/year for a plan that carries live sports. However, you can access Peacock virtually for free with a Walmart Plus 30-day trial for $1.

NBC and USA Network, meanwhile, are available through Sling – specifically the Blue plan, which starts at $45.99/month. It includes NBC, ABC and Fox in select locations, plus FS1, USA Network, FX and more.

Alternatively, both channels are also carried by YouTube TV and Hulu + Live TV, each of which offers a free trial to new users.

If you're traveling outside of the US, you can make use of NordVPN to catch the action.

How to watch The Open 2026 live streams in the UK

UK flag

(Image credit: Future)

In the UK, The Open Championship 2026 is being shown on Sky Sports, via the Sky Sports Main Event and Sky Sports Golf channels.

Sky Sports plans start from £35/month, or £20 if you're an existing Sky subscriber. Alternatively, grab a Now Sports subscription from £14.99/day or £34.99/month.

Outside the UK right now? Use NordVPN to access your preferred coverage of The Open Championship.

How to watch The Open 2026 live streams in Australia

Australian flag

(Image credit: free)

In Australia, The Open 2026 is being televised on Fox Sports via Foxtel, with live streaming available via Kayo Sports.

Kayo Sports starts at AU$30 per month after a 7-day free trial. Or you can get your first month for AU$1.

If you're currently out of Australia but want to watch your usual Open coverage, you'll need to get yourself a VPN, as per the instructions above.

How to watch The Open 2026 live streams in Canada

Canada

(Image credit: Other)

In Canada, The Open 2026 is exclusive to TSN.

If you don't have cable, the TSN Plus streaming service costs CA$29.99/month or CA$249.99/year. However, you can currently get three months for CA$59.99.

If you're out of Canada but still want to tune in, explore the VPN route set out above, which will help you access your accounts from anywhere.

The Open 2026 FAQs

What are the Round 1 tee times?

(All times BST, which is -5 hours from ET)

6:35 a.m. Matthew Baldwin, Thomas Detry, James Nicholas

6:46 a.m. Michael Kim, David Hillier, Andy Sullivan

6:57 a.m. Ryan Fox, Andrew Novak, Matthew Jordan

7:08 a.m. Henrik Stenson, Max Homa, Joe Dean

7:19 a.m. Robert MacIntyre, Rickie Fowler, Alex Fitzpatrick

7:30 a.m. David Duval, Martin Couvra, Matthew Southgate

7:41 a.m. Sungjae Im, Daniel Brown, Fifa Laopakdee*

7:52 a.m. Gary Woodland, Jake Knapp, Jordan Smith

8:03 a.m. Francesco Molinari, Tom McKibbin, Lev Grinberg*

8:14 a.m. Hennie du Plessis, Jose Luis Ballester, Dan Bradbury

8:25 a.m. Angel Ayora, Victor Perez, Mateo Pulcini*

8:36 a.m. Stewart Cink, Scott Vincent, Joakim Lagergren

8:47 a.m. Michael Thorbjornsen, Kota Kaneko, Travis Smyth

9:03 a.m. Alex Smalley, Sam Stevens, Ryo Hisatsune

9:14 a.m. Akshay Bhatia, Harris English, Rasmus Hojgaard

9:25 a.m. Ben Griffin, Hideki Matsuyama, Min Woo Lee

9:36 a.m. Russell Henley, Justin Rose, Viktor Hovland

9:47 a.m. Justin Thomas, Alex Noren, Jason Day

9:58 a.m. Scottie Scheffler, Tyrrell Hatton, Bryson DeChambeau

10:09 a.m. Jordan Spieth, Tommy Fleetwood, Jon Rahm

10:20 a.m. Brian Harman, Si Woo Kim, Nick Taylor

10:31 a.m. Ryan Gerard, Maverick McNealy, David Puig

10:42 a.m. Kazuma Kobori, Tom Sloman, David Howard*

10:53 a.m. Antoine Rozner, Ren Yonezawa, Caleb Surratt

11:04 a.m. MJ Daffue, Frederic Lacroix, Jack McDonald

11:15 a.m. Jeongwoo Ham, Ryutaro Nagamo, Alejandro De Castro Piera*

11:41 a.m. John Parry, Eric Cole, Tiger Christensen

11:52 a.m. Eugenio Chacarra, Matt Wallace, Max Greyserman

12:03 p.m. Michael Brennan, Sahith Theegala, Laurie Canter

12:14 p.m. Cameron Smith, Keith Mitchell, Stuart Grehan*

12:25 p.m. Sepp Straka, Joaquin Niemann, Kurt Kitayama

12:36 p.m. Sami Valimaki, Shaun Norris, Jackson Suber

12:47 p.m. Darren Clarke, Adrien Saddier, Bernd Wiesberger

12:58 p.m. Keegan Bradley, Corey Conners, Casey Jarvis

1:09 p.m. Matt McCarty, Harry Hall, Haotong Li

1:20 p.m. Padraig Harrington, Marco Penge, Michael Hollick

1:31 p.m. Tom Kim, Billy Horschel, Mason Howell*

1:42 p.m. Johnny Keefer, Pierceson Coody, Keita Nakajima

1:53 p.m. Louis Oosthuizen, Jesper Svensson, Jack Buchanan

2:09 p.m. Bud Cauley, Jayden Schaper, Lucas Herbert

2:20 p.m. Kristoffer Reitan, Patrick Reed, JT Poston

2:31 p.m. Chris Gotterup, Sam Burns, Adam Scott

2:42 p.m. Collin Morikawa, JJ Spaun, Nicolai Hojgaard

2:53 p.m. Shane Lowry, Aaron Rai, Brooks Koepka

3:04 p.m. Cameron Young, Wyndham Clark, Ludvig Aberg

3:15 p.m. Rory McIlroy, Xander Schauffele, Matt Fitzpatrick

3:26 p.m. Jacob Bridgeman, Rasmus Neergaard-Petersen, Tim Wiedmeyer*

3:37 p.m. Patrick Cantlay, Daniel Berger, Nico Echevarria

3:48 p.m. Peter Uihlein, Alistair Docherty, Francesco Laporta

3:59 p.m. Cameron John, Austen Truslow, Sam Bairstow

4:10 p.m. Naoyuki Kataoka, Marcus Plunkett, Baard Bjoernevik

4:21 p.m. Kazuki Higa, Jiho Yang, Nevill Ruiter*

Round 2:

6:35 a.m. John Parry, Eric Cole, Tiger Christensen

6:46 a.m. Eugenio Chacarra, Matt Wallace, Max Greyserman

6:57 a.m. Michael Brennan, Sahith Theegala, Laurie Canter

7:08 a.m. Cameron Smith, Keith Mitchell, Stuart Grehan

7:19 a.m. Sepp Straka, Joaquin Niemann, Kurt Kitayama

7:30 a.m. Sami Valimaki, Shaun Norris, Jackson Suber

7:41 a.m. Darren Clarke, Adrien Saddier, Bernd Wiesberger

7:52 a.m. Keegan Bradley, Corey Conners, Casey Jarvis

8:03 a.m. Matt McCarty, Harry Hall, Haotong Li

8:14 a.m. Padraig Harrington, Marco Penge, Michael Hollick

8:25 a.m. Tom Kim, Billy Horschel, Mason Howell

8:36 a.m. Johnny Keefer, Pierceson Coody, Keita Nakajima

8:47 a.m. Louis Oosthuizen, Jesper Svensson, Jack Buchanan

9:03 a.m. Bud Cauley, Jayden Schaper, Lucas Herbert

9:14 a.m. Kristoffer Reitan, Patrick Reed, JT Poston

9:25 a.m. Chris Gotterup, Sam Burns, Adam Scott

9:36 a.m. Collin Morikawa, JJ Spaun, Nicolai Hojgaard

9:47 a.m. Shane Lowry, Aaron Rai, Brooks Koepka

9:58 a.m. Cameron Young, Wyndham Clark, Ludvig Aberg

10:09 a.m. Rory McIlroy, Xander Schauffele, Matt Fitzpatrick

10:20 a.m. Jacob Bridgeman, Rasmus Neergaard-Petersen, Tim Wiedemeyer,

10:31 a.m. Patrick Cantlay, Daniel Berger, Nico Echavarria

10:42 a.m. Peter Uihlein, Alistair Docherty, Francesco Laporta

10:53 a.m. Cameron John, Austen Truslow, Sam Bairstow

11:04 a.m. Naoyuki Kataoka, Marcus Plunkett, Baard Bjoernevik Skogen

11:15 a.m. Kazuki Higa, Jiho Yang, Nevill Ruiter

11:41 a.m. Matthew Baldwin, Thomas Detry James Nicholas

11:52 a.m. Michael Kim, Daniel Hillier, Andy Sullivan

12:03 p.m. Ryan Fox, Andrew Novak, Matthew Jordan

12:14 p.m. Henrik Stenson, Max Homa, Joe Dean

12:25 p.m. Robert MacIntyre, Rickie Fowler, Alex Fitzpatrick

12:36 p.m. David Duval, Martin Couvra, Matthew Southgate

12:47 p.m. Sungjae Im, Daniel Brown, Fifa Laopakdee

12:58 p.m. Gary Woodland, Jake Knapp, Jordan Smith

1:09 p.m. Francesco Molinari, Tom McKibbin, Lev Grinberg

1:20 p.m. Hennie du Plessis, Jose Luis Ballester Barrio, Dan Bradbury

1:31 p.m. Angel Ayora, Victor Perez, Mateo Pulcini

1:42 p.m. Stewart Cink, Scott Vincent, Joakim Lagergren

1:53 p.m. Michael Thorbjornsen, Kota Kaneko, Travis Smyth

2:09 p.m. Alex Smalley, Sam Stevens, Ryo Hisatsune

2:20 p.m. Akshay Bhatia, Harris English, Rasmus Hojgaard

2:31 p.m. Ben Griffin, Hideki Matsuyama, Min Woo Lee

2:42 p.m. Russell Henley, Justin Rose, Viktor Hovland

2:53 p.m. Justin Thomas, Alex Noren, Jason Day

3:04 p.m. Scottie Scheffler, Tyrrell Hatton, Bryson DeChambeau

3:15 p.m. Jordan Spieth, Tommy Fleetwood, Jon Rahm

3:26 p.m. Brian Harman, Si Woo Kim, Nick Taylor

3:37 p.m. Ryan Gerard, Maverick McNealy, David Puig

3:48 p.m. Kazuma Kobori, Tom Sloman, David Howard

3:59 p.m. Antoine Rozner. Ren Yonezawa, Caleb Surratt

4:10 p.m. MJ Daffue, Frederic Lacroix, Jack McDonald

4:21 p.m. Jeongwoo Ham, Ryutaro Nagano, Alejandro De Castro Piera

Who are the recent Open winners?

2025 – Scottie Scheffler
2024 – Xander Schauffele
2023 – Brian Harman
2022 – Cameron Smith
2021 – Collin Morikawa
2020 – N/A
2019 – Shane Lowry
2018 – Francesco Molinari
2017 – Jordan Spieth
2016 – Henrik Stenson

Can I follow The Open 2026 on my mobile?

Of course! Each of the major broadcasters has streaming services that you can access through mobile apps or via your phone's browser.

And, as we've mentioned above you can watch action from Featured Groups at the tournament on The Open app (available via the Apple Store and Google Play).

You can also stay up-to-date with all of the key highlights on the PGA's official social media channels on YouTube (@PGATour), Instagram (@PGATour), TikTok (@PGATour) and Facebook (@PGATour).

We test and review VPN services in the context of legal recreational uses. For example:1. Accessing a service from another country (subject to the terms and conditions of that service).2. Protecting your online security and strengthening your online privacy when abroad.We do not support or condone the illegal or malicious use of VPN services. Consuming pirated content that is paid-for is neither endorsed nor approved by Future Publishing.

The Australian government just told thousands of people to throw out their routers — despite experts warning it could be a major security risk

  • The Australian Competition & Consumer Commission (ACCC) has bricked thousands of routers
  • Flashing alternative firmware like OpenWRT is an option that the ACCC has ignored
  • Disposed SamKnows SK-WB8 routers can pose a security risk if they’re not first wiped with a factory reset

The Australian government’s competition regulator, the Australian Competition & Consumer Commission (ACCC), has initiated the bricking of some 4,000 routers, rolled out across the country in 2020 in order to collect information on broadband speeds.

Issued as part of the Measuring Broadband Australia (MBA) program, the routers were whiteboxes from SamKnows, a subsidiary of Cisco, and given a finite lifespan. That date was reached in June 2026, with the SamKnows SK-WB8 routers remotely disabled on June 30.

As a consequence, Australians are likely to toss the bricked routers, resulting in a sharp increase in e-waste. In doing so, they risk breaches of digital security if the routers are not first wiped. Worse, the ACCC’s position is further confused by the fact that these routers can be flashed, making their destruction quite pointless.

Data discarded, but the routers still work

Since the June 30 cut-off, the routers are known to power up, and while bricked for internet access, can seemingly be reused with custom router firmware. The nature of the data collected by the routers for the MBA program was for measurement and customer registration, and this has apparently been deleted, according to emails sent to volunteers of the program.

While accurate figures are unknown, by December 2020 over 2,600 of the SamKnows SK-WB8 routers had been distributed by the ACCC, with 4,000 planned for release across the lifespan of the MBA program.

Attempts to contact the ACCC and Cisco to learn more about why volunteers of the MBA program are being encouraged to dispose of perfectly usable routers have been met with stock, non-committal responses.

The ACCC gave ArsTechnica a potted history of the device and the MBA program, as well as stating that “volunteers are encouraged to unplug their disabled whitebox and dispose of it in an environmentally responsible manner via free e-waste recycling services.”

Should you ditch your ACCC router?

If there is no reason to keep your ACCC-supplied router and have a replacement ready, it is important to factory reset the device before disposal. This ensures that any administrator passwords, ISP details, and custom network settings are deleted, keeping them from falling into the wrong hands.

Finding a safe disposal option will help to ensure the router is correctly dismantled. The ACCC has emailed recipients of the SamKnows SK-WB8 routers informing them of the correct disposal procedure, with a link to a live list of e-waste services.

However, if you have the time and inclination to flash OpenWRT, a guide explaining how to do this is available on the OpenWRT page for the SamKnows SK-WB8.

5 amazing tools built with GPT-5.6 that people are showing off to Sam Altman — from a wardrobe assistant to Pokémon Go for cats

OpenAI's debut of the new GPT-5.6 model prompted the usual ritual of benchmark charts and arguments over whether it is really smarter than the last version, but CEO Sam Altman asked for a little more this time. He publicly asked to see what people actually built with it.

i'd love to see interesting things people have built with 5.6 sol.i will send the person who made the coolest thing a special gift from the openai archives.July 12, 2026

That led to a much more interesting showcase. Developers responded with all kinds of ideas, pilot projects, and even complete services. It makes sense, since OpenAI claims GPT-5.6 is better at coding and more reliable for long tasks. Seeing them turn into real software says much more than a release blog ever could. Here are five that stood out among the deluge.

ChatGPT coworker

A new way to interface with AI pic.twitter.com/7ip7JPijLOJuly 12, 2026

The demo from Kitsune Agent Lab almost makes the chat window feel old-fashioned. The AI agent is given a goal and gets on with the job, moving between different tools, making decisions, and keeping track of what it has already done.

The interesting part is how motivated the AI agent appears to keep going and how good it is at remembering what it's done before. Developers have been asking for something like this for a while. AI is far more useful when it can finish the work instead of simply suggesting how you might do it yourself.

Financial chatter

Hi @sama I built a gameboy emulator for NYC that streams real-time city data (subways, weather, ferries, etc) all layered on a 3d map of NYC! All data exists in a spatial intelligence layer that agents can use to experience your fav places in the city!Should I do SF next? pic.twitter.com/uo0niBRvR5July 13, 2026

One of the most charming projects makes New York City look like it belonged inside an original Game Boy. It comes complete with chunky pixel graphics but runs on a live digital map of New York that pulls in real-time information, including subway trains, weather conditions, and ferry movements. Instead of wandering through a fictional RPG world, you're exploring a tiny, pixelated version of the city.

A project like this requires far more than generating a few lines of code. It brings together live data feeds, mapping, interface design, and plenty of problem-solving into something that feels polished rather than experimental. It's one reason developers are feeling excited about GPT-5.6

Wardrobe AI

i gave 5.6 sol access to my camera roll and had it extract pictures of every piece of clothing i own from my photosthen, told it to find new outfits for me and render them on me with gpt-image!its kinda cool to see your entire wardrobe in a collection like this https://t.co/pkLTjtn7xL pic.twitter.com/SV796uScrBJuly 13, 2026

This project uses GPT-5.6 to create a polished AI wardrobe assistant that organizes clothing, suggests outfits, and presents everything through an interface that feels more like a premium consumer app than an experimental AI demo.

It's an impressively complete experience. The application gives users a visual, interactive way to browse their clothes and receive recommendations based on what they already own. The demo also highlights GPT-5.6's strength in developers building entire applications instead of isolated features. It brings together interface design, image generation, organization, and intelligent recommendations that would normally require stitching together several complex systems. GPT-5.6 appears to handle much of that heavy lifting.

Pokémon Go, but for neighborhood cats

I made a mobile game https://t.co/J1xWyutGk4 🐱July 13, 2026

One developer made a whole real-world-based game called CatchCat. It's like a digital expansion to a scavenger hunt for cats. Point your phone at a real cat, let the app verify the sighting with its camera, and turn that encounter into a collectible digital cat card with its own personality, rarity, and place in your growing album. It is essentially a creature-collecting game in which the creatures are the neighborhood cats you meet.

Players can build collections, explore community sightings, compete with friends, and gradually fill a living scrapbook of feline encounters, all wrapped in a polished interface that would not look out of place on the App Store or Google Play. Building something like CatchCat means juggling computer vision, mobile development, backend services, and game design.

Tasteful travel

Built Atlas Mode for Pearl, an interactive globe that integrates data on the world’s best places + your taste profile to discover and book restaurants, hotels, bars, wineries, and flights. Used 5.6 Sol Ultra + GPT Voice 2.1 pic.twitter.com/b4LlPC7BZRJuly 13, 2026

One of the most ambitious projects, Atlas Mode for Pearl, is an interactive globe that turns travel planning into something closer to exploring a living map. Instead of typing destination names into a search box, users can spin the globe, discover places visually, and receive recommendations for restaurants, hotels, and more matched to their personal tastes.

It has an impressive number of moving parts running behind the scenes. The app combines geographic data with an individual taste profile, then layers AI recommendations directly onto an interactive globe. It even has an audio aspect thanks to GPT Voice 2.1. You can talk through vacation ideas instead of endlessly tweaking search filters.

That is a recurring theme among the projects developers rushed to show Sam Altman. The AI is no longer the product itself. Increasingly, it is the engine quietly powering products that people might actually want to use.

'This computer works almost like a guitar': Fingernail-sized quantum chip uses vibrations to store data

  • ETH Zurich quantum chip sees superconducting qubit act as CPU and the vibrational modes of a fingernail-width acoustic resonator serve as quantum RAM
  • The approach borrows from classical computer architecture as it completely flips the script on how modern quantum computing might store short-term data
  • The team demonstrated a universal gate set and ran small instances of the quantum Fourier transform and period finding

A guitar string essentially stores a note based on how it vibrates, and if one plucks it differently, an entirely different note plays.

A team of researchers at ETH Zurich has leveraged the same principle to build a quantum chip that stores information by replacing the string with microscopic acoustic resonators.

This allows the chip to increase its working memory significantly, essentially increasing the storage capacity, a prohibitively expensive commodity in quantum computing, significantly.

A vibrations-based quantum storage play

ETH Zurich's research is led by quantum physicist Yiwen Chu, who used tiny mechanical vibrations to both store and process information. The vibrations, however, go far beyond the range of human hearing, happening inside a quantum chip where they essentially replace or complement the working memory of a quantum computer.

The study, published by the Hybrid Quantum Systems group, lists Professor Yiwen Chu, along with doctoral students Yu Yang and Igor Kladarić, as lead authors and focuses on replicating the division of labor seen in a classical computer.

A superconducting transmon qubit serves as the CPU, while the working memory (the quantum equivalent of RAM) is a high-overtone bulk acoustic wave resonator, or HBAR, whose many vibrational modes each serve as a memory slot.

The Qubit essentially swaps a quantum state from a vibrational mode (reads it, in classical computer terms), manipulates it (modifies it), and swaps it back (writes it). This makes for a unique configuration that most modern quantum computers do not follow, in which processing and storage are two distinct segments; most designs treat both memory and compute similarly.

The approach has advantages, however: acoustic waves have wavelengths roughly a hundred thousand times shorter than electromagnetic ones, allowing an entire quantum chip to be extremely small, as the research team states, even if the actual computer will be many orders of magnitude larger.

The chip has passed stress tests, including a proof of feasibility, which also included testing using two of the most commonly used methods to benchmark a quantum computer: the quantum Fourier transform and a period-finding algorithm.

The endgame here, as noted by the research team, is quantum random-access memory (QRAM), which would allow modern quantum computers to access a much larger store of quantum memory than current specifications allow. Whether this pans out depends on both the scalability of the approach and the computational power in play.

'Bose features at a non-Bose price, for the first time': Skullcandy launches its most premium headphones ever, getting by with a little help from its friend

  • Skullcandy launches Crusher 1080 ANC, new premium over-ears
  • They mark the debut of three Bose-made features in a non-Bose product
  • Just launched and available right now, for $280 / AU$399.99 (about £210)

It is as I foretold: after we saw Skullcandy teases about new headphones, the brand has unveiled exactly the pair of cans I predicted. Meet the Skullcandy Crusher 1080 ANC; they're the pair that skate legend (and brand ambassador) Tony Hawk is pointing at in the picture above — yes, it really is him.

These are, according to the brand, its "best-sounding product" (although interestingly, not the most expensive because Skullcandy's Aviator 900 cans are a little pricier) and in case you didn't know, a 1080 in skateboarding involves three complete skateboard and body rotations performed either frontside or backside.

As a new member of its Crusher line-up, part of the draw will be the adjustable bass (see the big dial on the ear cup), but there's a lot more to celebrate besides that.

You can buy the Crusher 1080 ANC right now; they cost $279.99 / AU$399.99 (about £210) so they're a little cheaper than the likes of the $449 / £449 / AU$699 Bose QuietComfort Ultra Headphones (Gen 2) which they borrow features from.

They come in black, gray, brown, and pink, as you can see modelled sans Tony Hawk below. I rate them in the following order: brown, pink, gray, black, though I'd love to see a camo or floral redesign as Skullcandy is wont to do.

Colors aren't why you'll buy the Crusher 1080 ANC, though. No, it'll be because they offer three new Sound by Bose features at a non-Bose price...

That which we call a Bose by any other name would smell as sweet

Four different color models of Skullcandy Crusher 1080, hung up on a bar in a metro.

(Image credit: Skullcandy)

We've seen Skullcandy headphones with Bose features before, but the Crusher 1080 ANC are the first pair of cans not made by the brand which have three specific features. And these three features are a big selling point of the product.

The biggest will be Bose QuietControl ANC, which is a massive draw within Bose's own products (including the QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds 2nd Gen). The company's noise cancellation is best-in-class, and now that proprietary Bose technology is baked into Skullcandy's headphones too. To many, this could be a reason to buy the Crusher all on its own.

Bose's TrueSpatial audio with head-tracking (for surround sound profiles irrespective of source material) and WaveForm audio engine (for snappy digital signal processing) are also stepping foot off the Good Ship Bose for the first time with the 1080. These will be great little extras to refine and finesse what Skullcandy already offers.

And that's before we even mention the Sound by Bose tuning and SpeechClarity voice pickup, to improve the music you listen to and your call quality. The latter is new to Skullcandy, but we've seen the former on some earbuds like my beloved Method 360.

And what about the headphones themselves, beyond the Bose stuff? Skullcandy hasn't confirmed the drivers, but I'd guess they'll be 40mm and joined by woofer units.

The battery life is 60 hours with ANC off and 50 hours with it on, which is pretty impressive; there's a 5-band EQ and other features via the Skullcandy app (not Skull-IQ, which some of the firm's earbuds use). Pictures show a dial on the side of the headphones, amongst other physical controls; I'd wager this is a redesigned bass slider, and given how easy it is to miss this on my Crusher 540 Active, I appreciate the rethink.

Reading between the lines, and having tested the Method 540 earlier this year (a 540 is a one-and-a-half skateboard and body rotation performed either frontside or backside, which I cannot do), I get the impression that Skullcandy is undergoing a push to really level up.

The company doesn't seem to be abandoning the commitment to bass that's defined its products in the past (or its love of athletes as brand ambassadors), but seems to want to bring that into a better-rounded audio package with higher-fidelity music on offer. And if the Skullcandy Crusher 1080 ANC is the culmination of this process, I'm really intrigued to know how they sound.

Tony Hawk with laser eyes, reading a newspaper and wearing Skullcandy headphones

(Image credit: Skullcandy)

USAF wants to replace $30 million MQ-9 Reaper drones with cheaper UAVs after "dozens" were lost in Iran, costing taxpayers billions

  • Pentagon seeks an affordable drone capable of replacing many MQ-9 Reaper missions
  • Reaper drones hit hard in Iran, and losses force demand for lower-cost unmanned combat aircraft
  • New aircraft must combine long range with substantial payload capacity

The United States Air Force is examining a lower-cost unmanned aircraft concept after losing “dozens” of MQ-9 Reaper drones during the recent conflict involving Iran.

Those losses have intensified concerns about relying upon expensive aircraft in environments where increasingly affordable air defenses can destroy them.

With roughly 135 Reapers in service and each drone costing about $30 million, officials increasingly question whether existing loss rates remain sustainable.

Pentagon seeks a lower-cost drone with long range and heavy payload

Rather than pursuing a more advanced version of the MQ-9, defense planners are exploring a drone intended for larger-scale deployment.

The Defense Innovation Unit is seeking proposals for a Massed Modular Aircraft, or MMA, capable of performing many missions currently assigned to the Reaper.

According to the solicitation, the Pentagon believes dependence upon “exquisite” aircraft costing more than $30 million is becoming increasingly difficult to sustain.

The concept favours quantity alongside capability, allowing forces to continue operating even after suffering substantial battlefield attrition.

Unlike many smaller drones commonly associated with swarm operations, the proposed aircraft would retain significant reach and carrying capacity.

The solicitation calls for a payload of at least 2,800 pounds, compared with roughly 3,800 pounds carried by the MQ-9.

Requirements also include an unrefueled combat radius of at least 2,300 nautical miles and a one-way transfer distance exceeding 8,000 nautical miles.

The drone must travel at speeds above 200 miles per hour while remaining capable of operating from 6,000-foot runways and improvised airstrips.

Defense planners also want enough onboard power and cooling capacity to support diverse internal and external mission equipment.

The specifications mention 25kW of available electrical power and 5kW of cooling capacity for future mission systems.

Ambitious timeline aims for operational capability by 2031

The proposal places considerable emphasis upon autonomy, allowing a single operator to supervise several aircraft simultaneously during complex missions.

While no specific dimensions were included, the performance requirements indicate an aircraft broadly comparable in size to the MQ-9.

Officials have also not disclosed a preferred procurement price, though expectations suggest a figure substantially below the Reaper's estimated $30 million cost.

The timeline remains aggressive, with full-scale prototype flight testing expected within 21 months following contract award.

Initial Operating Capability is planned for fiscal year 2031, with 20 mission-ready aircraft delivered to an operational unit.

Recent combat experiences appear to have influenced the concept's development, particularly situations where defenders exhausted interceptors before attackers exhausted drones.

The solicitation argues that maintaining continuous MMA operations could pressure opponents into consuming costly defensive missiles at unsustainable rates.

“Keeping a constant airborne MMA presence to launch weapons, gather intelligence, perform electronic warfare missions, or relay communications will force an adversary to stay on the defensive,” the Defense Innovation Unit stated.

Via Defense News

Quordle hints and answers for Thursday, July 16 (game #1634)

Looking for a different day?

A new Quordle puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Wednesday's puzzle instead then click here: Quordle hints and answers for Wednesday, July 15 (game #1633).

Quordle was one of the original Wordle alternatives and is still going strong now more than 1,500 games later. It offers a genuine challenge, though, so read on if you need some Quordle hints today — or scroll down further for the answers.

Enjoy playing word games? You can also check out my NYT Connections today and NYT Strands today pages for hints and answers for those puzzles, while Marc's Wordle today column covers the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about Quordle today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

Quordle today (game #1634) — hint #1 — Vowels

How many different vowels are in Quordle today?

The number of different vowels in Quordle today is 4*.

* Note that by vowel we mean the five standard vowels (A, E, I, O, U), not Y (which is sometimes counted as a vowel too).

Quordle today (game #1634) — hint #2 — repeated letters

Do any of today's Quordle answers contain repeated letters?

The number of Quordle answers containing a repeated letter today is 2.

Quordle today (game #1634) — hint #3 — uncommon letters

Do the letters Q, Z, X or J appear in Quordle today?

• No. None of Q, Z, X or J appear among today's Quordle answers.

Quordle today (game #1634) — hint #4 — starting letters (1)

Do any of today's Quordle puzzles start with the same letter?

The number of today's Quordle answers starting with the same letter is 0.

If you just want to know the answers at this stage, simply scroll down. If you're not ready yet then here's one more clue to make things a lot easier:

Quordle today (game #1634) — hint #5 — starting letters (2)

What letters do today's Quordle answers start with?

• I

• P

• Y

• A

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

Quordle today (game #1634) — the answers

Quordle answers for game 1634 on a yellow background

(Image credit: Merriam-Webster)

The answers to today's Quordle, game #1634, are…

  • IGLOO
  • PLAIT
  • YEAST
  • AROMA

This was a tricky game — mainly due to two words ending in vowels.

I thought I had exhausted all words ending in the letter O, before I finally got to one ending in two of them.

Daily Sequence today (game #1634) — the answers

Quordle Daily Sequence answers for game 1634 on a yellow background

(Image credit: Merriam-Webster)

The answers to today's Quordle Daily Sequence, game #1634, are…

  • NEEDY
  • GOOFY
  • ABIDE
  • VISIT

Quordle answers: The past 20

  • Quordle #1633, Wednesday, 15 July: PROXY, BRICK, BROTH, SURGE
  • Quordle #1632, Tuesday, 14 July: EBONY, AVOID, RODEO, CUTIE
  • Quordle #1631, Monday, 13 July: VOICE, BISON, BURNT, BUILT
  • Quordle #1630, Sunday, 12 July: STAIN, BINGO, LARVA, DICEY
  • Quordle #1629, Saturday, 11 July: WORTH, PRONG, DINGO, DRUID
  • Quordle #1628, Friday, 10 July: GREET, STEAK, DUSKY, HAUTE
  • Quordle #1627, Thursday, 9 July: CRUMP, PHONE, SHINY, STONY
  • Quordle #1626, Wednesday, 8 July: GHOST, TREND, EXALT, ALONG
  • Quordle #1625, Tuesday, 7 July: ARRAY, SUITE, KIOSK, BOULE
  • Quordle #1624, Monday, 6 July: TRAWL, SPICE, PIANO, SHARK
  • Quordle #1623, Sunday, 5 July: PINEY, SWOON, TITLE, PINTO
  • Quordle #1622, Saturday, 4 July: ARGUE, MOTEL, OPERA, TRUCE
  • Quordle #1621, Friday, 3 July: AVERT, MOTOR, MANIC, WORDY
  • Quordle #1620, Thursday, 2 July: BULKY, PARSE, BELOW, MOVIE
  • Quordle #1619, Wednesday, 1 July: EASEL, OTTER, LYRIC, SHACK
  • Quordle #1618, Tuesday, 30 June: HALVE, DRYER, THERE, MINTY
  • Quordle #1617, Monday, 29 June: SLURP, CRACK, CRANK, PHONY
  • Quordle #1616, Sunday, 28 June: RUPEE, TOPAZ, FULLY, BEING
  • Quordle #1615, Saturday, 27 June: PRINT, MARRY, SADLY, BICEP
  • Quordle #1614, Friday, 26 June: JUICE, ARRAY, BONEY, SKIFF

NYT Connections hints and answers for Thursday, July 16 (game #1131)

Looking for a different day?

A new NYT Connections puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Wednesday's puzzle instead then click here: NYT Connections hints and answers for Wednesday, July 15 (game #1130).

Good morning! Let's play Connections, the NYT's clever word game that challenges you to group answers in various categories. It can be tough, so read on if you need Connections hints.

What should you do once you've finished? Why, play some more word games of course. I've also got daily Strands hints and answers and Quordle hints and answers articles if you need help for those too, while Marc's Wordle today page covers the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about NYT Connections today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

NYT Connections today (game #1131) - today's words

NYT Connections hints for game 1131 on a purple background

(Image credit: New York Times)

Today's NYT Connections words are…

  • NEEDLE
  • INK
  • JET
  • DOT MATRIX
  • TONER
  • POINT BREAK
  • LASER
  • CHARCOAL
  • PEEL
  • PITCH
  • PERIOD PIECE
  • BULLSEYE
  • SPOT REMOVER
  • EYE CREAM
  • CLOCKWORK
  • CLAY MASK

NYT Connections today (game #1131) - hint #1 - group hints

What are some clues for today's NYT Connections groups?

  • YELLOW: Cosmetics
  • PURPLE: Small beginnings
  • BLUE: Seeking perfection
  • GREEN: The darkness

Need more clues?

We're firmly in spoiler territory now, but read on if you want to know what the four theme answers are for today's NYT Connections puzzles…

NYT Connections today (game #1131) - hint #2 - group answers

What are the answers for today's NYT Connections groups?

  • YELLOW: SKINCARE PRODUCTS
  • PURPLE: STARTING WITH TINY MARKS
  • BLUE: ASSOCIATED WITH PRECISION
  • GREEN: SHADES OF BLACK

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

NYT Connections today (game #1131) - the answers

NYT Connections answers for game 1131 on a purple background

(Image credit: New York Times)

The answers to today's Connections, game #1131, are…

  • YELLOW: SKINCARE PRODUCTS: CLAY MASK, EYE CREAM, PEEL, TONER
  • PURPLE: STARTING WITH TINY MARKS: DOT MATRIX, PERIOD PIECE, POINT BREAK, SPOT REMOVER
  • BLUE: ASSOCIATED WITH PRECISION: BULLSEYE, CLOCKWORK, LASER, NEEDLE
  • GREEN: SHADES OF BLACK: CHARCOAL, INK, JET, PITCH
  • My rating: Hard
  • My score: 1 mistake

Looking at today’s game after I completed it, I don’t understand why I failed to see SHADES OF BLACK as it is the only group that I could have actually got right.

The other three groups were the result of muddled game play and lucky guesses — particularly STARTING WITH TINY MARKS, which I didn’t get because I spotted dot, period, point and spot, but because all the tiles were made up of two words.

Before that, though, I made the mistake of putting together what I thought were four different types of printer. Hopefully I wasn't the only player to fall into that trap, but in truth it doesn't take much to catch me.

Yesterday's NYT Connections answers (Wednesday, July 15, 2026, game #1130)

  • YELLOW: TERMS FOR THE LEGAL SYSTEM: BAR, BENCH, COURT, TRIBUNAL
  • GREEN: THINGS WITH LACES: BASEBALL GLOVE, CORSET, FOOTBALL, SHOE
  • BLUE: KINDS OF SPORTS: EXTREME, MOTOR, RACKET, WATER
  • PURPLE: WORDS BEFORE "ROOM" TO INDICATE EXTRA SPACE: BREATHING, ELBOW, HEAD, WIGGLE

What is NYT Connections?

NYT Connections is one of several increasingly popular word games made by the New York Times. It challenges you to find groups of four items that share something in common, and each group has a different difficulty level: green is easy, yellow a little harder, blue often quite tough and purple usually very difficult.

On the plus side, you don't technically need to solve the final one, as you'll be able to answer that one by a process of elimination. What's more, you can make up to four mistakes, which gives you a little bit of breathing room.

It's a little more involved than something like Wordle, however, and there are plenty of opportunities for the game to trip you up with tricks. For instance, watch out for homophones and other word games that could disguise the answers.

It's playable for free via the NYT Games site on desktop or mobile.

NYT Strands hints and answers for Thursday, July 16 (game #865)

Looking for a different day?

A new NYT Strands puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Wednesday's puzzle instead then click here: NYT Strands hints and answers for Wednesday, July 15 (game #864).

Strands is the NYT's latest word game after the likes of Wordle, Spelling Bee and Connections – and it's great fun. It can be difficult, though, so read on for my Strands hints.

Want more word-based fun? Then check out my NYT Connections today and Quordle today pages for hints and answers for those games, and Marc's Wordle today page for the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about NYT Strands today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

NYT Strands today (game #865) - hint #1 - today's theme

What is the theme of today's NYT Strands?

Today's NYT Strands theme is… Rerouting…

NYT Strands today (game #865) - hint #2 - clue words

Play any of these words to unlock the in-game hints system.

  • NOISE
  • CHANCE
  • VERSE
  • TRUANT
  • GIVE
  • SKATE

NYT Strands today (game #865) - hint #3 - spangram letters

How many letters are in today's spangram?

Spangram has 12 letters

NYT Strands today (game #865) - hint #4 - spangram position

What are two sides of the board that today's spangram touches?

First side: left, 4th row

Last side: left, 8th row

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

NYT Strands today (game #865) - the answers

NYT Strands answers for game 865 on a blue background

(Image credit: New York Times)

The answers to today's Strands, game #865, are…

  • TACK
  • ZIGZAG
  • TURN
  • VEER
  • DEVIATE
  • PIVOT
  • SWERVE
  • SPANGRAM: CHANGECOURSE
  • My rating: Hard
  • My score: 1 hint

Rerouting… is a word I used to see a lot when I used a sat nav in my car, so this is exactly the theme I was expecting — but I still struggled over it.

It’s not until you play Strands that you realize how many different ways there are to say the same thing, in this case a change of direction.

I took a hint to get going, but TACK didn’t help much. Then, I connected the two Zs for ZIGZAG and finally got motoring.

Yesterday's NYT Strands answers (Wednesday, July 15, game #864)

  • QUIXOTIC
  • IDEALISTIC
  • ROMANTIC
  • IMPRACTICAL
  • SPANGRAM: PIEINTHESKY

What is NYT Strands?

Strands is the NYT's not-so-new-any-more word game, following Wordle and Connections. It's now a fully fledged member of the NYT's games stable that has been running for a year and which can be played on the NYT Games site on desktop or mobile.

I've got a full guide to how to play NYT Strands, complete with tips for solving it, so check that out if you're struggling to beat it each day.

Quote of the day by Sam Altman: 'It also takes a lot of energy to train a human' — a staunch defense of the cost of AI training

The AI buildout is well and truly underway with OpenAI CEO Sam Altman leading the charge, having made various deals with companies including Oracle and Nvidia to guarantee the infrastructure needed to train future AI models is installed. But as this ensues, the spotlight has been thrown on how much energy these models will need.

Eating machines

Altman was speaking during an AI summit in India earlier this year when making the remarks to The Indian Express.

Quote of the day

This article is part of TechRadar Pro's QOTD project to provide an insight into the minds of the brightest and most recognized figures in the technology industry today and in years gone by. Read the full series here.

The OpenAI chief was being questioned about the substantial amount of energy that AI has already been consuming – and will be projected to continue consuming – for both training and inference. Bringing these models online, after all, and keeping them running require a huge amount of resources, not only in terms of the energy to power the data centers, but the water for cooling, and the components and resources in building the hardware.

Altman's defence hinged on the idea that people, too, require plenty of energy in order to reach utility — while AI can be trained much quicker. This view, in essence, frames machine intelligence as a like-for-like competitor with human intelligence.

Energy efficiency

Altman argued that humans are deeply inefficient, and that you should compare the total energy spent to create a human expert versus a machine expert. There's also an argument that energy efficiency of AI could improve over time.

But detractors were scathing in their criticism of this entire point of view – saying this framing doesn't take into account the fact that the human brain operates on roughly 20 watts of power. This isn't to mention the ethically gray and dehumanizing nature of the remarks.

Orbiting space data centers may face an unexpected hurdle — from environmental politics

  • Environmental groups seek broader review before massive satellite constellations receive approval
  • More than one million proposed satellites face increased regulatory scrutiny
  • FCC is reconsidering satellite environmental review rules

Environmental groups have petitioned federal regulators to pause approval of orbital data center satellite constellations pending a full environmental review process.

Earthjustice recently filed a petition on behalf of DarkSky International, Environment America, and Public Employees for Environmental Responsibility, known as PEER.

Combined proposals from SpaceX, Starcloud, Blue Origin, and Cowboy Space could place well over a million satellites into low Earth orbit.

Why regulators are being asked to slow down

The petition asks the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) to prepare a Programmatic Environmental Impact Statement before approving any pending applications currently under review.

Such a review, required under the National Environmental Policy Act, would examine risks, alternatives, costs, and cumulative impacts together across every proposal.

Environmental groups argue the agency's current approach treats satellite licenses as automatically excluded from any detailed environmental scrutiny under existing federal rules.

They say that framework no longer fits proposals measured in hundreds of thousands, or potentially millions, of individual spacecraft rather than dozens.

The filing lists specific concerns, including rocket emissions, reentry pollutants, ozone depletion, orbital debris, and disruption to astronomy research conducted worldwide.

The petition specifically challenges the FCC's default assumption that these projects individually and cumulatively carry no environmental impact whatsoever on nearby ecosystems.

It further warns that light pollution and wildlife disruption cannot be properly assessed through isolated regulatory reviews conducted individually rather than collectively.

The petition states that these proposals compound risk "synergistically and cumulatively" in ways single-project reviews cannot capture on their own.

Industry ambitions collide with regulatory uncertainty

Backers of orbital computing describe their projects in sweeping, civilization-changing language while offering few environmental details in return for regulatory approval.

Companies including SpaceX, Blue Origin, Starcloud, and Cowboy Space have not publicly detailed environmental mitigation plans for their satellites currently under regulatory review.

MOL and Hitachi have separately explored floating data center concepts, showing wider commercial interest beyond traditional orbital satellite proposals currently facing regulatory review.

The FCC is separately reconsidering its environmental review rules, acknowledging rapid growth across the broader commercial space industry over the past decade.

If the commission agrees, orbital data center operators could face considerable regulatory delay before launching any additional hardware skyward into low Earth orbit.

Some industry analysts have already questioned whether orbital data center economics make sense given high launch and maintenance costs involved in space deployment.

Analysts note that environmental reviews of this scope could take years, delaying deployment timelines.

This could delay deployment schedules and extend regulatory timelines if a comprehensive environmental review becomes mandatory.

Whether the FCC ultimately requires a full review remains uncertain, given ongoing industry pressure and competing national security interests tied to space dominance.

Until regulators decide, the fate of orbital computing may depend as much on environmental politics as on rocket technology or launch capacity itself.

Via The Register

Relax, Apple, OpenAI and its rumored AI smart speaker plans are no threat to you, Siri, HomePods, robots, or any other part of your business

OpenAI is building an AI-powered smart speaker nobody wants. That is, if you believe the Bloomberg report from Mark Gurman and you've read his description of said rumored device.

According to the report:

"OpenAI believes the product’s defining feature will be its personality and ability to connect on a humanlike level with users. The speaker incorporates mechanical elements that can move on their own, creating a sense that it is alive and not just an object responding to commands. The machine also will draw on personal information such as emails to better understand its owner."

The news sources, it appears, come from an insider who decided to spill all the juicy details mere hours after Apple dropped a blockbuster trade-secrets lawsuit on OpenAI's head. OpenAI claims it's done nothing of the sort, and recent reports say that Apple's claim that the AI giant has not even responded to Apple's earliest concerns was based on it potentially incorrectly identifying the former Apple employees who left to join OpenAI (allegedly with Apple trade secrets in tow).

Apple's concerns here are twofold: First, these former employees had access to many of Apple's secretive product development details and may even have asked recruits to share fresh details when they approached them to interview for jobs at OpenAI. The other concern is that Apple is already far behind in the AI race, and if Apple's plans for Siri, AI, and a potential robotic desktop home assistant were also leaked, it could harm its ability to catch up in multiple market sectors.

This latest news, which may or may not be accurate, should put Apple's fears to rest.

OpenAI is apparently not building something that could ably compete with any of Apple's key hardware or future hardware initiatives.

First of all, there's the smart-speaker-ness of the whole rumored OpenAI concept. There are already too many smart speakers on the market, many of them with their own smart assistants. Amazon, for instance, is smack in the middle of trying to convince millions of customers that not only do they need Echo devices throughout the home, but they need the AI-powered Alexa+ to guide them through their smart home experiences and, to some extent, their lives.

Apple has its own HomePod, Siri-infused speakers, which may get considerably more powerful with the Gemini foundation model-backed version arriving this Fall.

Put another way, smart speakers are a known quantity in the home consumer electronics space, and I think what most tech companies are realizing is that people like and use them, but mostly in limited ways: they want music, occasional answers to simple questions, and voice control of their smart home devices. That's it.

Why does my speaker think it's alive?

Amazon Alexa, Google Home, and Apple Homepod smart speakers

(Image credit: Future)

OpenAI appears to be prepared to offer something different: a personality-filled speaker that can watch you, move to engage, seem alive, and generally make you feel uncomfortable.

Obviously, that would not be the objective, but it could be the result. Who needs a speaker that quietly watches you as you walk from your kitchen to the den, waiting and hoping for you to say, "hey ChatGPT, what's up with the Strait of Hormuz today?"

In my home, we have a Psync smart security webcam with one oddball feature: it has a motorized body that can turn almost 360 degrees on its base and lift its thin, rectangular face and camera to keep track of people and alert me to intruders. However, most of the time, it's just watching us move around the house, and I can tell you that my family hates it. Sometimes I come home and find its face forced down so it can't pop up and track anything.

Now, imagine a larger and far smarter OpenAI AI smart speaker in your home, watching, waiting, chiming in when you don't want it to, and generally making people feel uncomfortable.

This will not be the breakout hardware hit OpenAI is hoping for.

Look, I was under the impression that OpenAI (really Jony Ive and Sam Altman) were working on an AI wearable. I didn't love that idea either, but it was a lot less creepy than this.

So, Apple, chill out. OpenAI's plans are no threat to you, even if they do allegedly have a bunch of insidery Apple information.

Top AI tools such as OpenClaw and Github Copilot can be hijacked to create new massive botnets

  • AI hallucination can be weaponized, new report warns
  • HalluSquatting is short for “adversarial hallucination squatting”
  • GitHub Copilot, Gemini CLI, and OpenClaw are all affected

Your favorite AI service could be subverted to deploy code that turns your phone or PC into a botnet, according to researchers at Intuit, Technion, and Tel Aviv University.

The technique has been given the name HalluSquatting, a portmanteau of adversarial hallucination squatting, and is similar to typosquatting in that it relies on a mistake in order to distribute malicious code. While typosquatting might occur with the incorrect input of a website URL, HalluSquatting pivots on an LLM being unable to identify a resource or repository with 100% accuracy.

Relying on an LLM’s tendency to hallucinate repository resource identifiers, this weakness could be scaled up to conduct massive ransomware campaigns, botnets, and more.

Push-me-pull-you

Previous LLM-based malware operations have relied on pull-based attacks. In this scenario, a prompt designed to jailbreak or otherwise subvert the AI is (for example) placed on a website and the LLM encouraged to gather the information, thereby reducing its internal security.

What the researchers have shared in their paper, is that pull techniques are being combined with push attacks, which are traditionally executed as code injection.

The paper’s introduction summary states: “By preemptively registering hallucinated resources—a technique we call adversarial hallucination squatting (HalluSquatting)—we demonstrate remote tool execution and remote code execution at scale across a range of popular agentic LLM applications, which could be exploited to the establishment of a botnet.”

Once an attacker has identified the resource likely to be misnamed by an LLM, and squatted on it (to embed adversarial prompts), the work is done. All that remains is for a user to trigger the resource, the AI chatbot or agent to initiate the response, and the squatted resource will be accessed.

Promptware attack

Following this, the adversarial content held within the squatted resource is activated, triggering the tool invocation stage. This is the promptware attack, where attacker-controlled instructions are executed, with results potentially including turning the device you’re using into a botnet zombie.

LLMs such as the Cursor, Cursor CLI, Windsurf, GitHub Copilot, Cline coding assistants have been used in the testing of this avenue of attack along with Gemini CLI, and the OpenClaw, ZeroClaw, and NanoClaw AI assistants. The researchers successfully achieved remote tool execution (essentially remotely accessing and controlling the LLMs) and remote code execution (RCE, where malicious code is executed remotely).

Some mitigation is available, including LLM developers blocking fetch operations in favor of a search tool, and resource owners enforcing strict naming, perhaps in favor of globally unique resource names. However, these are will require collaboration by disparate parties, and may take a while to implement.

The risk of LLM-based malware is increasing, and some has already been spotted in the wild. Of these, the JADEPUFFER attack is perhaps the most notable, as it isn’t simply AI-based malware – it is a full ransomware attack run entirely by an LLM.

This software team will charge you $10,000 a week to remove all AI-generated code from your systems — and use AI to do it

  • The three man team is known as “Slopfix”
  • It claims to be able to reduce AI generated codebases by up to 65% in size
  • They aim to "refactor vibecoded codebases back to maintainability"

Vibecoding has a lot to answer for, not least some excessively large codebases. A new team of software engineers are collaborating to reduce the size of these cumbersome projects… with a $10,000 per week bill.

Slopfix is the name of the team (comprising a trio: Maciej, Kuba, and Krzysztof), but its aim is efficiency and functionality, rather than code golf, where code is reduced to the shortest possible length.

However, while this might seem like a noble task and a service worth paying for, Slopfix isn’t taking a stand against the use of AI. In fact, it is employing AI tools to detect the AI flab in your codebases.

Use an AI to catch an AI

Challenges around vibecoded projects have increased in recent months, as the limitations of the technology become apparent.

While using an AI to program based on your prompts and requirements is straightforward, agents habitually begin to lose context and logic once the project reaches a certain size or age. Once that happens, you’re looking at duplication, features breaking, and of course, the dreaded hallucination.

Slopfix is targeting companies that have adopted vibecoding, built huge codebases, and found that they’re running into issues. To find the problematic AI code, however, Slopfix is employing AI.

They state that a full “screen by screen, endpoint by endpoint” evaluation of the vibecoded app is made, which aims to find the duplicated functions, broken logic, and other issues. There’s also the promise of a two-week warranty for anything they break.

All of this is aided by Claude Code “on a very short leash” which Slopfix uses find problems. They clearly state that “the agent doesn’t get a vote.” Instead, they’re relying on their experience as developers to improve your code.

$10,000 seem a bit steep?

While the price might seem high, $10,000 for one successful week’s work for three seasoned developers shouldn’t really be a budget breaker.

The fee covers successful work only, and as the Slopfix website states, payment is in proportion to how much of the reduction target the team hits, with $10,000 being the price for hitting the target – it’s not the default fee.

However, there is a lot of preparation involved, and the analysis of your codebase is conducted free of charge. If they can't fix your project's issues, they'll let you know and refuse the contract.

As software consultancies go, Slopfix is an unusual case. But as the problems with vibecoded projects begin to become apparent, competing consultancies may begin offering similar services.

Cheaper than an iPhone: Price of record-breaking Ukraine AI FPV drone slashed to $500 as range increases sixfold to 68 miles

  • Vyriy 15 FPV with The Fourth Law's TFL-1 AI guidance reportedly struck Russian logistics 68 miles (110 KM) away
  • Ever-innovating Ukrainian drone industry continues to achieve economies of scale even as it becomes a growing threat to Russian advances
  • With a payload capacity of 8kg and the ability to be equipped with a thermal imaging module as well as electronic warfare deterrence, it offers an interesting alternative to comparable fixed-wing drones that cost thousands of dollars

Basic FPV drones are hardly a new thing in a market flooded with hundreds, if not thousands of options that can cost as little as $100 to 200, but the Russia-Ukraine conflict might have upped the ante on affordability for a different kind of UAV that leverages the same tech: attack drones.

The Vyriy 15 is a self-styled "kamikaze drone" by the company that offers a stated strike range of 40-70km with up to a 8kg payload in tow which can be retrofitted with a thermal imaging module as well as an extended band VTX module to make jamming it harder.

With a control range of up to 30KM and a flight duration of 20 minutes (with a payload) and a cruising speed of 60-100 km/h, its not the most technologically advanced drone out there, but at its purported price tag of $500, it doesn't need to be.

An FPV strike record backed by AI

On the 10th of July, Yaroslav Azhnyuk, the CEO of Ukrainian autonomy developer The Fourth Law, announced on X what he called "a new FPV strike record": a Vyriy 15 quadcopter, flown by Ukraine's 5th Border Guard Detachment and fitted with his company's AI terminal-guidance module, had flown 110 km (68 miles) to strike a Russian logistics target.

This is both a significant achievement for Ukraine's domestic drone industry and a key indicator of how fast the Russia-Ukraine war has turned into one of attrition, with supply lines becoming increasingly targeted to prevent significant advances in either direction.

It also showcases how AI on the battlefield is shaping the conflict: the Vyriy 15 is, by default, a manually controlled drone that would otherwise need an operator or a relay to be closer to the theater of war.

The competition is American-made Hornets, fixed-wing drones that can cost upwards of $5,000, a 10-fold increase in cost for an already cash-strapped Ukrainian military that is increasingly looking towards localized solutions.

The optional AI module used to set the record is The Fourth Law's TFL-1, a machine-vision terminal-guidance module that operates on a fire-and-forget principle: once the operator visually designates a target, an onboard computer takes over the final approach, essentially countering Russian jammers that would otherwise disrupt a video link.

If Ukraine manages to mainstream such warfare in the future while cutting costs down to a tenth of what they do right now, reliably striking as deep as 100km into enemy territory while proving difficult to jam or costly to intercept, drones like the Vyriy 15 could signal an evolution in the modern battlefield even as aggression with low-cost drone swarms is already being rewarded in other conflicts such as the US-Iran war.

‘A candidate who was hostile from day one never produces that baseline’: Nation states spies applying for legit jobs are hard to spot

Geopolitical tensions are mounting, and nation states are employing new types of strategies to gain intelligence. A recent Five Eyes warning, for example, accused Chinese military intelligence officers of using professional networking sites and online job platforms to target individuals of interest.

In this specific case, the agents pose as recruiters advertising seemingly legitimate work to build relationships and, ultimately, get their hands on non-public information. Popular sites like LinkedIn, Indeed and Upwork have all seen this new type of attack take place.

At the same time, a parallel threat sees operatives applying for jobs within trusted organizations with access to intelligence, creating insider threats that experts warn AI might be mostly responsible for.

Generative AI, for example, can create documents, write applications and even supply live answers during real-time remote interviews, meaning that a small group of fake applicants can extend their reach much more quickly.

Rather than attacking existing workers, nation states are creating their own job candidates

Once inside an organization and with access to company tools like PCs, emails and other internal systems, nation state spies can then move laterally to acquire the information they sought.

Security experts at Exabeam warn that, because this technique is still evolving, it might not always be so easy to spot. Additionally, motives can differ, with Chinese intelligence operations typically seeking military, political or economic information. North Korean agents, on the other hand, tend to be tied to stealing money, which could also come with the side effect of data and intelligence theft.

Exabeam even observed this type of attack first-hand, when a North Korean-affiliated applicant used a false identity to apply for a job at the company. After passing technical tests, a video interview and other standard checks, the suspect’s laptop was quickly flagged for unusual activity.

In the following Q&A with AI Strategy and Security Research VP Steve Povolny, I discuss these new types of attacks, who’s responsible for stamping them out and what we can do to prevent similar incidents from happening more commonly.

  • The Five Eyes alliance recently warned that foreign intelligence groups are using job platforms to recruit insiders. How significant is this threat, and what is driving its growth?

This is among the most serious access-driven threats facing cleared workers, and it keeps growing because the economics now favor the attacker.

Foreign intelligence services no longer need handlers and dead drops when they can post a job ad on LinkedIn or Upwork and let candidates self-select based on the access listed in their own resumes. Generative AI lets them run thousands of these conversations at once, drafting outreach and scoring which applicants sit closest to sensitive information without a trained officer.

The Five Eyes alert describes a scaled, automated funnel, and that scale is what makes it dangerous.

  • A parallel risk runs alongside that warning: adversaries who secure employment directly rather than recruiting an existing employee. Which scenario presents the greater defensive challenge, and why?

The infiltration model gives defenders less to work with, which makes it the harder problem. When an adversary recruits someone already on staff, most of the suspicious behavior happens outside the company on platforms the employer never sees, yet the insider remains a known person with a verified identity and a real history.

When the adversary becomes the employee, the company has onboarded a fabricated person and handed them a laptop and standing network access on day one. No behavioral baseline exists, since everything that account does counts as a first. The deception also clears the controls most organizations trust, so the failure lands before any security tool gets a vote.

  • Exabeam identified a North Korea-affiliated individual who gained employment at the company. How did the operative clear Exabeam's hiring process, and what first signaled that something was wrong?

He cleared it by performing well on the parts we test and forging the parts we verify. Applying under the alias Trevor Rothluebber, he aced the technical interview and take-home assessment, passed the video interview and cleared our standard pre-employment process including the background check and I-9 validation.

Our hiring team flagged a suspicion that he leaned on generative AI for live help during the video call, the first soft signal. The hard signal arrived the moment he logged into his corporate account. Our threat intelligence feed matched his username to activity previously associated with North Korean operatives and rated it high risk, and that single match reframed how the team read everything that followed.

Simultaneously, Exabeam’s platform detected a number of anomalies inconsistent with a brand new employee’s first day, and escalating in severity within hours. Incident response quietly isolated and reimaged his laptop before any real damage could be done.

  • The candidate completed applications, interviews and assigned work without raising alarm. In retrospect, what indicators were present, and why did standard screening miss them?

The indicators existed, but they lived in places our screening was never built to read. The driver's license he submitted was either AI-generated or very badly manually modified, and the tell was physical. The image had unique aberrations, such as the ears in the photo which had an unnatural and pixelated modification an artifact that image generators still produce, and a reviewer skims past.

The live AI assistance during the interview was another, since his answers carried a fluency that did not match the natural hesitation you expect when someone reasons through an unfamiliar problem. Standard screening missed all of it because background checks and identity validation confirm whether documents are internally consistent and whether a record exists, and they never ask whether the human attached to those documents is real.

Further fabrication of documents such as I-9 were missed by a 3rd party identity verification company, and validation of (fake) job references was not properly identified.

  • How did AI contribute to the deception? What did the fraudulent documentation involve, and what capabilities does AI introduce that traditional forgery methods lack?

AI showed up at nearly every stage. The fraudulent documentation centered on a forged driver's license we believe was generated rather than physically produced, paired with a stolen identity that gave the paperwork a real history to rest on.

During the interview the candidate appeared to have run an AI copilot feeding him answers in real time, and many of these tools now stay invisible to everyone else on the call even while the candidate shares a screen. What AI adds over traditional forgery is volume and believability together. A skilled forger could always produce one convincing passport, but the craft capped how many operations could run at once.

Generative tools remove that ceiling, so a single actor can fabricate convincing documents and coach themselves through a live technical interview across dozens of applications at once, and the forgery stopped being the bottleneck it used to be.

  • The Five Eyes warning focused on China, while the Exabeam case involved North Korea. Do these actors share tactics and objectives, or do they represent distinct operational models that overlap on method?

They overlap heavily on method while running on different motives, which defenders should sit with. The Chinese operation the Five Eyes described aims at intelligence collection, pulling government and military insight out of people who already hold access.

The North Korean program that hit us and so many others in this industry is funded differently, since much of its purpose is revenue for a sanctioned regime, with intrusion and theft riding alongside the paycheck. The objectives diverge, yet the tradecraft has converged on one toolkit of fabricated identities, AI-assisted documents, manufactured professional histories and the patient relationship-building that lets an operative stay quiet.

When two adversaries with separate goals reach the same playbook, that tells you the playbook works and other actors are already watching.

  • Conventional insider threat programs are built to detect employees who become compromised over time. How should organizations identify a candidate who was an adversary from the point of hire?

Our mindset must shift toward treating the moment of hire as the start of the highest-risk window rather than the end of vetting. Traditional insider programs watch for drift, the employee who gradually turns after a financial shock or a grievance, so they depend on a baseline built over months.

A candidate who was hostile from day one never produces that baseline, which forces you to scrutinize the earliest behavior most closely. In our case, the catch came from putting new accounts under enhanced monitoring and letting an AI agent correlate scattered signals that no single alert would have justified escalating.

The working principle is to give hiring workflows and new-hire activity the same suspicion you already apply to production access.

  • Where should accountability for this threat reside within an organization? Is it a security function, an HR function, or a gap that persists because ownership is unclear?

Accountability most often lives in the gap right now, and that gap is exactly why the threat works. Hiring sits with HR and talent acquisition, who are measured on filling roles quickly and are not equipped to run identity verification at an intelligence-grade level.

Detection sits with security, which usually gains no visibility into a candidate until that person already holds a badge and a laptop, and the adversary exploits the seam between the two.

The workable answer is shared ownership with a clean handoff, where security sets the identity and behavioral standards hiring must meet and stays involved through the first weeks of employment rather than inheriting the problem once onboarding closes.

  • Many mid-sized companies lack dedicated threat intelligence resources. What practical measures can such organizations implement to reduce their exposure?

Useful defense does not require a dedicated threat intelligence team. The interview itself is the cheapest control available, and small changes make it far more revealing.

Underspecifying a problem on purpose shows whether a candidate asks clarifying questions like a real engineer or simply produces a confident answer and switching the problem partway through tests whether they adapt or whether something is feeding them responses.

Asking for an external webcam that shows the workspace instead of a shared screen removes one of the easiest hiding spots for an interview copilot. Beyond hiring, the highest-leverage move is placing every new employee on a watchlist for closer monitoring through their first weeks, which costs configuration time rather than budget.

Even a basic, low-cost threat intelligence feed would have surfaced the username match that broke our case open.

  • What is the most contested prediction on this issue, one that many security leaders would currently dispute?

My contested prediction is that within a couple of years the verified human interview, run live and in person for any role with meaningful access, returns as a security requirement. Many security leaders will fight that because it breaks the remote-first hiring model they spent years optimizing.

The objection I expect is that it does not scale and shrinks the talent pool, and those concerns are legitimate. My counter is that the economics have already flipped for high-access roles, since the cost of onboarding a single fabricated adversary now dwarfs the friction of one in-person verification step.

The deeper claim underneath it is that remote identity verification as we practice it today is no longer reliable for sensitive positions, and AI is what made it unreliable. Most security leaders are not ready to say that out loud yet.

Google logo on a black background next to text reading 'Click to follow TechRadar'

VPN deal of the week: After a year of testing it, this is the VPN I'll be using to stream England vs Argentina

In the past year I've spent tens of hours streaming with VPNs, and one thing is consistently problematic for even the best VPNs — live events.

So, if you're traveling and keen to catch BBC's coverage of England vs Argentina later this evening instead, you might think you're stuck. Thankfully, NordVPN proved to be the one streaming VPN I tested that consistently performed well in these scenarios.

Over the past year, I've used NordVPN with Peacock, BBC iPlayer, TNT Sports, ITVX, and 7Plus. And compared to any other VPN, it's proved the most effective.

I experienced the least delayed streams, the least buffering, and, most importantly, the fewest complete connection dropouts when using NordVPN. So, while cheaper alternatives such as Norton VPN and Surfshark exist, if you want the most reliable performance, this is where I'd put my money.

If you don't want a long term commitment, you could always choose to pick a monthly plan. For $15, you can watch the rest of the tournament and gain all the additional security benefits that come with a VPN.

NordVPN: from $3.49/month or $15 for one month
It might not be the cheapest but NordVPN's price is more than worth it considering its performance. It's the most reliable VPN I've streamed with and it's packed with added security features to keep you secure once you've watched the big game. Unsure? Either pick up a monthly plan for only $15 or make use of NordVPN's 30-day money-back guarantee.View Deal

You don't need NordVPN's most advanced features to watch England with a VPN. That's a good thing, as right now its premium plans are considerably more expensive than many other providers.

With long term plans, Surfshark plans start at $2.49/month, a full dollar cheaper per month; the same goes for Norton VPN. If you're really budget-focused, both PIA and Cyberghost are less than $1.60 per month right now, too.

But, should you choose a NordVPN Plus plan or above, you do get some great perks. NordPass, the best password manager we've tested, cloud storage, dark web monitoring, and more are on offer.

It's worth mentioning that buying the more premium plans monthly will set you back at least $20, so I'd recommend signing up for a longer duration if you prefer these extra features.

Experts flag new scam targeting fans seeking tickets for Celine Dion concerts

  • Group‑IB warns of scams exploiting Celine Dion’s concert comeback, with fraudsters selling duplicate Ticketmaster tickets and spoofing sites like AXS and Paris La Défense Arena
  • Scammers embed themselves in Facebook fan groups and marketplaces, even using voice messages to build trust and make fake offers seem legitimate
  • Fans are advised to only buy from official distributors, verify tickets in person if using resellers, and contact banks to dispute charges if scammed

Celine Dion is back, and hackers are already trying to exploit the fact for their own financial gain, experts have warned.

A report from security researchers Group-IB has claimed there are numerous scam campaigns all across the internet and social media, looking to exploit gullible fans and steal their money.

Its aptly named “The Scam Will Go On” report said it saw scammers lurking in Facebook Groups, Facebook Marketplace, and other fan-centric spaces, offering concert tickets for sale. The tickets themselves, hosted on Ticketmaster, are valid. However, the scammers only have a few tickets which can be redeemed by the first person who reaches the venue. Everyone else will be denied entry, since their tickets will already have been used.

How to avoid getting scammed

But that’s not the only scam. Some people don’t want to pay an unknown third person via wire, and would prefer to purchase the tickets directly from a service.

For those people, the scammers created entire websites, spoofing ticketing distributors such as AXS and Ticketmaster. Group-IB also saw fake websites spoofing Celine Dion and Paris La Défense Arena, the stadium where the concert will take place.

“We see that such an event generates excitement and provides scammers with another opportunity to make a fortune at the expense of unsuspecting fans,” Group-IB warned.

“Scammers are using increasingly sophisticated techniques, such as embedding themselves into social networking fan groups and speaking directly to their victims via voice messages to make the interaction more personal and gain their victims’ trust more easily. Furthermore, official ticketing platforms are being misused to make scams seem legitimate.”

The researchers recommend fans only visit official websites and those of official distributors, and if they absolutely must buy from a reseller, to make sure they’re purchasing a physical ticket, in person. Those that fell for the scam should call their bank and lodge an objection on their credit card.

I spent 10 hours comparing two fantastic premium compact cameras, the Lumix L10 and Fujifilm X100VI — here’s which one I’d buy with my own money

Panasonic
Lumix L10

Fujifilm
X100VI

Panasonic made quite a splash when it announced the Lumix L10 at its Lumix 25th anniversary event in May this year. I called it 'Panasonic's prettiest Lumix in years', and many tech journalists, myself included, have compared it to the viral Fujifilm X100VI.

These are two premium compact cameras with retro design and high-end features, but both take a different swing at the format. For example, the Lumix L10 packs a 20MP Micro Four Thirds sensor and 24-75mm f/1.7-2.8 lens, while the X100VI shoots 40MP stills with an APS-C sensor and fixed 35mm f/2 lens.

I've already compared the two based on specs and my extensive experience with each camera separately in my Lumix L10 vs X100 VI article. But I was keen to see which one I personally prefer based on using the cameras side by side — it had been a while since I last used the X100 VI.

So, with my loan samples in hand, I headed out, taking the same photos with each camera in a variety of scenarios, including travelling, commuting and weekends exploring. Objectively, each camera has its practical advantages over the other, but there was one camera that truly gave me the feels...

The head

Fujifilm X100VI premium compact camera alongside the Panasonic Lumix L10 on a lock in a UK canal
Tim Coleman
Man holding the Panasonic Lumix L10 compact camera up to his eye, he's looking through the viewfinder, in an urban setting of Japan
The Lumix L10 is a stunning camera, but what's it actually like to use?Tim Coleman
Man holding the Panasonic Lumix L10 compact camera in an urban setting of Japan
Tim Coleman
Man holding the Panasonic Lumix L10 compact camera in an urban setting of Japan
Tim Coleman
The Gold Titanium Special Edition of the Panasonic Lumix L10 compact camera, sat on gray and rust-colored rocks
Tim Coleman
Man holding the Panasonic Lumix L10 compact camera in an urban setting of Japan
Tim Coleman
Man holding the Panasonic Lumix L10 compact camera in an urban setting of Japan
Tim Coleman

If I'm to make a list of pros and cons based on features and specifications, then each model has distinct advantages over the other.

In favor of the X100VI: its 35mm f/2 prime lens quality, 40MP resolution (which is twice that of the Lumix L10), in-body image stabilization, quicker start-up time, fancier viewfinder, and its next-level retro aesthetics.

There's plenty going for the Lumix L10, mind you: its versatile 3.1x optical zoom lens, superior battery life, Real Time LUTs profiles (which for me outdo Fujifilm's film simulations), superior burst shooting speeds, snappier autofocus, vari-angle screen, plus its video performance has the edge. Oh, and it costs less — depending on which region you live in, the price difference can be pretty sizable.

Speaking objectively, I believe I'd get more use from the Lumix L10, especially the telephoto end of its 24-75mm f1.7 to f/2.8 lens. It is overall a more versatile camera. However, objectivity goes out the window when considering creative tools such as cameras for personal use.

We can talk features all day, but you really need to get a feel for a camera, and the only way to do that is to get properly hands-on, which is exactly what I did with the L10 and X100VI side by side. And in doing this direct comparison, a favorite quickly emerged.

The heart

Fujifilm X100VI premium compact camera alongside the Panasonic Lumix L10 in tech journalist Tim Coleman's hands
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI in the hand with top plate in view
Future
Top plate of theFujifilm X100VI in the hand
Future
Person holding the Fujifilm X100VI camera up to their eye with a bustling Tokyo city background
Future

Rather than getting bogged down in features and specifications, I'm going to articulate what it felt like to use each camera, because honestly that's more important in the long run, especially for this kind of premium compact camera designed for personal, daily use. (My workhorse mirrorless camera is another matter — it's there to do a job efficiently and reliably.)

I'm going to come right out and say it — I enjoyed the X100 VI more. Aesthetically, it has the edge: both cameras are retro, but the X100 VI is next-level with its manual exposure dials and hybrid viewfinder. With the two slung over my shoulder, it was the X100VI that I wanted to reach for first.

When I did, the X100 VI required more effort to master; there's more involvement in operating the exposure controls and such, which I actually preferred as a serious photographer. I liked how much more premium it felt in the hand too: the weightiness, the dampened shutter button...the X100VI just felt... better.

I also appreciated its quicker start-up time, and liked how much more compact its prime lens is. The hybrid viewfinder was more enjoyable too, especially since I'm in the small camp of photographers who genuinely enjoy the optical viewfinder.

Sure, I'd rather that autofocus was as good as the Lumix L10's. And for a variety of scenarios, wished that I could zoom the lens. And it's not like I didn't get any feeling with the Lumix L10 — how its lens handles in particular is a delight. But for feeling alone, and that sense of pursuing a craft, the X100VI captured my heart all over again.

Lumix L10 vs Fujfilm X100VI: the images

A collection of Panasonic Lumix L10 pictures. I have matched the Fujifilm X100VI's 35mm focal length in most of these samples, but I have also included some at different focal lengths to show how versatile it can be.

Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a blue vespa in an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a blue vespa in an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: ornate blue door and pink wall flowers in an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a bright red door down an an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: man besides his horse and cart in an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a sidewalk in London with an old house front and windows
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a sidewalk in London with a parked classic car in front of old house front and windows
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a sidewalk in London with a parked classic car in front of old houses
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a sidewalk in London with a parked classic car in front of old house front and windows
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: person walking down a sidewalk in London, low light sun
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: portrait of a man, leaning against a brick wall in London
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: portrait of a man, leaning against a brick wall in London
Here and for the following portrait, I've increased the zoom to the maximum 75mm focal lengthTim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: portrait of a man, leaning against a brick wall in London
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a UK pub frontage, there a hanging flowers above old windows
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a canal boat moored in front of a boat house
Tim Coleman
Panasonic Lumix L10 image gallery: a boardwalk in a nature reserve, lined with tree silhouetted by the low lying sun
Tim Coleman

And the comparisons with the Fujifilm X100VI. For both cameras, I set the color profile to the standard setting, but in reality I would be playing around with various looks and making selective exposure adjustments.

Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: blue vespa down an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: blur vespa down an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: ornate blue door alongside pink hanging flowers down an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: ornate red door down an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: man with his horse and cart in an old alleyway in Valetta, Malta
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: London sidewalk, with old house frontage and tall windows, with passerby
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: London sidewalk, with old house frontage and tall windows, with passerby
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: London sidewalk, a classic car is parked, there's an old house frontage with tall windows behind
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: London sidewalk, a classic car is parked, there are old house frontages behind it
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: London sidewalk, a classic car is parked, there's an old house frontage with tall windows behind
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: person walking on urban London sidewalk with low lying sun
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: portrait of a man, leaning against a brick wall of old street in central London
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: portrait of a man, leaning against a brick wall of old street in central London
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: UK pub frontage, there are hanging flowers
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: canal boat moored by a boat house
Tim Coleman
Fujifilm X100VI image gallery: boardwalk in a nature reserve, there are tress silhouetted by the low lying sun
Tim Coleman

How a camera handles is a major part of the equation — but the resulting images need to be easy on the eye too.

With wildly different sensor sizes, number of pixels, and types of lens, it's tough to pick one camera over the other, plus some assumptions about image quality need to go out the window.

For one, despite having the smaller sensor, the Lumix L10 actually has bigger pixels and light-gathering potential, so don't assume that the X100VI is better in low light. Also, beyond sensor size and pixels, the Lumix L10's autofocus is overall more reliable, so you're more likely to get a sharp image in the first place, depending on the scenario and camera settings.

But for direct comparisons, as in matching the X100VI's 35mm f/2 lens with the Lumix L10 as close as possible (35mm f/2.3), I think what pleased me the most overall is the X100VI's superior control over depth of field.

When I took street portraits at 35mm, the X100VI's images were easier on the eye. I also liked having 40MP to play with and the greater level of detail in the pictures. The X100VI was also less susceptible to lens flare.

That said, the Lumix L10 has that zoom lens versatility, and when set to 75mm and f/2.8, it is very capable of shallow depth of field portraiture too, with a greater compression effect that I prefer.

As for color, I didn't have a strong enough feeling scouring my images to recommend one camera over the other, though the Lumix L10 Real Time LUTs profiles are more versatile.

Fujifilm X100VI premium compact camera alongside the Panasonic Lumix L10 in tech journalist Tim Coleman's hands

(Image credit: Tim Coleman)

Conclusion

If you're considering the Lumix L10 or the Fujifilm X100VI, then the choice is tough, and, in truth, you'll be happy with either model! They are two of the best premium compact cameras, with a string of unique advantages over the other.

For me, however, the decision goes beyond specifications and features, and to an underlying feeling that I would get more joy in using the X100VI regularly than I would with the Lumix L10, even though the L10 is more practical. My head says Panasonic Lumix L10, my heart says Fujifilm X100VI.

England vs Argentina RECAP: Free Streams, TV Guide & How to watch from anywhere

It's England vs Argentina in the World Cup semi-finals as Harry Kane and Jude Bellingham look to end Lionel Messi's dream of retaining the trophy.

Both sides have had to work hard to reach this stage, but it's winner takes all now, with a place in Sunday's final against Spain at stake.

Keep up to date with all the action from England vs Argentina here, with live updates, free streams, and information on how you can watch the semi-final from anywhere.

England vs Argentina: The Essentials

Sign up to Norton VPN and watch the World Cup with our exclusive offer

Norton VPN is fast, reliable and packed with useful features, with server locations worldwide.

60-day money-back guarantee
Unlocks England vs Argentina streams

Its Ultimate plan is especially great value, protecting up to 20 devices under one subscription.

England vs Argentina: World Cup semi-final

It doesn't get much bigger than this!

Here we go!

Welcome to Atlanta! It’s here in Georgia that we’ll see England’s biggest challenge so far (no offence, Panama): Argentina...

There’s history, big names and even bigger stakes. The winner will play Spain, who showed up for their semi final in a way that France definitely didn’t, in what promises to be an epic final.

So, who will emerge victorious? Keep tuned here to find out as we cover the game in the build up and every minute of action…

3/5 wins...to England?!

One of the other stats emerging to fill England fans with hope is that on the five occasions that England and Argentina have met the Three Lions have waked away victorious three times.

Albeit a few 1-0 victories aren’t the most thrilling wins but in knockout tournaments - as England have discovered - it doesn’t matter how you get there as long as you’re victorious at the end.

So will Argentina manage to chalk up a win to equalise the overall tally or will England lead 4-2?

How to watch the match

Leaving it a bit last minute when it comes to watching the game? No stress, we’ve got you sorted…

Free Stream: BBC One (UK) / SBS (AUS)

US Stream: Fox via Fubo / YouTube TV

UK Stream: BBC One

Watch Anywhere: Norton VPN (60-day money back guarantee)

So, get yourself a Norton VPN subscription to enjoy the game wherever you are!

One hour to go!

We’re nearly there!

Get comfy, grab yourself some refreshments and stick with us here - to keep tuned for more updates as they come in - as it’s not too long to the game...

Rogers starting, Henderson not

Morgan Rogers is starting in the big changeup to the normal Starting XI.

Quansah with his red card is missing his second game today and Henderson with his injury is also missing out on the action.

Otherwise everyone is able to come on, but who will?

45 minutes to go...

In 45 minutes time we’ll see the kickoff of the decisive game which will determine the final!

Most pundits have it as a 50/50 tossup but with England’s track record - the only World Cup final they’ve been in is 1966 - you’d have to put Argentina in front.

Let’s hope this World Cup semi final will be less like 1990 and 2018 and more like 1966.

A semifinal like no other...hopefully for the right reasons

Local police have been told to watch this game in particular - with the highest danger warning issued of any World Cup game - due to the perceived temperature (in both senses) of the game.

With no major stories of fans letting themselves down this tournament, you really hope this won’t be the main story from the game but with the chequered history of both countries playing each other (we’ll get on to that later), that’s not a guarantee.

Let’s keep the drama on the pitch, eh lads?

30 mins to the game!

Settle down, everyone...it's nearly time!

A colourful history

The Falklands War. Hand of God. Beckham Red Card.

These three phrases are synonymous with England and Argentina when it comes to World Cups, and for good reason. However at the end of the game it’s football and the best team will win regardless of how important or unimportant this colourful history is.

Will we see another iconic moment that will rival Maradona’s two goals - one a blatant act of cheating and the other considered one of the greatest goals of all time? Will we see another player get sent off in shame like Beckham?

We’ll find out soon…

10 mins to the game!

Nearly time!

Still time to get yourself a front row seat with a Norton VPN subscription...help yourself below!

Norton VPN (60-day money back guarantee)

Messi v Kane/Bellingham

The one fact everyone is reeling out for this match is that Messi has never played England before. I guess we’ve also brought it up now.

The prospect of facing our squad will hardly be living in his head rent free but a few players may give him pause for thought. Kane and Bellingham.

Also in contention for the Golden Boot, although a few behind him, these England players are a threat in the box when it comes to trying to keep a clean sheet and see Argentina through to the second World Cup final in a row.

Who will come out on top?

Kick off!

Kick off!

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Here we go!

Argentina kick off, strap in everyone...

Bellingham and Anderson pushed early doors

Argentina give Bellingham a friendly push just to let him know they're there.

And then Anderson taken down more brutally. Both sides square up in a tense start already.

Could be a scrappy one...

England take a corner

Rice, Arsenal's corner taker extraordinaire, takes one which misses the mark.

It's a high octane match already in terms of scrappiness and opportunities but let's see how it plays out.

Anderson is seemingly getting fouled left, right and centre in other news.

Anderson can't catch a break

Anderson attacked again!

Anderson attacked again! (Image credit: Getty Images)

Anderson has spent more time lying on the pitch than running around it at this point.

How long has the ball actually been in play?

20 mins in...

For a change, England are on the front foot. In a way that they haven't really since their opening Croatia 4-2 victory.

Will this last or will Messi have something to say about it.

Hydration break = boos aplenty

As reliable as showing Infantino on the screen in the first 10 minutes of every game (he must have it in his vain contract), are the boos that follow the start of the hydration break. And to be fair Infantino gets the boos too.

You sense Tuchel will be giving England a big talking to.

30 mins of play...and still 0-0

It's been a tense game and a lot of heated moments, but no goals to show either side.

A few chances but no goals on target yet. Will that change as Bellingham goes down for a free kick outside Argentina's box?

No bookings at all!

The ref has set the tone by issuing no yellows at all yet and you sense that the challenges from Argentina are only going to get worse.

This will do nothing to quell the narrative of Argentina favouritism.

Soon we'll see a big injury if this doesn't change.

The first yellow goes to Anderson

Anderson gets a yellow!

Anderson gets a yellow! (Image credit: Getty Images)

Some beautiful weaving and feet from Messi but he goes down after a challenge from Anderson.

And England get the first yellow!

Messi certainly has the favour of the referees although admittedly it was a bad challenge from Anderson but incredible England pick up the first booking.

Let's see how this develops.

(Belated) Argentina yellow card

And finally Argentina pick up a booking after Rogers receives some rough shirt pulling.

Hopefully this will calm the game down after a yellow on each side...time will tell.

Halftime whistle blows

How can that only be three minutes stoppage time? The ball's only been in play for three minutes.

It's been an end to end game with England looking stronger before the hydration break and Argentina looking better after the hydration break.

Both sides will be getting a pep talk from their manager and we'll see if that makes a difference in the second half.

It's a game of two halves

It's a cliche but it really is a game of two halves.

Both teams so far have given it 110% but will one team triumph in the second half or will it be extra time?

Goals win games but will it be England or Argentina?

England kick off the second half

The pitch at halftime

The pitch at halftime (Image credit: Getty Images)

England kick off the proceedings...before it gets retaken for going too quickly.

Back to the start.

Some testy moments early doors

England are on the back foot early doors here.

Pickford makes a save as an on target shot comes his way and then a scramble in the box but England defend.

Less of that please.

Romero gets booked...cos it's Romero

It's a worthy yellow card but Romero - the baby faced Tottenham assassin - does seem to rack up the bookings with his reputation proceeding him.

Argentina on the attack now.

Gordon's alive...and scores!!!

Anthony Gordon scores!

A beautiful assist from Rogers and finished by Gordon.

Eng 1-0 Arg

Spence makes an incredible tackle!

Just as important as Gordon's goal is Spence clearing the ball thanks to a beautiful tackle from Spence.

He's been electric this game.

Gordon's long awaited goal

Gordon's alive!

(Image credit: Getty Images)

There were questions about Gordon's Barcelona signing but he's silenced the critics after that.

Surprisingly he's only the fourth England player to score a goal this tournament after Kane and Bellingham dominating and one goal by Rashford.

Partially a mistake from Argentina's defence but also an incredible opportunity from England, seized upon and beautifully delivered.

England are purring now.

Pickford's razor sharp reactions!

For England, Jordan Pickford rarely puts a foot wrong. Or dare I say a hand?

Argentina's best shot so far and thanks to England's number one they are forced to regroup this hydration break.

Could this be England in a World Cup final for the first time since '66...let's not get ahead of ourselves.

Pickford makes another incredible save

Ice in his veins! Pickford fears no one as he makes another beautiful save.

Will he be able to stop the inevitable Argentina tide? Time will tell.

Kane gets a free kick!

A very tense affair as the England box is swamped this half of the hydration break but Kane gets the Three Lions a much needed free kicks.

England's defence hasn't been tested this much since Mexico and it's holding...so far.

Pickford makes a great save but can't save the second one

After a hand to the ball which may well have gone over the England goal resulting in a corner, Pickford isn't quick enough to save a sucker punch of a goal from Argentina.

Fernandez scores and saves Argentina from an early exit tonight.

2-1 Argentina

The goal Pickford couldn't save

The goal Pickford couldn't save (Image credit: Getty Images)

Argentina were on a high after their first goal and looking dangerous.

And that's when they scored their second goal. After the goalpost stops the first shot, nothing can stop a great header from Martinez.

Two goals in quick succession, can England do anything to stop the inevitable?

So close but yet so far

Argentina win and go against Spain for the World Cup final.

85 minutes until full time, and then Argentina strike.

Too defensive? Too complacent? Too many memories of '66?

Full time. Arg 2-1 Eng.

Too defensive in the last 30 minutes?

Rice taken off, Burn sent on. Were England just too defensive?

Pickford made some incredible saves but you can't stop the tide forever.

Argentina seem to have a knack for being down and then triumphing. Cape Verde equalised with them twice and they overcame it, Egypt looked like they were going to take it home and they came back.

England fell into a self confidence trap. They played a blinder but maybe England should have put on Saka instead of Burn.

In the end, the better team won

Once England have woken up, probably slightly hungover tomorrow, they will admit that Argentina were the better team.

To come back after 1-0 down so close to the end is remarkable and they looked threatening for most of the game.

It's back to square one as to whether we can win a final, bear in mind that the Euros 2028 will see 10 years since Kane has been captain and a few of the OGs still in the squad: Pickford, Stones, Henderson, Rashford. Will England refresh? Will Tuchel honour his contract to stay till 2028?

Hopefully yes to all of the above. So close, but yet so far - seemingly the England mantra at this point. Always the bridesmaid, never the bride.

Messi celebrates reaching his third Argentina World Cup final

Messi celebrates

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Third Argentina final. Won one, lost one...where will Messi lead his next one?

2014 saw Argentina lose to Germany, 2022 saw Argentina win an incredible game against France. Where will 2026 take them?

England are sore but spotlight is now on Argentina. Stay tuned here for the World Cup final.

Spain v Argentina, it'll be a belter. Both teams are playing on top form so everything is to play for.

We'll see you then.

That's all, folks :(

Bellingham and Kane, England's best goalscorers of the World Cup 2026

Bellingham and Kane, England's best goalscorers of the World Cup 2026 (Image credit: Getty Images)

A rather somber note to bid farewell on but thanks for staying with us through the pain we've become accustomed to as England fans.

Not the result we wanted, but very much the result we expected.

Gordon did us proud, as did Pickford who had the weight of the country on his shoulders for the last half hour of the game and made some incredible saves until it was too much for him.

Maybe we didn't come together as a team as we quite hoped but it looked for a second like we could make a second World Cup final. Anyway, onwards and upwards.

Thanks for joining us, make sure you stay tuned here where we'll be reporting on the action from the third place play off on Saturday at 10pm BST as England take on France in a rematch of the World Cup 2022 quarterfinals (that we lost).

And then the big one: Spain v Argentina on Sunday at 8pm BST. I've been Dan, thanks for joining us (commiserations or congratulations) and until next time...

It's (not quite) coming home etc

Viltrox unveils a miraculously small 'pancake' lens with bright f/2.8 aperture for Sony and Nikon cameras — and it has an innovative feature I love

  • Viltrox has announced its new AF 26mm F2.8 EVO lens
  • It's available in Sony E and Nikon Z-mount versions, and costs $299 / £279
  • It measures 23.8mm thick and weighs 4.6oz / 130g

Chinese lens manufacturer Viltrox is having a prolific year, and it's now followed up a recent pair of medium-telephoto primes for APS-C cameras with a completely new 26mm f/2.8 pancake lens.

The AF 26mm F2.8 EVO is part of the same mid-range series as my recently tested AF 90mm F2.2 EVO, and is available for Sony E and Nikon Z-mount cameras at launch. It costs $299 / £279.

Compact size and light weight are the aim here — the 26mm F2.8 is just 23.8mm thick and tips the scales at 4.6oz / 130g. I can see it pairing nicely with a Sony A7C / A7C II or Nikon Zf as a casual, everyday lens offering surprisingly sharp image quality.

It's not the smallest autofocus full-frame lens in Viltrox's range, mind you — that accolade goes to the AF 28mm F4.5. However, given the bright f/2.8 aperture and the features on board, the new 26mm lens seems impossibly small.

Those features include a dust- and splash-resistant machined metal construction, dedicated aperture and focus rings, a metal rear mount with a USB-C port for firmware updates, and a STM focus motor for snappy autofocus.

Viltrox AF 26mm F2.8 EVO lens attached to a Sony camera in user's hands
Viltrox
Viltrox AF 26mm F2.8 EVO lens attached to a Nikon camera, in user's hands
Viltrox
Viltrox AF 26mm F2.8 EVO lens attached to a Sony camera, top down, resting on a tree stump
Viltrox
Viltrox AF 26mm F2.8 EVO lens attached to a Nikon camera in user's hands
Viltrox
Viltrox AF 26mm F2.8 EVO lens attached to a Sony camera, woman is pulling it out of her handbag
Viltrox
Viltrox AF 26mm F2.8 EVO lens attached to a Nikon camera on mahogany table with bookshelf in background
Viltrox

And there's more: the AF 26mm F2.8 EVO ships with a magnetic lens cap that snaps into place, eliminating the fiddling that comes with traditional pinch-release lens caps.

It's part of a lens cap system which includes a magnetic lens hood, which also works with magnetic lens filters. Alternatively, traditional screw-on filters work too, via the 43mm thread.

I hope other lens manufacturers follow Viltrox's lead — lens caps can be a real pain to remove and re-attach, but a magnetic type simplifies the process.

Optically, we have a simple construction of eight elements in six groups, with a minimum focus distance of 0.2m which results in a 0.2x maximum magnification, for reasonable close-up photography.

The Viltrox AF 26mm F2.8 EVO is available immediately in Sony E and Nikon Z versions from Amazon US and Viltrox's official store. There's no word yet on whether L-mount or Fujifilm X-mount versions are on the way.

Yes, Fujifilm X is APS-C format, but I can see the full-frame Viltrox lens working well with these crop-sensor cameras, even for Sony and Nikon, on which it would offer an equivalent 39mm focal length.

It's yet another new Viltrox lens available for Nikon Z cameras, which suggests that the Nikon vs Viltrox lawsuit from earlier this year has quietly been resolved. I hope that's the case, because Viltrox has consistently produced excellent optics, and the AF 26mm F2.8 EVO looks like an impressive addition. Look out for my in-depth review, coming soon.

The GMKtec G10 mini PC is 'a terrific little system' — and now our top budget machine gets a big discount

If you're looking for a reliable and cheap mini PC, the GMKtec G10 is our top choice. For general day-to-day work, with the scope to upgrade, there's plenty to like about the machine we called "a terrific little system" for the price.

Right now, the GMKtek G10 mini PC is $288 (was $400) at Amazon — a $112 saving on a genuinely capable budget mini PC. Meanwhile, in the UK, the G10 is now £260 (was £319) at Amazon.

Today's top mini PC deal

AMD Ryzen 5 3500U (4-core/8-thread, up to 3.7GHz) with Radeon Vega 8 graphics, 16GB dual-channel DDR4 RAM, and a 512GB PCIe 3.0 NVMe SSD. Dual M.2 2280 slots support up to 16TB of total storage, and RAM is upgradeable to 64GB. Includes 2.5GbE Ethernet, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and triple 4K display output via HDMI 2.1, DisplayPort, and USB-C. Windows 11 Pro pre-installed.

In the UK: now £260 (was £319)View Deal

In our review, we found it well-balanced for light office tasks, web browsing, and streaming. If that's the goal for your setup, it's ideal. For more powerful machines designed for demanding graphical workloads, we've selected the top mini PC deals for video editing and gaming.

So, what's on offer here? The Ryzen 5 3500U isn't new silicon — it's a 2019-era Zen+ chip on a 12nm process that still holds up very well against the sluggish Intel N-series chips (N100, N150) that populate most budget mini PCs at this price. The four cores and eight threads, courtesy of AMD's multithreading implementation, give it a genuine edge in multitasking and anything that touches video decoding or light image processing.

Where the G10 stands out is memory and storage. 16GB of dual-channel DDR4 and a 512GB NVMe SSD is a generous starting configuration at this price, and GMKtec gives you real room to grow: two SO-DIMM slots support up to 64GB of RAM, and two M.2 2280 slots support up to 16TB of combined storage. Having two drive bays also makes cloning an existing installation onto a bigger drive simple if you outgrow the included SSD.

2.5GbE Ethernet is the other feature worth calling out, since most rivals in this price bracket still ship with a single Gigabit port. If you're setting this up as a home server, NAS front-end, or Proxmox node, that faster wired connection is a genuine practical upgrade over the competition, and the Ryzen 5 3500U's AMD-Vi support means virtualization software runs without issue.

The Radeon Vega 8 graphics are dated by 2026 standards and won't handle demanding modern games, but they're meaningfully more capable than Intel's UHD graphics for everyday tasks like 4K video playback, light photo editing, or older and indie titles at lower settings.

Good to know: this machine needs a bit of patience out of the box. We found the G10 performs noticeably better after a trip into the BIOS to switch from Balanced to Performance mode, and the fan does get audible under sustained load in that mode. It's not a plug-and-play polished experience — with around 30 minutes of setup, you'll get this chip at its best.

For a cheap mini PC with genuinely generous memory, storage headroom, and fast networking, the G10 is a solid budget pick that features in our guide to the best mini PCs.

Steam fan finds 'cheap SSDs' to make retro 'game cartridges' system — the only problem is 2026 is the worst year in history to do it

  • A Steam user has found a way to store games on SSDs with an auto-navigation and auto-start script
  • These are effectively physical 'game cartridges' complete with key art
  • However, costly SSDs means this is a pricey endeavor (the Steam gamer was lucky enough to pick up used drives on the cheap)

Physical copies of PlayStation games are coming to an end from January 2028, and as the backlash around that continues, a restoration of physical media on PC has been discovered — and it's novel to say the least.

A Steam user on Reddit has managed to store games on 'cheap 2.5-inch' SATA SSDs, effectively acting as old-school 'game cartridges' with key art, and a script that auto-navigates Steam to each game's page. The user also notes that automatically starting games from each drive is possible.

This comes amid a significant uproar from gamers following the revelation of Sony's plan to eradicate physical game discs, supposedly by the time its next PlayStation console arrives. It's a very controversial move that has united gamers across all platforms to fight to retain discs and to ensure game ownership remains intact.

With that said, physical media for PC has been dead for a long while, since a modern desktop PC doesn't come with a disc drive, and there are hardly any publishers selling physical copies for the platform.

With most games only accessible digitally on PC, in theory those titles can be taken away from buyers at any time. The trouble is that consumer-friendly figures like Gabe Newell, who leads Valve, the owner of Steam, won't be in charge forever.

So in the future, under new leadership, it's possible more anti-consumer measures might be introduced, or other aspects of PC gaming that consumers dislike, such as DRM (like Denuvo).

Leon S Kennedy, Evelyn Parker, and Isaac Clarke

(Image credit: Capcom / CD Projekt Red / EA)
Steam Game Cartridges from r/pcmasterrace

Imagine if this 'game cartridge' system was adopted by PC game publishers? It's a smart idea, and a nice thought, but clearly not a realistic one. For starters, it'd be a prohibitively expensive method of reintroducing physical PC game copies.

Of course, platforms like Epic Games and Steam require users to be logged in and have their app installed to play games, so it's still a long way off true game copy ownership, anyway.

However, this concept would be paired perfectly with GOG, a platform that is DRM-free and doesn't require the launcher to play purchased games — in other words, you fully own purchased games on GOG.

Admittedly, publishers releasing PC game cartridges in the form of SSDs is a pipe dream, especially with the current state of the hardware market, and the RAM crisis, complete with skyrocketing SSD prices.

The idea comes at the wrong time, then, but if the RAM crisis ever settles down, then maybe this is something we'll see more PC hobbyists doing — and perhaps even the odd publisher.

The Batman Part II's release date has been pushed back to early 2028 — and its latest delay is going to have a major impact on James Gunn's DC Universe

  • The Batman Part II has been delayed until February 2028
  • Its director has shared new footage of Robert Pattinson as the Caped Crusader
  • James Gunn's DC Universe could be severely impacted by this development

It's going to be another 18 months before we finally get to see The Batman Part II.

The long in development comic book movie, whose release date had already been pushed back twice, is now not set to land in theaters until February 18, 2028. Anyone who had hoped to see The Batman Part II on its previously revised release date on October 1, 2027, then, is going to be seriously disappointed.

News of The Batman sequel's latest launch date came by way of a new video that director Matt Reeves shared on his social media channels. The footage, which gives us our first look at the returning Robert Pattinson as the titular vigilante in Reeves' next Batman film, ends with the revelation of the adjusted release date.

By the time this DC comic book project lands on the big screen, then, almost six years will have passed since its predecessor made its own theatrical debut. That's a long time to make fans wait for the hotly-anticipated follow-up.

Why The Batman Part II's delayed release is bad news for James Gunn's DC Universe

Robert Pattinson's mud-covered Caped Crusader looking up in The Batman

Batman fans across the world when they hear about this latest launch date delay... (Image credit: Warner Bros. Pictures)

It would be remiss of me not to say that movie delays happen all of the time, so word of The Batman Part II's latest launch setback is, especially for a film that's taken a long time to get off the ground for myriad reasons, to be expected.

Nevertheless, it's going to have a huge impact on James Gunn and Peter Safran's nascent DC Universe (DCU), which is already reeling from its first major dud in Supergirl.

Indeed, Gunn has said time and again that the DCU's Batman — and, by proxy, his DCU Chapter One solo film in The Brave and the Bold — won't see the light of day until The Batman Part II has premiered.

The reason? While Gunn says audiences are intelligent enough to understand that Reeves' Bat-Verse and the DCU are separate entities, he doesn't want two Batmans running amok in cinemas at the same time. Now that The Batman 2 won't come out until early 2028, though, we aren't likely to see the DCU's Dark Knight until 2029 at the very earliest.

That doesn't mean Gunn, Safran, and company won't be working on The Brave and The Bold in the meantime. What it does mean, though, is that the wait for one of DC Comics' so-called Holy Trinity will not only drag on for ever longer, but DC Studios' co-heads will have to continue fielding questions about the timeline for the Caped Crusader's unveiling in their cinematic franchise. In that regard, can't say I envy them.

Anyway, feel free to find out everything we know so far about The Batman Part II while you're here. Alternatively, vote in the poll above to let me know what you think of the movie's latest delay.

You'll soon be able to play the biggest football game on your iPhone thanks to an upcoming Apple Arcade release with zero microtransactions

  • EA Sports Madden NFL 27 is coming to Apple Arcade
  • The exclusive Arcade Edition launches on August 6, 2026
  • It offers full controller support and does not feature microtransactions

EA Sports Madden NFL 27, the next entry in the blockbuster football franchise, is just around the corner — but you won't need a pricey console to play it. That's because an exclusive version is coming to Apple Arcade that you'll be able to dive into right from your iPhone when it arrives on August 6.

Madden NFL 27 Arcade Edition is an exclusive version of the game designed specifically for Apple Arcade with zero ads or microtransactions. It features a range of teams and the latest NFL player rosters, with 11-on-11 gameplay on the field that's intended to be as authentic as possible while offering streamlined controls for mobile play. There's also plenty of franchise management, putting you in charge of trades, free agents, and more.

As you play through each season, a newly introduced 'Narrative Messaging System' will challenge you with new events with decisions that can impact player performance and force you to adapt to the consequences.

Aside from the flagship Franchise mode, you'll also be able to dive into Quick Play or try a selection of custom-themed franchises with their own handcrafted narratives that are changed on a monthly basis.

Regarding the announcement, EA vice president of franchise strategy and marketing Evan Dexter argued that "Apple Arcade is the perfect home for Madden" and "matches the complete, no-compromise experience we’ve built." He added: "the future of football is now in your hands.”

In addition to iPhone, the game will also be available on iPad, Mac, and Apple TV if you prefer to slump on your couch while you play. This is the first mobile Madden NFL game to offer full mobile controller support as well, giving you a truly console-quality experience if you have the compatible hardware.

The title joins a number of other sports games that are already available on the service, including NBA 2K26 Arcade Edition and Football Manager 26 Touch — a selection that senior director of Apple Arcade Alex Rofman said means "Apple Arcade delivers an unmatched lineup of sports games for every kind of fan".

The service is available for $6.99 / £6.99 / AU$9.99 or $49.99 / £49.99 / AU$9.99 a year or as part of all tiers of the pricier Apple One bundle.

Anker's compact Solix S2000 home backup battery is 50% off and can run your fridge for 35 hours

If you want home backup power without a bulky, heavy unit taking up a corner of the garage, this is a genuinely good price for it. Right now, the Anker Solix S2000 is $600 (was $1199) at Amazon — a massive 50% off on a 2kWh power station built specifically for keeping essentials running through an outage.

The headline feature here is the size-to-capacity ratio. At 35.7lbs and roughly the footprint of a large kitchen bin, the S2000 packs in 2,010Wh of LiFePO4 capacity in a chassis around 30% smaller and 25% lighter than typical 2kWh power stations. That matters if you're planning to keep this somewhere specific in the house rather than store it in a garage.

Today's top portable power station deal

2010Wh | 1500W

Anker's portable power station comes with a well-sized 2010Wh battery capacity rated for 10,000 charge cycles, 1,500W continuous AC output (3,000W peak), and a 10-millisecond UPS switchover. For me, the stand-out here is that the unit is rated for up to 35 hours of fridge backup. Recharges via wall outlet, solar (up to 400W), car outlet, generator, or alternator charger. Measures 8.2 x 11.1 x 12.7in and weighs 35.7lbs.View Deal

Anker's OptiSave system is the other notable piece of engineering. It drops the unit's active idle power draw down to around 6W with the AC outlets enabled, and roughly 2W with everything switched off — well below the 14-20W idle draw typical of competing 2kWh stations. Since a backup power station mostly sits idle waiting for an outage, or cycles a fridge compressor on and off, that lower standby drain translates into meaningfully more real-world runtime rather than just a better spec sheet number.

Port placement is a small but genuinely useful design choice: two AC outlets sit on the back for always-on gear like a fridge or router, while three more AC outlets plus USB-C and USB-A ports sit on the front for everyday devices. That split keeps cables from getting tangled if you're running multiple things at once, and the 10ms UPS switchover means a connected computer or router won't even blink when the grid drops.

The 10,000-cycle LiFePO4 battery is rated for roughly 15 years of typical use, which is close to double the cycle rating most mainstream power stations in this capacity class advertise — a genuine long-term value argument if you're planning to keep this around rather than replace it after a few years.

Important notes: the S2000 caps out at 1,500W continuous output, so it's not the right choice if you need to run power tools, space heaters, or other high-draw appliances — Anker's own larger Solix units handle that heavier lifting. Solar input is also capped at 400W, lower than some rivals that accept 600-1,000W, so it's better suited to topping up with a single panel than building out a larger solar array. And with only two USB-C ports and one USB-A port, it's clearly built around AC backup duty first, device charging second.

For anyone who wants dependable home backup without the bulk of a typical 2kWh unit, the SOLIX S2000 at $599.99 is a strong buy.

Also consider: More portable power station deals

1070Wh | 1500W

We recommend this one for camping this summer - it's practically built for the job. In our review, it also earned top marks, making it one of the best of its class. View Deal

1024Wh | 1800W

Earning top marks in our tests, we awarded this portable power station an Editor's Choice badge thanks to its compact design, versatile charging options, and robust performance. View Deal

1024Wh | 2000W

A complete portable power setup in one purchase. The C1000X Gen 2 packs 1024Wh capacity with a 2000W continuous output (3000W peak with SurgePad). And it charges from flat to full in 49 minutes via wall outlet — the fastest recharge in its class, certified by Guinness World Records. The included 100W bifacial solar panel captures sunlight from both sides, giving you roughly 15–20% more power output than a standard single-sided panel. View Deal

HP's Smart Tank 5101 all-in-one cartridge-free printer includes up to two years of free ink and it's nearly 30% off right now

If you're anything like me, one of the biggest frustrations with printing is the cost of ink. Over time, it can easily cost more than the printer itself, making refillable ink tank models an increasingly popular choice. They're built to keep running costs down while reducing the hassle of replacing ink cartridges on a regular basis.

So this deal immediately stood out to me. The HP Smart Tank 5101 all-in-one printer is down to $190 (was $260) at Amazon, saving you $70.10. In the UK, it's known as the HP Smart Tank 5107, and it's discounted to £150 (was £210) at Amazon.

Instead of relying on traditional cartridges, this model uses ink tanks that hold enough ink to print thousands of pages before needing a refill. Best of all, it comes with up to two years of ink in the box, so it will be ages before you need to spend out.

Today's top HP Smart Tank printer deal

Refillable ink tanks and up to two years of included ink help keep printing costs low, while wireless printing, scanning, copying, AI-assisted page formatting, and mess-free refills make everyday printing simple and reliable at home.

In the UK: now £150 (was £210)View Deal

Refilling the ink is easy because the bottles slot directly into the tanks and empty automatically without needing a squeeze or creating a mess, removing one of the biggest frustrations people have with refillable printers.

Printing speeds reach up to 12ppm in black and 5ppm in color, while the built-in scanner and copier mean it can handle far more than simple printing tasks. Wireless connectivity over 2.4GHz Wi-Fi lets everyone in the house or small office send jobs without plugging into a computer.

HP also says the Smart Tank 5101 continues producing sharp text and rich colors without the complicated maintenance routines often associated with ink tank printers.

Auto Power On helps reduce waiting around by waking the printer the moment a job is received, while borderless printing adds extra flexibility for photos, invitations, and creative projects.

Another useful addition is HP AI formatting, which automatically cleans up web pages and emails before printing, removing unnecessary content and awkward page breaks, stopping you wasting paper on unwanted content.

For the price, the Smart Tank 5101 is not only much cheaper than normal, it also comes with enough ink to keep many households printing for a very long time.

If your current printer burns through ink far too quickly, or you're thinking of buying your first all-in-one model, this is a terrific choice to get you started.

For more options, check out our round up of the best ink tank printers you can buy, as well as the best home printers.

Also consider

This all-in-one inkjet printer prints, scans and copies while offering Wi-Fi and USB connectivity for flexible setup. Its refillable ink tank system replaces traditional cartridges, and the compact design includes a 100-sheet rear paper tray, flatbed scanner and support for everyday home and small office printing.

In the UK: now £150 (was £240)View Deal

Squarespace's new limited-release tools aim to help sellers tap into FOMO

  • Squarerspace launches new limited-release tool
  • Features include a limited-time cart, purchase quantity limits, and low inventory badges
  • Available globally now, although limited to some subscription plans

From game consoles to toilet roll, there are countless examples of how scarcity can make a product more desirable. Whether a smart marketing tactic or a simple issue with supply, limited availability drives FOMO. Now, Squarespace, one of the biggest website builders on the market, has launched new tools to help users with limited releases and product "drops."

So, whether you want to drive anticipation behind a one-off t-shirt design or want to cap spaces in an exclusive yoga class, Squarespace aims to equip sellers with everything they need to turn a limited availability product or service into the hottest buy on the internet.

Driving urgency

Key features of Squarespace’s new tool include:

  • A reserved cart feature that holds items during checkout for a limited time, with a countdown timer, helping drive urgency and replenishing stock if the user fails to check out
  • Inventory management tools that allow merchants to set quantity limits, preventing individuals from sweeping inventory, whilst also driving a sense of exclusivity
  • Seamless checkout, offering a shortcut to purchase, so customers don’t have to navigate away from the store page to view their cart and check out
  • Hype generation tools, including low inventory badges and email campaigns, to help merchants build anticipation and signal scarcity.

"We're seeing entrepreneurs shifting away from always-on discount models and toward highly curated, exclusive releases that celebrate the value of their work," said Kevin Doerr, President of Squarespace. "With our new limited release selling tools, we are putting entrepreneurs in control of when and how they sell – reducing the operational burden and giving them everything they need to build hype, handle surges in demand, and deliver a seamless checkout experience.

According to a press release shared with TechRadar earlier this week, limited release tools are available globally, although availability does vary depending on your subscription plan.

New phishing campaign hits LastPass, Bitwarden users - password manager customers warned not to fall for this scam

  • Attackers are spoofing LastPass and Bitwarden with phishing emails from fake newsletter domains, tricking users into signing bogus DocuSign documents
  • Victims are redirected to malicious “compliance” domains flagged by Microsoft Defender and Cloudflare, already taken offline
  • Neither password manager was breached; this is domain spoofing, and users are urged to verify sender addresses and domains before clicking links

Criminals have been found impersonating popular password managers LastPass and Bitwarden online in an attempt to trick users into sharing their login credentials, and thus access to a treasure trove of passwords and other secrets.

LastPass recently issued a warning to its customers, raising awareness of the ongoing phishing campaign.

However the scam also now seems to have spread to other password managers, with Bitwarden customers also apparently being targeted.

Passwords are safe

In the campaign, LastPass users received emails from the address “hello@lastpassnewsletter.com”.

This address does not belong to LastPass, and is in no way affiliated with the password manager. In the message, the victims are told that the company’s security policies have been updated, and that they should navigate to a specific landing page and sign a DocuSign document.

The email comes with a ‘Review & Access Terms’ button which, if clicked, redirects the victims to lastpasscompliance[dot]com, yet another domain unaffiliated with the password management platform.

BleepingComputer claims this domain has already been flagged as malicious by both Microsoft Defender for Office 365, and Cloudflare and is currently offline.

Digging deeper, the journalists uncovered another campaign, almost identical, but now targeting Bitwarden users. In this case, the victims were being mailed from the “hello@bitwardennewsletter.com” addresses and were being redirected to bitwardencompliance[dot]com. Identical methodology, just slightly personalized.

It is important to note that neither LastPass nor Bitwarden were compromised as part of this attack.

The companies’ infrastructure is intact, and the passwords are safe. This is a typical domain spoofing attack in which the crooks purchase a domain similar to the legitimate one, in hopes that the victims won’t spot the difference.

As usual, the best course of action is to always be skeptical of incoming emails, and to double-check the domains and email addresses from which they are sent. It is also good to cross-reference these emails with any older messages that are proven to be authentic, to see if the domains and addresses match.

Privado VPN unveils an MCP server on Windows and macOS to let your AI agent manage your connection

  • PrivadoVPN has added a built-in MCP server to its Windows, macOS apps
  • It lets MCP-compatible AI tools manage your VPN connection
  • The server is opt-in, runs entirely on the device, and is restricted to localhost

The latest update from PrivadoVPN hands the keys to your VPN over to your AI assistant.

The provider has built a Model Context Protocol (MCP) server into its Windows and macOS apps, letting compatible AI development tools connect to and control your connection directly from your coding environment.

MCP is the open standard Anthropic introduced in late 2024 to link AI systems with external tools and data. By adopting it, PrivadoVPN joins a growing list of providers wiring their apps into the agentic era, allowing the best VPN services to be driven by natural language rather than menus and toggles.

What PrivadoVPN's MCP server does

PrivadoVPN's server plugs into MCP-compatible tools including Claude Code, Codex, Cursor, LM Studio, and Visual Studio Code.

Once it's running, an assistant can connect or disconnect the VPN, switch server locations, and check your current connection, IP address, and status. It can also list available locations, swap between WireGuard, IKEv2, and OpenVPN protocols, toggle the Kill Switch, and run basic network diagnostics.

Under the hood, the server is a local HTTP component embedded in the client. It listens on a fixed port (5801 by default) and is restricted to localhost, so it cannot be reached remotely. Commands run through the official PrivadoVPN app, and any change shows up instantly in the interface.

Security sits at the centre of the design. The server is off by default and has to be switched on by the user; it never leaves the device, and every action is executed by the PrivadoVPN client itself rather than handed to the AI.

The company pitches the feature to developers, QA teams, and power users who routinely run tests across different regions and VPN configurations.

You can see all the technical details on PrivadoVPN's support page.

How to use PrivadoVPN's MCP server

PrivadoVPN's MCP server Settings on app

(Image credit: PrivadoVPN)

To turn it on, users need to open the PrivadoVPN app, head to Settings, then Application, and turn on the MCP Server option. Once saved, it runs quietly in the background.

From there, you point your AI tool at the endpoint, http://127.0.0.1:5801/mcp.

In Claude Code, for example, a single terminal command registers it, while Codex, Cursor, LM Studio, and VS Code each take a short JSON snippet in their MCP configuration.

The VPN and AI agents race

PrivadoVPN is only the first of a growing but still small list of VPN providers joining the AI agents race.

ExpressVPN, for example, claimed an industry first in March when it launched an MCP server in beta for its desktop apps. Siilarly to Privado, also ExpressVPN's tool is opt-in, local, and covered by its strict no-logs policy.

Norton VPN went further with its "VPN for Agents", an AI-native tool that spins up temporary, Docker-based tunnels so each agent and task gets its own separate connection.

Windscribe took a different route, releasing a skill that lets agents such as OpenClaw drive its command line interface (CLI) on a dedicated machine, while PureVPN turned ChatGPT into a conversational assistant that recommends servers and connects through deep links.

I've been hunting for the perfect festival blackout tent — here are 9 easy-pitch options I'd happily stumble back to

Festival season is well and truly upon us, and it's also turned into the summer of the heatwave. If you haven't got a tent sorted yet, or if you were planning on digging out that old, slightly musty bag of fabric that's been festering in your loft, might I suggest that now is a good time to invest in a blackout tent?

Over the years, I've camped in all kinds of conditions and in all kinds of tents — both for fun and in a previous role as an Outdoors editor — and the one thing I prioritize above all others is blackout fabric in the sleeping area. It makes such a difference, not just to the amount of light that gets in, but to the temperature inside too.

A few years ago some friends and I volunteered at Glastonbury, and part of the deal was that we'd work a night shift. Afterwards, those of us in blackout tents slept happily (okay, semi-happily) past midday; the one friend who came in a non-blackout teepee did not sleep at all. His tent was bright as the sun, and just as hot, from about 8am. Even if you're not required to stay up all night, good sleep is hard to come by at a festival, so don't make things even more difficult for yourself.

I've scouted around for the best blackout tents you can find right now, and you'll find my top picks below. I've focused on easy-to-pitch and not-too-pricey options, from brands I've personally tested and would happily buy from. Happy camping!

Snooze time

Quechua tent

Quechua
Instant 2-person camping tent, 2 Seconds Easy Fresh & Black

Quechua tent

Quechua
Instant 2 Fresh & Black pop-up tent

Quechua tent

Quechua
Instant 2 XL Fresh & Black pop-up tent

Coleman Kobuk Valley 3 Plus Blackout Bedroom Tent | 3 Person Dome-Tent With Special Darkened Bedroom| 3 Man Igloo-Tent for Festivals and Camping | 100% Waterproof With Hh 4.500mm & Sewn-In Groundsheet

Coleman
Kobuk Valley 3+ Blackout Bedroom Tent

Coleman Tent Darwin 3 Plus Blackout | Compact 3 Man Dome Tent | Special Darkened Bedroom | Lightweight Camping, Festival and Hiking Tent | 4500mm Waterproof | 3 Person | With Sewn-In Groundsheet

Coleman
Darwin 3 Plus Blackout tent

Quechua tent

Quechua
Instant 2 Fresh & Black pop-up tent

Quechua tent

Quechua
Instant 3 XL Fresh & Black pop-up tent

Quechua tent

Quechua
Air Seconds 4.1 Fresh & Black inflatable tent

Quechua tent

Quechua
Arpenaz Fresh & Black 4.1 tent

WD Red Plus 8TB deal: Our pick for 'the best value' NAS drive is nearly $100 off

Mechanical hard drives (HDDs) still make the most sense when you need huge amounts of dependable storage, especially in a NAS that runs around the clock. If you're looking to expand your setup without overspending, I've found a terrific deal for you at Amazon.

The 8TB WD Red Plus NAS is currently down to $259 (was $355) at Amazon - a solid $96 off the usual asking price. Considering the 4TB version we tested is a little under $200 right now, that's a very welcome discount.

That's a great price, then, for a drive built specifically for always-on network storage, making it a great opportunity to add capacity to an existing NAS or form the basis of a brand new one.

Today's best WD NAS deal

Built for NAS systems, this 8TB hard drive uses CMR technology, a 256MB cache, and SATA 6Gb/s connectivity to deliver dependable storage, reliable performance, and smooth operation for always-on workloads.View Deal

Reviewing the 4TB WD Red Plus, our drive expert Mark even noted that the 8TB and 10TB models "offer the best value."

8TB of storage is plenty of room for family photos, videos, backups, documents, and media libraries.

Unlike desktop hard drives, this model is built for RAID-optimized NAS systems and uses NASware firmware to improve compatibility with supported enclosures.

It's intended for small and medium business environments, although it's just as useful for home users.

The drive spins at 5640RPM and combines SATA 6Gb/s connectivity with a generous 256MB cache to deliver dependable performance for file transfers, backups, and media streaming.

It also uses CMR recording technology, which many NAS owners prefer because it delivers more consistent write performance than SMR drives during heavier workloads.

Western Digital rates the drive for workloads of up to 180TB per year, making it suitable for systems that see regular activity not just occasional backups.

Support for NAS systems with up to eight drive bays also gives you flexibility if your storage needs is likely to grow over time.

Although SSDs dominate for operating systems and applications, traditional hard drives offer far better capacity for the money and saving almost $96 makes this one of the better prices I've seen recently.

For more picks, take a look at guides to the best NAS devices, best NAS hard drives (including the WD Red Pro) and best NAS and media server distros.

How to watch England vs Argentina: Free Streams, TV Channels & Kick-Off time as Lionel Messi meets Three Lions in FIFA World Cup 2026 semi-final, team news

Lionel Messi takes on England for the first time in his career as Argentina face their old rivals in a FIFA World Cup 2026 semi-final laced with history in Atlanta — and you can live stream the game around the world for free.

From a feisty encounter in 1966, to the 'Hand of God' 20 years later and David Beckham's kick out at Diego Simeone at France '98, this fixture has provided some unforgettable World Cup moments — but this is the first time England have faced Argentina in the semi-finals or later. In fact, they have not met at all since a friendly in November 2005, three months after Messi's international debut. The Albiceleste captain was not involved that day but he will look to produce another match-winning performance in Atlanta, having seen his team-mates make the difference in the 3-1 extra-time victory over Switzerland in the quarter-finals. With eight goals to his name, Messi has shown at this World Cup that he remains top-class, even aged 39. Manager Lionel Scaloni makes one change, as Giuliano Simeone replaces Rodrigo De Paul.

England have their own superstars capable of hauling their team to victory, which is exactly what Jude Bellingham did in the quarter-final against Norway. The Real Madrid midfielder scored twice in a 2-1 extra-time win, but manager Thomas Tuchel was far from happy with the Three Lions' performance. England are yet to play to their potential at this tournament but they find themselves in just their fourth World Cup semi-final as they look to reach the final for the first time since winning the trophy in 1966. Tuchel makes three changes as full-backs Reece James and Djed Spence replace Ezri Konsa and Nico O'Reilly, and Morgan Rogers comes in for Noni Madueke on the right wing. Jarell Quansah remains sidelined as he serves the second game of his two-match suspension.

So, read on as we show you exactly how to watch England vs Argentina for free from anywhere in the FIFA World Cup 2026.

England vs Argentina: Team News

England XI: Pickford; James, Stones, Guehi, Spence; Rice, Anderson; Rogers, Bellingham, Gordon; Kane.

Argentina XI: Emi Martinez; Molina, Romero, Lisandro Martinez, Tagliafico; Paredes; Simeone, Fernandez, Mac Allister; Messi, Alvarez.

How to watch England vs Argentina for free

England vs Argentina is available to watch for free in multiple countries, including the UK, Australia, Brazil, Belgium, Ireland, Netherlands, Switzerland and Turkey.

Abroad? Can't access your free stream? Unblock your free World Cup stream with Norton VPN — more on that below.

Use a VPN to watch England vs Argentina live streams

It’s the World Cup, and if you’re traveling, you might discover your usual England vs Argentina stream is suddenly unavailable due to geo-restrictions.

Don’t worry, that’s exactly where a VPN can help. A virtual private network lets you connect to servers around the world so you can securely access your usual World Cup coverage as if you were back home.

We recommend Norton VPN. Here's why:

▶︎ Norton VPN MEGA Deal — 60-day money back guarantee

Watch your free World Cup stream without limits. Norton VPN delivers fast, secure connections with global servers, so you can stream from anywhere with ease.

💰 60-day money-back guarantee
🔓 Unlocks World Cup streams

Don’t miss a second. Stream the World Cup from anywhere with total confidence.View Deal

How to watch England vs Argentina in the US

US flag banner

US viewers can watch England vs Argentina on Fox (English commentary) or Telemundo (Spanish commentary).

Fox is available on cord-cutters like YouTube TV (free trial), Hulu+Live TV, Sling (select markets), Fubo or DirecTV.

We would recommend Sling TV:

Watch Fox's World Cup coverage on Sling

Get Sling's Blue Plan today and stream England vs Argentina. Your first month comes in at only $23 with prices rising to $45.99 thereafter.View Deal

Those looking for a streaming service instead can watch England vs Argentina on Fox One (3-day free trial). Telemundo is also available via Peacock ($10.99/month).

Visiting the US from the UK? You can still watch your World Cup stream for free thanks to Norton VPN (try for 60 days).

How to watch England vs Argentina in the UK

UK flag

UK customers are in luck as they can stream England vs Argentina for free on BBC One. Live coverage is also available via BBC iPlayer.

You require a TV license and a valid UK postcode for an account (e.g. SE1 7PB).

Norton VPN can unlock your stream if you're abroad today.

How to watch England vs Argentina in Australia

Australian flag

(Image credit: free)

England vs Argentina will be shown for free in Australia on SBS On Demand.

The streaming platform has every game of the tournament for free, making it the perfect place for your World Cup viewing.

Traveling for work or on holiday? A VPN like Norton VPN can help unlock your free stream.

How to watch England vs Argentina in Canada

Canada

(Image credit: Other)

In Canada, TSN and free-to-air channel CTV will be broadcasting England vs Argentina.

You can live stream via the TSN+ streaming platform, which costs CA$8 per month or CA$80 per year.

CTV will require TV provider login details for you to watch for free online.

Outside of Canada? Use Norton VPN whilst you're traveling away from home to unlock your stream.

How to watch England vs Argentina in New Zealand

New Zealand

(Image credit: Other)

In New Zealand, England vs Argentina will be broadcast for free on TVNZ+.

While some games require the tournament pass (NZ$44.95) this isn't one of them and New Zealand residents can stream at no cost.

England vs Argentina: Match Information

What time does England vs Argentina start?

England vs Argentina kicks off at 8pm BST / 3pm ET on Wednesday, July 15. That's 5am AEST on Thursday, July 16 in Australia.

What are the squads for England vs Argentina?

England

Goalkeepers: Dean Henderson (Crystal Palace), Jordan Pickford (Everton), James Trafford (Manchester City).

Defenders: Dan Burn (Newcastle United), Marc Guehi (Manchester City), Reece James (Chelsea), Ezri Konsa (Aston Villa), Nico O'Reilly (Manchester City), Djed Spence (Tottenham Hotspur), John Stones (Manchester City).

Midfielders: Elliot Anderson (Nottingham Forest), Jude Bellingham (Real Madrid), Eberechi Eze (Arsenal), Jordan Henderson (Brentford), Kobbie Mainoo (Manchester United), Declan Rice (Arsenal), Morgan Rogers (Aston Villa).

Forwards: Anthony Gordon (Barcelona), Harry Kane (Bayern Munich), Noni Madueke (Arsenal), Marcus Rashford (Manchester United), Bukayo Saka (Arsenal), Ivan Toney (Al-Ahli), Ollie Watkins (Aston Villa).

Argentina

Goalkeepers: Juan Musso (Atletico Madrid), Geronimo Rulli (Marseille), Emiliano Martinez (Aston Villa).

Defenders: Marcos Senesi (Bournemouth), Nicolas Tagliafico (Lyon), Gonzalo Montiel (River Plate), Lisandro Martinez (Manchester United), Cristian Romero (Tottenham), Nicolas Otamendi (Benfica), Facundo Medina (Marseille), Nahuel Molina (Atletico Madrid).

Midfielders: Leandro Paredes (River Plate), Rodrigo de Paul (Inter Miami), Valentin Barco (Strasbourg), Giovani lo Celso (Real Betis), Ezequiel Palacios (Bayer Leverkusen), Alexis Mac Allister (Liverpool), Enzo Fernandez (Chelsea).

Forwards: Julian Alvarez (Atletico Madrid), Lionel Messi (Inter Miami), Nicolas Gonzalez (Atletico Madrid), Thiago Almada (Atletico Madrid), Giuliano Simeone (Atletico Madrid), Nico Paz (Como), Jose Manuel Lopez (Palmeiras), Lautaro Martinez (Inter Milan).

England vs Argentina: Road to the semi-finals

Stage

England

Argentina

Group stage

Group L: 1st, 7 points

Group J: 1st, 9 points

Last 32

Beat DR Congo (2-1)

Beat Cape Verde (3-2 AET)

Last 16

Beat Mexico (3-2)

Beat Egypt (3-2)

Quarter-finals

Beat Norway (2-1 AET)

Beat Switzerland (3-1 AET)

What is the weather for England vs Argentina?

The temperature in Atlanta on Tuesday is forecast to be around 82F (28C) at kick-off.

The good news is that the stadium is fully air-conditioned and has a retractable roof, which will make the conditions much more comfortable for players and fans.

Can I watch England vs Argentina on my mobile?

Of course, most broadcasters have streaming services that you can access through mobile apps or via your phone's browser.

You can also stay up-to-date with all of the key World Cup moments on the official social media channels on X/Twitter (@FIFAWorldCup), Instagram (@FIFAWorldCup), TikTok (@FIFAWorldCup) and YouTube (@FIFA).

We test and review VPN services in the context of legal recreational uses. For example:1. Accessing a service from another country (subject to the terms and conditions of that service).2. Protecting your online security and strengthening your online privacy when abroad.We do not support or condone the illegal or malicious use of VPN services. Consuming pirated content that is paid-for is neither endorsed nor approved by Future Publishing.

Sonos boosts its upgrade program with savings of up to 30% on speakers, soundbars, and more

I'm quite happy with my current Sonos speaker. Still, I've just seen that the manufacturer has once again launched its double upgrade credit campaign, meaning it could be a good time for some new tech, as you can save 30% on your next speaker or soundbar when you buy direct from the manufacturer.

Claim your 30% Sonos discount

The whole process is very straightforward. Start by logging in to the upgrade page and checking that you own a product that's eligible for the program. If you do, you should see a button to activate your upgrade credit. After that, simply add the new product you want to buy to your basket, and then activate the discount at the checkout.

There's a good selection of products in the promotion, including the excellent Sonos Arc soundbar for $629 / £629, which we awarded four and a half stars out of five in our Sonos Arc review. Or there's the latest Sonos Roam 2 for $125 / £125 that we said was even better than the original version in our Sonos Roam 2 review.

Just a heads up that time is running out on the double credit promotion, as it's scheduled to end on July 17. After that, it reverts to the original 15% off.

Save 30% on Sonos speakers and soundbars

Sonos: 30% off when you upgrade at Sonos
If you already own an eligible Sonos speaker or soundbar, you can activate a discount in your account that lets you save 30% on a brand-new product. Options include the majority of top Sonos speakers, soundbars and subwoofers, such as the Arc, Beam, Five, Move, and Roam. This offer is only available until July 17, when the discount will drop to 15%.View Deal

Is the Sonos upgrade program worth it?

Sonos Move

(Image credit: Sonos)

The Sonos upgrade program is a no-brainer if you've got an eye on a new speaker or soundbar from the manufacturer.

The list of qualifying products nearly covers the entire catalogue, so chances are that, if you bought one in the last decade, you will have the discount available. Just make sure the product is registered in your account and then head to the upgrade program page to claim your discount.

You will also see that there's an option to print a shipping label to send your current item back. However, you don't actually need to do a trade-in to get the discount. That's only if you want to send it back so it's recycled or if you no longer need it.

Me? I would just hold onto any existing items, as they will continue working as normal, so you can use them in another room or give them away to someone else who will make use of them if you want.

Work and study laptop deals: I found the HP OmniBook 3, Asus Vivobook 14, and Dell 15 under $600 right now

Whether you're an office worker or a student, I always find now is a great time to pick up a laptop for work and study that's actually worth the money.

MacBooks might be expensive, Chromebooks can be underpowered, but there are plenty of big-brand Windows 11 machines under $600 right now that can handle productivity tasks, schoolwork, creative projects, and everyday use without issue, and will stay useful well beyond the next school year.

These are the three deals that stood out to me right now.

Today's best laptop deals

Powered by Qualcomm's Snapdragon X processor, this Copilot+ PC combines 16GB of memory, a 512GB SSD, a 14-inch touchscreen, Wi-Fi 6E, and up to 32.25 hours of battery life for students and everyday productivity.View Deal

My top pick overall here is HP's OmniBook 3, which is currently $599.99 (was $949.99) at Best Buy. It runs on Qualcomm's Snapdragon X processor with up to 32.25 hours of battery life, making it an excellent choice for office professionals and students planning to spend many hours away from a power outlet.

It comes with 16GB of memory alongside a 512GB SSD, making it far better equipped for multitasking and running Microsoft's growing collection of AI features. The laptop also features a 14-inch 1920 x 1200 touchscreen, Wi-Fi 6E, and HDMI 2.1 for hooking up an external monitor.

Powered by Qualcomm's Snapdragon X processor, this Copilot+ PC pairs 16GB of memory with a 512GB SSD, a 14-inch WUXGA display, USB4, Wi-Fi 6E, and up to 29 hours of battery life.View Deal

Another great choice is Asus' Vivobook 14. Also on sale at Best Buy, the model is priced at an even more affordable $548.

It combines the same Snapdragon X processor as the OmniBook 3 with 16GB of memory, a 512GB PCIe 4.0 SSD, and a 14-inch 1920 x 1200 IPS display.

Although it skips the touchscreen, it does keep the Copilot+ PC AI features, 45 TOPS NPU, WiFi 6E, HDMI 2.1, USB4, and impressive 29-hour battery life.

At 3.28lb, it's also the lightest laptop here, making it a great fit for students carrying it between classes. If you don't need touch support, I'd say this is the best all-round buy of the three.

Powered by Intel's Core i7-1355U processor, this laptop combines a 15.6-inch 120Hz Full HD display, 512GB SSD, WiFi 6, and plenty of ports, making it a dependable choice for schoolwork and everyday computing. It only has 8GB of RAM though.View Deal

Finally, there's the Dell 15 Laptop for $550 (was $750) at Dell. Powered by a 13th Generation Intel Core i7-1355U processor, it comes with a 512GB PCIe NVMe SSD, and 15.6-inch Full HD 120Hz IPS display which will make it useful for recording notes, writing essays, multitasking, and so on.

The laptop includes Wi-Fi 6, USB-A, USB-C and HDMI ports, as well as an SD card reader, and a headphone jack. My biggest reservation is that it only comes with 8GB of DDR5 memory, which really isn't enough in 2026. You can upgrade the laptop to 16GB of RAM if you want, but that will cause the price to skyrocket to $949.99.

For more top choices, we've also tested the best student laptops, best business laptops and the best laptops for engineering students.

'We decided not to limit VPNs': UK government U-turns on age-gating privacy tools

  • The UK government confirmed it will not limit VPNs
  • Data reveals only 7-10% of teenagers use a VPN to bypass age checks
  • Social media curfews, autoplay restrictions were also announced

The UK government has officially scrapped the idea of restricting virtual private networks (VPNs) to enforce its impending social media bans, delivering a massive victory for digital privacy advocates.

Speaking on BBC Breakfast today, the government confirmed a major U-turn on the subject, with Online Safety Minister Kanishka Narayan stating: "We decided not to limit VPNs."

This was further cemented in a written parliamentary statement by Technology Secretary Liz Kendall, who clarified that the government will not age-gate or ban the best VPN software because "VPNs have legitimate privacy and security uses."

The announcement ends fears that sweeping age verification laws could inadvertently break online privacy for millions of adults.

Cybersecurity experts and privacy groups previously warned that restricting these tools would be a disaster waiting to happen, prompting an open letter from the industry urging lawmakers to leave everyday privacy tools alone.

Privacy wins, but platforms face new rules

'We have decided not to limit VPNs'Online Saftey minister Kanishka Narayan told #BBCBreakfast the Government has decided not to restrict access to Virtual Private Networks (VPN) as part of a social media ban for under 16s, despite initially suggesting it would take action… pic.twitter.com/pP94b81aeRJuly 15, 2026

While VPNs are safe from a blanket government ban, the social media ban loophole hasn't been completely ignored.

Kendall confirmed the onus will now fall on social media platforms "to take robust steps to detect and prevent attempts by underage users to circumvent age assurance measures."

To achieve this, the government has tasked Ofcom and the Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) to report by October on how platforms can better detect and prevent VPN use for age-check circumvention. The government also plans to engage directly with VPN providers regarding voluntary actions.

This shift in responsibility aligns with newly released government research.

A Department for Science, Innovation and Technology (DSIT) report revealed that while 26% of 11- to 17-year-olds use a VPN, findings show they do so primarily for privacy.

Only 7-10% use them to bypass age checks, whereas 45% simply enter a false date of birth.

Midnight curfews and AI limits

While everyday privacy tools have been spared, the government is pressing forward with strict new rules to combat digital addiction — that online commentators already deemed "ineffective and useless" — with the first regulations coming into effect in early 2027.

Following the upcoming blanket ban on social media for under-16s, new measures will ensure 16- and 17-year-olds don't face a sudden "cliff edge" of addictive features. Government consultation revealed that nearly one in three children actively want help managing their screen time.

Under the new rules, older teens will face default social media curfews from midnight to 6 am. Additionally, persuasive features like autoplaying videos and personalized infinite feeds will be switched off by default to make logging off easier.

"This is about giving these older children more choice and control over the feeds and reducing that sense that they can never switch off being online," Kendall stated.

The protections also extend to artificial intelligence.

The government will require mandatory breaks for under-18s using AI chatbots to prevent emotional dependency. Furthermore, lawmakers are working with health regulators, including the MHRA and DHSC, to consider banning therapy chatbots entirely if they provide dangerous or unverified mental health advice to minors.

Hundreds of GitHub repos found posing as real software to push malware

  • ArcticWolf uncovered 292 malicious GitHub repositories spoofing legitimate tools and products, delivering a new BoryptGrab infostealer variant
  • Malware steals from 19 browsers, 32 crypto wallets, messaging apps, Steam, and Windows Credential Manager, and uniquely bypasses Chrome’s App‑Bound Encryption via code injection
  • Most repos have been removed, but some remain active; GitHub’s popularity makes it a prime target, underscoring the need to vet code before use

Russian actors have reportedly created hundreds of malicious GitHub repositories masquerading as legitimate software but acting as a dangerous infostealer.

Cybersecurity researchers ArcticWolf discovered the campaign after finding their own products spoofed as part of the attack.

In total, the researchers found 292 fake repositories, spoofing things like security products, developer tools, macOS utilities, games, and more. Each repository contained a README file with the download URL.

Obviously malicious

Victims who download the program get a variant of the BoryptGrab infostealer family that grabs data from 19 browsers (passwords, cookies, payment information), 32 cryptocurrency wallets, Telegram, Discord, and Steam sessions, credentials for Meta’s Max, data from Windows Credential Manager, and more. It can also exfiltrate files from Desktop and Documents, and grab screenshots.

While most of the features can be found in other BoryptGrab variants, this one is unique in a sense that it can bypass Chrome’s App-Bound Encryption through direct code injection into the browser process.

While it hasn’t been specifically said that the threat actors are Russian, the compressed data is later sent to a Russia-based command-and-control (C2) infrastructure.

What’s also worth mentioning is that the malware is not designed to last. It has no anti-analysis layer, and doesn’t even try to hide itself in any specific manner. It does not establish persistence and simply tries to grab as much sensitive data as it can on the first attempt.

The attack, which seems to have started in the final days of June, is almost thwarted now, since most of the malicious repositories have been removed from GitHub. Citing “researchers”, BleepingComputer reported that several dozen still remain active, though.

Because of its importance and popularity in the open-source community, GitHub is currently one of the most targeted platforms on the internet, which is why it’s important to double-check and vet every piece of code before it’s applied to a project.

Denshattack! is a hybrid of all the best fast-paced platformers I've ever played, and I'm convinced it's a stand out indie game this year

Denshattack! is undoubtedly one of 2026's best indie games, providing endless amounts of fun. It takes clear inspiration from several fast-paced platformer classics, from its splashy and colorful art style, bombastic and intense OST, to its high-speed and intense levels.

Instead of the conventional control of a character, developer Undercoders has you taking control of a train. You focus on style mixing skills and speed across multiple theme park-like levels, and aim for the highest scores possible throughout to beat rival gangs, and fight to wreck a 'shady megacorp', known as Miraidō, in a 'Japanese dystopia'.

Frankly, the story wasn't my focus going in, but rather how the developers could keep the experience feeling exciting as you progress — and fortunately, it managed to do just that with each stage feeling like it was ripped straight out of an action-packed comic book.

This is a game that I can certainly see others coming back to over and over again for challenges to obtain higher scores, and most importantly, enjoy the intense atmosphere each level provides.

Denshattack! borrows from three huge platformer classics

GIF of gameplay in Denshattack!

(Image credit: Undercoders / Fireshine Games)

From the off, the inspiration behind Denshattack! was clear as day. The incredibly fast-paced and intense train adventure sequences reminded me very much of my experiences with Sonic games, notably Sonic Unleashed and its first Windmill Isle level.

In Denshattack!, you'll be overwhelmed with how many combinations you may have to remember at such high speeds, and you'll need fast hand-eye coordination to pull off tricks and dodge obstacles. You'll have several objectives to hit in each level, some being main objectives, but others standing as optional, with the latter contributing to the final score.

One example is what I call the brake-to-boost mechanic; Denshattack! allows players to break at any given moment during a level, but will give you a heads-up when turning a corner on a track for a drift. If you hold down the left trigger and let go at the right time (when the meter is centered in the middle and fully green), you'll get a big boost to speed, which is often one of the optional objectives in levels.

The intensity of Denshattack!'s gameplay is incredibly high; avoiding crashes into walls, jumping to change railway tracks, and even timing perfect landings to increase your score add to the game's difficulty. It even encourages you to avoid obstacles at the very last second, with one aspect of each level's final score labelled 'dares', effectively testing your daredevil skills.

Many of these mechanics play a significant role in boss battles, which require faster reaction speeds. That might sound straightforward, as most boss battles in games are more difficult and require better timing, but with how rapid Denshattack!'s gameplay flow is, leaving you very little time to settle, it's absolutely worth noting.

Sometimes, it can even feel like the game is moving just a tad bit too fast when you're attempting to keep track of objectives — arguably an issue with modern-day Sonic games too — but getting the hang of controls and timing doesn't take very long, and once you do, there's plenty of fun to be had.

In-game screenshot of Denshattack!

Main character, Emi, with a background of rivals (Image credit: Undercoders / Fireshine Games)

Jet Set Radio is another Sega classic, and a simialrly big inspiration. The art style in Denshattack! is very similar, with its cartoonish and colorful nature, even down to the very font across the game's UI in-game and within menus.

The soundtrack is phenomenal, and also much like Jet Set Radio's, which shouldn't come as a huge surprise, since some of Jet Set Radio's composers, like Richard Jacques, have collaborated on Denshattack!'s funky, disco-like, bass-centric, and synthwave-infused OST.

Those inspirations are combined to make an intense adventure come to life, but what gives Denshattack! its own identity is the vast amount of unique maneuvers, tricks, and even attacks (during boss battles), giving players a push for higher scores.

Many of the tricks reminded me of the Tony Hawk's Pro Skater series, like grinding across rails at high speeds and air spins, but not on a skateboard. Instead, you're quite literally using a train to provide a great spectacle, in what I originally thought was an odd move, but perfectly highlights the chaotic nature of riding in Denshattack!.

There's also a fair amount of customization available for the train car itself, and plenty of levels and collectable items to look out for throughout the game's runtime — and seeing a significant portion of what you can do in Denshattack!, I have no doubts this will be a 2026 sleeper hit.

Lomography just created a super affordable, idiot-proof film camera that doubles your number of photos — and it comes pre-loaded with a roll and the instructions are literally printed on the body

  • Lomography has released a new version of its ‘Simple Use’ disposable-style film camera
  • It’s half-frame, meaning it exposes half a frame of 35mm film at a time to effectively double the shot count
  • It comes pre-loaded with a roll of film, in a choice of color or black & white

Many people are put off trying out film photography because they perceive it to be too complicated. Lomography tries to take some of that mystique out with its disposable-style ‘Simple Use’ cameras — and today, the analog specialists have announced the new Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera, which doubles your shot count from a standard roll of 35mm film.

The name ‘half-frame’ refers to the fact that the camera only exposes half a frame of 35mm film at a time, cutting the standard horizontal 36mm x 24mm frame into two shots with rough dimensions of 18 x 24mm. This means that while your shots are smaller, you get a heck of lot more of them — a standard 36-shot roll of film could produce around 72 discrete images when run through the Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera.

Half-frame cameras aren’t new. In fact, they’ve been around since the 1960s, with Japanese manufacturers first offering them as a cost-saving alternative to standard 35mm film cameras. We’ve also seen more recent entries in the genre, such as the Kodak Ektar H35N. They tend to be small, cheap and straightforward.

Animation of the Lomography Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera with back open and different rolls of film being loaded

Unlike a standard disposable, once the first roll is done, you can reload as you please. (Image credit: Lomography)

However, the Lomography Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera sets itself apart by taking all steps possible to be incredibly, mind-bogglingly easy to use. This is the definition of an idiot-proof camera, one that basically anyone could pick up and use, and for this reason it might just be the ideal gateway drug for anyone who’s been tempted to try film photography.

Photograph of a hand holding the Lomography Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera, showing the rear of the camera with written instructions, diagrams and a QR code

It's so beginner-friendly it literally has instructions printed on it. (Image credit: Lomography)

Couldn’t be simpler

The Simple Use cameras are often described as ‘disposable-style’. This means they operate just like the kinds of disposable cameras that everybody used to bring on trips and then drop off to get developed. There’s no means of setting shutter speed or aperture — both are fixed — and the lens is completely fixed focus. The only control other than the shutter release is the flash, which is activated via the unmistakable lightning-bolt button on the front.

The Half-frame Simple Use camera also comes pre-loaded, meaning it’s completely ready to go out of the box. You have a choice of two options — getting one pre-loaded with LomoChrome Classicolor, or with Lomography Lady Grey monochrome film. Both of these stocks have an ISO rating of 400, meaning they’re good all-rounders for most lighting situations. They do only come in rolls of 20 however, which is quite small for a roll of 35mm. But remember, on half-frame, that works out to about 40 shots.

Sample images from the Lomography Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera, side by side vertical frames showing a man wearing glasses and a field of sunflowers
Half-frame images can be separated or left as diptychs if they feel complementary.Lomography
Sample images from the Lomography Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera, side by side vertical frames showing a young woman lit with differently colored flash
Colored gels can be placed over the flash for special effectsLomography
Sample images from the Lomography Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera, side by side vertical frames
The lens is a fairly wide 21mm.Lomography

Once you’ve rattled through your shots, you can rewind using the dial on top to extract your film. In another quite sweet bit of idiot-proofing, the camera body is covered in stickers and labels to remind you to rewind before opening the rear door — indeed, you have to physically remove two of these stickers before opening the door is even possible.

Sample image from Lomography Half-frame Simple Use Reloadable Film Camera showing a woman holding a black cat, lit with flash

Cheap cameras like this will likely find use for quick grab-shots. (Image credit: Lomography)

With a plastic lens and fixed settings, this isn’t a camera that’s going to create images of stunning quality — even before you factor in that your shots will be half the size of normal 35mm frames. However, I think its simplicity means it could be a fantastic choice for anyone who has always wanted to shoot film but has found the process intimidating. And with a low asking price of $29.90 / £21.90 / AU$37.90 for the B&W version, or $34.90 / £24.90 / AU$44.90 for the color, you don’t have a lot to lose by giving it a try.

You might also like

The Odyssey IMAX 70mm screening demand is so high that IMAX CEO confirms he'd 'like to see more' theaters — but actually getting them is more complicated than it looks

As Christopher Nolan's The Odyssey arrives in theaters worldwide on July 17, the demand for screenings in IMAX 70mm has never been higher.

According to Variety, demand is so high that "fans are taking cross-country trips, buying tickets in bulk and more to see the film, with one fan even delaying her pregnancy."

The new movie is the first feature film ever shot entirely on 1570 IMAX cameras, and you only have to look at the TikTok below to see how much of each shot standard cinemagoers will be missing out on.

Globally, there are only 30-40 theaters that can play Nolan's original 70mm film, with around 26 in the US and just three in the UK.

We know what cultural and economic impact The Odyssey is set to have in the industry this summer, with estimates predicting that the movie will gross $200 million at the international box office in its opening weekend alone.

So does this mean that we could see an increase in new IMAX theaters being built? IMAX CEO Richard Gelfond confirms that it's a definite company goal... but the reality isn't quite so straightforward.

'We haven't made new IMAX projectors in about 50 years'

"There's certainly more demand; the problem is they haven't made new IMAX film projectors in about 50 years," Gelfond told Variety.

"So we retrofit them, rebuild them, and part of our strategy is to see how far we can take it. But certainly, demand-driven, I'd like to see more."

Obviously, this would be a huge investment for the company. Commercial IMAX projectors range from $300,000 to over $1.2 million USD, depending on whether it is digital, laser, or traditional 70mm film. The latter is going to be at the top end of this range, given its complexity.

Then there's the risk involved with investing. Just because The Odyssey has such high demand doesn't mean that other movies that opt to film in the same format in the future will have the same retention level.

Cinemas are struggling enough as it is, which isn't helped by the fact that streaming services like Netflix are frequently pushing back on giving original movies a theatrical release.

“There is a group of filmmakers who still want theatrical,” Dan Lin, chairman of Netflix Film, told The Hollywood Reporter. “Those are filmmakers that we’ve accepted; we just won’t work with.”

In short, it's a leap of faith back to a new cinema, despite how much fans are desperate for them. However, if any film can set a new precedent — and bring back the forgotten ways of making projectors — it's The Odyssey.

I'm quietly keeping my fingers crossed that such passionate interest in returning to cinema in its biggest and best form will mark a turning point. Perhaps just because I can't get tickets for Nolan's latest at the BFI IMAX... but while I'm jealous, the fact that screenings are sold out until mid-August is nothing short of astonishing.

Could now finally be a good time to buy an AI PC? This report says so

  • AI PCs are emerging as a viable option to run local AI without unpredictable costs
  • One-time PC cost alleviates the need to fork out for cloud token fees
  • Broader research reaffirms rising popularity of smaller models

New Gartner data has claimed now could actually be a good time to buy AI PCs, as cloud computing faces numerous challenges in a rapidly-changing business world.

Data center construction is slipping behind demand as supple chains strain and local communities oppose new projects, meaning that metered compute could end up costing some companies more than they'd bargained for.

By shifting some of their AI processing locally, companies could be able to avoid some of those extra monthly costs with a one-time purchase of a more powerful PC as part of their regular refresh cycles.

AI PCs present an ideal hybrid compute model

While AI PC adoption started pretty slow with companies struggling to understand the benefits, they're now being seen as a cloud fallback option rather than a primary benefit in their own right.

With AI usage increasingly sharply and unpredictable token consumption hitting companies hard, forecasting monthly costs is a new major challenge that many face.

Small language and reasoning models, including specially trained models for individual business use cases, ultimately need fewer resources than leading frontier models, allowing them to be run locally as part of a broader hybrid approach.

Gartner predicts that speech and chat, text generation, image and audio generation and more could soon shift to workers' PCs, with only the most intensive tasks routed via hyperscaler data centers.

By as soon as 2029, the company's researchers anticipate that around one-third (30%) of enterprises could use AI PCs to reduce cloud AI token costs. By 2030, 70% of corporate PCs could be able to run some GenAI tasks locally.

Omdia researchers also noticed a shift in AI model usage, with smaller and medium models proving popular, with domain-specific tasks not needing the full breadth of compute.

"Older GPUs are retaining value and remaining in service, as they continue to offer a cost-effective option for small and midsized model inference and disaggregation," Senior Principal Analyst for Advanced Computing Alexander Harrowell said.

Via The Register

Google logo on a black background next to text reading 'Click to follow TechRadar'

"Players using CryoTherm Palm felt 60% cooler, held 2.45% higher speeds and preserved sprint velocity 4.7% better" — I asked Therabody's Chief Science Officer how England's World Cup squad is using a new cooling device to combat heat and boost performance

One of the biggest talking points around this year's World Cup has been the heat. Players from countries with very temperate, cool climates, like Norway and England, have had to play back-to-back games in hot and humid conditions, placing enormous stress on their bodies as they struggle to keep their core temperature down.

When core temperatures rise, fatigue isn't far behind. Research has shown that elevated internal body temperatures cause fatigue during prolonged exercise in hot environments, even for trained athletes. Staving off exhaustion by staying cool is therefore crucial.

Enter Therabody, maker of some of the best massage guns, which has supplied Thomas Tuchel's England squad with a novel new device: the Therabody CryoTherm Palm. It looks a little like a dumbbell, but it's not for lifting; instead, you simply place your hands on the nodes, and the CryoTherm Palm, Therabody says, uses these contact points to cool down your whole body using the company's 'Cryothermal technology'.

It sounds too good to be true — but the England players are reportedly making the most of it. We asked Therabody's Chief Science Officer, Tim Roberts, exactly how the technology works.

Harry Kane of England celebrates after scoring his team's third goal during the FIFA World Cup 2026 Round Of 16 match against Mexico at Mexico City Stadium on July 5, 2026 in Mexico City, Mexico

England captain Harry Kane (Image credit: Getty Images)

"Your palms are natural radiators — hairless skin packed with special vessels that bring a lot of blood right to the surface," says Roberts. "It’s why gloves keep your whole body warm in winter.

"CryoTherm Palm cools that surface, pulls heat out of the blood passing through, and that cooled blood circulates back to lower your core temperature faster than cooling almost anywhere else."

So, in theory, the cold blood passing through your hands works to regulate the rest of your body's internal temperature. Clever. According to Roberts, there's a psychological effect too, as "it also dampens the thermal signals your brain uses to judge effort", so exercising feels easier.

Therabody CryoTherm Palm in use

(Image credit: Therabody)

Roberts points to a study conducted at the IMG Academy in Florida, in which footballers using the device between sprints saw positive results.

"In our IMG Academy soccer study, players using CryoTherm Palm between sprints felt 60% cooler, held 2.45% higher top speed and preserved sprint velocity 4.7% better across repeated efforts," says Roberts. While he does concede that "none of this replaces basic heat sense — hydrate, respect genuinely dangerous conditions, and back off when you need to," those numbers suggest it can make a difference.

I wouldn't be doing my due diligence if I didn't point out that in a Therabody press release, the IMG Academy was referred to as a Therabody partner. However, the science seems sound, and the CryoTherm Palm might just be your secret weapon to keep cool during your next workout, especially in very hot weather.

The device is available now, priced at $399.99 / £349 / around AU$600. I'm looking forward to testing, especially if the heatwaves we're experiencing here in the UK continue.

Inkjet-printed OLED screens are reportedly in mass production at long last — here's why that's great news for monitor, laptop and even TV pricing

  • TCL CSOT is reportedly now mass producing the first inkjet-printed OLEDs for consumers
  • MSI just revealed a new 27-inch monitor which seemingly uses this 4K panel
  • Inkjet printing is a more affordable way of making OLEDs and it will usher in cheaper monitors and laptops, and eventually TVs further down the line

TCL CSOT has seemingly taken a big step towards putting inkjet-printed OLED panels in the homes of consumers, and mass production of these screens is now reportedly underway.

OLED-Info reports that the Chinese manufacturer has kicked off production with an initial 27-inch 4K panel with a refresh rate of 120Hz. It offers a brightness of up to 300 nits and 99% coverage of the DCI-P3 color gamut (meaning lifelike and accurate color representation).

This inkjet-printed screen is destined for monitors, but bigger panels for the likes of TVs are expected to be in the cards for the future. For starters, though, we're looking at production for monitors and also laptop OLEDs.

This is still the very early stages for TCL, and OLED-Info clarifies that we are only talking about 'low volume' production on the firm's Gen 5.5 inkjet line for now. Still, it's an important step to take, but producing the panels is one thing, and it'll take some time for these to be incorporated into monitors which are then shipped to retailers where consumers can buy them.

Note that the Gen 5.5 inkjet line has produced OLED panels before, just not displays destined for consumer products (they were screens for commercial use in the medical field).

It seems that the freshly announced MSI Pro Max OLED 271UPJW12 uses this TCL 4K panel, although that isn't explicitly stated in the press release for the new model published by TechPowerup. All the specs match up, though, and it couldn't really be any other screen anyway – and this revelation is another sign to back up OLED-Info's contention that mass production is now up and running.

MSI boasts of the monitor: "With a 164 PPI density and an optimized RGB Stripe sub-pixel layout that closely resembles the uniform RGB structure of traditional LCDs, this advanced design effectively eliminates color fringing, optimizing text and image clarity."

We don't get a price from MSI, but that's not surprising at this stage, because as noted, the release is likely still some way off yet.

Analysis: what's the big deal with inkjet-printed OLEDs anyway?

MSI Pro Max OLED 271UPJW12 monitor promotional image

(Image credit: TechPowerUp / MSI)

As we've covered in the past, there are some distinct advantages with using an OLED printed by an inkjet compared to traditional (Fine Metal Mask) OLED panels. They are more power-efficient, and the inkjet-printed (IJP) OLEDs will also have a longer lifespan, but most crucially, they're cheaper.

TCL has previously told us that these IJP panels are 20% cheaper than existing OLEDs (and they can be made 30% faster, too). Analyst firms believe that these printed panels could be up to 35% cheaper in the future, when production is higher volume and more refined (with less waste).

The upshot should be OLED monitors which are a good deal more affordable, not to mention laptops with OLED screens that hit cheaper price points – and as noted, TVs eventually, too. The lower power usage will also be a major benefit for notebooks in terms of extending battery life, given that the display is one of the biggest drains on the battery.

The overall affordability of OLED will also be helped by TCL's inkjet-based creations, because the dominant panel makers – LG Display and Samsung – will be forced to be more competitive with their pricing. Add to that the emergence of BOE's Generation 8.6 panels, which went into mass production last month – again offering a more economical way to produce OLEDs thanks to much larger substrates – and this poses yet more competition, meaning there'll be some distinct downward pressures on OLED pricing.

The catch is that it will take some time for this to happen, especially in the world of bigger screens for the likes of OLED TVs – but make no mistake, it is happening.

How brands can preserve customer ‘digital patience’

As the common phrase goes – ‘patience is a virtue’. The ability to endure, wait and yield to time without complaint is widely seen as a positive personality trait. Yet patience is situational, and everyone has a limit.

In a customer service context, people will wait longer when the stakes are high, or when they trust that delays will lead to better security, accuracy or care. If they’re dealing with another human, they also tend to be far more forgiving.

Alongside that limited patience, customers are also increasingly distracted. The average Brit now sits on over 1,000 unread emails in their inbox, according to recent research, alongside juggling around 25 non-work notifications a day.

People are not short of communication, but saturated. Attention is at a premium, and anything irrelevant is quickly deprioritized or disappears entirely.

This is particularly acute for the 36-55-year-old cohort, which boast the highest unread email counts, and the greatest pressure to stay online for work. Two-fifths of 36-50-year-olds say they feel more disconnected than ever, despite increased digital interactions.

Balancing careers, caregiving, mortgages and performance metrics, the attention and mental load on this group is significant. If brands are adding irrelevant noise and difficulty into these environments, tolerance is low.

This simultaneous feeling of burnout and impatience is heightened by the fact that the instant nature of the attention economy, and the incentives of digital platforms, has rewired expectations.

If there is no sense of progress or urgency conveyed with a digital service, then reassurance falls away and the chances someone will give up on the process rapidly increases. Clear, proactive explanations, combined with customer experience design that maintains continuity across every channel and interaction are vital.

Setting clear expectations

Digital saturation and the attention economy have also meant that first impressions are decisive. If in those initial moments of engagement there is any sense of delay or stalling, people will reconsider if they need the product or service in the first place.

These early moments are therefore a critical opportunity to build seamless customer journeys, closing these ‘patience deficits’ by finding and fixing areas that cause frustration. When there are unavoidable moments where waiting is required, brands must turn these into opportunities to strengthen loyalty and trust.

Customers want assurance that every click, confirmation or verification step serves a purpose. Uncertainty is the true enemy of patience, so give customers better visibility and control to help build trust.

Other industry research found that 25% of consumers there think ‘transparency about what’s happening and why’ is one of the most important things to them in a digital customer experience, with 45% valuing clear instructions and easy-to-follow steps. If there’s an action they don’t need to take or unnecessary duplication, remove it.

Poor design can lead to digital impatience, and exacerbate the overload of digital admin. Ensure that digital and automated channels are fast, reliable and transparent when it comes to waiting times. Competitive advantage will come from being the most considered, not the loudest.

Turning impatience into opportunity

At the same time, when customers know brands are protecting their data, there is an opportunity to earn patience through careful application of friction. Digital speed bumps like two-factor authentication, framed in the right way, can become symbols of care, not inconvenience – so in designing the customer journey, brands should take advantage.

The reality of digital patience is made more complex by the fact that more people are interacting with machines for customer service than ever before. AI agents, designed and used effectively, have raised expectations – but when AI gets stuck, misunderstands intent or is otherwise poorly designed, it backfires and becomes counterproductive. In those moments, many of us prefer to just talk to a human.

The purpose and context of interactions matter, so organizations must take care to match automation to the complexity and stakes of each task. Examine which tasks are best for AI agents to take on, and be clear about when AI is in use, explaining its role in plain language.

For those tasks which require more reassurance, empathy and accountability, human alternatives may be preferable. In these situations, we tend to be slightly more patient – 84% will stay patient on the phone with a real person, perhaps because we know we’re more likely to be able to connect on a human level, and get some understanding and reassurance in response to our enquiry.

If a service is too slow, however, then more than half of consumers say that delays lead them to think less of a brand, leave negative reviews, or warn others to steer clear.

Brands should provide the choice of human support and digital self-service tools in a way that reflects these dynamics. When switching between the two, brands should also carry context over, so that customers never need to repeat themselves.

Digital patience is a precious resource. Poor design which frustrates and builds impatience can see it easily lost, but with care, it is equally easy to earn. When brands anticipate frustration and design for reassurance, they convert fleeting attention into enduring trust, and find opportunities to strengthen relationships and loyalty.

We've featured the best ecommerce platform.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

I tried Android's underrated desktop app, and it's transformed the way I work

For the longest time, I thought that, despite their annoyances, iPhones had something big over the best Android phones: PC connectivity. I'd always seen iPhone and Mac-owning friends quickly send files between the two, and assumed it was an Apple-exclusive feature.

As it turns out, this isn't true. Android users can use a Windows app that brings loads of really useful features — and it's really underutilized, which is why a tech journalist like me hadn't heard of it.

This software is called Phone Link, and we've got a guide on how to connect your Android phone to a Windows PC using Phone Link elsewhere on TechRadar. I downloaded it about a year ago, largely out of duty to test every tool, appliance, and gadget I could get my hands on. I was expecting it to last a weekend.

A year on, though, and Phone Link has become such a useful part of my workflow that I'd forgotten it's something not everyone's heard about. It's such a natural part of the way I use my phone and computer that I'd totally forgotten it was something I initially downloaded to test!

Well, no longer: TechRadar has let me wax lyrical about Phone Link, and I'm going to give the tool its time in the sun.

Sending photos from phone to PC

A screenshot of Phone Link on Windows, showing a photo of some headphones.

(Image credit: Future)

For the most part, whenever I want to connect my phone to my PC, it's to move pictures between the two devices.

As a smartphone journalist, you can understand that I'm sending snaps from my phone to my computer a lot. Sometimes it's camera samples from a mobile I'm testing that I want to upload for a review. Occasionally, I want to back up pictures I really like before I wipe a phone and send it back to the company.

The most frequent use case, though, is to transfer to my PC pictures I've taken on one phone, of another. I use smartphones to do review photography, and it's a great way to test out a phone I'm reviewing.

Before Phone Link, I'd have to use a USB cable to connect my phone to my computer — approving the connection on my Android's end, because they're always annoyingly suspicious — and drag and drop all the relevant pictures into a folder on my computer. It's not an especially onerous process — it's a lot quicker than when I used to use Google Drive to transfer pictures, for instance — but it takes a little while of fiddling with my phone and digging out a cable to work.

Not so with Phone Link. Its Photos tab shows a big old list of all the pictures you've taken recently, giving you options to save them to your PC, open them in an editing app, and share them with others.

These pictures appear as soon as you take them, as long as your phone is on the same Wi-Fi as your computer. I've become used to taking photos in one room of my home, and entering my office, to see them linked up on Phone Link, ready for an edit. When I've got PC notifications turned on, I can even hear the 'bong' of my computer telling me they've arrived.

Phone Link also lets you browse the contents of your mobile in the Files tab, where it appears in the Devices and drives list alongside any cloud or local drives you have. I don't use my phone to handle non-photo files, but it's a nice touch that'd be really useful if I were in another line of work.

Apps on my PC

The Windows Phone Link Apps menu on the right, and on the left the window for Too Good To Go.

(Image credit: Future)

Ostensibly, one of the main uses for Phone Link is that it lets you open your smartphone apps on your computer. Its Apps page shows you a massive list of every one you have installed on your mobile, and clicking on it opens it in a window.

This doesn't override anything you have going on on your phone; if you're using it as a second screen to watch a YouTube video or act as a music player (one of many ways you can repurpose an old Android phone), the app will open in your PC window alone.

When I first started Phone Link, I tried using it for everything, but often bounced straight off. In many circumstances, using a smartphone is simply more intuitive than using a mouse and keyboard, given that phone apps are designed for thumbs. But over time, I've found a few uses of Phone Link's app windows that are genuinely handy.

As mentioned, one of those uses is as a music player. I can let Spotify hang around as a spare window, ready to skip tracks or change playlists when I want. It's also useful as a way to check apps that don't have PC equivalents, like Too Good To Go or Mubi Go, or ones that do have web functions but are easier on the phone, like my national health service's app.

There's one way that Phone Link saved me hours, though. When I used to work for a company that didn't let you use your work Gmail account on personal computers, Phone Link was my workaround to still see emails on my PC. This saved me ages each day; time that'd otherwise be taken up checking and replying to emails on my phone, or trying to get my decrepit work laptop to turn on.

Naturally, you can manage your calls and texts via Phone Link too. Personally, I don't think I've sent an SMS or made a non-WhatsApp voice call since the 2010s, but I'm sure there are some people who'd find this handy.

I also appreciate a notification list down the left side of Phone Link. This transforms it from being software solely for controlling your mobile to a veritable hub of information from your handset. I'll often keep it up on my second monitor; it makes good use of its space.

Controlling my phone from my computer

A snippet from the Windows Phone Link app, showing phone controls.

(Image credit: Future)

As mentioned, you can use your computer to control your mobile's apps via Phone Link, but you can also use it to change the actual settings of the device itself, which proves itself useful in an entirely different way.

Phone Link lets you monitor your phone status; I can see how it's connected to other devices, what battery it's on, and whether it's currently paired with Phone Link or not. I can even see a little representation of what my wallpaper currently is. All useful to a small degree, but the charge is the only one of those that's seriously useful.

What's more important are the status controls. You can toggle between vibrate, sound, and silent, turn Do Not Disturb on and off, and turn on the media player.

From a cursory mention of the tools, these might not sound that important, but I've found them really useful in a pinch. I'm constantly forgetting to mute my phone before I go on a video meeting, and a quick click of the Do Not Disturb button means I'm not going to have unexpected calls.

As a lazy person, I also love the fact that you can use Phone Link to play a sound from your phone; I'm always doing this instead of spending five seconds actually looking.

My one gripe with Phone Link is that I still need my phone with me to use it. When you start using it each session, you're required to unlock your device and approve the connection. But this is a small price to pay for the transformational effect it's had on my workflow — and I hope that you, too, consider giving it a try.

How parked domains became a cybercrime goldmine

Every day, millions of people type a web address into their browser, usually in a flurry of rapid keystrokes, and arrive exactly where they intended.

However, a small but significant number of people don’t.

They might miss a letter, type an extra letter in their haste, or get some letters mixed up. Instead of hitting linkedin[.]com, they hit linkdein[.]com. Those mistakes gave way to one of the internet’s least glamorous destinations – the parked domain.

Most internet users have encountered them at some point, even if they didn't know what they were looking at. Typically, a parked domain would just be a sparse, messy page filled with adverts and a search bar with very little else.

They existed because someone, somewhere, recognized that in the early days of the internet a percentage of users would inevitably mistype a popular website – so they registered the most similar-looking domain names for themselves in a move known as “typosquatting” and earned advertising revenue from the resulting traffic.

If just 0.1% of the millions of people accessing amazon[.]com accidentally went to the amazn[.]com domain they’d bought, that’s still a worthwhile payday. It was a mundane corner of the digital economy, built on convenience, coincidence, and the occasional typo.

History can be a harsh teacher, but it can also sow complacency. In 2026, a lot of security teams still regard parked domains as little more than lazy digital billboards – inconvenient and annoying, but not a meaningful security concern.

However, the infrastructure surrounding parked domains has evolved considerably from the amateurish, pop-up-ridden advertising pages of the early internet. What was once a simple case of opportunistic domain monetization now sits inside a far more complex ecosystem of advertisers, brokers, and traffic distribution networks.

In many cases, a user's accidental visit no longer ends on a parked page at all. Instead, it triggers a journey through a chain of intermediaries operating largely out of sight. Somewhere along that journey, legitimate advertising can give way to fraud, scams, and malware distribution.

In other words, one of the web's most familiar and overlooked mechanisms has become one of the most lucrative and insidious vehicles for cybercrime.

From Mistype to Malware

The transformation of parked domains from digital curiosities into cybersecurity risks has been subtle, and that’s one of the reasons it’s so dangerous. For decades, the model followed the same patterns – a user would land on a parked domain, see a collection of banners, click on something accidental or otherwise, and generate a small amount of revenue for the domain owner.

It was cynical, but at least it was transparent because users could at least see where they had ended up and decide for themselves what to do next – usually just close the tab and go where they meant to. The only real danger here came from the occasional misleading or malicious ad rather than the mechanics of the domain itself.

Today things are different. Changes within the online advertising industry, including tighter policies around traditional domain monetization, have encouraged cybercriminals and fraudsters to try new approaches to keep the train of monetization moving.

Increasingly, users who arrive at a parked domain don't encounter a parked page at all. Instead, they’re immediately redirected elsewhere through a process known as “zero-click advertising”, sometimes referred to as direct search.

What appears to be a simple typo can trigger a rapid auction in which a user's visit is bought, sold, and passed between multiple advertising partners before they ever see a destination website. Most of this activity unfolds in fractions of a second and entirely beyond the user's view, and while many of those transactions remain legitimate, the sheer complexity of the ecosystem creates opportunities for abuse.

Somewhere within that chain, traffic can be acquired by actors whose interests extend far beyond advertising revenue, opening the door to scams, malware, fraudulent software, and a host of other malicious outcomes.

The Malvertising Economy

One of the reasons parked domain abuse is still underestimated and difficult to pin down is that the attack path rarely follows a straight line. When most people imagine a cyberattack, they picture a malicious website waiting at the end of a link, ready to ensnare an unsuspecting user.

But in this case, by the time a user reaches the content they're ultimately shown, their traffic may have already passed through a maze of advertising exchanges, brokers, redirectors, and cloaking services.

Each participant sees only a fragment of the overall journey, making it remarkably difficult for the “good guys” to determine which “bad guys” are responsible for what. It’s a little like trying to investigate a crime scene where the evidence constantly rearranges itself.

The cowardly threat actors involved in this type of cybercrime exploit this ambiguity. They use sophisticated cloaking techniques which allow them to examine visitors before deciding which content to serve up – where are they based? What kind of browser are they using? What operating system is their device running?

A security researcher in California might see a harmless landing page, while a finance broker in London might be served up a credential harvesting scam. This selective delivery makes malicious activity harder to detect and even harder to reproduce.

What’s worse, parked domain abuse is rarely aimed at a specific industry or organization. The actors deploying parked domains are usually financially motivated, and their primary interest is in acquiring traffic, so they’re not going to discriminate.

Once they’ve ensnared a victim, they become a commodity moving through an invisible marketplace where every click has value and every redirection creates another opportunity for exploitation.

The blind spot in traditional security

So where does all of this leave defenders? Parked domain abuse doesn’t behave like a conventional cyber threat. While security teams are used to investigating suspicious websites, malicious files, or compromised accounts that leave a relatively obvious trail, parked domain campaigns are different because the underlying traffic distribution is constantly changing.

The same typo domain can send one user down an entirely different path than the next. By the time an analyst attempts to recreate what a victim experienced, the route may no longer exist and any “evidence” has effectively evaporated. How do they defend against something they can't see or recreate?

One thing is guaranteed – regardless of how many redirects, intermediaries, cloaking systems, or advertising platforms sit between the initial typo and the final destination, every step in the journey depends on the domain name system (DNS). Often described as the internet's address book, DNS is responsible for translating domain names into the destinations users ultimately reach.

Put simply, each lookup leaves behind a breadcrumb that helps reveal relationships that would otherwise remain hidden, and that visibility has allowed researchers investigating typosquatted versions of well-known domains to follow the trail beyond the initial deception. Patterns start to emerge between seemingly unrelated cases of malware, involving the same parking providers, cloaking services, and traffic distribution infrastructure.

By examining historical DNS records and mapping the relationships between domains over time, it has become possible to connect incidents that appear to be unrelated and expose the networks operating behind them. Instead of playing “whack a mole” and chasing surface level domains, DNS mapping has allowed defenders to target the entire machine.

The greatest danger posed by parked domains isn't the typo itself, but the assumption that the infrastructure behind that typo is benign. For years, parked domains occupied a strange corner of the internet, largely ignored by security teams and rarely considered worthy of serious scrutiny.

But today, they offer cybercriminals something far more valuable than advertising revenue – access to legitimate systems, trusted business models, and vast streams of user traffic that can be manipulated and monetized at scale.

As threat actors continue to refine their use of cloaking, traffic distribution, and advertising networks, the distinction between legitimate online activity and malicious activity will become increasingly difficult to spot from the outside.

Protect yourself against malware with the best antivirus software.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

'No new vulnerability is needed to bypass UEFI Secure Boot': Experts find attackers can exploit decades-old flaws to gain access to key systems

  • ESET discovers 11 vulnerable UEFI shim bootloaders signed by Microsoft, allowing attackers to bypass Secure Boot and deploy malicious bootkits
  • Any UEFI system trusting Microsoft’s 2011 third‑party certificate could be exposed, potentially billions of devices; attackers can bring old trusted shims to new systems
  • Microsoft has revoked the vulnerable shims, and users should apply the latest UEFI revocations (Windows auto‑updates, Linux via LVFS) to block exploitation

Cybersecurity experts from ESET have discovered 11 vulnerable UEFI shim bootloaders, all signed by Microsoft, which could allow threat actors to exploit ancient vulnerabilities and bypass UEFI Secure Boot, deploying all sorts of malicious bootkits.

A shim is a small, intermediary bootloader that works as a bridge between a computer's firmware (UEFI) and the operating system's bootloader. Its primary purpose is to allow operating systems to work with UEFI Secure Boot without having Microsoft sign every Linux bootloader individually.

Any UEFI-based machine that trusts the Microsoft Corporation UEFI CA 2011 third-party UEFI certificate authority (CE) certificate, regardless of the operating system, was said to be vulnerable to the shims (versions 0.9 and older). That would put the number of potentially vulnerable devices in the billions, since almost all modern x86 PCs use UEFI firmware, and most of them trust the Microsoft Corporation UEFI CA 2011 certificate out of the box.

Revoking the shims

However, ESET reported its findings to CERT/CC and the vulnerable UEFI applications were all revoked.

The shims come from different tools such as PC diagnostic software, Linux distribution, and other UEFI-based utilities, the researchers explained. They also added that, since the attackers can bring their own vulnerable shims to any UEFI system with the Microsoft third-party UEFI certificate enrolled, they can exploit systems that are, at first, not affected.

To block the vulnerable shims, users should apply the latest UEFI revocations from Microsoft, it was said. While Windows systems will most likely do it automatically, Linux systems users should do it through the Linux Vendor Firmware Service.

“What makes these old shims dangerous is not a novel vulnerability; it’s that no new vulnerability is needed to bypass UEFI Secure Boot,” says ESET researcher Martin Smolár, who discovered the vulnerable shims.

“An attacker needs no complicated exploitation primitives — only a copy of an old, still-trusted but unrevoked shim binary and a basic understanding of how UEFI shims work. That is enough to bypass such an essential security feature as UEFI Secure Boot."

Spotify parents rejoice! KPop Demon Hunters need never cloud your Wrapped results again, thanks to Managed accounts launching on Spotify Free

  • 'Managed' accounts let parents create a Spotify experience for their child
  • Once reserved for Premium Family accounts, it is now rolling out to all
  • Managed accounts are music-only with no messages, but do get Wrapped

Fed up with waiting for your Wrapped roundup only to find KPop Demon Hunters is claiming the top spot again — and it most certainly would not be down to you?

Great news: Spotify is expanding its Managed account service (which the big green streaming machine launched around two years ago, within its paid-for Family subscriptions) to the Free, ad-supported service.

This gives young listeners a chance to have their own personalized Spotify experience (including their own Wrapped summary), but within what Spotify calls a "focused, music-only experience".

With Managed accounts (which must be set up by an adult 'Account manager', usually a parent or guardian), young listeners can create their own playlists and receive tailored recommendations for new music. Yes, our favorite Daylist feature, plus a Wrapped summary at the end of each year, are both onboard.

The company tells me that while 90% of parents using Spotify agree that listening to music on the platform is a good use of their children's time (versus only a third of parents when asked the same question about gaming), parents don't really want their Wrapped playlists influenced by their nine-year-old.

Spotify also reports that more than 70% of kids now listen to music every week, but that children asking their parents to play a favorite track (often a lot) can cause family friction — especially when children might be fighting for airtime with a sibling, or just completely ignoring what mom might want to listen to in the car.

Managed accounts on Spotify: what you need to know (and why they're Golden)

Spotify managed accounts screengrabs on blue background

(Image credit: Spotify)

As the image above shows, the process for creating a Managed account is straightforward using the 'Add account' tab. As any parent in the UK knows, plans are well underway for a social media ban for under-16s, so this can only be seen as a wise and welcome move from Spotify.

The basics are this: as well as Spotify's filters for explicit lyrics or content, parents and guardians can manually filter out content, and manage playback for specific artists or tracks.

Video and Canvas looping visuals are also always off by default for managed accounts. During its initial rollout, Spotify says 60% of parents chose to keep video content switched off, which is why in this wider rollout — it is coming to 17 markets globally today — it's off by default.

Additionally, the default features of Managed accounts mean that they are automatically set to private and are unsearchable, with no profile photos (just avatars), and young listeners will not have access to messages.

Spotify tells me that Managed accounts are typically for children aged 7-12, who are not yet ready for a full account but who want to establish their identity and explore a love of music themselves, via their own managed account.

Again, Managed accounts are music only right now, i.e., no podcasts, video or audiobooks. But Spotify says the experience will evolve as the company continues to work closely with parents as well as Spotify's team of six external partners, including the Spotify Safety Advisory Council.

Does your child need their own phone? No, there’s a device switching option, which locks the account holder’s content with a PIN, so the holder of the Managed account can start to stream away with both the default and added controls and filters deployed.

And when your children grow up (it happens so fast!), what then? Once a child reaches the minimum age for their respective market, they can put in a 'request’ to the main account holder to be upgraded to a full account. Once the owner of a Managed account turns 18, that young person can change their own account to a regular one — so no playlist gets left behind.

I test 4K Blu-rays for a living and these are my 6 picks from Amazon's big sale, including reference-level discs from Disney, Marvel, and 20th Century Studios that I use for AV testing

If you're looking to add more 4K Blu-rays to your collection, then Disney's Summer Days, Movie Nights 4K Blu-ray sale has arrived at the perfect time, where it's 2 for £30 on discs including titles from Disney, Marvel, Star Wars and 20th Century Studios. The same 2 for £30 sale is also live at HMV.

I regularly test 4K Blu-ray as part of our monthly Blu-ray Bounty feature, where we test the best new 4K releases. I've picked six discs from the sale that all featured as part of the Blu-ray Bounty, so I know just how good they look and sound.

First up is Alien: Romulus, one of my reference discs for testing contrast and black tones on the best TVs. Its also excellent Dolby Atmos soundtrack is immersive and spine-chilling too.

The Sound of Music is one of the best restorations I've seen, with spectacular colours and detail. Edward Scissorhands is another disc that delivers superb colour reproduction, surpassing my expectations completely.

If you want action-packed titles with brilliant Dolby Atmos soundtracks, Master and Commander delivers pinpoint-accurate sound, while Fantastic Four: First Steps delivers the power you'd want from a superhero flick. Finally, Tombstone looks crisp and offers a fantastic DTS-HD 5.1 MA soundtrack that will show off your surround setup.

For my thoughts on each disc, scroll further down the page.

My picks from Amazon's 2 for £30 4K Blu-ray sale

Alien Romulus Uhd Bd [blu-Ray] [region Free]

20th Century Studios
Alien Romulus 4K Ultra HD & Blu-ray

The Sound of Music 60th Anniv Uhd Bd [blu-Ray] [region Free]

Walt Disney
The Sound of Music 4K Blu-ray

Edward Scissorhands Uhd Bd [blu-Ray] [region Free]

20th Century Studios
Edward Scissorhands 4K Blu-ray

Master & Commander Uhd Bd [blu-Ray] [region Free]

Walt Disney
Master & Commander: The Far Side of the World 4K Blu-ray

Fantastic Four First Steps Uhd Bd [blu-Ray] [region Free]

Walt Disney
The Fantastic Four: First Steps 4K Blu-ray

Tombstone Uhd Bd

Walt Disney
Tombstone 4K Blu-ray

Alien: Romulus

Alien: Romulus image of Andy on Panasonic MZ1500 OLED with HW-Q990C soundbar in front of TV

(Image credit: Future)

Set between the events of Alien and Aliens, Alien: Romulus follows a crew of scavengers who come across a derelict space station called Renaissance, where they encounter hostile aliens.

Alien: Romulus delivers a truly stunning picture in 4K. Its inky black levels and high-contrast scenes look superb on the best OLED TVs, and it's a real showcase for 4K detail. Textures are crisp, with impressive intricate detail in objects and environments that show just how good modern movies can look in 4K. When I want to test a TV's backlight and contrast, this is one of the first discs I reach for.

The Dolby Atmos soundtrack featured is incredible. While the more powerful moments, such as gunfire or the sound of engines igniting, have real impact, it's the detail that impresses. The sound of face-hugger feet is so precisely mapped, it had me looking around our testing lab when I first tested it, as their path came from the rear channels with astonishing accuracy. The movie's more visceral moments, as characters meet their demise, can be particularly realistic.

The Sound of Music

A shot of Maria and the Von Trapp children on a hillside in front of a mountain from The Sound of Music 4K Blu-ray on LG G5

(Image credit: 20th Century Studios / Future )

One of cinema's most iconic musicals, The Sound of Music follows Maria (Julie Andrews), a nun who is sent to take over as the nanny of the Von Trapp family children, set in pre-WWII Austria.

The Sound of Music is one of the best examples of a 4K restoration I've seen. Textures have been cleaned up beautifully, and the breathtaking cinematography of the Austrian landscape has never looked more detailed. Really though, it's the colours that stand out the most here. Green fields and blue skies have serious pop, and other colours such as red, yellow and orange are delivered with real vibrancy. One of my reference discs, the market scene, in particular, is brilliant.

Never has the movie's legendary soundtrack sounded better than here. The Dolby Atmos mixes are all perfectly balanced between the score and vocals, and speech is crystal clear throughout. Songs like 'Do Re Mi' and 'My Favourite Things' sound clean, with superb depth and clarity.

Edward Scissorhands

Edward Scissorhands 4K Blu-ray showing a yellow car and colorful houses on LG G5

(Image credit: 20th Century Studios / Future)

Edward Scissorhands follows the story of Edward (Johnny Depp), an artificial humanoid with scissors for hands, who is taken in by a suburban family, where he falls for the family's daughter, Kim (Winona Ryder).

When I first tested Edward Scissorhands on 4K, I didn't expect to be wowed by the disc's colours as much as I was. The gothic nature of the movie is juxtaposed with the vibrant, often garish, colour scheme of the neighbourhood, and these colours are superb in 4K. The bright, multi-coloured houses are vivid, and if your TV has good colour reproduction, you'll be rewarded. Textures have also been refined here to give everything a lifelike look.

The disc's Dolby Atmos soundtrack is excellent. It shows real depth by accurately capturing subtle effects like the clicking of Edward's scissors. Danny Elfman's unmistakable score, with big horns balanced with delicate bells, is delivered with plenty of gusto and detail.

Master and Commander: The Far Side of the World

Master & Commander 4K Blu-ray on LG G5 showing ship during daytime

(Image credit: 20th Century Studios / Future)

Master and Commander: The Far Side of the World is the tale of the HMS Surprise, a British ship during the Napoleonic Wars in 1805, as they pursue the French ship Acheron. It stars Russel Crowe as Surprise's Captain Aubrey and Paul Bettany as Maturin, the ship's surgeon.

Where Master and Commander's 4K disc shines is with its Dolby Atmos soundtrack. Naval battles deliver room-shaking power as cannons fire, with intricate details such as splintering wood coming through clear in the mix. In several scenes, as cannonballs flew through the ship, I found myself looking around the room, following its trajectory as it was mapped with incredible accuracy.

The 4K presentation looks amazing, too. Night scenes deliver deep black tones with some strong contrast, as lamps balance with said dark tones. The crew looks lifelike, and the vast ocean looks stunning in 4K. Colour, while sparing, has some nice pop, whether it's the red of blood or the gold details on ships.

The Fantastic Four: First Steps

Shot of The Thing, Mr Fantastic and Human Torch by a car from the The Fantastic Four: First Steps 4K Blu-ray on LG G5 screen

(Image credit: Disney / Future )

Set in a 1960's, futuristic world and based on the Marvel superhero family, The Fantastic Four: First Steps follows the Fantastic Four as they must protect Earth from Galactus and the Silver Surfer. Starring Pedro Pascal (Mr Fantastic), Vanessa Kirby (The Invisible Woman), Joseph Quinn (Human Torch), and Ebon Moss-Bachrach (The Thing).

The 4K disc of The Fantastic Four: First Steps has brilliant picture quality, accurately delivering the alt-1960s aesthetic. The bright blues and whites of the team's uniforms pop on screen, but the oranges and yellows of decor and civilian clothing look great too. A big-budget Marvel movie, textures are refined and 3D-like and look top-notch on 4K.

As you'd expect from a Marvel movie with a Dolby Atmos soundtrack, this disc sounds fantastic. There are plenty of room-rattling explosions that deliver punchy bass and impact. Anytime the Human Torch flies overhead, height channels are utilised perfectly and will sound great through an Atmos system.

Tombstone

Tombstone 4K Blu-ray with Wyatt Earp gang on Panasonic MZ1500 OLED TV

(Image credit: Disney / Future )

Tombstone follows Wyatt Earp (Kurt Russel), a retired lawman who moves to the town of Tombstone and ends up as its de facto sheriff after a gang of outlaws wreaks havoc. The movie also stars Val Kilmer, Sam Elliot, and Bill Paxton.

Tombstone looks stunning in 4K. A fantastic restoration means textures are clean and crisp, demonstrating almost 3D-like levels of depth and detail. Colours are bold and punchy throughout, and black tones are rich, whether it's the night sky or the Earp group's clothes.

The disc's DTS-HD 5.1 MA soundtrack is excellent too. Gunfights deliver precise sound mapping, as bullets fly around and ricochet off buildings. Galloping horses offer plenty of rumble that will let your subwoofer flex its muscles, and even subtle sound effects like spurs on boots as people walk have nice detail.

Microsoft just released its biggest Patch Tuesday ever, with a mammoth 622 fixes including three dangerous zero-days

  • Microsoft’s July 2026 Patch Tuesday fixed a record 622 vulnerabilities, including 58 critical, two exploited in the wild, and one publicly disclosed, plus 428 Chromium bugs
  • Actively abused flaws include CVE‑2026‑56155 (AD FS privilege escalation) and CVE‑2026‑56164 (SharePoint privilege escalation), alongside notable issues in BitLocker and Copilot
  • Surge in fixes is linked to Microsoft’s use of Anthropic’s Mythos AI, with patch volumes rising sharply since its adoption

Microsoft has released its July 2026 Patch Tuesday download, marking another record-breaking update, addressing hundreds of flaws across the ecosystem.

The release, which is currently rolling out to Microsoft users, fixes a staggering 622 vulnerabilities, including 58 critical-severity ones, two that were observed as being abused in the wild, and one which has already been publicly disclosed.

On top of that, Microsoft shipped fixes for another 428 Chromium bugs, as well.

A jump in numbers

There are simply too many vulnerabilities to mention all of them, however two that are being exploited in the wild are CVE-2026-56155 and CVE-2026-56164. The former is described as an “Insufficient granularity of access control in Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS)” bug, which allows an authorized attacker to elevate privileges locally. It carries a severity score of 7.8/10 (high).

The latter is a “Missing authentication for critical function in Microsoft Office SharePoint” bug that allows an unauthorized attacker to elevate privileges over a network. Microsoft assigned it a medium severity score (5.3/10), but the National Vulnerability Database gave it a 9.8/10 (critical).

Other notable mentions include CVE-2026-50661, a protection mechanism failure in Windows BitLocker that allows unauthorized attackers to bypass a security feature with a physical attack, and CVE-2026-48561, an improper neutralization of special elements used in a command in Microsoft Copilot, that allows an unauthorized attacker to execute code over a network.

If you think fixing 622 vulnerabilities in a month is a lot, you’re absolutely right. It’s well above what Microsoft is used to do, and this is most likely due to the company now using the fabled Mythos - Anthropic’s cybersecurity-oriented AI.

In June 2026, roughly a month and a half after the release of Mythos, Microsoft fixed 206 flaws, which raised eyebrows because it was significantly above the company’s usual amount of bugs fixed.

In May it fixed 120 flaws, in April 167, and in March - 79.

Are the Philips Hue Essential bulbs actually any good? Here's what you need to know about the smart light brand's budget range

Philips Hue is widely known as the best smart bulb brand, but if you're looking to get yourself kitted out with a full Hue setup from the main range, it'll cost you. You might have spotted the brand's Essential range — which looks very similar to the main lineup but comes in at a much more affordable price — and wondered where the compromise is. You can see an Essential bulb on the left of the image above, next to a main range bulb on the right.

This article is here to help you figure out whether the Philips Hue Essential range is right for you, or whether it's better to splurge on the original lineup. We've tested both, and you can get the full low-down on what we thought of the budget-friendly bulbs in our Philips Hue Essential series review. For a quick summary, though — plus links to buy — read on.

Philips Hue Essential bulbs: reasons to buy

Let's start with the good bits about the Philips Hue Essentials range. Here are the main benefits to know about:

The performance is excellent: In her side-by-side tests with the main range, our Homes Editor Cat Ellis found "both were equally responsive, and produced colors that were identical to my naked eye when [she] switched between scenes". The Essential bulbs are based on a different color-matching technology to regular Hue lights, but Cat "had a hard time telling the difference".

They're compatible with the full Hue ecosystem: The Essential bulbs will play nicely with any Hue gadgets you already have, making them a great way to extend your existing smart light setup.

They're much cheaper than the main range: While prices vary depending on exactly which bulb you're buying, generally the Essential models come in around half the price of the main range.

Philips Hue Essential bulbs: reasons to avoid

So what about the downsides? These are the main compromises you'll be making if you opt for an Essential bulb:

The white shades don't match the main range: Essential bulbs have a narrower white light range, which is an issue if you were hoping to add them into a room that already has bulbs from the main lineup.

They can't dim as low: Essential bulbs can only dim to 2%, whereas the main range can go right down to 0.2%. If you want seriously muted lighting, you'll need to shell out a bit more and stick to the main range.

They can't get as bright: Essential bulbs have a lower maximum brightness capacity — they can reach 803 lumens, whereas some of the standard White & Color Ambiance bulbs can hit 1,600 lumens. It's worth nothing that this spec varies by bulb; not all standard bulbs have a higher max brightness than their Essential counterpart.

Philips Hue Essential Starter kits

Most people getting started with a Philips Hue lighting setup will begin by purchasing a 'Starter kit', which bundles some bulbs, a Philips Hue Bridge, and occasionally a bonus Philips Hue accessory. A Bridge isn't essential, but it is a good idea if you want to maximize the potential of your bulbs. There are a few variations available, with different numbers and kinds of bulbs included; I've listed a selection here.

US starter kits

Philips Hue Essential Starter Kit: Bridge + 4 Essential E26 Smart Bulbs,white & Color Ambiance,2200k-6500k,dimmable,compatible With Alexa,google,samsung Smartthings,apple Home

Philips Hue
Essential starter kit (4 E26 bulbs), White and color ambiance

Philips Hue Essential White & Color Ambiance 2-Pack Starter Kit - 2x 60-Watt Equivalent (800lm) A19 General Purpose Light Buls (medium Base) + Hue Bridge

Philips Hue
Essential starter kit (2 bulbs), White and color ambiance

UK starter kits

Philips Hue Bridge + 2 Essential B22 Smart Bulbs Starter Kit, White and Colour Ambience, 2200k-6500k, Dimmable Led Bulbs, Works With Alexa, Google Assistant, Samsung Smartthings, Apple Home

Philips Hue
Essential starter kit: 2 B22 smart bulbs, White and color ambiance

Essential Starter Kit: 2 E27 Smart Bulbs (806 Lm)

Philips Hue
Essential Starter Kit: 2 E27 Smart Bulbs

Essential Starter Kit: 3 E27 Smart Bulbs (806 Lm)

Philips Hue
Essential Starter Kit: 3 E27 Smart Bulbs (806 Lm)

Essential Starter Kit: 3 Gu10 Smart Bulbs (345 Lm) + Smart Button

Philips Hue
Essential Starter Kit: 3 Gu10 Smart Bulbs (345 Lm) + Smart Button

Essential Starter Kit: 3 Gu10 Smart Bulbs (345 Lm)

Philips Hue
Essential Starter Kit: 3 Gu10 Smart Bulbs (345 Lm)

Starter Kit: 2 E27 Smart Bulbs (1100)

Philips Hue
Starter Kit: 2 E27 Smart Bulbs (1100)

Philips Hue Essential bulbs

If you already have a Bridge and are looking to extend your setup, or are planning on going without (basic bulb functions can be controlled via Bluetooth), you can buy individual or multipack bulbs. There's a massive range — I've just included a selection here.

Whichever bulb lineup you choose, you'll have to decide between Hue's three light types. White and color ambiance bulbs can emit any one of millions of RGB colors, including a wide range of different white tones. White bulbs emit a warm light at a set color temperature, and White ambiance bulbs can be set to any one of a massive range of cool to warm white lights.

US bulbs

Essential A19 - E26 Smart Bulb - 800 Lm - 8.8w - 4 Pack

Philips Hue
Essential A19 - E26 Smart Bulb - 800 Lm - 8.8w - 4 Pack

Essential Br30 - E26 Smart Bulb - 650 Lm - 7.2w

Philips Hue
Essential Br30 - E26 Smart Bulb - 650 Lm - 7.2w

Essential A19 - E26 Smart Bulb - 800 Lm - 8.8w

Philips Hue
Essential A19 - E26 Smart Bulb - 800 Lm - 8.8w

Bundle: Essential A19 - E26 (2 Pack)

Philips Hue
Bundle: Essential A19 - E26 (2 Pack)

Bundle: Essential Br30 - E26 (2 Pack)

Philips Hue
Bundle: Essential Br30 - E26 (2 Pack)

UK bulbs

Philips Hue Essential Led A60 Smart Bulb, White and Color Ambiance, E27 Base, 8w, 2200k-6500k, 806 Lumens, Dimmable B22 Led Bulb, Smart Lighting Works With Alexa, Google Assistant, Apple Home, 4 Pack

Philips Hue
Essential A60 LED Smart Bulb (4 pack), White and Color Ambiance

Philips Hue Essential Led A60 Smart Bulbs, White and Colour Ambiance, B22 Base, 8w, 2200k-6500k, 806 Lm, Dimmable Hue Led Bulbs, Smart Lighting Works With Alexa, Google Assistant, Apple Home, 2 Pack

Philips Hue
Essential smart bulb (2 pack), White and color ambiance

Philips Hue Essential Smart Led Gu10 Spotlight Bulb, White and Color Ambiance, 4.7w, 2200k-6500k, 345 Lumens, Dimmable, Works With Alexa, Google Assistant, and Apple Home, 4 Pack

Philips Hue
Essential Smart LED GU10 Spotlight Bulb, White and Color Ambiance

Hue Essential 10-Meter Led Strip Light, Rgbic, Vibrant Color and Ambiance, Flexible Indoor Lighting, Easy Installation, App and Voice Control, Works With Alexa, Google Assistant, and Apple Home

Philips Hue
Essential 10-Meter LED Strip Light, Color and Ambiance

Microsoft deletes man’s hacked OneDrive with 25 years of photos and games — as 'irreversible' action prompts him to bemoan ‘I relied on Microsoft to keep that safe’

  • Microsoft deleted a user’s OneDrive account after it was compromised
  • This resulted in the loss of 25 years’ worth of photos and games
  • The incident is a reminder to use multiple backup solutions

How much do you have stored in your Microsoft account? Consider all the photos and documents backed up to OneDrive, the games and apps linked to your username, and all the rest. Many of us have a lot stored there, but as one Microsoft user recently found out, it can all be taken away in an instant — with Microsoft itself doing the deleting.

Posting on X, Joshua Khane related how a recent hack of their account led to Microsoft taking the nuclear option and removing 25 years’ worth of data, including photos of their infant son and “thousands of Euros spent on games.”

Khane shared an email from Microsoft explaining that, since “unauthorized access occurred” on their account — meaning a likely compromise by hackers — “we have permanently suspended the account.” Microsoft confirmed that “this action is irreversible … Additionally, if you had files stored in OneDrive, those files are no longer accessible. Due to encryption and privacy safeguards, even our engineers cannot retrieve them.”

The move left Khane incensed, with the disbelieving user condemning Microsoft’s decision not to restore their account: “One of the biggest companies ever couldn’t do that so they just deleted that sh*t like it was nothing??”

“Even though the security could be tighter from my side (lessons are learned),” they added, “it bothers me the most that Microsoft says that they cannot recover my account and suspended it … Thousands of Euros are gone down the drain as I’ve lost all my games also! Couldn’t back those up and I relied on Microsoft to keep that safe, even if I got compromised!”

How to keep your data safe

Businessman using a computer to backup storage data

(Image credit: Deemerwha studio / Shutterstock)

After the saga was posted on Reddit, other users chimed in with similar stories of their own. “Happened to me also,” said one user. “I had payment proof and everything going back 20 years. They said sorry, best we can do is lock your account for good.”

Another had a piece of advice for Khane: “When this happened to me, I created the new account and sent an email to them (on the same thread) with the new account info. They basically cloned the old account into the new one and I got everything back.” Elsewhere, many users recommended Khane take legal action against Microsoft.

If you want to avoid a similar fate, it’s important that you don’t just back up your important documents to one source — be that cloud storage like OneDrive or an external storage drive. If something goes wrong, your only copy has vanished into the ether.

Instead, build redundancy into your backups. Use a cloud backup service like Backblaze and a local NAS or offline archive drive. If possible, ensure your backups are in different physical locations, including one off the premises.

As Redditor Linesey rightly suggested, “Get a NAS, get an off-site location like a safe deposit box for cold storage, and then use the cloud if you really want to, as another layer.” That way, you’ve got at least one fallback option if a firm like Microsoft decides to delete your data without warning.

It’s also worth setting up passkeys and multi-factor authentication on your accounts and using one of the best password managers to strengthen and store all your logins. That way, you make it harder for bad actors to gain access to your account — and less tempting for Microsoft to hit the big red button, with irreversible consequences.

New Windows 11 update is a big one — these are my top 4 features, including the ability to pause updates indefinitely

  • Windows 11's July update has arrived
  • It packs some smart features, including pausing updates at length and a new recovery option
  • This patch also cures a nasty bug that slowly eats more and more drive space, but there's an issue to be aware of for Dell laptop owners

Microsoft has released its monthly patch for Windows 11 and the July update is a biggie, packing a feature that I've been awaiting for quite some time.

That would be the ability to pause updates on Windows 11 Home – beyond just a short period of time, which has been the only choice to date – and there are some other impressive additions from Microsoft here.

I'm going to pick out my top four features introduced by the July update, as well as rounding up some of the other more notable changes here. I'll also highlight an important bug fix that has been deployed for a nasty flaw that eats your drive space – along with a warning for some of those with a Dell laptop (who may not get this update for a good reason, as you'll see).

As ever, these changes were seen in the last optional update (June preview), and most of these features are being rolled out gradually, so you may not see them right away after installing this update (indeed, you may have to wait a while based on how the update winds blow regarding your exact PC configuration).

1. Pausing updates

Checking windows update on laptop screen close up view

(Image credit: Shutterstock)

Sometimes you want to hold off installing an update because of a bug that you're nervous about potentially affecting your system, and up until now, Windows 11 users have only been able to avoid any given update for five weeks.

Okay, so that's a fairly long time, but what if the bug is one of those persistent and niggly affairs that Microsoft takes an age to fix? You may want to delay the update beyond five weeks, and now you can. The catch is that you'll need to continually renew the delay for every 35-day period, but nonetheless, you can now keep an update at bay for as long as you want. (Well – until you're forced to update to a new version of Windows 11, that is, when support runs out for your current version).

2. Point-in-time restore

A young woman is working on a laptop in a relaxed office space.

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Another neat addition is point-in-time restore, a new recovery option that you can employ when something bad happens to your PC and you can no longer reach the desktop. Point-in-time restore lets you roll back a non-functioning system to a previous working state. It reverts to the "full system state" meaning that all your apps, files, and settings are recovered as captured at that previous time.

Hopefully this is a feature that you'll never need, but if you do, you'll be very glad of it. Note that the system backups obviously take up drive space, with older backups automatically deleted after 72 hours by default. Also, if you have a system drive that's smaller than 200GB, you'll have to enable this feature yourself (as it won't be turned on automatically due to potential space issues – note that you can specify a maximum amount of storage space used).

3. Fewer annoyances with widgets

Windows 11 on a laptop

(Image credit: Windows/Unsplash)

The July update is making the widgets panel 'quieter' by which Microsoft means that it has cut out a lot of clutter. The main change is that by default the panel just displays your widgets and Microsoft has got rid of the promotional nonsense in terms of ads and the MSN feed. Notifications and taskbar badges are also minimized by default, and widgets no longer open when you hover over them.

There are some other streamlining moves here, and even if you don't use widgets, I think this is a noteworthy change as it shows the direction Microsoft is now heading in with Windows 11 – chilling out on the upselling as was previously promised (if not entirely banishing it).

4. Screen tint

A laptop with the Windows 11 desktop on screen, glowing, while on a work desk

(Image credit: Shutterstock/Ham patipak)

Windows 11 has been graced with a number of accessibility improvements in the July update, first of which is a new screen tint ability. This does what it says on the tin, allowing you to tint the screen with a choice of colors to help reduce eye strain, or to make text more easily readable. You can adjust the tint intensity, and this is a very useful addition that'll save people from downloading a third-party app to get these kinds of color overlays.

Other features in the July update

Windows 11 Linux app

(Image credit: TechRadar)

There's quite a lot going on here aside from the above major moves, and that includes Microsoft boosting the speed at which File Explorer launches (helping Windows 11 to feel more performant overall).

There's a whole lot of work on the Bluetooth front, too, as Microsoft notes: "This update improves reliability and performance when connecting to and using Bluetooth devices." That includes better driver stability, improved audio routing for calls via Phone Link, and more.

File Explorer has also been honed to be more reliable, and Microsoft has implemented a performance tweak to the Background Intelligent Transfer Service (BITS) that means PCs will shut down more promptly. If you've ever sat staring at your computer while it takes 20 seconds to shut down, wondering what on earth it's doing, that kind of behavior will hopefully be a rarer occurrence going forward.

A major bug fix – and Dell laptop problems

There's some good news for those of you who have been suffering at the hands of a mysterious bug that eats storage space (due to an out-of-control database file). This is fixed with the July update (the cure was in the June preview before it), so you can grab this to resolve the issue (hopefully).

There's some bad news on the bug front, though, namely that you won't get this update on some Dell devices with Intel CPUs, as Microsoft has blocked it due to the July patch causing all sorts of weird issues. I say it's bad news, but at least Microsoft caught the problem and has prevented the update from being piped to those machines.

Microsoft informs us: "This update might not be available for a limited number of Dell devices with Intel processors due to an incompatibility reported by Dell that can potentially cause unexpected shutdowns, poor performance, increased heat, and battery drain. We are working together with Dell to prevent the affected models from experiencing the issue and plan to release a resolution for affected devices in the coming days."

So, if you were wondering why you couldn't get this patch on your Dell laptop, now you know. You'll just have to sit tight for now until Microsoft and Dell get this ironed out.

'Ineffective and useless': the UK government is proposing a midnight social media curfew for 16 and 17-year-olds, but there's an easy loophole

  • The UK is proposing a social media curfew for ages 16 and 17
  • Access would be blocked from midnight to 6am by default
  • However, teens will be able to change these settings if they wish

Having already announced plans to ban under-16s from social media apps early next year, the UK government is now proposing a midnight social media curfew for young people aged 16 and 17 — though parents seem less impressed with this latest idea.

As reported by the BBC, the suggested curfew would run between midnight and 6am, and would be combined by certain "addictive" features being disabled in apps like Instagram and TikTok at any time of day. Those features would include infinite scroll, for example, and videos auto–playing when loaded.

The measures will be "crucial in helping young people get the sleep they need, focus on school and college, and spend more quality time with family and friends," according to Technology Secretary Liz Kendall. They're also intended to provide a gentler 'on ramp' to these apps for kids turning 16, having previously not had any access.

Changes are also going to be enforced for AI chatbots, which will be required to encourage regular breaks for under-18s, and to have safeguards in place to prevent "dangerous, misleading, or unverified mental health advice" from appearing. The moves are being made after a pilot scheme involving more than 300 teenagers and their families.

Teens can opt out

Keir Starmer to announce midnight social media curfew for teenagers from r/ukpolitics

There's not much detail in the government's announcement, so questions around mechanisms and timing have yet to be answered. It's possible the target date for this is the same as the under-16s social media ban – springtime (March, April, May) in the UK.

What's different to the social media ban is that the curfew timings and the removal of addictive features are going to be optional. While app developers will be told by the government to have these restrictions in place by default, teenagers will have the option to disable them if they wish.

Reactions on Reddit suggest the measures will end up being "ineffective and useless", with one poster comparing it to speed limit warnings for cars — very easy to ignore. Commenters also point out that this may require more age verification, and that existing parental control tools already exist to block social media access for kids at certain times.

"How is it any of the government's business what time anyone uses social media?" reads one post, while another calls into question allowing 16-year-olds to join the army but not letting them on social media past midnight.

Hold up, Mint Mobile is currently selling the Google Pixel 10 for just $150 — and you don't even need to trade in

The prepaid carrier Mint Mobile has been making headlines recently with its huge discounts on the latest Android flagships. Last week, I was shouting out the carrier's $500 discount on the Samsung Galaxy S26 series, but I've just spotted another great option.

It's a record-breaking $650 upfront discount on the latest Google Pixel 10, which is just $150 at the carrier today without the need for trading in. While you'll still need a plan, Mint Mobile is also offering a full year of unlimited data for just $180. That means a device and plan for just $329 upfront.

Getting such a decent phone for so cheap isn't to be ignored, and these types of deals have been incredibly popular at Mint Mobile over the past few months. Just a few weeks ago, the Galaxy S26 series sold out at the carrier, so I wouldn't be surprised if this Pixel 10 series deal did too.

This particular deal is listed as exclusive to new customers, though, so you may be excluded if you already have a line with Mint Mobile. As always, these deals are very much aimed at people looking to bundle up one of the latest phones with a super-cheap plan that really undercuts the traditional big carriers.

Record-breaking Google Pixel 10 deal at Mint Mobile

Google Pixel 10: was $799 now $149, plus one year of unlimited data for $180 at Mint Mobile
Mint Mobile's offered plenty of deals on the excellent Google Pixel 10 series recently, but none have come close to this week's record-beating discount. Right now, you can get a massive $650 off the device if you buy it upfront with a new plan. No trade-ins are needed at all here, and the carrier is also offering a full year of unlimited data for just $180 — that's just $15/mo on average.View Deal

While you can technically get the Pixel 10 alongside any plan at Mint Mobile, the carrier has every plan listed at $180, so it makes sense to go for the option that's usually the priciest. And, it's a good plan, too. You get unlimited talk, text, and 50GB of high-speed 5G data per month for one of the most competitive prices on the market.

Note, if you're just interested in the plan and not the phone, then Mint Mobile also has some great 'bring your own device' summer specials currently. I've listed those out, alongside today's deal on the Galaxy S26 series, just below.

Also available at Mint Mobile this week...

Samsung Galaxy S26 series: $500 off, plus up to $400 off with a trade-in at Mint Mobile
Mint Mobile's latest deal on the Galaxy S26 series is one of the best I've ever seen from the well-known prepaid carrier. Not only can you get a record-breaking $500 upfront discount on a brand new device, but you'll also get a full year of unlimited data for just $180 — that's half price. On top of that, you can also trade in for an additional discount of up to $400 off, which is enough to cover the entire cost of the standard Galaxy S26.

Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra: was $1,300 now $1,100
Samsung Galaxy S26 Plus: was $1,100 now $600View Deal

Mint Mobile unlimited data plan: was $360 now $180
If you've been curious about trying Mint Mobile, then now's a great time to jump on board. The carrier has just brought back its best-ever deal on its already good-value unlimited plan. Right now, you can get a full year of service for just $180 upfront, which equates to half price and just $15/mo on average.View Deal

"The difference between launching now and launching never": How vibe coding is turning small business ideas into functional apps in record time

A new customer booking system, a bespoke CRM, or an app that can be sold as a new revenue stream. Small businesses are rarely short of great ideas, but often lack the time, funding, or technical expertise to go from idea to functional app.

This is the gap that vibe coding aims to fill, helping small businesses launch apps by combining plain English prompts with AI.

I caught up with Yoav Orlev, Head of Product at Base44, to get some insight into how small businesses can get the most out of vibe coding platforms. We also discuss some of the common pitfalls and risks associated with vibe coding and how to overcome them.

Vibe Coding has a lot of buzz around it, but what does it actually mean for the small businesses that can benefit from it?

The same quality output without the same budget

Instead of needing to know how to build an application, small business owners can just describe what they want and it gets built. They’re essentially having a conversation with AI instead of wrestling with tools, templates, or code. There are significant advantages to vibe-coding, including:

Removing the “gatekeepers"

Previously, a small business owner who wanted a professional website had two options: pay a developer (expensive) or spend hours learning code (time-consuming). Vibe coding collapses both into a single conversation. A florist, a personal trainer, a local accountant, anyone can now describe their business and get a professional application without any technical knowledge.

Speed to market changes everything

A small business can go from idea to functional application in minutes, not weeks. For a new business owner, that's the difference between launching now and launching never.

Iteration becomes effortless

Want to change your text? Swap your color scheme? Add an agent? Instead of digging through menus or calling a developer, you just type what you want changed via natural conversion. Small businesses can now move and adapt as fast as their ideas do.

The playing field levels out

Enterprise businesses have had dev teams, agencies, and big wallets for years. Vibe coding gives small businesses access to the same quality output without the same budget. This is a significant shift, letting smaller businesses compete with larger ones.

Vibe coding means that for the first time, the barrier to having a custom application is no longer technical skill or budget. That's a meaningful unlock for millions of small business owners who previously felt locked out of the growing digital economy.

For years, small businesses have benefited from drag-and-drop tools. How has vibe coding changed this approach? What new benefits does it bring to the table?

Users are now not operating a tool but collaborating with one.

Drag-and-drop was a genuine breakthrough. It opened up web creation to anyone, regardless of technical skill or budget constraints. Users needed to know what they wanted, where to put it, and how to make it look right, but they had more access and guidance than ever before.

Vibe coding starts the create-and-build process with a conversation. Users describe their business and goals, and the platform builds around that. It's a fundamentally different kind of interaction than drag-and-drop. Users are now not operating a tool but collaborating with one.

Vibe coding isn't here to replace drag-and-drop, and that's an important distinction. Both have real advantages. Vibe coding wins on speed and ease of use. Drag-and-drop gives users precision and hands-on creative control. The real breakthrough for small businesses is having both working together seamlessly by describing what they need, letting AI get there fast, then fine-tuning the details manually without ever switching platforms or starting over.

That combination is what gives small businesses a truly holistic way to build and grow an online presence. Less time building and more time focusing on their business.

If an entrepreneur wanted to build a tool for their business today, where should they start? What does a good prompt look like?

A first prompt doesn't need to be perfect. Get something on the screen, react to it, and refine from there.

The best place to start is with the problem, not the solution.

Before opening any tool or writing a single prompt, an entrepreneur should get specific about what's actually slowing their business down. Is it taking bookings manually over the phone? Chasing invoices? Answering the same customer questions over and over? The clearest prompts come from the clearest problems.

When it comes to writing a good prompt, specificity is everything.

A weak prompt sounds like "build me a website for my business." A strong prompt sounds like "I run a mobile dog grooming service in Chicago with three employees. I need a way for customers to book appointments online, see my pricing by dog size, and get automatic confirmation texts."

The more context users give, such as industry, customer, specific workflow, and the outcome that’s trying to be achieved, the more useful the result. Think of it less like a search query and more like briefing a new hire on their first day. The AI works best when it understands not just what you want, but why you need it.

From there, iteration is your best friend. A first prompt doesn't need to be perfect. Get something on the screen, react to it, and refine from there. The most effective builders treat it as a back-and-forth conversation rather than a one-shot request.

What are some common examples of small businesses using vibe coding to build internal tools? Which do you believe are the most valuable and why?

The range of tools small businesses are building with vibe coding is remarkable. We're seeing everything from custom booking and scheduling systems, to lightweight CRM and lead tracking tools, client-facing portals, invoice generators, staff onboarding wikis, loyalty program trackers, and more.

The most valuable apps tend to be the ones replacing a manual process that was quietly costing the business time or customers. Custom booking systems are one standout. For service-based businesses, time is the product, and a system built around their exact workflow has a direct and immediate impact on revenue. Lightweight CRM tools are another reason because most small businesses aren't losing customers due to bad service; they're losing them because follow-up falls through the cracks. A tool built around how they actually sell, rather than how generic software thinks they should, makes all the difference.

The common thread is fit. What makes vibe coding genuinely powerful for small businesses is that they can build exactly what they need and tailored for them, rather than settling for something “close enough.” That's a shift that levels the playing field in a very real way.

Can entrepreneurs also use vibe coding to build customer-facing tools and new revenue streams? What are some good examples of this?

Absolutely! This where vibe coding starts to look less like a productivity tool and more like a genuine business accelerator. The same technology that helps a small business automate internal processes can also help them build entirely new products, services, and revenue streams that simply weren't accessible before without a development budget.

The examples are wide-ranging. A personal trainer can go beyond selling sessions and build a branded fitness app where clients track workouts and access custom programs, turning a one-to-one service into a scalable product. A marketing consultant can build a self-serve audit tool that generates leads while they sleep. A local chef can launch a meal planning subscription with a custom interface rather than relying on a third-party platform that takes a cut of every transaction. A retailer can build a personalized product recommendation quiz that increases average order value without touching their core website.

What all of these have in common is that they were previously only realistic for businesses with developer resources and big pockets. Vibe coding changes that entirely. The barrier to launching a new revenue stream is no longer technical and costly. It's just having the idea and the ambition to act on it.

Some business owners (myself included) have found ourselves stuck in a loop where AI fixes one issue, but breaks several others. What are some golden rules users can apply to get back on track when the ‘vibe’ goes wrong?

  1. If possible, try to break down your request into smaller pieces. Sometimes, when trying to add too many features at once, the agent makes a mistake.
  2. If something doesn't work at first, be very specific and clear. In many cases, it can also be helpful to state what the AI shouldn't do. For example, tell AI to change the layout, but make sure not to change any colors in the app.
  3. Almost all vibe coding platforms allow users to revert. So if you are failing to add something 3 or 4 times in a row, then revert to the last successful version and try in a slightly different way.
  4. Search the tool documentation. There are usually many examples and “how tos” that can carry you over a certain hurdle.

What are some of the pitfalls and risks that entrepreneurs should be aware of when vibe coding internal tools and potential products? 

There are 2 main pitfalls we see.

  1. Not giving your product to users. We talk to a lot of users who keep building more and more features, since it's so easy, yet they hold off releasing the product, fearing it's too early. Don't. AI is all about moving as fast as possible. If you have a working product that will help someone, put it in the hands of users and get feedback as quickly as possible. Worry less about the perfect product and more about usage.
  2. Security is huge. Most tools nowadays offer security scans, but as a builder, make sure you take the time to really understand how the scan works, what it covers, and what issues you might face. Most tools will cover you, but only if you know how to leverage them. Take the time to learn it or consult someone who can walk you through it.

Why AI recommendations are becoming ecommerce’s most valuable source of traffic

When a trusted friend recommends a product or service to you, it can alter the way you think about the potential purchase. You tend to lower your guard, with the knowledge that some of the filtering work has already been done on your behalf.

This is particularly true when that friend understands your tastes and priorities, and how much you’re looking to spend; the recommendation carries weight before you even visit the website or look at the product page. By the time you click, a large part of the decision has already been made.

Now there is evidence that AI recommendations can have a similar effect on consumers.

We recently analyzed web traffic and conversion data from more than 35,000 ecommerce brands using Shopify and it revealed something significant: referrals from AI tools such as ChatGPT are converting at an average rate of 3.6%, compared with 1.23% for traditional Google search traffic. AI referrals are also generating around 30% higher revenue per session.

For ecommerce businesses, these findings point to an important change in consumer behavior that presents both an opportunity and a challenge.

The buying journey is changing

For years, digital marketing strategies have been built around search engines. A user enters keywords, compares links, visits multiple sites and eventually makes a decision. Brands compete to win the click, then persuade the customer after they arrive.

AI is changing the sequence.

Consumers are no longer simply typing broad phrases like “best running shoes” or “cheap Bluetooth speaker”. Instead, they are asking the likes of ChatGPT highly detailed questions tailored to their exact needs.

Where previously the user might have received a list of product websites to explore, now they are being given a specific tailor-made recommendation.

In effect, AI platforms are compressing the consideration stage of the buying journey. Much of the evaluation happens before the consumer reaches the brand’s website. By the time they click through, they already have a degree of confidence in the recommendation they have been given – much like the case of the recommendation from a friend.

This creates a different type of visitor altogether.

Traditional search traffic can often be broad and exploratory. AI-referred visitors, however, increasingly resemble ‘pre-qualified’ leads. They arrive with clearer expectations and stronger buying intent, which helps explain the higher conversion rates.

Why visibility now means something different

For brands, the opportunity is clear: higher intent traffic generally means stronger revenue per visitor and more efficient acquisition.

The challenge, however, is that many ecommerce businesses are still measuring success using frameworks built for the ‘traditional’ approach.

A large proportion of marketing strategies remain heavily focused on traffic volumes, click-through rates and keyword rankings. Yet AI recommendation systems rely on different signals. Visibility inside AI-generated answers depends less on traditional advertising tactics and more on credibility, authority and contextual relevance across the wider web.

Brands are no longer only competing for search rankings. They are competing to become trusted sources within the information ecosystem AI tools rely upon.

That has major implications for how companies think about content and discoverability.

Reviews become more influential because AI systems frequently incorporate them into recommendations. Third-party editorial coverage matters more because it contributes to authority and trustworthiness. Community discussions on forums and social media also gain importance because they help establish credibility and context.

The businesses that perform well in AI-driven discovery are likely to be those with strong reputations spread consistently across multiple trusted sources, rather than those relying purely on aggressive performance marketing.

Rethinking marketing measurement

There is another important lesson in this data. Many businesses may currently have an incomplete understanding of which channels are genuinely driving growth.

One of the perennial challenges with digital advertising is ‘attribution distortion’. In simple terms, platforms optimize for conversions, often retargeting existing customers or users who were already close to purchasing. This can create inflated perceptions of acquisition performance.

At the same time, AI-referred traffic may still be under-measured inside many organizations because it remains a comparatively new source of inbound visitors.

The danger is that businesses continue over-investing in channels that appear successful according to legacy metrics while underestimating emerging forms of high-intent traffic.

This matters because AI-driven discovery is likely to become more important over time.

Consumer expectations are evolving rapidly. People increasingly want answers tailored to their exact circumstances rather than broad lists of generic options. AI interfaces are naturally suited to that type of interaction because they can process nuance and context in ways traditional search engines struggle to replicate.

What brands should do next

Brands therefore need to rethink not only where they advertise, but how they present their offer online altogether.

That starts with understanding how the business appears across the wider digital landscape. Are reviews consistent and trustworthy? Is the brand being referenced by credible publications and communities? Is product information clear, accurate and useful?

It also means creating content that answers real consumer questions in detailed and genuinely helpful ways, rather than simply targeting high-volume keywords.

None of this means traditional search is disappearing overnight. Search engines remain hugely important, and publishers continue to play a central role in shaping the information AI systems consume and reference.

What is changing is the path consumers take before making decisions.

The era of winning attention purely through visibility is gradually giving way to an era of winning trust before the click ever happens.

We've tested the best email marketing platforms on the market.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

Why transaction data may be the missing link to AI ROI

AI took enterprises by storm, with many opting for integration as fast as possible in fear of falling behind the more ambitious tech adopters. But speed alone isn’t always an advantage and as a result, 95% of enterprise pilot programs still failed to deliver measurable financial returns just last year.

Now that we’re a few years past the initial AI explosion, the pressure is on to prove true ROI from these projects.

Businesses have most frequently poured resources into AI tools aimed at boosting productivity and automating workflow in hopes to target the most universal, longest standing business goal: doing more with less. But what leaders should be doing is identifying where the technology can solve the biggest issues specific to today’s business climate. One of those issues is cash flow forecasting.

This year, 52% of American CFOs named cost management as their most worrisome internal concern. While a well-oiled cost management strategy remains critical for creating a strong financial cushion and remaining resilient, balancing fixed operations with constantly shifting real world variables is never easy.

As companies increasingly look for ways to remain nimble and improve decision-making, those that can leverage AI to forecast trends in cash flow demand, churn risk, and spending pattern shifts will find themselves on a quicker path to ROI. Doing so requires harnessing the right data, and these financial signals are hidden in the transaction layer.

While businesses have long mined transaction data for traditional analytics and reporting, it’s far under-utilized in AI strategies. There needs to be a shift from viewing these insights as archival records of past performance to real time indicators of what’s to come.

Making revenue forecasting more adaptive

There are several revenue indicators that lie within bottom funnel operations that AI has the ability of turning into actionable insights. From frequently adjusted terms within contract renewals to the average time it’s taking customers to finalize transactions, purchase signals like these can help AI systems make smarter predictions about demand or accounts receivable.

To provide a more granular view into the value of this data layer, let’s look at upgrade or renewal activity for example. Customer retention is a key element to maintaining predictable cash flow and is among the first to go during an economic shakeup.

Tracking accounts that consistently upgrade a product or service on time to see that they suddenly miss a milestone could immediately flag eventual churn risk. These deviations should also be compared across similar accounts to segment risk based on geography, product lines, or size and industry.

From there, leaders can act proactively with strategies like targeted discounts or incentive measures to encourage retention. Alternatively, accounts that are expanding faster than expected could provide predictions into other customers who might be ready for higher value offerings.

Identifying cues like those that often precede cancellations, along with delayed payments, reduced usage, or smaller order size for instance, can equip finance or leadership teams with rolling forecasts. Whereas on the other hand, monthly or quarterly forecasts typically only rely on historical averages and don’t provide the real time guidance needed for a quickly shifting marketplace.

This can manifest into a powerful decision-making engine. One that is dynamic enough to support flexible cost management strategies. Seeing where cash-flow is moving allows leaders to make more informed decisions.

For example, if it’s consistently being found that these customers are upgrading at slower rates then it may be a good indicator to preemptively reduce inventory or relax timelines for product development teams. In turn, leaders can avoid allocating too many resources to demand that may not end up materializing.

This also gives teams more flexibility to adjust spending and production before any cash flow pressure sets in.

An important element to keep in mind is that these purchasing behavior insights often sit across separate systems. While sales teams may have insights into average order values, only legal or finance may know how payment terms are changing across clients.

First mapping where all of these metrics currently live is critical to then unify them into one place for predictive models to cross-analyze everything against each other and make stronger recommendations.

Connecting to ROI directly

Many businesses have revolved their AI projects around generative AI for efficiency gains in producing content or developing software for instance. But not only are these task-level initiatives harder to prove a measurable impact from, in some cases they end up hurting productivity in the long run with added time spent reviewing and editing AI outputs.

When it comes to analyzing data for forecasting and predictions, AI has shown immense value and is tied to more tangible business outcomes. Now, forecasting real time insights tied directly to revenue can help leaders remain adaptable in an increasingly unpredictable economy, offering a fast track to ROI on these projects.

We've featured the best AI website builders.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

What is the release date for Rick and Morty season 9 episode 9 on Adult Swim, HBO Max, and Hulu?

You know what Rick and Morty season 9 has been missing so far? Something marginally normal. Thankfully, Morty and Summer are off to summer camp (the season, that is — they didn't name the camp after her) in this week's episode.

Obviously, I'm being hopelessly naive in thinking that this is going to resemble anything like a routine summer-camp adventure, especially seeing as Beth and Rick are being left home alone in the meantime; I mean, what could go wrong — at either venue?

It's exhausting even trying to guess at what's coming, so I might as well stop trying, and answer the question you're here to have answered: when does Rick and Morty season 9 episode 9 arrive on Adult Swim, Hulu, and HBO Max?

What time can I watch Rick and Morty season 9 episode 9 on Adult Swim, Hulu, and HBO Max?

In the US, Rick and Morty season 9 episode 9 will debut on Adult Swim on Sunday, July 19 at 8pm PT / 11pm ET.

Viewers elsewhere, as well as in the US, have two streaming options: Hulu and HBO Max. Episodes should appear on these platforms 24 hours after they've aired on Adult Swim, meaning you can expect episode 9 to land on Monday, July 20.

These are the timings you need to take note of:

  • US – 12am PT / 3am ET
  • Canada – 12am PT / 3am ET
  • UK – 8am BST
  • India – 12:30pm IST
  • Singapore – 3pm SGT
  • Australia – 6pm AEST
  • New Zealand – 8pm NZDT

When do new episodes of Rick and Morty season 9 come out?

Rick flies a spaceship

(Image credit: Adult Swim)

Rick and Morty season 9 is set to have 10 episodes. As long as there are no unexpected delays, we can expect it to follow the following release schedule:

  • Episode 1: out now
  • Episode 2: out now
  • Episode 3: out now
  • Episode 4: out now
  • Episode 5: out now
  • Episode 6: out now
  • Episode 7: out now
  • Episode 8: out now
  • Episode 9: July 19
  • Episode 10: July 26

New York becomes the first US state to ban hyperscaler data centers, says it will 'lead the way in creating the strongest standards in the nation for data center development'

  • New York State has temporarily banned new, large-scale data centers
  • One-year moratorium affects new 50MW+ campuses
  • NY wants to assess community, environmental and grid impacts

New York State has banned the construction of new hyperscaler data centers, marking the latest step as mounting local opposition against AI and cloud facilities builds, with communities citing concerns over rising electricity costs, water consumption and other environmental factors,

State Governor Kathy Hochul is responsible for introducing the first statewide moratorium on new campuses, which imposes a one-year pause while the state looks into the environment, energy supply and communities.

Projects that have already been permitted will still continue as expected, but new buildouts will face restrictions and delays until the moratorium is lifted.

Data centers banned in NY - for one year

The one-year ban buys the state time to evolve regulations to address some of the challenges presented by large hyperscaler data centers, including strained grid supplies, emissions and other environmental impacts, and stresses on local communities.

Under the new ban, campuses that require at least 50MW of electricity will be affected, which for an AI data center isn't all that much. Some of the largest measure power consumption in the hundreds of megawatts, or even gigawatts in the case of high-profile, flagship campuses like OpenAI's Stargate Project.

"[The moratorium] comes as the direct result of immense public pressure from people across the state demanding their elected leaders protect them from Big Tech's assault, which threatens the state's clean air and water and New Yorkers' financial security," New York State's Food & Water Watch Director Laura Shindell said.

"New York has always been at the forefront of innovation and change but we’ve also always guaranteed that New Yorkers benefit," Hochul noted.

Although New York represents the first statewide temporary ban, other regions have also been looking to pause buildouts as they assess the damages. Just last month, Seattle also voted to ban new projects for a year.

Google logo on a black background next to text reading 'Click to follow TechRadar'

The gap between AI potential and AI reality Is a leadership problem

For years, the central question around AI was whether it really works the way much of the market’s hype says it does.

That debate is settled, and we’ve seen what AI can do. The more important question now – and one most organizations still aren’t asking – is whether we’re working alongside it the right way.

That shift in framing matters. Budgets have been allocated, tools deployed, and pilot programs have graduated into full-scale production.

And yet, something is still missing.

IBM’s Institute for Business Value found that only 25% of AI initiatives have delivered their expected ROI, and just 16% have successfully scaled across the business despite years of investment and genuine enthusiasm for what the technology can do.

The problem isn’t AI itself; the bottleneck stems from what organizations have or have not built around it.

That’s a leadership problem, and fixing it will require more than buying better tools or scheduling more trainings.

Stop Investing in the Wrong Places

The instinct for most organizations has been to buy the latest platforms, stand up a few pilot programs, and bring in a vendor to train their workers. That approach addresses the surface-level challenge, but misses the greater underlying issue. The truth is the greatest barrier to AI maturity is the lack of investment in the human infrastructure needed to support it.

The companies seeing the strongest AI outcomes are rarely those with the most sophisticated or expensive models. They’re the ones that have fundamentally rethought how their people work. Among organizations that Boston Consulting Group designated as AI leaders, roughly 70% of resources went towards people and process changes, 20% to IT infrastructure, and only 10% to the AI models themselves. Most organizations have that ratio backwards.

When leaders become hyper-focused on deploying the right tools and launching the right uses cases, they neglect the organizational muscles that are essential to using AI responsibly and consistently. All the tools in the world won’t close that gap without the right training, guardrails, and policies to back them up. And building that support structure must be a leadership priority, not an afterthought.

The Productivity Gains Are Real, But Fragile

None of this is to say AI isn’t creating real value. It absolutely is – at least, for the companies using it well. But those gains are more fragile that many leaders realize. They evaporate when companies lack support for their employees across their interactions with the technology, or when they fail to clearly communicate where human judgement and critical thinking are still essential.

The data here is hard to ignore. Among employees who use AI on the job, less than 8% report receiving extensive training with their tools. And that number has barely budged despite a sharp increase in daily usage. Moreover, 60% say it often takes them longer to figure out how to accomplish a task with an AI tool than it does to simply do it themselves.

Companies are deploying AI faster than they are enabling people to use it, and in doing so, may be creating exactly the friction and confusion they were trying to eliminate.

What Leaders Owe Their People

This is where leadership has to show up differently. The gap between AI potential and AI reality isn’t going to close through procurement decisions or new rollout announcements. It closes with deliberate, ongoing investment in people. That means three things:

Focus trainings on people, not just tools: AI is evolving faster than training curriculums can keep up. Invest in training role-specific judgements, helping people understand where AI makes them faster and where it introduces challenges or risks.

Move beyond adoption rate metrics: If 80% of your organization is using AI and productivity is still flat or declining, adoption is the wrong metric. Measure time-to-completion on real work tasks and be honest about what you find. Some use cases that are slowing people down simply shouldn’t be using AI.

Stop treating AI policy as a compliance checkbox: Companies getting this right have built AI governance into how they plan and execute work daily, not appended into and acceptable use document. That means leaders who model where they use AI and where they don’t, and who are willing to explain why.

Making AI Potential a Reality

The technology is ready. But leaders need to be able to do more than allocate budget and monitor usage.

They need to decide when AI should and should not be used, what to rebuild rather than automate, and how to support their teams throughout all of it.

Those are the questions most organizations are still failing to ask, and until they do, the ROI gap isn’t going anywhere.

We've ranked the best HR software.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

Tomb Raider: Legacy of Atlantis seems like the glow-up the gaming icon needed — but I’ve not seen enough yet

Reflecting on my time with Tomb Raider: Legacy of Atlantis at Summer Game Fest 2026, I really can’t wait to fight more dinosaurs and solve more puzzles as Lara Croft once more — but I’m yearning to see more to get a better idea of the reimagining at work.

Playing one area complete with lush rainforest setting, puzzles, waterfalls, and dinosaurs, I, first and foremost, was instantly having a great time, and the experience scratched both my Tomb Raider and my Uncharted itch.

However, it was quite a self-contained preview, and my overwhelming emotion after finishing it — after basking in its beauty, at least — is that I really need to see more to get a better handle on the reimagining and the specifics of how that differs from a remake. I got a glimpse into Lara’s Peruvian adventure, but not much more.

Welcome to the jungle

A screenshot of Lara Croft engaging with a water and gear puzzle in Tomb Raider: Legacy of Atlantis

(Image credit: Crystal Dynamics)

What I can categorically say, however, is that this is a reimagination for the modern day, well and truly. The visuals are stunningly beautiful, and the rendition of the jungle that this iteration of Lara Croft finds herself in is exquisite.

The lush and verdant vegetation, beautifully detailed ruins, and fabulous water effects all combine to make for a really beautiful setting, and this may be the best-looking Lara Croft game ever once it comes out — which is saying something after the Survivor trilogy. Full of secret tunnels and routes, as well as overgrown passages to cut down and spectacular jumps to make across ruins and walkways, the game’s environments are set to be spectacular playgrounds.

The core of the segment I previewed involved Lara solving an ancient water and gear puzzle to progress past a giant gate, and presumably open a route to find treasure. The challenge itself was well done and featured a good mix of what I would call the b*****d-hard puzzles of older games, with some parts that were more intuitive. It felt well-balanced between giving you hints and giving you nothing.

Such was the attraction of the area and to explore all it had to offer, the inner looter in me took great glee in searching every nook and cranny for shiny ornaments, trinkets, and secrets, but I was left wondering whether these are just things to be found and stuffed away in a menu, or whether these, hopefully, are secrets that lead to something greater or play into side quests, or similar. One can only hope.

It’s got the moves

Lara Croft approaching a huge statue in some ruins in Tomb Raider: Legacy of Atlantis

(Image credit: Crystal Dynamics)

Lara herself is a joy to play again, and this version did not disappoint. Wonderfully voiced and acted by Alix Wilton Regan, I really felt like this version of the icon felt more ‘human’ than ever before.

Away from some gravity-defying jumps, this mainly came from a weightier, more realistic move set that felt more grounded. Even the flair moves and acrobatics felt believably human through my controller. She also feels more vulnerable, less of a video game behemoth with overpowered guns, and much more breakable, which adds a bit of peril too.

The modernization of Lara’s tools feels well done; gadgets are intuitive to use and helpful without spoon-feeding you too much, while they are also well implemented in terms of how they look on screen, with a scan’s net wrapping around ruins, for example.

Lara also has a new focus ability to add to her modern skillset that works a lot like bullet time from Max Payne and is satisfying to use — and to build up, by deploying well-timed dodges and acrobatic moves.

A screenshot from Tomb Raider: Legacy of Atlantis showing Lara Croft taking on dinosaurs

(Image credit: Crystal Dynamics)

This all came to the fore toward the end of my preview when I encountered some iconic enemies: dinosaurs! Taking on three velociraptors with only Lara’s trusty handguns shone a light on how much skill you need to dodge and acrobatically move out of the way of attacks, but also how valuable it is to use the focus ability to gain an edge.

Finishing the preview with the famous Tyrannosaurus Rex chase scene was a thrill too, and in this new beautiful guise, the game managed to brilliantly capture the adrenaline-fueled, panic-ridden affair spectacularly. If this is a microcosm of the spectacle and adventure that’ll fill the entire game, then it’ll be a special ride; and as a result, it really does feel like the time is right to jump back into Lara's boots.

Having said all that, I really would like to see more to get a proper, meatier look at what this reimagining is going to look like on a grander scale. The mix of modern takes on gameplay, action, and combat mixed with some old-school approaches that hark back to the origins of one of gaming’s finest icons has got me incredibly keen and excited to see how more of it comes together.

Until we hear more, though, I’ll just have to wait until the game releases on February 12, 2026, for PlayStation 5, Xbox Series X and Series S, and PC.

First VPN administrators sanctioned by US Treasury over ransomware attacks

  • The US Treasury has sanctioned First VPN's administrator for aiding ransomware attacks on American infrastructure
  • Another suspect was targeted for selling "cryptors" that cloak malware from security systems
  • The move follows a May 2026 takedown by European law enforcement and the FBI that seized the VPN's infrastructure

The United States government has officially issued sanctions against the operators of a notorious free virtual private network, escalating a global crackdown on digital infrastructure used to facilitate ransomware attacks.

On Monday (July 13), the US Department of the Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) designated First VPN Service (also known as 1VPNS) and its Ukrainian administrator, Dmytro Rashevskyi, for abetting cybercriminals. The service, which has operated since 2014, was heavily favored by ransomware gangs targeting American hospitals, municipalities, and businesses.

While the best VPN services are designed to protect everyday consumer privacy, rogue networks like First VPN provided malicious actors with the tools to "hide the origins of their attacks, deploy malware, and manage exfiltrated data," according to a Treasury Department press release.

As part of the same action, the Treasury also sanctioned Yegeniy Vladimirovich Silayev, a Belarusian national accused of selling "cryptors" to ransomware operators.

While Silayev is not directly affiliated with First VPN, his inclusion in the sanctions package highlights a broader strategy of targeting the entire cybercriminal supply chain. Cryptors are tools specifically built to disguise ransomware as harmless files, preventing security systems from detecting or deactivating the malware.

A haven for cybercriminals

Code Skull

(Image credit: Shutterstock)

The US Treasury's latest move is an update to an ongoing international operation against First VPN.

In a massive May 2026 takedown, a coordinated effort led by European law enforcement agencies and the FBI successfully seized the service's website and server infrastructure.

Prior to the takedown, Rashevskyi aggressively marketed First VPN on dark web forums. To lure cybercriminals, he promised total anonymity and boasted that the network "does not keep logs of users' identities or activities, and that it refuses to cooperate with law enforcement investigations into illegal activity originating from the servers it rents to customers".

According to the US Treasury, Rashevskyi went to great lengths to keep the operation running. He utilized false identities, such as "Maksim Sorin" and "Roman Chabanenko," to "buy infrastructure from companies that might otherwise refuse to do business with him because of complaints of abuse from internet service providers about illegal activity originating from 1VPNS servers".

Disrupting the cybercriminal ecosystem

This latest wave of sanctions was coordinated alongside the United Kingdom's Foreign, Commonwealth & Development Office (FCDO) and carries severe consequences for the designated individuals.

Under the new sanctions, all property and interests belonging to Rashevskyi and Silayev within the US are blocked, and US citizens are strictly prohibited from engaging in any transactions with them. Beyond the immediate financial freeze, OFAC sanctions serve as a massive reputational blow designed to choke off future revenue streams.

By focusing on the service providers and tool suppliers who facilitate these attacks, rather than just the ransomware operators themselves, authorities are aiming to maximize their impact and disrupt multiple gangs at once.

"Under President Trump's leadership, Treasury is using every available tool to disrupt the cybercriminal ecosystem and protect the American people," said Gene Lange, who is performing the duties of the Under Secretary for Terrorism and Financial Intelligence. "We will continue targeting the actors who enable ransomware attacks against Americans and our critical infrastructure".

The Mandalorian and Grogu's digital release date has been revealed — but I won't be able to see the new Star Wars movie on Disney+ just yet

  • The Mandalorian and Grogu's digital release date has been announced
  • It'll be available to rent or buy in late July
  • The new Star Wars movie won't come to Disney+ anytime soon

The Mandalorian and Grogu is heading to a TV screen near you very soon — but not via Disney+.

Yesterday (July 15), Lucasfilm and parent company Disney announced the latest Star Wars movie will be available to watch at home from Tuesday, July 21 onwards. If you didn't catch it in theaters or have been waiting to re-watch it from the comfort of your couch, then you'll be able to do so via numerous premium video on demand (PVOD) platforms in less than a week.

Be the first to watch at home.Buy Star Wars: The Mandalorian and Grogu on digital July 21 and own it on 4K Ultra HD August 25. pic.twitter.com/QT6oR0HOS9July 14, 2026

As for the services it'll land on, the usual suspects, such as Amazon Prime Video, Apple TV, and Fandango, should be your first ports of call. Right now, there's no indication that The Mandalorian and Grogu will be available to rent and/or buy, but I'd be shocked if viewers were only given the option to temporarily or permanently add one of 2026's many new movies to their digital film collection.

Want to know if the first Star Wars flick in over six years is worth seeing? Read my review of The Mandalorian and Grogu for more details.

Why han't The Mandalorian and Grogu arrived on Disney+ yet?

Baby Yoda and the Ancellans looking up at something in The Mandalorian and Grogu

You won't be able to stream The Mandalorian and Grogu on Disney+ for a while (Image credit: Lucasfilm)

If you're wondering why The Mandalorian and Grogu isn't coming to Disney+, aka one of the world's best streaming services, yet, you're not alone. After all, it's been over two months since the Pedro Pascal-fronted sci-fi adventure not only landed in theaters, but subsequently failed to meet expectations from critical and commercial standpoints.

Wouldn't it make sense to just drop the movie on Disney's primary streamer, then? Simply put: no.

For one, releasing it on digital platforms first is a sure-fire way for Lucasfilm and Disney to continue making money from The Mandalorian's big-screen sequel.

Sure, adding it to Disney+'s movie library might persuade some to sign up for the streamer to watch it. However, Disney is far more likely to bring in extra cash through rentals or permanent purchases than new Disney+ subscriptions, especially if the cost of renting or buying The Mandalorian and Grogu is greater than the most expensive tier on Disney+ in your world region. For instance, US fans have to pay $18.99 every 30 days for an ad-free experience, so if Disney sets The Mandalorian and Grogu's digital price at $20, it's obviously going to earn more from the latter.

Regardless, the Jon Favreau-directed film will eventually come to Disney+, so you'll just have to be patient if you're waiting for it to its official streaming debut. While you wait, see if you agree with my Disney+ release date prediction for The Mandalorian and Grogu.

'SMBs need to move from disconnected pilots to true alignment': Study finds European firms are getting more out of AI than other markets

  • SAS finds EU SMBs are seeing better results from real-world AI deployments
  • Compliance is still a major headache for one in four leaders
  • Preparing for the EU AI Act could have helped

A new AI readiness report from SAS has claimed European small businesses are among the most ready to achieve the most ROI from artificial intelligence compared with other global regions.

While North American SMBs perform better in planning, building and enabling, they fall short on actual deployment, indicating that European SMBs have progressed beyond pilots to actual implementation.

However, the number of businesses globally that are still in the earlier stages of AI readiness is much greater, with 37% considered 'experimental' and 33% considered 'opportunistic'. Nine in 10 of the stage-one (experimental) companies haven't even got a formal AI strategy in place, the report reveals.

AI deployment is higher in Europe, but overall deployment is still low

Compared with the number of businesses in the early stages of AI readiness, only 9% have fully embedded AI into strategy, operations and decision-making.

For many, it's the fundamental building blocks that are still holding them back. Nearly half say data is still scattered across systems (45%) and that AI tools operate independently from one another (46%). Compliance, security and risk management is still the biggest barrier for 24% of the survey's respondents.

"Organisations treating governance as a foundation rather than an obstacle are often the ones best positioned to execute," SAS Global Channels SVP John Carey wrote.

The report also implies that preparing for regulation like the EU AI Act could have positioned companies better to maximize their AI ROI, while other regions are seemingly lacking in this area.

IDC Research VP Daniel-Zoe Jimenez urged businesses to focus on aligning data, people and resources to avoid disconnected pilots. "Experimenting with the technology is one thing. Deploying it strategically and sustainably is quite another."

Google logo on a black background next to text reading 'Click to follow TechRadar'

White House launches 'Gold Eagle' cybersecurity clearinghouse to share and patch AI-discovered software flaws

  • White House, Treasury, DHS and DoW come together to launch Gold Eagle scheme
  • The initiative will prevent duplicated work and prioritize vulnerability remediation
  • Gold Eagle will also help to identify which systems could be at risk

The US Government has launched Gold Eagle, a new clearinghouse which looks to centralize vulnerability discovery and remediation against a backdrop of evolving AI-powered security threats.

Gold Eagle will serve as a central hub between federal agencies, AI developers, open-source software developers and critical infrastructure companies, in a bid to increase the speed of vulnerability discovery and prevent major incidents from occurring in the first place.

The scheme came about under President Trump's June 2 2026 executive order 'Promoting Advanced Artificial Intelligence Innovation and Security' and represents collaboration between the Treasury, the DHS' Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA) and the Department of War.

US Gold Eagle scheme addresses growing vulnerability exploitations

Under the scheme, vulnerabilities scanning will happen centrally to ensure multiple organizations aren't independently repeating the same work. Gold Eagle will also identify which software, networks and critical infrastructure could be at risk, before coordinating fixes. The White House described the scheme as a "force multiplier."

Although AI is largely to blame for the increase in attacks, Gold Eagle is set to fight fire with fire by employing AI to identify bugs too, using models like Anthropic's Mythos.

"Through this strategic partnership, we will expand existing security measures to safeguard software and networks in the 21st century and continue to promote advancements in artificial intelligence," DHS Secretary Markwayne Mullin wrote.

The concept of a dedicated clearinghouse centralizes vulnerability management to ensure the right bugs are being prioritized and to cut through the noise of lower-quality reports. Its assistance will most likely be felt by the open-source community, which has limited resources and financial backing to identify and fix issues as effectively as enterprise software vendors.

"Under the leadership of President Trump, we are bringing a wartime footing to the cyber domain to relentlessly patch vulnerabilities," Secretary of War Pete Hegseth added.

Google logo on a black background next to text reading 'Click to follow TechRadar'

The network perimeter is dead. Now what?

The National Cyber Security Centre (NCSC)’s recent advisory detailing how the Russian cyber actor APT28’s exploited vulnerable routers to enable DNS hijacking highlights a dangerous blind spot in enterprise security today.

Traditional perimeter-based security models are increasingly failing at the edge, and this should be uncomfortable reading for any security leader still anchoring their strategy to perimeter defense.

This is the same story we saw play out in 2024, when Chinese state sponsored bad actors linked to Volt Typhoon exploited an unpatched, end-of-life FortiGate 300D firewall to compromise a domain admin account, escalate privileges, create a new user, and establish persistence deep enough to survive a device restart.

One unpatched edge device. One breach vector. Total access. The perimeter didn’t just fail; it handed attackers the keys. According to the FBI, this breach remained undetected for over 300 days, and the same exploit was used to gain access to over 100 separate utility companies across the US.

These two incidents aren’t outliers. They’re a pattern. And the pattern is telling us that the old model is finished. Add to this the recent news about the power and sophistication of the latest generation of agentic AI tools such as Anthropic’s Claude Mythos, and it really is time to act quickly.

The problem with perimeter thinking

Legacy security was built on a simple assumption: draw a line between trusted internal systems and untrusted external ones, defend the line, and you’re protected. It made sense when company data lived in on-premises data centers and employees showed up to the office. The boundary was real and defensible.

That world is gone. Edge nodes are now everywhere; in factories, retail stores, utility substations, and customer premises, and the clean network borders of the past have either blurred or disappeared entirely. Edge devices themselves rarely have dedicated security capabilities. IoT and OT systems in particular frequently lack the robust features needed to detect and resist advanced threats.

Worse, software-based management tends to fail precisely when it matters most. When the software layer is compromised or unresponsive, organizations lose visibility and control at the exact moment they can least afford to.

Then there’s credential theft. According to Verizon’s 2025 Data Breach Investigations Report, the human element is a factor in 60% of breaches and attackers have become highly effective at exploiting it. They don’t need to break in, they walk in, using legitimate credentials, through the front door.

Once inside, now often augmented by AI capabilities, they move laterally from a single-entry point across operational systems, compromising entire environments in minutes. A security architecture built around password authentication offers almost nothing against this type of attack.

What resilience actually looks like

The security conversation has shifted. For years the focus was on keeping attackers out. That is still necessary, but it’s no longer sufficient. What organizations are increasingly recognizing is that resilience depends just as much on what happens after a compromise; specifically, whether security teams retain visibility and control when it counts.

Lost visibility during an incident, even a contained breach, can quickly spiral and escalate. This is driving a serious rethink of how distributed infrastructure is managed, particularly as edge environments extend further across factories, retail locations, utilities and a myriad of remote sites.

Out-of-band management (OOBM) is one approach gaining real traction here. Rather than relying on the production network for management traffic, OOBM operates on an entirely separate, highly secure parallel path. That means that even when the main network is compromised or down, edge devices remain manageable, visible and controllable.

Crashed devices can be remotely rebooted, or even re-configured. Powered-off devices can still be reached. And critically, administrative access is separated from the primary production network targeted by attackers, thereby reducing exposure to the credential-based attacks that are now the most dominant breach vector.

The operational benefits are real too: fewer costly emergency site visits, faster data recovery times, and preserved control during high-pressure incidents when software management tools have gone dark.

The reckoning

What’s becoming clear is that perimeter security, on its own, is no longer a viable strategy. The edge has expanded too far, credentials are too easily stolen, and attackers are too fast once they’re in.

The organizations that will weather the next wave of incidents aren’t necessarily those with the most sophisticated perimeter defenses. They’re the ones that have accepted the compromise will happen and built the visibility, control and recovery capability to deal with it when it does.

Everyone else is building blind spots. And attackers, increasingly, know exactly where to look.

We've reviewed and ranked the best password managers.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

The Disney settlement is a story about two layers of infrastructure that no longer line up

In February 2026, the California Attorney General announced a $2.75 million settlement with Disney DTC and ABC Enterprises, the largest in the history of the California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA).

Most of the noise has focused on the legal and interpretive dimensions: how the settlement reads against the statute, what it signals about enforcement posture, and what it adds to an enforcement record that has been building for more than three years.

Since the first major CCPA action against Sephora, in 2022, for failing to honor opt-out requests, settlements with DoorDash, Tilting Point, Healthline, Sling TV and Jam City have progressively expanded the technical specificity of what compliance has to look like in practice.

For privacy leaders trying to decide what to do on Monday morning, the most useful lessons from the Disney settlement are technical. In many enterprises, there is a gap between two initiatives that operate in parallel: a privacy tech layer focused on cookies, cookie banners, and webforms, and a data layer that runs on identity graphs, pseudonymous profiles and cross-system data flows.

The four technical claims leveled by the California Attorney General: gaps in how opt-outs reach logged-out users, disconnected opt-out tooling, missing cross-brand propagation, and absent opt-out functionality on apps and connected TV, are four symptoms of this misalignment

These challenges and claims are not unique to Disney, nor do they reflect negligence. They are consequences of timing. The privacy layer in most enterprises is built to satisfy a regulatory model that took shape between 2018 and 2022, when "consent management" largely meant deciding which cookies fired on a webpage.

The data layer it was bolted onto had been evolving for a decade by then, towards exactly the kind of cross-device, partner-dependent identity resolution that makes modern advertising and personalization possible. The two were never properly integrated in most enterprise environments because, for several years no one seemed to mind.

What the recent enforcement record establishes is that they do now.

One principle, four symptoms

The settlement's central principle is unusually direct: "If a business can associate a consumer's devices with the consumer for advertising purposes, it can and must associate those devices with the consumer for purposes of honoring the consumer's opt-out rights."

In other words, the scope of your opt-out obligation is defined by the scope of your data monetization, not by the scope of your consent management platform. If your advertising stack resolves an anonymous device signal to a known profile to target a consumer, you have, for the purposes of the law, identified that consumer.

The obligation follows the use of identity capabilities, not who built them. If identity is being used to target a consumer with ads, the same identity must be used to exclude them once they opt out.

That single principle unifies the four technical points of the settlement.

The first: identity parity concerns whether opt-outs cover consumers who aren't currently logged in. Many enterprise programs apply opt-outs only to authenticated users, on the reasoning that the business doesn't know who a logged-out user is. The settlement reframes that. If your advertising infrastructure uses pseudonymous profiles—the device-level identifiers that ad-tech systems use to recognize the same person across visits without a login - to target that user, then for the purposes of the law, you have identified them. The opt-out has to reach the same identity.

The second: architectural fragmentation concerns how opt-out requests travel through the systems meant to enforce them. Most enterprise privacy programs run two separate products: a consent management platform (CMP) that governs which trackers and tags fire on the website, and a data subject rights (DSR) tool that handles webform submissions like Do Not Sell or Share requests. When those products aren't integrated, a consumer who submits a webform may stop appearing in certain backend records, but the CMP keeps firing the same tags on every page they visit, and data sharing continues. The webform captured the request. The collection infrastructure never received it.

The third: cross-brand propagation concerns whether an opt-out submitted on one property reaches the others that share its data infrastructure. If a media company runs three streaming services on a single advertising stack, and a customer opts out on one, the law treats that as an opt-out across all three because the data is monetized across all three. The technical capability to propagate the signal usually exists; the compliance logic that ties opt-outs to it rarely does. The same point extends downstream: if ad-tech partners already hold a consumer's data, blocking tags on your own site doesn't reach what they have. They need to be actively notified, through a workflow that runs every time an opt-out is processed.

The fourth: non-browser surfaces concerns the consumer-facing channels that aren't a website. Cookie-based consent tools were built for browsers. They do not, by default, extend to mobile apps, connected TV environments, or any other surface where data is collected outside the browser. In Disney's case, consumers on a connected TV app could only opt out by going to a webform on a different device - a webform that had no effect on the code transmitting data from the TV app to its ad-tech partners. The mechanism existed; the obligation it was meant to satisfy went unmet.

The difficulty is structural

The four technical gaps above share a common root, and fixing them points to something more fundamental than patching individual systems. None of this is straightforward to operationalize.

Modern data infrastructure is genuinely complex and rebuilding how the privacy and data layers of an enterprise stack actually communicate is not the kind of project that gets completed in a quarter. But the structural difficulty points to something deeper than implementation effort: a flaw in how most organizations have framed the problem from the start.

Privacy as a data infrastructure question, not a regulatory one

Privacy programs built around regulations are, by design, reactive. A new law passes, a settlement lands, an enforcement sweep reveals an unexpected gap, and the program scrambles to respond. That cycle is the predictable outcome of treating privacy as a compliance checklist rather than a capability embedded in how data actually moves through the organization. Regulations will keep coming, and they will keep changing. No program designed around any single regulatory framework will stay current for long.

The more durable approach starts in the data infrastructure itself. When privacy controls are built into the data layer, tied to identity resolution and data flows rather than bolted onto individual regulatory requirements, they adapt. A new regulation adds a specific obligation, but the underlying framework for honoring consumer choices across identifiers and systems is already in place to absorb it. The work becomes configuration, not reconstruction.

The path forward is not another tool layered on top of existing infrastructure to satisfy the next regulation. It starts by embedding privacy controls into the data layer itself, tied to how data actually flows through the organization. That foundation does not need to be rebuilt every time the regulatory landscape shifts. It absorbs change. For privacy leaders looking to get off the reactive cycle for good, that is where the work begins.

The best business VPN helps you connect safely and securely online to your business.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

'Could blow Sony's Pro IEMs out the water': Sivga's new wired earbuds look beautiful and are packed full of drivers to turn buyers' heads

  • Affordable audiophile brand Sivga just unveiled new in-ear monitors
  • Lyrebird use four drivers for versatile sound
  • Sony's recently-released Pro rivals now have tough competition

Sivga, a Chinese head-fi brand which has wowed us in the past with wood-design headphones, including the Sivga Robin and Sivga Oriole, has a new pair of wired earbuds it wants you to hear.

The Sivga Lyrebird are its new in-ear monitors (IEMs), and they've just been released for $149 / £149 (about AU$300). This isn't the cheapest price we've ever seen on this kind wired offering (Sivga itself has also released cheaper, more EarPods-style earbuds called the M260), but since audiophile-adjacent IEMs can sometimes costs thousands, it's still fairly affordable.

Not sure what IEMs are? They're wired earbuds, but aimed at professionals or audiophiles focused on detailed and natural sound. They often house an intricate array of drivers within their headshells — so they're often more expensive than your average wired buds as a result.

With the continued resurgence of wired earbuds, IEMs are seeing a boost in profile. Just last week, Sony unveiled its own IER-M500 Pro option, for a little less than the Lyrebird. When you look at the specs, though, Sivga's new option could blow Sony's Pro IEMs out of the water, on paper at least, with larger and more plentiful drivers.

And this lyrebird you cannot change

The buds of the Sivga Lyrebird.

(Image credit: Sivga)

Sivga has packed its Lyrebirds with four drivers (the Sonys have a single 5mm one). This is to offer a wide soundstage, while also allowing each driver to focus on a certain part of the frequency spectrum.

For the low-end there's a 10mm polymer composite dynamic driver, and it's joined by a balanced armature driver for vocals, micro planar for treble and 9.2mm piezoelectric ceramic driver for the higher frequencies.

The earbuds connect using a 120cm cable, which has silver- and gold-plated copper connectors and ends in a 4.4mm jack.

Sivga has continued its wooden design aesthetic with the Lyrebird, as you can see from the pictures. The earpieces are handcrafted, and coated in resin to ensure they're durable.

The announcement of the Sivga Lyrebirds coincides with CanJam London, which is bringing plenty of other audio announcements. So before the day is through, we may see many other IEMs to enjoy.

How automation is easing IT’s patching pressure

The disclosure-to-exploit window used to be measured in weeks; for weaponized vulnerabilities, it now runs in hours. Out-of-cycle patches that used to be exceptional have become routine across enterprise environments of meaningful size.

This pattern now has a name. You might have heard it already: the Patch Apocalypse. Sounds a bit dramatic, but the impact warrants the drama.

It describes something measurable — software flaws are being discovered, disclosed and weaponized faster than most patch management programs were built to handle.

Several factors are converging at once. Frontier AI models are accelerating vulnerability research — Anthropic's Project Glasswing and comparable initiatives have produced thousands of high-severity findings in compressed timeframes.

Attackers are using the same class of tooling to reverse-engineer patches far faster than previously thought possible. Public disclosures are arriving on shorter cycles.

For any team responsible for keeping production systems patched, this all translates to a backlog that grows faster than the available maintenance management windows can drain it. And “drain” is the right word here, because that’s also the impact on the team: it’s very, very draining.

This is far from an anecdotal observation. The workforce cost is already visible.

Recent UK data shows what’s happening at the personnel level: 42% of UK IT professionals report high levels of stress from their jobs, and 76% say that stress is affecting their physical and mental health. 30% report difficulty concentrating, 35% report trouble sleeping and 30% report increased anxiety and depression.

Why traditional patching is breaking down

Patch management was built around predictability. Vendor releases on a known schedule. A defined maintenance window. Manual testing in a staging environment. Communication, approval, deployment, verification.

The model worked when most enterprise software was released on predictable monthly or quarterly schedules, when threat actors needed weeks to weaponize a disclosed CVE, and when out-of-cycle patches were rare enough that a program could absorb them without restructuring. When those scenarios change, the model’s validity changes.

Two structural changes have done most of the work:

Volume is the first. When a single AI model can autonomously surface thousands of high-severity vulnerabilities across major operating systems and browsers — as Project Glasswing did within weeks of its April launch — the downstream effect is more CVEs arriving sooner, with public patches available, all flowing into the same backlog the IT team was already trying to clear.

Velocity has compounded that. Attackers have access to the same class of capability. Patches can be reverse-engineered in as little as 72 hours, sometimes far less. Any system unpatched in that window is exposed to working exploits.

Combine the two, and a patch program that was already running near capacity has to absorb a step change in volume, with shorter deadlines and less predictability about when the next critical disclosure will land. That’s a lot of pressure, and it’s what’s driving the stress data up.

Automation is taking center stage

As an operating model, automation is far better-equipped to survive a Patch Apocalypse than previous iterations. Three important principles underscore the model’s efficacy:

1. Continuous, risk-based triage. The CISA Known Exploited Vulnerabilities list is the non-negotiable top tier. An Exploit Prediction Scoring System threshold appropriate to the environment can drive priority for everything else. Below that threshold, work waits for the maintenance ring.

2. Automated test and deployment rings. The test cycle has to compress to fit the exploit window. Even with top-tier skills and best intentions, a human checklist cannot move at that speed. The familiar sequence — test ring, early-adopter ring, broad production, mission-critical — has to be instrumented and capable of running without manual coordination at every stage.

3. Closed-loop verification. A patch isn’t deployed until the install is confirmed on every endpoint, and a CVE isn’t closed until a rescan confirms it. Compliance evidence is produced as a byproduct of the workflow, not assembled from a spreadsheet the week before an audit.

Industry data points in the same direction. 67% of IT professionals say AI tools and automation will free up their time for more interesting, fulfilling work. 66% say the same tools will help them provide better service to end users. Less than one in three organizations report having fully embedded automation in their IT workflows.

Who’s paying the cost

Any cost considerations regarding patch programs need to take the human cost into account. A patch program running on legacy assumptions will absorb the Patch Apocalypse by burning out the team running it. The stress figures are showing the early signs. The downstream cost includes attrition, error rates, lost productivity and the slow erosion of the institutional knowledge that holds a program together.

On the other hand, programs where automation runs the workflow have the potential to absorb the same volume without requiring the team to absorb it personally. Continuous prioritization, instrumented rings and verification embedded in the workflow take variable, manual work out of the critical path.

Two-thirds of IT professionals see AI and automation as a route to better work — fewer frantic escalations and more time on the problems that need human judgement.

The Patch Apocalypse is very much here, and is poised to reach every program. Is the workflow underneath built to absorb the impact? If not, consider the whole scope of what — and who — is at stake.

We've reviewed and ranked the best endpoint protection software.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

I love my Marantz CD player, and its new upgraded version was just unveiled — and the matching amp with aptX Bluetooth, HDMI and MM phono looks irresistible too

  • Marantz unveils replacements for the acclaimed PM6007 and CD6007 amp and CD player
  • Amp has HDMI ARC and high-quality Bluetooth streaming, plus phono MM input
  • From $750 / £499 / AU$1,000

One of the things I love about quality hi-fi is that it's often made to be a treat for your eyes as well as your ears. The new Marantz Model 70 integrated amp and CD 70 CD player definitely come into that category: I think they look stunning.

I'm probably a little bit biased because my CD player is a Marantz (the CD6007 that this one makes obsolete, no less) and I love it dearly. But both new models promise serious substance to match their style.

The Model 70 and CD 70 are the successors to the acclaimed PM6007 and the aforementioned CD6007, and Marantz promises that both deliver what the brand calls its signature "warm, detailed and deeply musical" sound.

But there are significant upgrades that should make this new generation an even more luxurious listen.

Marantz Model 70 and CD 70: key features and pricing

The Marantz Model 70 is an integrated amp with HDMI ARC and Bluetooth, with the latter offering transmission and reception via aptX Adaptive, aptX HD, AAC and SBC. In addition to the usual audio connections there are preamplifier and subwoofer outputs.

Marantz Model 70 amp and CD 70 CD player on a wooden surface

(Image credit: Future)

The 50-watt Class A/B amplifier features an upgraded topology with an enhanced power supply and larger toroidal transformer, which Marantz says delivers greater dynamic expression, improved speaker control and increased authority across all kinds of speakers. It includes a high-quality MM phono stage for your turntable and a high-performance ES Sabre DAC for digital audio sources.

The Marantz CD 70 features the same DAC as the Model 70 plus additional proprietary HDAM (High Definition Amplifier Module) circuitry to deliver "detailed, expressive and emotionally engaging reproduction of compact discs, extracting every nuance from treasured music collections," Marantz says. There's a USB-A port on the front for your digital files, and support for hi-res formats including FLAC HD, ALAC, AIFF and DSD.

Marantz Model 70 amp and CD 70 CD player on a wooden surface

(Image credit: Future)

As with the Model 70 amp, the circuitry has been optimized to reduce noise and preserve detail; there's an upgraded power supply, "strategically deployed" copper hardware and a double-layered chassis base with rigid isolation feet.

As with their predecessors, the Model 70 and CD 70 aren't terrifyingly expensive. The official price of the CD 70 compact disc player is $750 / £499 / AU$1,000, while the Model 70 integrated amp is £749 / AU$1,455. Sadly, the latter isn't available in North America.

Both models will be available on August 15th, 2026.

UN Secretary General says 'Killer Robots' must be stopped, calls autonomous weapons "morally repugnant"

  • UN Secretary General calls for a global ban on autonomous "killer robots”
  • Guterres argues that delegating life-or-death decisions to machines is “morally repugnant”
  • Governments should take a stance now – not wait for something catastrophic to happen

UN Secretary General António Guterres has called for lethal autonomous weapons, which he describes as ‘killer robots’ to be prohibited under international law following recent discussions at the first Global Dialogue on Artificial Intelligence Governance in Geneva.

Guterres’ demand to ban these weapons focuses on those capable of identifying, selecting and attacking targets without human oversight, which leaves artificial intelligence and other computer systems in charge of a life-or-death decision.

He ultimately argued that certain decisions must remain exclusively human, and the decision to take a life is well into the boundary of requiring human oversight. Transferring the decision-making to killer robots would be “morally repugnant” and “politically unacceptable,” he argued.

AI requires global regulation as military AI poses major threats

Key to the Secretary General’s argument is that he urges governments to take action and ban such robots now, rather than waiting for an autonomous weapon to cause a major incident before rethinking their strategies.

“Let us not wait for atrocity to act,” Guterres said. “Some decisions must remain forever human – none more than taking a human life.”

The issue is becoming more urgent now that AI models and advanced chips are already being used within military intelligence, targeting and other battlefield systems.

More broadly, Guterres’ thoughts align with those of Anthropic, which recently had a dispute with the Pentagon after seeking guarantees that its models would not be used for autonomous weapons or surveillance.

While the Pentagon had rejected those limitations, arguing that it should be able to use Anthropic’s models for any lawful purpose, the case highlights how private companies are becoming increasingly intertwined with digital warfare.

Reporting by the Wall Street Journal cited a similar view by Pope Leo XIV, who warns that AI-controlled weapons could promote an “anti-human” view of warfare. He warned that the autonomy could reduce some dangers and distance political leaders from the human consequences of conflict.

There’s a need to balance the pros and cons of AI

However, artificial intelligence does promise several benefits to modern warfare, particularly in its ability to process huge amounts of information extremely quickly. With modern compute, militaries can respond to threats at lightning speed, improve their accuracy and precision, reduce soldier risk and potentially reduce civilian casualties, too.

Critics also question whether human oversight of AI systems is at all meaningful if the person in charge only has seconds to act on AI-generated information in the first place.

It’s also yet to be determined which party or group of parties should be held accountable for any incidents or mishaps – human operators, commanders, hardware manufacturers and software developers are just some of the parties up for judgment.

“We may be the last generation able to set the terms on which humanity and machines coexist,” Guterres warned separately in an X post, warning that AI must be governed, trusted and fair.

“It sounds like science fiction, but it's a real possibility, and it could change the world in ways that we don't understand yet, and it could change the power dynamics of our planet in ways that require our attention,” Independent International Scientific Panel on AI Co-Chair Yoshua Bengio added.

Google logo on a black background next to text reading 'Click to follow TechRadar'

How to watch Alone Australia season 4 for *FREE* from anywhere

Ten Aussie survivalists are being taken well out of their comfort zone for Alone Australia 2026, which – in a series first – is set in the northern hemisphere. They'll be entirely self-reliant in the near-inhospitable region of Sápmi (known by some as Lapland) in the Arctic Circle, where even the indigenous Sámi people have only formed a small handful of settlements.

You can watch Alone Australia season 4 online from anywhere with a VPN and potentially for free.

Premiere: Wednesday, July 15 at 7.30pm AEST

Watch free: SBS on Demand (AUS)

Unlock your stream with NordVPN (save up to 75%)

Former Navy chef Trent is eyeing 101 days, which is ambitious considering the all-time franchise record is 100 days, and nobody in Alone Australia history has made it beyond 76 days in warm climes. Hunting is also forbidden this season.

On paper, wrecking yard manager Arash, permaculture practitioner Jasper, outdoor guide Lillian and ultramarathon runner Sia look as if they have potential. Arash, Jasper and Sia are accomplished at foraging and fishing, while Lillian – who grew up in nearby Sweden – has led remote wilderness tours in temperatures as extreme as -60 degrees Celsius.

Arash and Sia have especially fascinating backstories. Arash lost everything when war destroyed his hometown in Afghanistan, after which every minute of every day became about survival. Sia grew up in extreme poverty in Thailand, which taught her more than most about resilience and scratching out a living.

Read on as we explain how to watch Alone Australia S4 from anywhere.

Can you watch Alone Australia season 4 for free?

Yes. Viewers in Australia can watch Alone Australia season 4 FREE of charge on SBS and the SBS on Demand streaming service.

Traveling outside Australia? You can use a VPN to watch your usual streaming services from anywhere.

How to watch Alone Australia season 4 from anywhere

If you're keen to watch Alone Australia but you're away from home and access to the show is geo-blocked, you can always use a VPN to access it (assuming you're not breaching any broadcaster T&Cs, of course). You may be surprised by how simple it is to do.

Use one of the best VPNs to watch Alone Australia 2026 from anywhere:

🟩 NordVPN – get the world's best VPN

Not having a VPN is like leaving your front door wide open in a busy city – anyone can walk right in and take a peek.

TechRadar regularly reviews all the biggest and best VPN providers and NordVPN is our #1 choice.

✅ 75% Off Today
✅ Try risk-free for 30 days
✅ Unlocks SBS on Demand

Get NordVPN now and watch Alone Australia season 4 from anywhere.View Deal

How to watch Alone Australia season 4 in the US

History is home to Alone Australia in the US, but at the time of publication the broadcaster's plans for season 4 are still under wraps.

The channel is included from many cable providers, but what if you've cut the cord? Philo has a 7-day free trial. With no-hassle setup, no hidden fees, and a 7-day free trial, it's perfect for Alone fans. You'll get access to History and ton of premium channels.

Alternatively, the History channel is also carried by Sling – specifically the Orange plan, which costs $4.99/day, $9.99 for three days, $14.99/week, $45.99/month or $115/quarter. It also includes ESPN, ESPN2, TNT and TBS. It's also on Hulu+Live TV.

For now, a VPN will help you tune in if you're spending time in the US from Australia. We recommend NordVPN above all others.

How to watch Alone Australia season 4 in Canada

In Canada, Alone Australia airs on Paramount Plus, but at the time of publication it isn't clear when season 4 will hit the streamer.

A Paramount Plus subscription costs CA$7.99/month.

Visiting Canada from Australia? Use NordVPN to watch Alone Australia S4 for free.

Can I watch Alone Australia season 4 in the UK?

Although free-to-air Channel 4 is home to the short-lived Alone UK, and the American version of the show airs on Sky History, the Australian iteration doesn't appear to have a broadcasting partner in the UK.

For now, a VPN will help you tune in if you're spending time in the UK from Australia. NordVPN is our recommended provider, and you can find out why with our in-depth NordVPN review.

How to watch Alone Australia season 4 in Australia

Viewers in Australia can watch Alone Australia season 4 for FREE on SBS and via the SBS on Demand streaming service.

Episodes air at 7.30pm AEST each Wednesday, starting with a double-header on July 15.

Traveling outside Australia? As detailed above, if you’re overseas you’ll struggle to connect to any of the streaming services you usually use. The solution? Try using a VPN.

Alone Australia season 4 – Need to Know

Alone Australia S4 trailer

Who is in the Alone Australia S4 cast?

Alyce, 36, Aboriginal community engagement senior advisor, WA

Arash, 32, wrecking yard manager, QLD

Clint, 57, sheep and cattle farmer, NZ

Dougy, 43, electrician, WA

Dylan, 35, DFV high-risk team specialist, QLD

Jasper, 24, permaculture practitioner & educator, WA

Lillian, 25, international outdoor guide, NT

Misty, 29, adventure tour guide, VIC

Sia, 44, design project consultant & ultramarathon runner, VIC

Trent, 39, former Navy chef, TAS

How many episodes of Alone Australia S4 are there?

SBS hasn't revealed when the Alone Australia 2026 finale will air at the time of publication, but the previous seasons of Alone Australia comprised 12, 11 and 13 episodes respectively.

We test and review VPN services in the context of legal recreational uses. For example:1. Accessing a service from another country (subject to the terms and conditions of that service).2. Protecting your online security and strengthening your online privacy when abroad.We do not support or condone the illegal or malicious use of VPN services. Consuming pirated content that is paid-for is neither endorsed nor approved by Future Publishing.

Volkswagen unveils its innovative eBike with the world's first integrated rear-view camera and smart glasses

  • Volkswagen and n+ have unveiled a premium new eBike range
  • It features a rear-view camera and radar-based blind-spot warnings
  • Smart glasses and a connected helmet complete the safety ecosystem

Volkswagen has taken some of the most advanced safety features from its passenger cars and squeezed them onto an electric bicycle, unveiling what is claimed to be the world's first eBike with an integrated rear-view camera and dashboard display.

Developed in partnership with premium eBike manufacturer n+, the new Volkswagen-licensed electric bicycles are designed around the same "safety-first" philosophy that has informed the German automaker's road cars for decades.

Rather than focusing solely on bigger batteries and more powerful motors, Volkswagen says the new range is engineered to make cyclists more visible to motorists and more aware of their surroundings.

At the heart of the system is Smart View, which combines an integrated high-definition rear-view camera with radar-assisted traffic monitoring.

Neatly integrated into the handlebars, the display takes a real-time feed from a high-definition camera mounted on the rear mudguard that allows riders to see what is happening behind them without having to turn their heads. At the same time, radar sensors, similar to those offered by Garmin, can also warn of approaching vehicles in a cyclist's blind spot.

The technology resembles the camera mirror systems increasingly found in modern passenger vehicles, and the company says it could represent one of the most significant safety advances to hit the eBike market in recent years.

Volkswagen and n+ have also developed a full-length illuminated LED strip that runs through the bike's top tube. The system acts like an automotive daytime running light but can also illuminate red when braking and amber when turning, signaling a rider's intentions to other road users.

Volkswagen Smart eBike

(Image credit: Volkswagen/n+)

An optional Smart Helmet can synchronize with the eBike via Bluetooth, mirroring the bicycle's lighting signals and incorporating a built-in accelerometer that can detect crashes and automatically send text messages to loved ones in the event of an emergency.

Then there are the Smart Glasses, which are perhaps the most futuristic of all. Inspired by automotive head-up displays and developed by engineers who previously worked on fighter pilot helmet displays, the glasses can project navigation instructions, blind-spot warnings and ride information directly into a rider's field of vision.

Peter Jost, CEO of Volkswagen Accessories, Lifestyle and Licensing Business, said that technologies like these are "most commonly known from the automotive world" and that seeing them arrive on an eBike demonstrates how safety systems can "evolve and be adapted in meaningful ways".

Despite the plethora of new technologies onboard, the innovative eBikes are priced to rival premium competitors, with Sport models starting at £3,999 in the UK (around $5,300/AU$7,700), which includes the Smart View rear-view monitor. The Smart Helmet and Smart Glasses cost an additional £499 (around $670AU$960) each.

Analysis: are automotive safety systems the next big thing in eBikes?

Volkswagen Smart eBike

(Image credit: Volkswagen/n+)

As cities become increasingly congested and more people turn to electric bicycles as an alternative to driving, safety is rapidly becoming one of the biggest battlegrounds in micromobility.

While innovations in recent years have largely centered on extending range and increasing power, there has been comparatively little focus on helping cyclists avoid accidents in the first place.

Many companies that specialize in cycling accessories have come up with safety solutions that help increase visibility and awareness of other vehicles, but this often requires cyclists to bolt on awkward pieces of technology.

Having it neatly integrated into the bicycle itself feels like a logical solution, and with commuters looking for ever-cheaper ways to get from A to B, these could very well be the sort of innovations that persuade motorists to ditch their cars in favor of something leaner and greener.

'The future is now' — PS5 user locked out of Ghost of Yotei due to license verification, and this is why Sony's all-digital future plans must end

  • PS5 user reports being locked out of Ghost of Yotei digital copy for 'half an hour' due to license verification
  • License verification isn't new, but this case is important amid Sony's plans to axe physical game copies
  • Once physical game copies are gone, access to games on PlayStation will be at Sony's disposal

Sony's plans to push for an all-digital future for games on PlayStation have come under major scrutiny since the announcement, and one case highlights just how dangerous those plans are to game access and ownership.

A Reddit user (in a now-removed post) reported being locked out of the digital copy of Ghost of Yotei on PS5 for half an hour, even after refreshing licenses. When attempting to open the game, the message reads: "Can't use this content. Your licenses are being verified. Try again later."

It's important to note that this type of scenario isn't exactly new; license refresh prompts can occur after a long period, especially when sharing a game with another user. However, this Ghost of Yotei license check example comes amid Sony's ongoing, controversial decision to end the production of physical game discs from January 2028.

Once the supposed digital-only PS6 arrives, this very example of a consumer being locked out of a game can happen at any time. Unlike physical game discs, access to digital PlayStation game copies is at Sony's discretion, and the same will soon apply to all game copies, which essentially means game ownership will be non-existent.

In-game screenshot of Atsu in Ghost of Yotei

(Image credit: Sucker Punch)
Comment from r/gaming
Comment from r/gaming

Since there has been no follow-up statement since the disc axe announcement, it seems Sony is waiting for the storm to subside so it can ultimately commit to its digital-only plans, despite pressure from consumers online.

Unlike Microsoft's decision to walk back on its 'always-online' Xbox One plans after backlash in 2013, it may take a tumultuous effort from consumers, game studios, and video game retail stores to make an impact.

It's also quite ironic that Sony, which previously mocked Microsoft for the ability to share physical game copies, is now responsible for eliminating physical game copies. In the same vein as the subscription-based PlayStation Plus, which is a requirement to play games online, if consumers don't continue to push back against digital-only plans, there will be no going back once the PS6 arrives.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 review: full-power RTX 5090 performance in a slim 16-inch chassis

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2: Two-minute review

The Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is built for fast 2560 x 1600 gaming, and it squeezes flagship-class hardware into a slimmer chassis than typical desktop-replacement machines.

The review unit tested here combines AMD’s Ryzen 9 9955HX3D CPU with a 175W Nvidia GeForce RTX 5090 laptop GPU, 32GB of RAM and a 1TB SSD, so it’s aimed at buyers who want top-tier performance without stepping up to a much larger 18-inch machine.

The 16-inch OLED display is one of the main reasons to consider it. It has a 2560 x 1600 resolution, 240Hz refresh rate, 100% DCI-P3 colour coverage, a 1,000,000:1 contrast ratio and HDR 1000 support.

Text looks sharp, colour and contrast are excellent, and the finish isn’t so glossy that reflections become a major issue. It’s a very good fit for fast games, high-quality video and creative work, and the laptop itself is fast enough to make proper use of the panel’s resolution and refresh rate.

The Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is also more portable than its spec suggests. It measures 35.7 x 25.5 x 1.9 to 2.4cm (14.1 x 10.0 x 0.7 to 0.9in) and weighs 2.39kg (5.27lb), so it’s heavy enough to notice in a bag, but still manageable if you need to carry it between home, work, university or when travelling.

The adapter adds another 750g (1.65lb), which matters if you’re trying to pack light, but the 330W charger is still fairly compact for its output.

Build quality is reasonable, but not as premium as the price suggests. The thin metal-backed screen is rigid, while the plastic shell on the main body has a little flex and feels less expensive.

The keyboard has decent travel and plenty of room, though it’s a little bouncy in vigorous use, while the touchpad is large, responsive and easy to use when you don’t have a mouse connected.

The Full HD infrared camera works well for Windows Hello facial recognition, though image quality is nothing special. The speakers are better than typical laptop audio, with excellent volume and little distortion at higher levels, though bass is still limited.

The port selection covers the basics well, with USB-C, USB4, USB-A, HDMI 2.1, Ethernet, microSD and 3.5mm audio. The issue is the layout.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop

(Image credit: Future)

Because the cooling system takes up the rear section of the laptop, most cables need to plug in further forward on the sides, where they can crowd desk space and get in the way of a mouse.

It’s not a deal-breaker, but it makes the Aorus slightly less pleasant to use with a monitor, dock and other desk accessories connected.

Gigabyte’s GiMate software gives useful control over performance modes, fan behaviour and lighting. The laptop also has plenty of lighting to adjust, including the keyboard, rear light bar and desk glow from the underside.

The software itself can be laggy, though, and that makes quick customisation tweaks more frustrating than they should be on an expensive gaming laptop.

Performance is very good, and the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 has no issue running the RTX 5090 at up to 175W for extended periods. Compared with an RTX 5080 laptop, the Aorus is up to 35% faster for gaming, with the biggest gains in heavier ray-tracing scenarios where the extra GPU headroom and 24GB of VRAM help it sustain higher frame rates.

That makes it a very capable choice for demanding 1600p gaming, especially if you want high texture settings, ray tracing or very fast OLED refresh rates.

Raw CPU performance is also very good. The Ryzen 9 9955HX3D is a powerful processor, and the cooling system lets it work hard in multicore workloads without obvious throttling.

That matters outside games too, as the Aorus Master 16 is well suited to creator work, video editing and heavier productivity tasks.

The laptop can also charge and run from USB-C, and documents, browsing and calls remain snappy, but it’s limited to Balanced mode or lower and gaming performance drops to about 10% of maximum. So the 330W adapter is still needed for proper gaming performance.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop

placeholder image (Image credit: Future)

The main trade-off is fan noise. While the cooling system works well, it also makes the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 one of the loudest laptops I’ve tested at full load. The sound also has a high-pitched note that’s somewhat unpleasant at both low and high speeds, and the fans ramp up quickly even with lighter workloads.

Even the power-saving quiet mode isn’t as quiet as I’d like, so this is not the right laptop if you need near-silent performance when not gaming.

Battery life is the other downside. Despite the large 99Wh battery, web browsing lasted under 2.5 hours, and video playback ran for 3 hours and 46 minutes using power-saving settings. That’s with the RTX 5090 completely off and only using the Radeon iGPU too, and it’s much more power hungry than comparable Intel based gaming laptops.

Gaming on battery is much shorter again, but that is normal and expected. Still, overall the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is better treated as a desktop replacement you can move around than a laptop that you can use on the couch without a charger nearby. Hopefully a future driver update can reduce the idle and low load power use, but as tested, battery life is disappointing.

Overall the Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 delivers the speed its high-end hardware promises, and the OLED display is more than capable of showing off the higher frame rates that performance enables.

It’s a good fit if you want a powerful 16-inch gaming laptop that can also handle demanding creative work, and you don’t want to deal with a bulkier machine.

But that does come at a price, so while performance is excellent, the fan noise and battery life stop the Master 16 from feeling as premium as the price tag.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16: Price & availability

  • How much does it cost? The tested RTX 5090 model is priced at $4,299 / AU$6,599
  • When is it available? It's available now
  • Where can you get it? You can get it in the US and Australia

While it is just hitting shelves in the US and Australia, at the time of writing, we haven't yet seen the Gen 2 Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 for sale in the UK.

Now, the Master 16 Gen 2 is an expensive gaming laptop, and the tested RTX 5090 model sits near the top of the price range. Still, it needs to be judged against other slim but high-power RTX 50 series laptops, rather than chunkier desktop-replacement options.

The price is easier to justify if you want the specific mix of a 175W RTX 5090, Ryzen 9 9955HX3D CPU, 240Hz OLED display and a chassis that is still portable enough to carry around easily.

There are cheaper Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 configurations available, including RTX 5080 and RTX 5070 Ti variants, but the exact CPU and GPU power limits vary by model.

  • Value score: 3.5 / 5

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2: Specs

The Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 range is available in a few configurations, so it's worth double checking the exact model before buying. The RTX 5090 version tested here sits at the top of the range with 24GB of VRAM and a 175W GPU power limit, while the RTX 5080 version keeps the same 175W limit but drops to 16GB of VRAM.

There's also an RTX 5070 Ti version, but the CPU and GPU power limits can vary by SKU and region.

The specs are very good overall, with Wi-Fi 7, USB4, a 99Wh battery and upgradeable DDR5 RAM. The main limitation for the models we have seen for sale so far is that they are limited to 32GB of RAM and a 1TB SSD, which is fair enough considering recent memory and storage price rises.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 specs

RTX 5070 Ti variant

RTX 5080 variant

US Price

$1,899

$2,199

UK Price

£1,799

£2,099

AU Price

AU$3,299

AU$4,299

CPU

AMD Ryzen 9 8940HX

AMD Ryzen 9 9955HX3D

GPU

RTX 5070 Ti

RTX 5080

RAM

32GB LPDDR5x 5600 MHz

32GB LPDDR5x 5600 MHz

Storage

1TB

1TB

Display

2560 x 1600 IPS, 100% sRGB, 400 nits, 165 Hz

2560 x 1600 IPS, 100% sRGB, 400 nits, 165 Hz

Ports

1x USB-C 5 Gbps, DisplayPort 1.4, PD charging, 2x USB-A 5 Gbps, HDMI 2.1, 1 Gb Ethernet, 3.5mm headset jack.

1x USB-C 5 Gbps, DisplayPort 1.4, PD charging, 2x USB-A 5 Gbps, HDMI 2.1, 1 Gb Ethernet, 3.5mm headset jack.

Connectivity

Wi-Fi 6E, 802.11ax 2x2 + BT5.2

Wi-Fi 6E, 802.11ax 2x2 + BT5.2

Battery

76Wh

76Wh

Dimensions

358.3 x 262.5 x 19.45 - 22.99 mm (14.11 x 10.33 x 0.77 - 0.91 inches)

358.3 x 262.5 x 19.45 - 22.99 mm (14.11 x 10.33 x 0.77 - 0.91 inches)

Weight

2.3 kg (5.1 lbs)

2.3 kg (5.1 lbs)

  • Specs score: 4.5 / 5
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16: Design

  • Slim for a high-power RTX 5090 laptop
  • Customizable RGB lighting
  • Useful ports but awkward placement

The Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is slim for a laptop built around a 175W RTX 5090 and high-end AMD CPU, but it's still a large gaming machine. It measures 35.7 x 25.5 x 1.9 to 2.5cm (14.1 x 10.1 x 0.7 to 1.0in), and the 19mm thinnest point includes the rubber feet.

When picked up, that’s perfectly manageable for a 16-inch gaming laptop, and at 2.39kg (5.27lb), it's portable enough to carry on the go every day if needed.

Of course, the 330W adapter is also part of the portability equation. It weighs 750g (1.65lb) and measures 16.0 x 7.5 x 2.7cm (6.3 x 3.0 x 1.1in), which is compact for a charger with such a high output, but it still takes the total carry weight over 3kg.

USB-C charging is useful if you only need documents, browsing or calls away from your main desk, but the main adapter is still the practical choice for gaming.

Build quality is functional rather than feeling truly premium. The top of the lid is metal and is thin but rigid, while the main chassis is plastic and has a little flex. The laptop didn’t show wear during my testing, including when carried in a bag, but the dark finish picks up fingerprints, though they also cleans off relatively easily.

The rear of the chassis is mostly given over to cooling, with large vents across the back edge and exhausts on the sides. That cooling system is a key part of the design, as it helps the Aorus Master 16 run high-power hardware in a slimmer body. It also leads to some of the compromises, such as fan noise and port placement.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future

The port selection is useful, with USB4, a second USB-C port, two USB-A ports, HDMI 2.1, 1Gb Ethernet, microSD and 3.5mm audio. The problem is where those ports sit. Because the rear of the laptop is reserved for cooling, cables plug in further forward on the sides, where they can crowd your desk and mouse space.

For those who value their desk space, the chunky side-mounted power connector can be especially bulky and annoying, so I found a powered USB-C dock is a good option if you use the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 with a monitor, Ethernet and other accessories. That way you can have just one cable plugged in, and only add the bigger power plug when gaming.

The keyboard has a reasonable 1.7mm of travel and plenty of room, so it works well for both typing and normal WASD gaming. It's a little bouncy in vigorous use, and overall doesn't feel as firm as I'd like for a flagship laptop, but the layout is pretty good overall.

The touchpad is large, responsive and pleasant enough to use when you don’t have a mouse connected.

The RGB lighting includes the keyboard and is pretty extensive overall. The Aorus logo on the rear of the screen is backlit by colour-changing LEDs, and there is front and rear underside lighting that creates a nice nonglare desk glow effect in a darker room.

There's also a small light that projects the Aorus symbol onto the desk behind the laptop. It's a fun idea, but the focus seemed a touch soft.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future

Gigabyte’s GiMate software controls lighting, performance modes and fan behaviour, but I find it can be slow to load and respond at times. That’s a mild frustration for anyone who may want to change modes often, especially if you are trying to reduce fan noise during lighter work.

There are also automatic ‘AI’ modes, but I found they left the laptop running hotter and noisier than I’d like when not gaming. Like the laptop itself, the software doesn't feel as slick as you’d hope for the price.

The Full HD infrared webcam works well for Windows Hello facial recognition, though image quality is nothing special and gets softer in darker rooms.

The speakers are better than what I’ve experienced on most other laptops I’ve tested, with great volume and very little distortion at high levels, but as expected, bass is still pretty limited. The speakers can overpower the fan noise when cranked right up, but I'd still recommend a headset for gaming.

  • Design score: 4.5 / 5
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future
Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop
Future

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16: Performance

  • High 1600p gaming frame rates
  • Excellent CPU performance
  • Loud fans under load

The Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gives the cooling and power headroom needed to make a high end GPU worth paying extra for. The variant I tested uses a 175W Nvidia GeForce RTX 5090 laptop GPU (and the AMD Ryzen 9 9955HX3D CPU), so it's not one of those slim gaming laptops with a premium GPU bottlenecked by a low wattage limit.

And just as importantly, the cooling system lets the hardware work hard for sustained loads, and that makes the Aorus a proper match for its 240Hz, 2560 x 1600 OLED display.

Compared with an RTX 5080 laptop, the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is up to 35% faster for gaming. The biggest gains are in heavier ray-tracing scenarios, where the extra GPU headroom and 24GB of VRAM help sustain higher frame rates. That extra memory also helps if you want high-resolution textures, or play a lot of newer games that push beyond what lower-tier laptop GPUs can comfortably handle.

If you mostly play lighter esports titles, the hardware is overkill, but the 240Hz OLED display still gives it a clear use case for very fast gaming.

The RTX 5090 is also a powerful accelerator for creator work. GPU-heavy video effects, rendering workloads and AI-assisted tools can all use the extra graphics grunt, so the Aorus Master 16 makes more sense if you want one machine for both gaming and demanding creative work.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop

placeholder image (Image credit: Future)

CPU performance is also very good. The Ryzen 9 9955HX3D is a powerful processor, especially in multicore workloads, and the Aorus cooling system lets it run full tilt without obvious throttling. That is important for gaming, but also for video editing, rendering, compiling code and other higher loads.

The cooling system also lets the CPU and GPU run hard at the same time. During demanding gaming sessions, the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 generates a lot of heat, but it doesn't make the keyboard or WASD area uncomfortable to use. Hot air exits from the rear and sides, so your exact desk setup will change the impact, but the thermal comfort is better than the fan noise might suggest.

The trade-off is that the cooling system is not subtle. At all. I love that the Aorus Master 16 can give high performance in a relatively slim 16-inch chassis, but it’s important to highlight that it does that by moving a lot of air, loudly.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop

placeholder image (Image credit: Future)

The benchmark table below compares the Aorus Master 16 with the Alienware 16 Area-51 configuration I tested with an RTX 5080. The Alienware is another premium machine, so it makes a useful comparison for showing what the Aorus gains from the RTX 5090 and 24GB of VRAM.

If you are comparing the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 with other gaming laptops, pay close attention to GPU wattage as well as the GPU name. A lower-wattage RTX 5090 laptop can perform much closer to an RTX 5080 machine, while the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 has the cooling and wattage budget needed to make the 5090 worth the extra cost.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 benchmark results

Aorus Master 16 Gen 2

Alienware 16X Aurora

Alienware 16 Area-51

CPU

AMD Ryzen 9 9955HX3D

Intel Ultra 9 275HX

Intel Ultra 9 275HX

GPU

RTX 5090 24GB

RTX 5070

RTX 5080

RAM

32GB

32GB

32GB

Battery

99 Wh

96 Wh

96 Wh

General performance

PCMark 10 - Overall (score)

10,905

8,437

8,639

Geekbench 6 - Multi-core

19,954

19,615

20,244

Geekbench 6 - Single-core

3,209

3,068

3,149

Geekbench 6 - GPU

232,231

136,686

213,178

Cinebench R24 - CPU Single Core

130

133

133

Cinebench R24 - CPU Multi Core

2,148

1,964

2,106

Battery

PCMark 10 - Battery Work (HH:MM)

1:56

6:01

3:09

TechRadar video test (HH:MM)

2:11

6:16

4:27

Graphics performance

3DMark SpeedWay

6,185

3,664

5,610

3DMark Port Royal

16,132

9,031

11,999

Steel Nomad

5,972

2,846

5,109

Cyberpunk 2077 - 1600p RT Low (DLSS)

133

76

114

Cyberpunk 2077 - 1600p RT Low (DLSS off)

99

50

79

Cyberpunk 2077 - 1600p RT Ultra (DLSS)

84

54

72

Cyberpunk 2077 - 1600p RT Ultra (DLSS off)

50

16

37

Black Myth: Wukong - 1600p Cinematic (DLSS)

121

76

104

Shadow of the Tomb Raider - 1600p (DLSS off)

214

131

175

Storage

CrystalDiskMark Read/Write (MB/s)

6,902 / 5,618

6,939 / 6,740

6,575 / 5,890

In real use, the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is very capable at its native 2560 x 1600 resolution. Demanding games still need sensible settings if you want to push closer to the OLED screen's 240Hz limit, but this is a laptop where high detail, ray tracing and upscaling can all be used without dropping frame rates too low.

The 24GB of VRAM is a key long-term advantage over lower-tier GPUs. It gives the laptop more scope in the future for high-resolution textures and demanding ray-traced scenes, and it should also help the Aorus Master 16 age better as game requirements keep rising.

Fan noise is the major performance downside. At full load, the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is one of the loudest laptops I’ve tested, and the sound has a high-pitched note that makes it more annoying than a lower rush of air.

A headset is already a typical choice for gaming, but the bigger problem is that even when not gaming, the fans ramp up quickly and can get loud even under light loads.

The quiet and power-saving modes help, but they don't make the laptop consistently quiet. Even in lighter use, the fans tend to spin up much more than seems necessary given the internal temperatures, and it becomes loud enough to notice.

Arguably this is the real-world cost of getting this much performance from a slimmer 16-inch design, but it still feels much less refined than it could be. Hopefully Gigabyte works on the fan control and smooths it out somewhat in future software updates.

Stability was good during testing. External display use worked well, including through a dock, and both Ethernet and Wi-Fi behaved reliably. I also didn't run into sleep, wake or lid-behaviour glitches that often plague Windows based machines. I did find Gigabyte's GiMate software slow at times, but on the plus side it gives good access to performance modes, fan settings and lighting controls.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop

placeholder image (Image credit: Future)

USB-C charging on the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is useful, but only if you understand and respect a few limits. The laptop does charge and run happily from USB-C, and in fact tends to be much quieter, which makes it a good option for a docked desk setup, travel or basic work without the big 330W adapter. Light single-core tasks were only 2% slower than full-adapter use in my testing, so web browsing and typical office tasks still feel snappy.

CPU-heavy loads show the limits, though, and were about 60% slower on USB-C than with the power brick, and gaming performance was about 92% lower. That doesn't make USB-C useless, but it does mean you should treat it as a convenience for productivity and top-ups rather than factor it in for gaming.

Still, overall the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 delivers the high-end performance its hardware promises. It's fast enough for demanding 1600p gaming and creative work, for those who don’t mind the fan noise.

If you want a powerful laptop that stays quiet when not gaming, it’s a harder machine to recommend.

  • Performance score: 4.5 / 5

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2: Battery life and Charging

  • Under 2.5 hours of web browsing
  • 3 hours and 46 minutes of video playback
  • USB-C charging suits light work, not gaming

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 gaming laptop

placeholder image (Image credit: Future)

Battery life is not great, especially considering the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 has a larger 99Wh battery. The slim 16-inch chassis makes it easier to carry than a typical desktop-replacement laptop, but the short runtime unplugged means you'll still want the charger nearby for anything more than brief use.

In my web-browsing battery test, the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 lasted under 2.5 hours. Video playback ran for 3 hours and 46 minutes using power-saving settings.

Those results are disappointing and they do limit the usefulness of the Aorus when you want to work away from a desk for more than a short session.

The 330W adapter is needed for full gaming performance, and it's compact for a charger with that output. It still weighs 750g (1.65lb), though, so carrying the Aorus Master 16 with its charger pushes the total travel weight well over 3kg.

That’s manageable for a high-performance gaming laptop, but it's enough extra weight that I'd only pack the charger when I expected to game or run heavier workloads.

USB-C charging is useful when you want to work on documents, browse or take calls without carrying the 330W adapter. It also works well for a docked desk setup, and the laptop is much quieter when running from a smaller USB-C charger. The limit is performance: the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 drops to Balanced mode or lower on USB-C, and gaming performance falls far enough that the 330W adapter is still required for serious play.

That means USB-C is useful for light productivity and top-ups, not as a proper replacement for the main charger. A future driver update may improve battery life, but as tested, the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 may be easy enough to transport, but it’s not a laptop that can be relied on away from a charger.

  • Battery life and charging score: 2.5 / 5

Should you buy the Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2?

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 scorecard

Attributes

Notes

Rating

Value

Expensive, and the fan noise and low battery life make the price harder to justify

3.5 / 5

Specs

High-end CPU and GPU, excellent OLED display, useful ports and a 99Wh battery

4.5 / 5

Design

Slim for the hardware inside, but little details like the port layout feel unpolished

4 / 5

Performance

High end 1600p gaming and creator performance

4.5 / 5

Battery

Poor runtime despite the 99Wh battery, though USB-C charging helps for documents, browsing and calls

2.5 / 5

Overall

A powerful 16-inch OLED gaming laptop, but fan noise and battery life limit its appeal

4 / 5

Buy it if…

You want fast 1600p gaming in a 16-inch laptop
The 175W RTX 5090 has the graphics performance to make good use of the 2560 x 1600 OLED display, especially if you want detailed settings, ray tracing or very fast frame rates.

You want one laptop for gaming and demanding work
The Ryzen 9 9955HX3D and RTX 5090 give the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 the CPU and graphics performance for video editing, rendering and other heavy workloads.

You want flagship performance without an 18-inch chassis
The Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 is still heavy, especially with the charger, but it's slimmer and easier to move around than larger desktop-replacement gaming laptops.

Don’t buy it if...

You need quiet operation
The fans are loud, ramp up quickly and have a high-pitched note, so it’s not great for use in quiet spaces or gaming without a headset.

You need long battery life
The 99Wh battery doesn't translate into good unplugged runtime, so look elsewhere if you need to operate away from a charger.

You want a more premium physical design
While the Aorus 16 Gen 2 is functional enough, the design downsides are hard to ignore given the price.

Gigabyte Aorus Master 16: Also consider

If my Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 review has you considering other high-end gaming laptops, these are some other options that are worth a look:

Alienware 16 Area-51
A larger and more polished 16-inch gaming laptop with high end performance, a premium-feeling design and better port placement. It's worth considering if you like the Aorus Master 16 Gen 2's gaming grunt but don't need the slimmer chassis.

Take a look at the full Alienware 16 Area-51 review

Razer Blade 16 (2025)
A premium RTX 5090 gaming laptop with a 16-inch OLED display, a thin aluminium chassis and decent battery life. It's a good choice if build quality and portability matter more than raw performance for the money.

Check out the full Razer Blade 16 (2025) review

How I tested

  • I tested the Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 for two weeks
  • I used it on a desk, with an external display and while travelling
  • I used it for 2560 x 1600 gaming, productivity work, video editing and battery testing

I ran the Gigabyte Aorus Master 16 Gen 2 through the usual TechRadar benchmark suite, as well as using it for day-to-day work at a desk and on the go.

I tested gaming performance at the native 2560 x 1600 resolution, checked performance across the laptop's main power profiles and used it for office work, video editing, external display use and general media playback.

I used the TechRadar movie test for assessing battery life during video playback, plus web-browsing and productivity battery tests to see how long the Aorus lasted away from the charger.

I also tested USB-C charging with a dock and USB-C chargers, and checked how performance changed compared with the 330W adapter. Fan noise, thermal comfort, Wi-Fi, Ethernet, sleep behaviour and Gigabyte's GiMate software were also assessed during normal use.

Read more about how we test.

  • First reviewed in July 2026

'We just figured having an AI day would be appropriate': how the National Day Calendar founder bypassed his own 30,000-application queue to make it happen

It all started with an email. Someone was reminding me about the fast-approaching National AI Day. I never finished the email but quickly wondered, "National AI Day, is that really a thing?" It is, and I found the man responsible for it.

"We have about 30,000 applications a year for new national days. From that, we have a committee of people look at them," said National Day Calendar.com founder Marlo Anderson when I reached him by phone just two days before the big July 16th event.

National AI Day, though, did not follow that traditional route when it was designated a day on their calendar in 2025. Anderson told me he does a lot of AI work with the business and has been using AI for 20 years, so he did something slightly unusual.

"We just figured having an AI day would be appropriate," he said and admitted he did the designating.

It is not the normal process, though Anderson believes, but could not specifically recall, that people had suggested the day in the past.

You made this list

It is a big deal to get added. After all, National Day Calendar only adds a handful each year and, as Anderson admitted, some already believe they have too many "National Days" (he noted that he might be among that cohort, too).

Still, Anderson, who founded National Calendar Day in 2013, believes AI warranted it. He explained that it's already responsible for much of the "mundane process" work they do, including uploading the National Day Calendar's daily videos to a platform called Video Elephant. They were uploading 100 clips as he spoke to me. Doing it by hand would take two weeks. With AI, "just one day or two."

If we have an agentic AI that can handle that workload for us, we should probably do it.

National Day Calendar Founder Marlo Anderson

As for which AI platforms Anderson uses, he seems to spread it around, telling me that Claude is used for app development and website maintenance, ChatGPT Voice for brainstorming projects, and Gemini in National Day Calendar offices in North Dakota.

Anderson is a firm believer in the power and potential of AI for both his own work and as an agent for good in the world. Locally, he told me, "If we have an agentic AI that can handle that workload for us, we should probably do it."

National Anti-AI Day

National Day Calendar Founder Marlo Anderson

National Day Calendar Founder Marlo Anderson (Image credit: National Day Calendar / Marlo Anderson)

When I asked abotu the AI backlash — a recent study found 40% of surveyed peopel are limiting use of AI — Anderson told me, "We talk about it all the time," but added, "We get backlash on National Cheese Sandwich Day and French Fry Day," which is to say, he's not sure if the backlash is any greater than for other oddball National Days.

More seriously, Anderson is well aware of the debate about AI's impact on the environment but is also convinced the positives far outweigh the negatives.

"I also understand there’s a lot of benefit," like the ability to find medical cures. They're making, he told me, "remarkable progress right now" in medicine.

He then spun out an analogy about horses and cars. A million hours ago (in 1912), most people were still riding horses and, it turns out, they were pretty dangerous, too. Early cars, with the lack of traffic infrastructure, weren't much better, but "most people would agree a car is a better way to travel," he said, adding that we're currently "at the same crossroads with Artificial Intelligence."

Ultimately, Anderson's decision to create National AI Day was rooted in its current impact.

20 years from now, no one will know or talk about goat yoga, but 20 years from now, they will be talking about AI.

Marlo Anderson

In 2025, "the conversation had heightened to a point where probably everyone knows about AI, at least in the US. Everyone is probably using it, whether they know it or not," he told me.

It's also about AI's long-term prospects.

When goat yoga was a big thing, Anderson explained, they had a lot of requests to make it a day. "There's no day because we assumed it would be a fad [he was quick to add he’s sure it’s wonderful]. 20 years from now, no one will know or talk about goat yoga, but 20 years from now, they will be talking about AI."

So happy National AI Day. Feel free to celebrate on July 16 by using it, deriding it, or ignoring it altogether.

This sleek Japanese power strip finally fixes your office desk's ugliest pain point

  • Kokuyo Energy Line replaces discrete sockets with one continuous slot that takes up to five two-prong plugs anywhere along its length
  • It won a 2025 Good Design Award thanks to its accessibility, style, and attention to detail
  • The Kokuyo Energy Line also offers an inclusive design that allows users with upper limb disabilities to easily use the product with just 1 hand

Kokuyo is a well-known Japanese furniture giant that focuses on both functionality and aesthetics across its furniture and interior design lines.

It regularly collects Good Design Awards even as it runs a public "live office" where users can test out hardware in a workplace setting, in addition to HOWS DESIGN, an inclusive-design program that has birthed multiple successes.

The Kokuyo Energy Line power strip is one such offering: it comes with a Good Design Award (2025) and is influenced by the HOWS DESIGN program.

A power strip that blends focus on design, functionality

Modern work desks are a far cry from their older, mundane alternatives at the workplace or at home, offering a degree of customizability that few could have foreseen.

Amid all the upgrades one sees in monitor arms, cable management, electric desks, and even headphone stands, one thing often remains an aesthetic (and often functional) outlier: the modern power strip.

The Kokuyo Energy Line aims to fix this by offering a single continuous power socket that can house up to 5 appliances, with a plug-anywhere design and wiring concealed under the table via a minimalist clamp.

The Kokuyo Energy Line clamped to a table

The Kokuyo Energy Line clamped to a table (Image credit: Kokuyo)

It also leverages an inclusive design that allows users with limb disabilities to use it easily with one hand, as demonstrated during the company's inclusive design workshop at its "HOWS PARK" diversity office.

The Kokuyo Energy Line clocks in at about 7,000 Yen (~$50) and comes in both black and white colors to suit different themes. It aims to eliminate cable clutter on one's desk with a one-size-fits-all approach.

Despite the advances made, the Kokuyo Energy Line also comes with its limitations: the design means it does not accommodate heavy-duty appliances, with a 5-device limit and a 1500W power ceiling, which may leave users who use high-end computers or multi-monitor setups looking for something different.

Unlike competing power strips, it also lacks a surge protector or grounding support, which limits its use to electronics that use a 2-prong cable.

With no support for 230V power cables or sockets and no plans currently to incorporate them, the Kokuyo Energy Line is an impressive but geographically limited power strip offering that suits the company's target audience looking for an aesthetic upgrade, albeit with serious limitations that could see it not be in play for more demanding consumers in terms of sockets and/or power.

Quordle hints and answers for Wednesday, July 15 (game #1633)

Looking for a different day?

A new Quordle puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Tuesday's puzzle instead then click here: Quordle hints and answers for Tuesday, July 14 (game #1632).

Quordle was one of the original Wordle alternatives and is still going strong now more than 1,500 games later. It offers a genuine challenge, though, so read on if you need some Quordle hints today — or scroll down further for the answers.

Enjoy playing word games? You can also check out my NYT Connections today and NYT Strands today pages for hints and answers for those puzzles, while Marc's Wordle today column covers the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about Quordle today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

Quordle today (game #1633) — hint #1 — Vowels

How many different vowels are in Quordle today?

The number of different vowels in Quordle today is 4*.

* Note that by vowel we mean the five standard vowels (A, E, I, O, U), not Y (which is sometimes counted as a vowel too).

Quordle today (game #1633) — hint #2 — repeated letters

Do any of today's Quordle answers contain repeated letters?

The number of Quordle answers containing a repeated letter today is 0.

Quordle today (game #1633) — hint #3 — uncommon letters

Do the letters Q, Z, X or J appear in Quordle today?

• Yes. One of Q, Z, X or J appears among today's Quordle answers.

Quordle today (game #1633) — hint #4 — starting letters (1)

Do any of today's Quordle puzzles start with the same letter?

The number of today's Quordle answers starting with the same letter is 2.

If you just want to know the answers at this stage, simply scroll down. If you're not ready yet then here's one more clue to make things a lot easier:

Quordle today (game #1633) — hint #5 — starting letters (2)

What letters do today's Quordle answers start with?

• P

• B

• B

• S

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

Quordle today (game #1633) — the answers

Quordle answers for game 1633 on a yellow background

(Image credit: Merriam-Webster)

The answers to today's Quordle, game #1633, are…

  • PROXY
  • BRICK
  • BROTH
  • SURGE

As befits the appearance of a rare letter it took me a while to find the word PROXY.

Instead, I was trying every letter combination left to me, which is how I ended up with “grovy”.

Daily Sequence today (game #1633) — the answers

Quordle Daily Sequence answers for game 1633 on a yellow background

(Image credit: Merriam-Webster)

The answers to today's Quordle Daily Sequence, game #1633, are…

  • FUZZY
  • THERE
  • TEMPO
  • CAUSE

Quordle answers: The past 20

  • Quordle #1632, Tuesday, 14 July: EBONY, AVOID, RODEO, CUTIE
  • Quordle #1631, Monday, 13 July: VOICE, BISON, BURNT, BUILT
  • Quordle #1630, Sunday, 12 July: STAIN, BINGO, LARVA, DICEY
  • Quordle #1629, Saturday, 11 July: WORTH, PRONG, DINGO, DRUID
  • Quordle #1628, Friday, 10 July: GREET, STEAK, DUSKY, HAUTE
  • Quordle #1627, Thursday, 9 July: CRUMP, PHONE, SHINY, STONY
  • Quordle #1626, Wednesday, 8 July: GHOST, TREND, EXALT, ALONG
  • Quordle #1625, Tuesday, 7 July: ARRAY, SUITE, KIOSK, BOULE
  • Quordle #1624, Monday, 6 July: TRAWL, SPICE, PIANO, SHARK
  • Quordle #1623, Sunday, 5 July: PINEY, SWOON, TITLE, PINTO
  • Quordle #1622, Saturday, 4 July: ARGUE, MOTEL, OPERA, TRUCE
  • Quordle #1621, Friday, 3 July: AVERT, MOTOR, MANIC, WORDY
  • Quordle #1620, Thursday, 2 July: BULKY, PARSE, BELOW, MOVIE
  • Quordle #1619, Wednesday, 1 July: EASEL, OTTER, LYRIC, SHACK
  • Quordle #1618, Tuesday, 30 June: HALVE, DRYER, THERE, MINTY
  • Quordle #1617, Monday, 29 June: SLURP, CRACK, CRANK, PHONY
  • Quordle #1616, Sunday, 28 June: RUPEE, TOPAZ, FULLY, BEING
  • Quordle #1615, Saturday, 27 June: PRINT, MARRY, SADLY, BICEP
  • Quordle #1614, Friday, 26 June: JUICE, ARRAY, BONEY, SKIFF
  • Quordle #1613, Thursday, 25 June: SHELF, TAWNY, HYPER, SOLVE

NYT Connections hints and answers for Wednesday, July 15 (game #1130)

Looking for a different day?

A new NYT Connections puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Tuesday's puzzle instead then click here: NYT Connections hints and answers for Tuesday, July 14 (game #1129).

Good morning! Let's play Connections, the NYT's clever word game that challenges you to group answers in various categories. It can be tough, so read on if you need Connections hints.

What should you do once you've finished? Why, play some more word games of course. I've also got daily Strands hints and answers and Quordle hints and answers articles if you need help for those too, while Marc's Wordle today page covers the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about NYT Connections today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

NYT Connections today (game #1130) - today's words

NYT Connections hints for game 1130 on a purple background

(Image credit: New York Times)

Today's NYT Connections words are…

  • RACKET
  • FOOTBALL
  • WIGGLE
  • BAR
  • HEAD
  • BENCH
  • ELBOW
  • SHOE
  • EXTREME
  • BREATHING
  • MOTOR
  • COURT
  • CORSET
  • WATER
  • TRIBUNAL
  • BASEBALL
  • GLOVE

NYT Connections today (game #1130) - hint #1 - group hints

What are some clues for today's NYT Connections groups?

  • YELLOW: Tell it to the judge
  • GREEN: All need to be tied
  • BLUE: Types of competitive activity
  • PURPLE: Add a word that rhymes with “boom”

Need more clues?

We're firmly in spoiler territory now, but read on if you want to know what the four theme answers are for today's NYT Connections puzzles…

NYT Connections today (game #1130) - hint #2 - group answers

What are the answers for today's NYT Connections groups?

  • YELLOW: TERMS FOR THE LEGAL SYSTEM
  • GREEN: THINGS WITH LACES
  • BLUE: KINDS OF SPORTS
  • PURPLE: WORDS BEFORE "ROOM" TO INDICATE EXTRA SPACE

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

NYT Connections today (game #1130) - the answers

NYT Connections answers for game 1130 on a purple background

(Image credit: New York Times)

The answers to today's Connections, game #1130, are…

  • YELLOW: TERMS FOR THE LEGAL SYSTEM: BAR, BENCH, COURT, TRIBUNAL
  • GREEN: THINGS WITH LACES: BASEBALL GLOVE, CORSET, FOOTBALL, SHOE
  • BLUE: KINDS OF SPORTS: EXTREME, MOTOR, RACKET, WATER
  • PURPLE: WORDS BEFORE "ROOM" TO INDICATE EXTRA SPACE: BREATHING, ELBOW, HEAD, WIGGLE
  • My rating: Hard
  • My score: Perfect

Despite not making any mistakes I am classifying this game as tricky, because I came close to an error in collecting four unrelated sporting things.

THINGS WITH LACES also favors anyone familiar with FOOTBALL, as my mind went to soccer balls — which haven’t had laces since the 1960s.

I also got lucky in spotting the purple group after thinking all of the things that WIGGLE could be connected to and saying “wiggle room” to myself. I hate the idea of being in tight, crowded spots, so wiggle room is always on my mind.

Yesterday's NYT Connections answers (Tuesday, July 14, 2026, game #1129)

  • YELLOW: CONTRACT: AGREEMENT, BARGAIN, DEAL, UNDERSTANDING
  • GREEN: EDIT MENU OPTIONS: COPY, CUT, DELETE, PASTE
  • BLUE: KINDS OF BASKETS: EASTER, GROCERY, LAUNDRY, PICNIC
  • PURPLE: SYMBOLIZED WITH ARROWS: RECYCLING, SHUFFLE, THIS SIDE UP, U-TURN

What is NYT Connections?

NYT Connections is one of several increasingly popular word games made by the New York Times. It challenges you to find groups of four items that share something in common, and each group has a different difficulty level: green is easy, yellow a little harder, blue often quite tough and purple usually very difficult.

On the plus side, you don't technically need to solve the final one, as you'll be able to answer that one by a process of elimination. What's more, you can make up to four mistakes, which gives you a little bit of breathing room.

It's a little more involved than something like Wordle, however, and there are plenty of opportunities for the game to trip you up with tricks. For instance, watch out for homophones and other word games that could disguise the answers.

It's playable for free via the NYT Games site on desktop or mobile.

NYT Strands hints and answers for Wednesday, July 15 (game #864)

Looking for a different day?

A new NYT Strands puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Tuesday's puzzle instead then click here: NYT Strands hints and answers for Tuesday, July 14 (game #863).

Strands is the NYT's latest word game after the likes of Wordle, Spelling Bee and Connections – and it's great fun. It can be difficult, though, so read on for my Strands hints.

Want more word-based fun? Then check out my NYT Connections today and Quordle today pages for hints and answers for those games, and Marc's Wordle today page for the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about NYT Strands today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

NYT Strands today (game #864) - hint #1 - today's theme

What is the theme of today's NYT Strands?

Today's NYT Strands theme is… Rose-colored glasses

NYT Strands today (game #864) - hint #2 - clue words

Play any of these words to unlock the in-game hints system.

  • QUIT
  • MARKET
  • MAIN
  • PLACE
  • PLINTH
  • RELICS

NYT Strands today (game #864) - hint #3 - spangram letters

How many letters are in today's spangram?

Spangram has 11 letters

NYT Strands today (game #864) - hint #4 - spangram position

What are two sides of the board that today's spangram touches?

First side: bottom, 3rd column

Last side: top, 4th column

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

NYT Strands today (game #864) - the answers

NYT Strands answers for game 864 on a blue background

(Image credit: New York Times)

The answers to today's Strands, game #864, are…

  • QUIXOTIC
  • IDEALISTIC
  • ROMANTIC
  • IMPRACTICAL
  • SPANGRAM: PIEINTHESKY
  • My rating: Hard
  • My score: 1 hint

Just four long words made up today’s game, but that didn’t make the search any easier.

I am more familiar with a slight variation on today’s theme — rose-tinted spectacles — which I had viewed as meaning to look favorably on something you are biased towards (such as the fortunes of your team). But the words here leaned more towards fanaticism.

Regardless of interpretation I needed a hint to get going and was rewarded with QUIXOTIC, a word I would have failed to see otherwise. From here I found the other two words with a T-I-C ending, before the spangram helped me to locate IMPRACTICAL.

Yesterday's NYT Strands answers (Tuesday, July 14, game #863)

  • CHAIR
  • ROCKER
  • BEANBAG
  • OTTOMAN
  • RECLINER
  • THRONE
  • SPANGRAM: HAVEASEAT

What is NYT Strands?

Strands is the NYT's not-so-new-any-more word game, following Wordle and Connections. It's now a fully fledged member of the NYT's games stable that has been running for a year and which can be played on the NYT Games site on desktop or mobile.

I've got a full guide to how to play NYT Strands, complete with tips for solving it, so check that out if you're struggling to beat it each day.

Inside Samsung Display's secret labs, where it builds and stress-tests next-gen displays — and says it's ready for Apple to launch a foldable: 'We mean it, we love other companies to join this market'

The metal ball dropped 40 centimeters onto a hair-thin flexible Samsung display with a resounding, cringeworthy clunk, but it did not break, and yet that wasn’t the most remarkable thing. It was that I was the one dropping the ball, using one of Samsung Display’s own pieces of testing equipment, and I was doing so inside Samsung Display headquarters, a place where no media has gone before.

I’d come to South Korea for a wide-ranging Samsung Electronics product briefing and tours of its massive Gumi Digital City Factory and this first-ever look inside Samsung Display. With Samsung Unpacked now just days away (July 22) and new foldables anticipated, the visit would prove more than illuminating.

Samsung Display Factory Tour
They let me set and drop a steel ball onto a flexible display.Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future

While obviously connected and working closely to deliver products like the Galaxy S26 Ultra and Galaxy Z Fold 7 and Z Flip 7 (and whatever comes next), they’re also separate, working in a partnership that also allows Samsung Display to supply displays to, for instance, Apple (more on those Apple folding phone rumors later).

Samsung Display is a display specialist operating in a vast and in some ways nondescript (and in other ways beautiful) factory that is just a stone’s throw away from its nearest competitor, LG Display, which works in South Korea with its partner LG Electronics in a similar fashion.

Most of Samsung Display's buildings are unattractive, brutalist monoliths, but the interiors feature some eye-popping examples of their work. Ironically, we were initially greeted by a conference-hall-sized display featuring our names, which Samsung Display did not build. But on an adjacent wall was an animated edifice of phones, tablets, TVs, and other screens that all tell the story of Samsung Display technology, one that has taken it from tiny feature-phone displays and tube TVs to the vast OLED panels and flexible displays featured in the latest foldables.

Samsung Display Factory Tour
This massive display offered some cool 3D effects but was not built by Samsung Display.Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Displays on this wall shifted in and out for a truly mesmerizing visual experience.Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Screen sizes ranged from phones to TVsFuture
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Yes, Samsung Display made all these screens.Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
A little bit of screen history.Future

The ball-drop demo was part of a whistle-stop tour of Samsung Display's latest innovations and stress tests. I only dropped the 21.7-gram ball on the panel after watching a Samsung Display tech do it multiple times from a height of 30 centimeters on a 220lb machine that Samsung Display had moved into this small room just for this one demonstration.

However, Samsung seemed in the mood to open up, and we were soon visiting multiple rooms where Samsung Display puts panels through the wringer.

Samsung Display Factory Tour
Ever wonder how Sasmung Display makes all those screens?Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
It's all about layersFuture
Samsung Display Factory Tour
And building big OLED panels...Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
That you can slice into many, many smaller screens.Future

Following our guides, we hopped on a special elevator and soon were standing outside a 24-hour lab that’s running tests even when Samsung employees are asleep. “Only authorized technicians get in,” our guide warned us before unlocking the door with her ID and ushering us inside.

Many of these tests Samsung Display runs are designed to test “how long can I use it?” So, there are the folding and unfolding tests to the tune of thousands of times a day, and stress tests that heat the panels up to 60 degrees Celsius or cool them to minus 20 degrees Celsius. Many of the large gray or beige metal boxes where the tests are performed are sealed, so technicians must track the tests via video feeds from internal cameras.

Samsung Display Factory Tour
We got a close look at the display test labs, a place where no media has tread before.Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future

But as I learned while touring other Samsung facilities, the company likes to automate these processes, so it’s often an unemotional computer that will recognize and report a failure.

Our next stop was another few levels down (B5, to be precise) where we saw image quality and reflection testing. The latter was interesting because, as is often the case, Samsung Display built a special rig, this one a barium sulfate-coated contraption to shine ultra-bright light on the panel and then use a spectrometer to read the light refracted back. For foldable displays, they even check how light bounces off the crease, which will, of course, affect visibility of the crease.

Samsung Display is also where they’re unsurprisingly pushing the boundaries of display technology. Company execs showed us a series of displays that, I think, speak to the future of many of our display-worthy electronics.

Samsung Display Factory Tour
And we got an up-close look at some cool display concepts.Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future

The first display, a visual trick of sorts, may have been my favorite. It looked like a small, bezel-less OLED screen showing off the inside of an ornate cathedral. However, when I got close and shifted my view to the left or right, I realized it was two displays sandwiched on top of each other; a small portion of the image was on the smaller display, and behind it was the complete image. Head-on, they seamlessly blend together.

Samsung Display Factory Tour
How do you make two screens look like one? Essentially, remove the bezels.Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future

This optical illusion only works because Samsung Display has figured out how to reduce its tolerances so much that the small gap necessary for electrodes and encapsulation is almost zero, meaning that the top display has no visible black border around it.

Samsung Display Factory Tour
Samsung Display is bending, curving, stretching, shaping, and rolling OLEDS in all kinds of remarkable ways,Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Many of these concepts could make it to future devices.Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
A speaker with a flexible display? Why not?Future
Samsung Display Factory Tour
Oddly shaped OLEDS are alreayd appearing out in the wild.Future

The other 7.2-inch displays were of the flexible variety. We saw screens flex, we saw them roll away, but the most interesting was the hybrid: a foldable and rollable screen, something that’s never been tried before.

As for when these displays might come to consumer devices, that’s hard to say, but it does seem inevitable. After all, I first saw Samsung flexible displays more than a decade ago, and now they’re part of a growing legion of consumer-grade foldable phones.

Display executive perspective

Later, we moved to another part of the vast facility for a sit-down with Samsung Display executives

Byung Duk Yang, EVP at Core Component Technology Team, Samsung Electronics and Kyung-jin Yoo EVP & Head of Mobile Display Product Development Team, Samsung Display.

Unquestionably, the bleeding edge of the work they do continues to be the foldable phone partnership with Samsung Electronics, where these innovations presented a series of unusual challenges, many of which the firm has overcome over seven generations of foldable devices (and whatever we expect to come next week at Samsung Unpacked).

“The two companies are always thinking about how we can continue to improve the usability of the foldable,” said Byung Duk Yang.

Samsung Display Factory Tour

Byung Duk Yang, Samsung Display EVP & Core Component Technology Team (Image credit: Future)

Yang talked about how these flexible devices and their folding screens introduced diverse user paradigms. Some of the work they do is figuring out how to handle challenges like drops, pressure, and collisions with heavy objects.

But it sounds like it’s been rewarding work and the company is undoubtedly committed to the foldable space. “The future of the foldable device is very promising,” said Byung Duk Yang. But when we asked about how soon some of those fold and slide screens might be in our hands, Samsung Display execs cautioned us, “We have to consider the real-world usage pattern. The display might be ready, but we should consider many aspects of the usage.

Samsung Display Factory Tour

The screen that welcomed us (Image credit: Future)

When we have confidence that we can deliver meaningful innovation to the user, then every other aspect of technology are ready, then we are going to list the product,” said Byung Duk Yang, who added that as an engineer, he knows they’re not ready.

We are exploring and we are thinking, when and how to implement the privacy display into foldable display.

Byung Duk Yang, Samsung Display EVP & Core Component Technology Team

When I asked, though, if there were any intrinsic barriers in folding displays to the introduction of the privacy display — a breakout feature for the Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra — the answer surprised me.

Samsung Display Factory Tour

Kyung-jin Yoo EVP & Head of Mobile Display Product Development Team, Samsung Display (Image credit: Future)

“We are exploring and we are thinking, when and how to implement the privacy display into foldable display. Because we know many people love the feature. We are thinking, considering,” smiled Yang.

Speaking of innovation, the Samsung Display execs revealed that, with the upcoming new line of foldables, it's introducing a new material, or rather, doubling the use of a material generally associated with strength and not flexibility: Titanium.

Samsung Display Flex Titanium Technology

All the layers in Samsung Display's Flex Titanium Technology for its folding devices. (Image credit: Samsung Display)

Samsung Displays described it as "Flex Titanium Technology," and what it means is that upcoming foldable Galaxy phones, which the company will reveal next week, will feature not one but two titanium layers.

One is an update to the relatively rigid one that's existed in previous Galaxy Fold models, with a new, special structure at the fold or crease to give flexibility and reduce crease visibility. The second, new, almost paper-like titanium alloy film replaces the polymer layer below the OLED in previous foldable devices and sits on top of the more rigid titanium plate. It's both thinner than that old polymer layer and, Samsung claims, more resilient.

"Polymer layers are good for flexibility but [we] want to minimize permanent deformation; titanium alloy has a much better quality to reduce permanent deformation,” they explained.

To help us visualize the new flexible display construction, Samsung Display brought out a bread-box-sized diorama, with each display layer hanging inside like a curtain. The new titanium polymer layer felt smooth, thin, light, and quite strong.

Samsung Display Factory Tour

Byung Duk Yang, Samsung Display EVP & Core Component Technology Team (Image credit: Future)

Naturally, we had to ask about Apple’s rumored foldable phone, which may be called the iPhone Ultra, and how Samsung Display might supply the screen. They wouldn’t comment on the rumors but did share, “I think it’s more than welcome because when the other competitors and other companies join the market, this market will be standard and the owners will increase….We really welcome the big competitor joining this market…

We mean it, we love other companies to join this market.”

Samsung Display Factory Tour

If you look closely, you can see we are all making heart signs with our fingers. (Image credit: Future)

Samsung has a 16TB PCIe 6.0 SSD coming soon with read/write speeds of 28.4GBps and 21.9GBps respectively — but you won't be able to use it anyway

  • Samsung's PM1763 entered mass production as the fastest SSD on paper, focusing solely on AI data centers as its key market
  • The PM1763 offers read and write speeds of 28.4GB/s and 21.9GB/s respectively, essentially twice that of its predecessor, the PM1753
  • The drive can't physically be used in consumer-grade PCs, adhering to an EDSFF-only form factor while also requiring PCI-E 6.0 channels, something that has yet to be available to end-users

Samsung has announced it is now mass-producing the PM1763 SSD, which aims to replace the PM1753 as its highest-end enterprise-class SSD for AI customers.

The PM1763 offers read speeds of 28,400 MB/s and write speeds of 21,900 MB/s, leveraging PCIe 6.0 connections.

It uses the company's 9th-generation V-NAND, along with a 4nm controller, to deliver these speeds even as PCI-E 6.0 offers double the per-lane bandwidth available to users.

A very fast SSD that narrowly beats the competition where it matters

Samsung's offering is, at the time of writing, without doubt, the fastest SSD available to enterprise clients on paper, but it does have a few caveats.

The company claims the PM1763 offers "industry-leading performance", and that is definitely true in both the read and write departments, especially the latter, but it barely ekes out a win in the former over the Micron 9650.

The Micron 9650 offers read speeds of 28,000 MB/s and much slower write speeds of 14,000 MB/s sequentially, also leveraging PCI-E 6.0 to deliver such performance.

Samsung's SSD is decisively faster on another metric that is key for AI customers, however: it offers 6.92 MIOPS in sequential read speed versus Micron's 5.5 MIOPS.

Micron's offering, however, has already been in mass production since February 2026 and is expected to enjoy greater availability for the rest of the year than Samsung's enterprise flagship.

Samsung's offering also incorporates other gains: it delivers power efficiency that the semiconductor giant says is 1.8x better than the PM1753 and supports both post-quantum cryptography (PQC) algorithms and the TEE Device Interface Security Protocol (TDISP).

It must be noted that both Micron and Samsung's offerings are only part of the puzzle, as enterprise consumers are currently gearing up for the next generation of server hardware. Both Nvidia's Vera platform and AMD's EPYC "Venice" offer PCI-E 6.0 connectivity that these drives need to run at maximum speeds.

One would expect similar gains soon in the consumer market, where Samsung's Gen 5-based 9100 Pro is one of the few that currently rule the roost with advertised read and write speeds of 14,800 MB/s and 13,400 MB/s, respectively, but that might be wishful thinking at best.

The gains from the PM1763 are not expected to trickle down to consumers for a multitude of reasons. Primarily, PCI-E 6.0-supporting hardware does not currently exist at the consumer end, even as datacenters begin to adopt it.

The bleeding-edge storage on offer is also expected to be prohibitively expensive, pitting consumers against datacenter clients with seemingly limitless pockets for now, and industry figures such as Phison's CEO are already warning that AI demand will keep NAND and DRAM in shortage through 2026; consumer storage is increasingly built from what the data centers do not take.

The PM1763, therefore, at least from an end-user's perspective, might as well be a proof-of-concept SSD; it is unlikely to make its way onto their desktop anytime soon, and they are unlikely to be able to afford it unless they want to host a data-center-class server at home.

The Gen 6 storage era has arrived, attached to hardware you cannot buy, in a shape you cannot mount, on an interface you do not have, built from NAND that was never going to reach you anyway. Sadly for enthusiasts looking for a faster SSD: The speeds are real. So is the velvet rope.

Quote of the day by Linux creator Linus Torvalds: 'Nvidia has been the single worst company we've ever dealt with' — airing frustrations at walled gardens

For as long as there's been software there has been tension between open source and closed source. The creator of the Linux kernel, software engineer Linus Torvalds, has long been an outspoken advocate for open source environments – while putting the boot into closed source corporate entities who have tried to exploit the ecosystem.

Open for business

During a Q&A at Aalto University, an attendee complained that the Nvidia Optimus chip – a processor that switches between integrated graphics and dedicated graphics – was no longer being supported on Linux.

Quote of the day

This article is part of TechRadar Pro's QOTD project to provide an insight into the minds of the brightest and most recognized figures in the technology industry today and in years gone by. Read the full series here.

That meant that this expensive chip fitted into her Linux laptop was basically useless unless developers worked on a fix by reverse-engineering the process. Torvalds answered by giving Nvidia both barrels – complaining that the company was profiting from the Linux Foundation ecosystem through products like the Tegra chips for Android devices.

At the time, he complained that competitors like Intel and AMD were happy to co-operate with Linux to build native drivers whereas Nvidia would treat its proprietary code as classified material. This exchange culminated with an angry Torvalds flipping Nvidia off to camera.

Turning the tables

The situation today is almost entirely different from that we found nearly 15 years ago. Nvidia has embraced open source with open arms, and has also fully transitioned to open source Linux GPU kernel modules as being the default options as of 2022, pushed under a dual GPL/MIT licence.

With the AI buildout also fully underway, Nvidia has crafted the Linux-based DGX OS for its personal mini supercomputing DGX Spark products. This Ubuntu-based system is designed to work with the entire Nvidia software stack – with this AI layer (including software like CUDA, cuDNN and NCCL) being closed.

Although the battle between open and closed source remains active, Nvidia's reversal signalled that the future of enterprise and AI-centric computing was to be found in open source environments.

Don't forget, you can save 50% on Criterion 4K Blu-rays at Amazon and Barnes & Noble right now — the sale is for a limited time, so don't miss it if you're looking to add to your collection

If you'd missed that the big half-price Criterion Collection 4K Blu-ray sale is back on, then don't worry — you still have a bit of time left to catch it! The official sale runs until July 26. As always, the complete Criterion range is discounted at Barnes & Noble, while a more limited set of discounts is available at Amazon.

View the full Criterion sale at Amazon
View the full Criterion sale at Barnes & Noble

The Amazon sale also has some options that are on sale, but not at the full half price. I'm mainly included Amazon links because some people just lean towards it for convenience, but the B&N sale is where you can fully indulge in building your collection, and to a dangerous degree — my biggest problem with a Criterion sale is always deciding what to limit myself to if I don't want to hit bankruptcy.

I've highlighted 12 discs below that I think are worth checking out from the sale options, but I imagine most collectors will just want to browse everything, which you can do via the links above.

Criterion 4K Blu-ray sale — quick links

Criterion 4K Blu-ray sale: 12 titles I'd recommend

Eyes Wide Shut (the Criterion Collection) [4k Uhd]Save 50%

The Criterion Collection
Eyes Wide Shut

Wall•e (the Criterion Collection) [4k Uhd]Save 50%

The Criterion Collection
Wall•E

The Princess Bride (the Criterion Collection) [4k Uhd]Save 50%

The Criterion Collection
The Princess Bride

No Country for Old Men (the Criterion Collection) [4k Uhd]Save 50%

The Criterion Collection
No Country for Old Men

The Before Trilogy (before Sunrise/before Sunset/before Midnight) (the Criterion Collection)Save 50%

The Criterion Collection
The Before Trilogy (Before Sunrise / Before Sunset / Before Midnight)

Bruce Lee: His Greatest Hits (the Big Boss / Fist of Fury / the Way of the Dragon / Enter the Dragon / Game of Death) (the Criterion Collection)Save 50%

The Criterion Collection
Bruce Lee: His Greatest Hits (The Big Boss / Fist of Fury / the Way of the Dragon / Enter the Dragon / Game of Death)

Sentimental ValueSave 50%

The Criterion Collection
Sentimental Value

Seven SamuraiSave 50%

The Criterion Collection
Seven Samurai

Dazed and ConfusedSave 50%

The Criterion Collection

ThiefSave 50%

The Criterion Collection
Thief

After HoursSave 50%

The Criterion Collection
After Hours

The Silence of the LambsSave 50%

The Criterion Collection
The Silence of the Lambs

Germany confirms drone-destroying laser weapon for German Navy by 2029 — 100Kw version will zap 1000+ mph supersonic missiles for $1 a shot

  • Germany advances a Naval laser weapon toward operational deployment by 2029
  • Future 100kW laser aims to counter faster and larger aerial threats
  • More than 1,000 laser shots validated performance during extended naval trials

Germany has confirmed plans to field a high-energy laser weapon aboard naval vessels by 2029, aimed primarily at intercepting drones.

Defense contractors Rheinmetall and MBDA signed a contract in June 2026 worth several hundred million euros to build the complete system.

The program follows years of testing a demonstrator aboard the frigate Sachsen, which fired more than 1,000 shots during trials.

From demonstrator to deployable weapon

The demonstrator currently operates at roughly 20 kilowatts, sufficient for neutralizing small drones and light surface targets near naval vessels.

Future versions are expected to exceed 100 kilowatts, a substantial increase intended to counter larger and considerably faster aerial threats.

During trials, the demonstrator covered roughly 28,000 nautical miles between the Baltic Sea and the Mediterranean over more than a year.

Another testing phase included over 100 live firing events under maritime conditions, examining tracking accuracy, reaction speed and engagement performance against fast-moving drones.

“The laser weapon system will provide our personnel deployed on naval vessels with a significantly higher level of protection, particularly when it comes to countering drones,” said Roman Koehne, head of Rheinmetall’s weapons and ammunition division.

Beyond countering drones, engineers hope the technology can eventually intercept guided missiles, rockets, and even artillery shells fired from considerable range.

Company officials say the system also demonstrated the ability to strike targets set against open sky rather than solid terrain.

The British, French and Belgian forces are pursuing similar systems — a broader push toward directed-energy weapons across European navies more generally.

The United Kingdom's Royal Navy, for instance, already plans to install its DragonFire laser weapon aboard a destroyer by 2027.

Similarly, Belgium committed €3.1 billion toward layered air defenses including Skyranger 30 systems, GM200 radars and 10 NASAMS batteries.

Costs, sovereignty, and unresolved questions

The German program places strong emphasis on domestic supply chains, with serial production expected largely to occur within Germany.

MBDA Deutschland's managing director, Thomas Gottschild, described the containerized system as an affordable option for guarding ports and other secure facilities.

Neither company has disclosed a final per-unit price, leaving open how affordable the weapon will prove across a full production run.

Scaling the laser from 20 kilowatts to more than 100 kilowatts introduces significant thermal and power-generation challenges aboard confined naval platforms.

However, officials believe naval vessels offer sufficient electrical power, cooling capacity, sensors and space needed for the demanding laser weapon systems.

Both companies describe the system's technology readiness as very high, citing more than a year of continuous shipboard testing under real conditions.

Procurement officials have not specified interim milestones, making it still difficult to assess whether the 2029 goal remains realistic at this point.

Further trials remain necessary before procurement, but recent milestones suggest European navies now view directed-energy weapons as practical complements to existing missiles and guns.

Via Defense News

245.76TB Micron 6600 Ion SSD has a staggering 16GB RAM with a $100,000+ price tag, and is 'the one to beat in its class', reviewer says

  • Micron's 6600 ION SSD boosts random write performance with an unusually large onboard memory design
  • Benchmark testing exceeded several official performance specifications during enterprise evaluation
  • Massive 64GB DRAM gives Micron a clear performance advantage over rivals

Micron's new 6600 ION enterprise SSD packs 245.76 TB of QLC flash storage into a single E3.L form-factor drive, and has garnered some high praise in initial reviews.

TweakTown reviewer Jon Coulter awarded the drive a rare 99% score, calling it "the one to beat in its class."

The drive stands out mainly because of its unusually large 64GB of onboard DRAM, an uncommon amount for this capacity class.

Why more onboard memory changes everything

Most ultra-high-capacity SSDs near 256TB, like the DapuStor 245.76TB PCIe Gen5 SSD, use a 16:1 ratio of NAND to DRAM, resulting in only 16GB onboard at this capacity point.

Micron instead uses a 4:1 ratio, giving the 6600 ION a full 64GB of onboard DRAM for indexing random write operations. This larger memory pool lets the drive sustain around 50,000 random write IOPS at queue depth 256, exceeding its 42,000 IOPS spec.

By comparison, competing 245.76TB drives with a 64K IU reportedly manage only about 15,000 IOPS for random writes under similar test conditions.

That performance is reportedly more than three times faster than rival 245.76TB drives built with a smaller 64K indirection unit.

Sequential performance also reaches up to 13,900 MB/s read, and 3,159 MB/s write, both slightly above Micron's factory specification claims.

Random read performance hits roughly 1.78 million IOPS, matching Micron's published specification for the drive exactly under identical test conditions.

These results were measured using an Intel Xeon w7-2495X processor on a PCIe Gen5 platform running Ubuntu Linux, confirming the figures under real enterprise conditions.

Pricing and practical limitations remain unclear

Despite the strong benchmark results, Micron has not published an official price for the 6600 ION at the time of writing.

Reports suggesting a price beyond $100,000 have circulated online, though no listing confirms that specific figure at the time of writing.

Enterprise SSDs at this capacity typically sell through direct vendor contracts rather than public retail listings, making pricing hard to verify.

The drive carries a 5-year limited warranty and supports major operating systems including Linux, Windows Server, and VMware ESXi across enterprise deployments.

It offers a 1-drive-write-per-day endurance rating, a modest figure that still fits typical enterprise storage workloads at this scale.

The drive also includes power-failure protection and full data-path protection, standard features expected in enterprise-grade storage designed for continuous operation.

The benchmark numbers alone do not confirm real-world value, since pricing and support costs remain unknown.

Whether the 6600 ION genuinely leads its category depends heavily on how competitors price similar high-capacity QLC drives over the coming months.

Until official pricing becomes available, claims about its market position should be treated as preliminary rather than fully confirmed.

How to watch MLB All-Star Game 2026 — watch baseball online from anywhere

The National League will aim to claim back-to-back wins over the American League for the first time since 2012 in the 2026 MLB All-Star Game at Citizens Bank Park, Philadelphia. Below we have all the start times and how to watch the 2026 MLB All-Star Game live streams online, on TV and from anywhere.

After the American League won nine successive All-Star Games between 2013 and 2022, the National League has turned the tables in recent years with victories in 2023 and 2025. Their triumph 12 months ago in Atlanta came in dramatic circumstances as they won the first tiebreaker in the history of the All-Star Game, with the Philadelphia Phillies' Kyle Schwarber hitting three home runs and being named MVP.

Schwarber is one of six Phillies players ready to shine on home turf at Citizens Bank Park, including National League starting pitcher Cristopher Sánchez, but there are many more who are playing in their first Midsummer Classic. In total, 29 players will make their All-Star Game debuts in Philadelphia, including Toronto Blue Jays starting pitcher Dylan Cease and New York Yankees pitcher Cam Schlittler, both representing the American League.

There will also be emotional appearances from more experienced stars, including the American League's Mike Trout of the Los Angeles Angels, who will appear in his 12th All-Star Game less than 50 miles from his hometown of Millville, New Jersey. Several of his teammates and opponents are from much further afield, with 22 internationally born players set to be involved.

Read on below for how to watch 2026 MLB All-Star Game live streams online and from anywhere.

Use a VPN to watch any MLB All-Star Game stream

If you're away from home while the MLB All-Star Game is on, you may find yourself unable to access your usual streaming services due to geo-restrictions. Luckily, there’s an easy solution.

Downloading a VPN allows you to stream geo-blocked services online, no matter where you are. It's a simple bit of software that changes your IP address, meaning that you can access content just as if you were at home.

🟩 NordVPN – get the world's best VPN

Not having a VPN is like leaving your front door wide open in a busy city – anyone can walk right in and take a peek.

TechRadar regularly reviews all the biggest and best VPN providers and NordVPN is our #1 choice.

Up to 75% off today
3 extra months free
Unlocks all necessary streaming services

Get NordVPN and live stream the MLB All-Star game from anywhere.View Deal

How to watch MLB All-Star Game live streams in the US

US flag banner

The 2026 MLB All-Star Game is being televised nationally in the US on FOX and FOX Deportes (Spanish commentary).

Cut the cord and don't have a cable package? You can FOX through an OTT cable TV alternative.

Fox is available on cord-cutters like YouTube TV (free trial), Hulu+Live TV, Sling (select markets), Fubo or DirecTV.

Those looking for a streaming service instead can watch MLB on Fox One (3-day free trial).

Abroad? Use NordVPN to access your FOX stream from anywhere in the world.

How to watch MLB All-Star Game live streams in the UK

UK flag

(Image credit: Other)

In the UK, the 2026 MLB All-Star Game is being shown on TNT Sports. It is scheduled to start at 1am BST on Wednesday, July 15 with coverage on TNT Sports 1.

You can subscribe to TNT Sports and its streaming platform HBO Max for £30.99/month.

NordVPN can unlock your stream if you're abroad today.

How to watch MLB All-Star Game live streams in Canada

Canada

(Image credit: Other)

Sportsnet will be showing the MLB All-Star Game on their platform.

Sportsnet Plus, which costs from CA$29.99/month ($249.99/year), will show all the action.

Those travelling outside the Great White North can use Norton VPN to unlock Sportsnet.

How to watch MLB All-Star Game live streams in Australia

Australian flag

(Image credit: free)

Australian baseball fans will find MLB All-Star Game live streams on ESPN via Foxtel.

MLB fans who don't have access to Foxtel can use Kayo Sports to watch the All-Star Game. Prices start from $35.99/month (7-day free trial for new customers).

Not in Australia right now? You can simply use a VPN like Norton VPN to watch all the action on your Kayo account as if you were back home.

Can I watch MLB All-Star Game baseball on my mobile?

Of course, most broadcasters have streaming services that you can access through mobile apps or via your phone's browser.

You can also stay up-to-date with all things MLB on the official social media channels on YouTube (@MLB) and Instagram (@MLB)

Which players will be in action in the MLB All-Star Game?

American League

Starters
C: Shea Langeliers (ATH)
1B: TBC
2B: Ernie Clement (TOR)
3B: Junior Caminero (TB)
SS: Bobby Witt Jr. (KC)
OF: Mike Trout (LAA)
OF: Riley Greene (DET)
OF: Cody Bellinger (NYY)
DH: Yordan Alvarez (HOU)

Starting Pitcher: Dylan Cease, Blue Jays

National League

C: Drake Baldwin (ATL)
1B: Freddie Freeman (LAD)
2B: Ozzie Albies (ATL)
3B: Max Muncy (LAD)
SS: CJ Abrams (WSH)
OF: Brandon Marsh (PHI)
OF: Juan Soto (NYM)
OF: Andy Pages (LAD)
DH: Shohei Ohtani (LAD)

Starting Pitcher: Cristopher Sanchez, Phillies

We test and review VPN services in the context of legal recreational uses. For example:1. Accessing a service from another country (subject to the terms and conditions of that service).2. Protecting your online security and strengthening your online privacy when abroad.We do not support or condone the illegal or malicious use of VPN services. Consuming pirated content that is paid-for is neither endorsed nor approved by Future Publishing.

RayNeo X3 Pro review: These AI+AR Smart Glasses are technically impressive, but far from easy to use

RayNeo X3 Pro: 30-second review

RayNeo, the AR glasses arm of TCL, launched the X3 Pro globally in December 2025, following a well-received debut in the Chinese market. It represents the company's most ambitious product to date: a standalone pair of AI-powered augmented reality smart glasses that aims to put a useful, persistent digital layer over your view of the world, without requiring you to carry a tethered compute unit.

The headline hardware is the dual-eye full-colour MicroLED display, powered by RayNeo's own 'Firefly Optical Engine' and delivered through waveguides co-developed with Applied Materials. With 6,000 nits of peak brightness and 16.77 million colours, it is probably the best display currently available in any smart glass product, eclipsing even the Meta Ray-Ban Display's 5,000-nit panel. The simulated image is equivalent to a 43-inch screen viewed from two metres, within a 30-degree field of view.

Under the frame sits a Qualcomm Snapdragon AR1 Gen 1 processor — the purpose-built platform for this class of device — paired with 4GB of RAM and 32GB of onboard storage. The X3 Pro runs RayNeo's AIOS, an Android-based operating system, and is integrated with Google Gemini 2.5 (Beta) for multimodal AI assistance. A 12MP Sony IMX681 sensor handles photography and 4K video, accompanied by a secondary monochrome camera for spatial positioning and depth tracking with 6DoF + SLAM support.

At 76 grams, the X3 Pro is lighter than the Inmo Air 3 (119g), and only a few grams heavier than the Meta Ray-Ban Display (69g). The frame is built from an aerospace-grade magnesium-aluminium alloy, and control is handled via a five-way touch panel on the right temple, with support for Apple Watch gesture control promised in a future OTA update.

The device's single greatest limitation is its 245mAh battery. Under light use, you may approach three to five hours. Under active use that might be navigation, AI queries, camera recording, or app usage, the running time plummets to as little as one or two hours, and it can be as little as 45 minutes. The only saving grace is a recharge of around 45 minutes via USB-C.

At $1,169, the X3 Pro is a premium early-adopter product with genuine technological credibility, but a hefty price tag. The display alone makes a compelling case for the future of AR glasses. Whether that future is worth over a thousand pounds to experience today is a question each buyer must answer for themselves.

RayNeo X3 Pro: Price & availability

RayNeo X3 Pro

(Image credit: Mark Pickavance)

The RayNeo X3 Pro launched globally in December 2025, initially priced at $1,099 on an early-bird basis, rising to $1,299 at standard retail.

At the time of writing, RayNeo sells direct from its website here, with delivery to the United States, the United Kingdom, France, Italy, Germany, and other markets.

In the UK, the full retail price is £1,169, and in the USA it’s $1,169. Considering that the exchange rate on the day of writing is $1.34 to the pound, UK customers pay roughly 25% more for the same products for no obvious good reason.

Prescription lens inserts are available separately from around $49 / £49, supplied through RayNeo's partner Lensology.

What’s a little odd is that these glasses aren’t available on Amazon.com, when almost everything else RayNeo makes is.

By way of comparison, the Meta Ray-Ban Display starts at $799, the Even Realities G2 at $599, and the Halliday Smart Glasses at $500. Traditional smart glasses without a display, such as the Ray-Ban Meta, are available for considerably less.

The X3 Pro commands a significant premium, but the technical specification that includes the dual-eye MicroLED display and the Snapdragon AR1 platform is a major step up from those alternatives.

RayNeo also offers existing X-series customers a 'RayNeo Explorer' lifetime benefit, providing a $200 discount towards future X Series purchases.

What colours my perspective on the price is that these aren’t dual-purpose glasses that can also be used to watch movies. They’re only for AR, which makes the high price even harder to justify.

  • Score: 3/5

RayNeo X3 Pro: Specifications

Chipset

Qualcomm Snapdragon AR1 Gen 1 (4nm)

RAM

4GB LPDDR5

Storage

32GB

Display type

Dual full-colour MicroLED, waveguide optics (both eyes)

Resolution

640 × 480 per eye

Peak brightness

6,000 nits (typical: ~3,500 nits)

Field of view

30 degrees

Virtual screen

43-inch equivalent at 2m distance

Refresh rate

60Hz

OS

RayNeo AIOS (Android-based)

AI engine

Google Gemini 2.5 (Beta)

Cameras

12MP Sony IMX681 (front, colour) + monochrome OV (positioning/depth)

Video

4K / 3K recording

Tracking

6DoF + SLAM; Falcon Image spatial positioning

Audio

Open-ear directional speakers (both temples)

Connectivity

Bluetooth 5.3, Wi-Fi 6

Controls

5-way touch panel (right temple); voice ('Hey RayNeo'); Apple Watch (future OTA)

Weight

76g

Battery

245mAh; ~1–5 hours depending on use; full charge in ~38–45 min via USB-C

Translation

Real-time audio + on-screen text; 14 languages; ~2.1-second response

Prescription

Supported (lens inserts via Lensology, from ~$49/£49)

Colours

Black (single style)

RayNeo X3 Pro: Design & build

  • Divisive aesthetics
  • Wearability issues

RayNeo X3 Pro

(Image credit: Mark Pickavance)

There is an obvious problem with products like the X3 Pro, which is that the design telegraphs that these aren’t just glasses, drawing attention to the wearer.

This tension between engineering achievement and social wearability is perhaps the defining characteristic of this first generation of capable AR glasses, and the X3 Pro didn’t dodge that bullet.

The frame takes broadly Wayfarer-style cues, i.e. being thick, squarish and dark. In short, these look like John-Paul Belmondo wore them at the end of the 1960s, before Michael Cain borrowed them to play the classic British spy, Harry Palmer.

That might be delightfully retro, but two cameras sit in the bridge between the lenses, a small indicator light sits on the front frame (active when recording), and distinctive protrusions near the temple hinges house the MicroLED projectors, giving the game away.

The temples are noticeably thicker than conventional eyewear, accommodating the speakers, electronics, and battery. The USB-C charging port sits at the tip of the right temple.

Structurally, the X3 Pro is more refined than its predecessor, the X2 Pro. RayNeo cites eleven structural optimisations and the use of aerospace-grade magnesium-aluminium alloy to achieve a 36% weight reduction over that earlier model. The result is a frame that, at 76g, sits comfortably on most faces without the ear pressure or nose strain that plagued heavier competitors. Multiple reviewers noted that they occasionally forgot they were wearing them during prolonged use.

The lenses themselves have good optical transparency when the display is off, meaning the world doesn't take on the tinted quality of sunglasses during non-display use. Interchangeable nose pads in different sizes are included, and prescription lens inserts are available through Lensology.

For older people, me included, these lens inserts are a necessity, since the glasses require abnormal eye-muscle acrobatics that those without perfect vision are unlikely to achieve without some help.

Fit adjustment is largely limited to nose pad selection, which does tend to put more pressure on the bridge of the nose. Previously, with the Air 3s Pro, RayNeo offered adjustable temple angles, but these aren’t available on the X3 Pro.

And, because of this, depending on your face shape, you can find that the display is dramatically offset from the ideal line of sight. As I’ll talk about later, I had big issues with this, and it made using them extremely difficult.

In short, if social discretion is a priority, this is not the device for you. If you are the sort of person who wears technology proudly, or who has a professional or specialist use case, the design is functional as long as your face and eye geometry fall within a specific envelope.

  • Design & build: 3.5/5

RayNeo X3 Pro: Features

  • Impressive display technology
  • Sony IMX681 camera sensor
  • Tiny battery

RayNeo X3 Pro

(Image credit: Mark Pickavance)

The X3 Pro's MicroLED dual-eye display is, by wide consensus, the standout feature of this device. Unlike single-eye displays used by some competitors, the X3 Pro projects identical imagery to both eyes, producing a more natural and immersive AR experience that doesn’t assume binocular compensation on the viewer's part. The 640 × 480 resolution per eye is modest by smartphone standards, but it is appropriate for a heads-up overlay and is rendered with genuine clarity at the 30-degree field of view.

Peak brightness of 6,000 nits is a notch above the Meta Ray-Ban’s 5,000 nits, making the display legible in direct sunlight and suitable for navigation or outdoor use. These aren’t meant for media consumption, and therefore don’t include shields to reduce external views, so the graphics need to be bright.

The display sits centrally in the wearer's field of view, rather than in the lower-right corner (as on the Meta Ray-Ban Display). This means AR content is more prominent and easier to read, but also more obtrusive. You cannot easily consume AR content passively while doing something else. It is a deliberate design choice that suits dedicated, task-focused use over an ambient, always-on overlay.

The primary camera uses a Sony IMX681 sensor capable of 12MP stills and 4K/3K video. A secondary monochrome camera assists with spatial positioning, depth tracking, and dual recording. In daylight conditions, camera output is described as decent, with the wide-angle field of view well-suited to point-of-view recording.

But in low light, there is a tendency to visible noise and graininess, and the lack of digital zoom or manual camera controls reduces flexibility. A recording indicator light on the front frame activates when the camera is in use, serving both as a privacy indicator and a practical reminder.

These don’t take pictures that would worry any mid-tier phone, and most entry-level Android phones have better sensors.

The X3 Pro's battery life is probably its greatest limitation, since a 245mAh cell is simply not large enough to support extended active use of the device's headline features.

RayNeo's claim of up to five hours applies to very light use, and by that, they probably mean music playback and limited screen time. In practice, active use scenarios significantly reduce this figure. In a few of my sessions, the time was a fraction of that amount, and the worst offenders for eating battery capacity were translation, video capture and navigation.

In theory, you could have a hip-mounted power pack attached to the USB port of the X3 Pro, but when I tried this, it pulled them out of square and made reading the display even harder.

Thankfully, the glasses do feature wear detection, automatically powering down when removed. This helps conserve battery during breaks, but carrying a power pack around is practically a necessity if you intend to use them for any extended time.

Contextually, the limited battery is an inevitable consequence of the 76g weight target. A larger cell would mean a heavier device. RayNeo engineers have made a considered trade-off here, and future hardware iterations will presumably seek to improve energy density. It may be that the makers can engineer better power management through firmware adjustments, but with only 245mAh of battery to work with, there is only so much that can be done.

Without a doubt, the primary reason to hesitate before purchase is battery life.

  • Features: 3.5/5

RayNeo X3 Pro: Software

RayNeo AR Android Application

(Image credit: RayNeo)
  • Google Gemini 2.5 (Beta)
  • Live translation
  • Side-loading apps

RayNeo AIOS, the operating system built on Android and structured around four primary screens: a home screen showing time and status indicators, a quick-actions panel, an app launcher, and a notifications screen. Navigation is via the five-way touch panel on the right temple, with voice commands available via 'Hey RayNeo'. The interface is responsive and, for the constrained form factor, relatively intuitive.

According to RayNeo, it's Google Gemini that’s the flavour of AI baked into AIOS, and I suspect it’s Google Gemini 2.5 (Beta), which is a long way behind the current models that Google is promoting.

Compared to some other talking AI’s I’ve used, this one is pretty average. For starters, even though I’m in the UK, it insisted on using a chirpy American accent. And, if I asked what the temperature was, the answer arrived in Fahrenheit, times in a 12-hour clock and distances in feet and inches. Yes, Gemini, the world is America.

But aside from being fixated on a region that’s more than 3,000 miles away, the other issue was that it got simple questions wrong from the outset. As it loves America, I asked it to name the last ten U.S. leaders. It got the name and the order correct and then fumbled the answer by saying that all these people had been President in the past ten years.

I tried to subtly nudge it in the right direction by asking which ones were the President in the past ten years, but it failed to notice the discrepancy between what it was saying now and what it said previously.

Thankfully, it didn’t fall for the classic "walk or drive" question for the car wash, but I think all AI platforms are hardwired to answer that way, since it’s an obvious pitfall.

Compared to the latest versions of the major AI providers, the AI on this platform isn’t going to write Skynet anytime soon.

Real-time translation is a more advanced feature, supporting 14 languages and delivering approximately 2.1-second response times. Translation can be delivered as on-screen text or synchronised audio. In testing by other reviewers, accuracy was broadly good, though the system waits for the speaker to finish before translating. That’s necessary in some languages, like German, but it does come across as a less-than-natural conversation and can feel stilted.

Navigation is powered by HERE WeGo Maps (used by BMW and Audi), projecting turn-by-turn directions and nearby landmarks directly into your field of view. This is one of the most practically compelling use cases for the device, eliminating the need to look down at a phone while on foot. Unfortunately, the app never loaded on my glasses. Every time I tried to download and install it, it failed. Other apps were installed, so I’m unsure why this one refused to.

I know that some software for this device requires side-loading, which isn’t something many users will be happy to perform.

  • Software: 3.5/5

RayNeo X3 Pro: Performance

RayNeo X3 Pro

(Image credit: Mark Pickavance)

The Snapdragon AR1 Gen 1 is purpose-designed for augmented reality applications, and the X3 Pro benefits accordingly. Day-to-day navigation, AI queries, notification handling, and app use are smooth under normal conditions. The combination of 4GB LPDDR5 RAM and 32GB storage is appropriate for the use cases the device targets.

That said, compared with a modern smartphone, this isn’t the most powerful platform, and with some more resource-intensive tasks, the cracks start to show.

The glasses do support 6DoF + SLAM with Falcon Image spatial positioning, and the AR overlay alignment is typically accurate and stable under testing. But the issue here is more about how close this platform is to being overrun, and there are hints it's not ever too far from the edge.

But this reviewer had many more issues with this device, which is partly why I waited more than six months before completing my review.

When I first got these in 2025, they did almost nothing. Since then, the firmware updates and enhancements that come via the mobile app have transformed the functionality provided, but they haven’t addressed some of the issues I’ve had from the outset.

The first big problem I had was seeing the projected images, not because the glasses didn’t work, but because they were almost out of my field of view. Some of this was my long-sightedness that made the images seem soft, but I couldn’t see the entirety of the display without balancing the glasses on the very tip of my nose. If I didn’t do that, the image would have been presented as below me and barely in sight. Lifting the glasses to make the image central causes it to disappear.

I’m not confident that spending another £50 on the proper lenses would fix that issue.

That made just seeing things a challenge, but the other issue I had was using the touch panels on the sides of the glasses for directing the interface, because half the time they just ignored my instructions or did something I didn’t ask for. In one instance, I deleted the To-do application from the glasses, not because I wanted to, but because the glasses took one swipe as my instruction to do that, and then refused to cancel that erroneous request.

I did consider getting a small hand controller to make it easier to use or even using the phone as a touchpad, but frankly, at this price, it should be easier than it was.

My final complaint about this device is how some aspects aren’t thought through. One of the apps is a translation app, and you can stand in front of a person from another country and get real-time translation of what they are saying. And, it works. You can even run a YouTube video of someone speaking another language and see it translated.

However, my problem is how you might use this in the context of being a tourist in a foreign country. Let’s imagine I’m in Japan, where they speak a language I don’t, and I walk into a shop where a sales assistant asks, ‘What are you looking for?’ I understand this, because the glasses translate for me, but it can’t reply in Japanese.

At which point, phone translation, where you can show the person your reply in their language, or it speaks for you, works much better. Obviously, if you like to sit on a train and listen to people gossiping about you in their language, thinking you can’t understand them, it's great, but it seems an expensive device to do just that.

RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
RayNeo X3 Pro photo capture
Mark Pickavance
  • Performance: 3.5/5

Should you buy the RayNeo X3 Pro?

The RayNeo X3 Pro is, technically, the most impressive pair of smart glasses currently available for purchase. The dual-eye MicroLED display is genuinely impressive, with bright enough images for outdoor use, colourful, and binocular in a way that no other glasses at this price point can match.

The integration of Gemini AI would make it genuinely useful beyond being a novelty if the model were newer and didn’t assume that all English speakers are Americans.

The camera produces capable results in good light, and the 76g weight is a remarkable achievement for the hardware it contains.

But the £1,000+ price tag demands honest scrutiny of what you're buying, and the answer is: a first-generation product. The battery will frustrate most users who intend to use its headline features for more than an hour or two at a time. The app ecosystem requires technical workarounds.

The aesthetic is also overly conspicuous, and considering how people are quite rightly objecting to unwanted image capture and AI in general, expect some push-back from others if you wear these in public.

For early adopters, AR developers, and professionals with specific use cases, such as live translation, heads-up navigation, and meeting transcription, the X3 Pro is credible but far from perfect. For mainstream buyers hoping for an all-day, all-purpose wearable, the technology is not quite there yet, but this is the clearest indication yet of where it is heading.

Value

An expensive option even with these features

3/5

Design

Lightweight design, but obviously AR

3.5/5

Features

Great displays but tiny battery

3.5/5

Soware

AI and navigation, but side-loading is a thing

3.5/5

Performance

Wearability issues and patchy performance

3.5/5

Total

Expensive and the ecosystem is a work in progress

3.5/5

RayNeo X3 Pro

(Image credit: RayNeo)

Buy it if...

You want the best AR display available today
The dual-eye MicroLED is a genuine leap forward. If seeing what AR glasses can look like is important to you, nothing else currently matches it.

You have a specific professional use case
Live translation, navigation, meeting transcription, and developer access make the X3 Pro a serious productivity tool for the right scenarios.

Don't buy it if...

Social discretion matters to you
Multiple experienced smart glasses reviewers noted that the X3 Pro draws looks and comments in public. If you are not prepared to stand out, this is not the device for you yet.

You need all-day battery life
Under active use, the 245mAh cell simply cannot deliver a full day of use. If you need more than an hour or two from a single charge, look elsewhere or accept that a power bank becomes a permanent companion.

Bosgame’s P6 Ryzen 9 mini PC deal undercuts 8-core rivals as a powerful $520 desktop replacement

If you want genuine 8-core desktop power in a footprint you can tuck behind a monitor, this Bosgame P6 mini PC for $520 (was $640) at Amazon is worth checking out, with the machine built around AMD's high-performance Ryzen 9 6900HX.

The Ryzen 9 6900HX is the real draw here. It's an 8-core, 16-thread chip built on a 6nm Zen 3+ process, with a boost clock up to 4.9GHz. That puts it well ahead of the Ryzen 5 and Ryzen 7 mobile chips that populate most mini PCs in this price range.

The Bosgame P6 is genuinely capable of sustained multi-threaded work like video encoding, compiling, or running several lightweight VMs at once without slowing down.

Today's top mini PC deal

AMD Ryzen 9 6900HX (8-core/16-thread, up to 4.9GHz), Radeon 680M graphics, 24GB LPDDR5X-4800 RAM, 1TB PCIe 4.0 SSD (expandable to 4TB), dual Gigabit Ethernet, Wi-Fi 6E, Bluetooth 5.3, and triple 4K display output via HDMI, DisplayPort, and USB-C. Windows 11 Pro pre-installed.View Deal

The Radeon 680M integrated GPU pairs with that CPU well. It's an RDNA 2 part with 12 compute units, and while it's not a substitute for a discrete card, it comfortably handles 4K media playback and esports titles like CS2 at high settings — useful if this doubles as a casual gaming box alongside office duties.

24GB of LPDDR5X-4800 memory is a healthy amount for multitasking, though it's worth noting this RAM is soldered to the board and not user-upgradeable — what you buy is what you're stuck with. The 1TB PCIe 4.0 SSD fares better: BOSGAME includes a second M.2 slot, so storage can be expanded up to 4TB down the line.

Connectivity is a genuine strength at this price. Dual Gigabit Ethernet ports let you keep two networks separated or add load balancing — handy for home labs or NAS setups — while Wi-Fi 6E and Bluetooth 5.3 cover the wireless side. Triple 4K display output via HDMI, DisplayPort, and a full-function USB-C port (with data, Power Delivery, and DisplayPort Alt Mode) rounds out a well-connected little machine.

A couple of honest caveats: the soldered RAM means there's no upgrade path if 24GB becomes tight later, and Bosgame's mini PCs typically ship with an external wall-socket power brick rather than a laptop-style supply, so factor that into your desk setup. If you need discrete-GPU-level graphics performance for gaming or GPU-accelerated creative work, this integrated setup won't get you there either.

For an 8-core desktop replacement with strong connectivity, the BOSGAME P6 is a solid pick in this category.

Want to do more with your machine? We tested the best mini PCs and selected the top mini PC deals for video editing and gaming that you can get right now.

More mini PC deals

For general home and office tasks, the GMKtec M6 Ultra is our top pick for most people. This Windows 11 Pro mini PC comes equipped with an AMD Ryzen 5 7640HS processor, 32GB DDR5 RAM, a 1TB SSD, with triple 4K display support, USB4, dual 2.5G Ethernet, and Wi-Fi 6E. View Deal

One of my favorite mini PCs for those that want a little more power - particularly for content creation, Geekom's A8 Max features a Ryzen 9 8945HS chip, 32GB DDR5 RAM, and a 1TB SSD. It also boasts USB4, dual 2.5GbE LAN, and 8K output. View Deal

Meta says it will spend an extra $40 billion on its nearly 4,000-acre data center campus in Louisiana in its quest for more compute power

  • Meta's 4,000 acre Hyperion data center will receive an additional $40 billion investment
  • Meta says the project has been a huge benefit for the local community of Richland Parish
  • Multiple groups and local residents have criticized the massive campus and its energy sourcing

Meta has announced that an additional $40 billion will be used to fund the construction of its enormous 4,000 acre data center campus in Richland Parish, Louisiana.

This additional funding brings the total Meta investment for the ‘Hyperion’ site to over $250 billion when combined with Bloomberg reporting of $200 billion allocated for the project in May, plus a previously announced $10 billion investment for the data center and surrounding community.

The data center itself is expected to consume 5 gigawatts of computing power, with an additional 2 gigawatts for wider campus needs, placing the predicted total usage upon completion at more than three times the power consumed by the city of New Orleans.

A boon or bane for the local community?

In a Meta blog post, the company boasted about the benefits of the enormous data center campus for the local community.

It cites $50,000 bonuses for local teachers thanks to increased tax revenues on the Hyperion campus, alongside $1.6 billion in contracts for local businesses and other funding from Meta for public schools and youth programs via the Data Center Community Action Grants project.

“It’s life-altering for our teachers and their families, and it’s transforming our schools. Meta’s investment has made Richland Parish a destination for education as well as industry,” Richland Parish’s School District Superintendent, Sheldon Jones, told Meta.

Meta also said that once the project was completed, it would support 1,000 jobs. There is also a further $1 billion earmarked for investment in local infrastructure improvements, including roads, water and wastewater systems.

A promotional video accompanying Meta’s local funding news shows the story of a backwater town faced by a lack of business and opportunities, with local residents, teachers, and business owners speaking of the positives of having the Hyperion campus being constructed, accompanied by upbeat orchestral music.

While the select individuals featured in the Meta PR video preach of the benefits, there has also been local opposition to the project, which has been steeped in controversy.

The other side of the coin

Multiple environmental and consumer groups have pushed back against the project since its announcement, particularly around how the power for the data center will be generated. Entergy Louisiana is spending billions to construct 10 new gas-fired power plants to provide the necessary electricity. But many communities across the US who live in the vicinity of such power plants have reported a wave of symptoms, such as dizziness, nausea, vertigo, and sleep disruption.

A Floodlight investigation, published by the Guardian, found that the success of Hyperion’s approval rested largely on the shoulders of a single Louisiana state senator, John “Jay” Morris.

Many of the land purchases and sales required for Entergy to construct the planned gas turbine plant were undertaken by Morris and his partners, Floodlight claims. Louisiana law requires government officials to recuse themselves from voting when a conflict exists, and prohibits the use of public office for private gain.

Morris has denied any wrongdoing. “It makes a nice story if you can try to show that I have some sort of conflict. But under Louisiana’s ethics laws, I don’t,” Morris told the Guardian.

The Union of Concerned Scientists (UCS) and the Alliance for Affordable Energy (AAE) have both criticized the Hyperion site, especially the amount of power it is planned to consume, warning that the site will unfairly shift the cost of electricity and infrastructure upgrades on to the site.

Additionally, the approval for the Entergy gas turbine power plant was fast-tracked through the Louisiana Public Service Commission, with the UCS warning that Entergy ratepayers would have to cover the costs of a $550 million transmission line that is only necessary because of the Hyperion site, alongside the fuel costs for the new gas turbine plant.

CEO of big memory chip maker says 2027 could be the 'worst year in the industry's history' — and other RAM crisis rumblings back up that dire prediction

  • The boss of SK Hynix believes that the RAM crisis is going to get much worse
  • The CEO said 2027 will be the 'worst year' in the RAM industry's history, and that the crisis will likely roll on to 2030 and beyond
  • Analysis from the Bank of America also claims that SK Hynix's expansion of memory production capacity is going to fall well short of its target for 2028

We keep getting told that the RAM crisis is dug in as a fixture for the foreseeable future, and, whether you want them or not, here are a couple more unwelcome reminders.

First, Android Headline flagged a Reuters interview with Kwak Noh-jung, the CEO of SK Hynix, one of the big memory chip makers. The chief executive didn't have comforting words about the prospect of RAM pricing in 2027, observing, "We forecast that ‌next year will be the worst year in the [memory] industry's history from the supply perspective."

So, seemingly next year will see RAM hit peak pricing, with no relief likely until 2030 (as previously forecast by the chairman of parent company SK Group) according to the CEO — and even then, he suggested that demand will continue to outweigh supply as the next decade rolls on beyond 2030.

The second RAM-related blow comes from analysis by the Bank of America highlighted by the Commercial Times in Taiwan (via Wccftech), which pours doubt on the South Korean president's recent boasts about the major expansion of the country's overall memory chip production by 2030.

Part of this analysis is a claim from a memory industry insider over in Taiwan that SK Hynix might only add just a sixth of its originally planned production capacity increase by 2028. Obviously that assertion needs to be liberally seasoned, but it's such a large potential shortfall that it's bound to raise some eyebrows.

The Commercial Times notes that while huge new chip manufacturing plants are being built by SK Hynix and Samsung in South Korea, they will take a lot longer than 2030 to come fully online — and this process is more likely to take a full decade. The report contends that a realistic level of memory wafer capacity expansion for South Korea is around 10% (or slightly less) per year, which will leave the country falling well short of the president's claims for production in 2030.

Analysis: diverging RAM timelines

Intense close-up of RAM against a black background

(Image credit: Unsplash / Liam Briese)

It's grim news from the CEO of SK Hynix, then, although of course, the skeptics will quickly point out that it's the chief exec's job to talk up the company's value — in terms of a booming market and the struggle to meet demand — coming off the back of its debut on the Nasdaq. Stock prices around the big memory chip makers have been turbulent of late, it should be noted, as investors start to worry about whether these companies are currently overvalued — and indeed whether the AI boom might start to run out of momentum.

So, that's a consideration, but there's no denying that SK Hynix's boss isn't the only person making gloomy predictions along these lines. Nvidia's CEO Jensen Huang said that he expects the RAM crisis to last "quite a few years", indicating that we'll be stuck in pricing hell until 2030 or thereabouts, although others don't see it that way. In the opposing camp we notably have the likes of an AMD exec, the ex-chief of Samsung's semiconductor division, and Jefferies, an investment banking firm, who all believe RAM pricing will start to ease in 2028.

However, the sting in the tail there is that Jefferies is also predicting big memory price hikes over the rest of this year, and in 2027 too, backing up the CEO of SK Hynix in that respect. When you consider the estimated massive shortfall of SK Hynix's production capacity boost based on the rumor mill, everything feels distinctly shakier in the nearer-term for RAM pricing.

I also can't help but recall the blow Microsoft recently delivered when talking about Xbox price rises, when the company informed us that it expects another doubling in the cost of RAM in just over a year (by the fall of 2027).

While there's a mixed bag in terms of longer-term predictions, then, the outlook for this year and next remains worryingly negative on the RAM front.

'I've been waiting for this for ages!': The Sonos app's new navigation, volume controls and speaker ordering are finally rolling out — though you might not get them right away

  • App update delivers tab navigation, speaker/room sorting, and Dynamic Volume slider for iOS
  • Phased rollout so it won't reach everyone simultaneously
  • May take up to two weeks to arrive

Sonos users may not need to keep creating alternative apps for their systems: the official app is getting a significant update that's rolling out now. It's a phased rollout, so not everyone will get it at once, but it should reach everyone's devices within the next fortnight — though it's also optional, so you need to manually turn the changes on (for now).

Posting on Reddit, Sonos said: "We have a new Sonos App update and it's a big one." In addition to the usual bug fixes, there are significant interface improvements and, on iOS, a new volume interface too.

According to ShaunFromSonos, you shouldn't have to wait more than two weeks for the update on iOS or Android, and the timescale is "likely sooner". Provided you have Automatic Updates enabled, you'll get it as soon as it's rolled out to your device — however, once you have version 87 of the app, you need to turn on "Enable Improved Navigation" in Settings.

Sonos says that it's not making it the default until it's been tested en masse, outside of a limited beta environment. If people use it, love it and don't encounter major technical issues, then it could become the default later in the year.

Sonos app update in July 2026: what's new?

The update is coming to the Sonos app and Player and delivers clear tabbed navigation that follows the standard design conventions of Android and iOS respectively, with buttons to clearly show what's been selected and more prominent Home, System, and Search options.

The app will also now let you reorder speakers and rooms directly. You can sort alphabetically, by frequency of use, and by which speakers are currently playing audio. You can also pin your favorite speakers for fast access. As with the interface changes, this is opt-in and requires you to enable the improved navigation.

On iOS, there's a new volume slider that gets bigger when you interact with it, and it displays the number within the slider so you can see exactly what volume level you've selected.

Initial responses seem pretty positive so far, with one poster noting that the search function seems much faster on Android. Sonos are actively seeking feedback here, so if you've got the update already they'd like to know what you think on the app update Reddit thread.

Sonos also says that Lock Screen playback controls are coming to iOS soon, a long-awaited feature that's already available on Android.

Thinking of buying a new TV?

Try our TV size and model finder! You tell it how far you sit from your TV, we'll tell you what size to buy based on viewing angle advice from image quality experts, and we'll recommend our three top TVs at that size for different prices.

Bambu Lab A2L review: This 3D printer makes large-format printing look easy

The Bambu Lab A2 L is a printer I’ve been expecting for some time. Essentially, it’s a larger A1, just with technology tweaks and, of course, scale. The big feature here is a 330 x 320 x 325 build area, making it one of the largest in its class of large open 3D printers.

While the A1 is a superb printer for beginners, there’s often a feeling that the print bed size can be a little bit restrictive, especially for some enthusiasts as well as businesses looking to model, create costume items or larger-scale prototypes, and this is what the A2 L’s larger print bed essentially facilitates.

What I like here is that Bambu has essentially created a large-frame design that keeps costs down compared with the more expensive, professional-level H2, P2, and X2 designs. This is more of the entry-level, but still it offers all of that technology and refinement that Bambu Lab always offers, and whilst many people will look at the open-frame design as a little bit of a negative point because you won’t be able to use engineering filaments, if the bulk of what you do is basic print farm work or you’re just printing PLA or basic TPU, then this machine is going to be a perfect option.

During the test, another point that came up was that the Wi-Fi is limited to 2.4 GHz. Since I was testing other kit at the time and didn’t have that 2.4GHz bandwidth, I couldn’t quite figure out what was happening. Only when I went for the dual 2.4 and 5GHz did it connect okay, but really, this is a minor thing for most businesses, and that would be absolutely fine.

The build area is obviously the major difference between this and the A1: the A1 has a nice square 256 x 256 x 256 build area, whereas this one upgrades to 330 x 320 x 325. I do kind of wish that Bambu Lab had kept an absolute cube build, as it just makes things easy when you’re orienting; however, it’s nice to have such a large space to work with.

Along with a larger build volume comes a new extrusion system, fully upgraded from the A1 standard direct-drive setup. On the A2, it adds a PMSM closed-loop servo extrusion system, designed to deliver smoother extrusion and monitor for issues during the print process. Another good upgrade is the motion stability system, which is far more advanced, as you’d expect given the couple of years between releases. Part of the reason for this is not just the passing of time, but also the fact that, because this is a much larger machine, it’s more prone to errors, so this part is finely tuned.

Further aiding error-free printing is a new package: physical blob and clogging detection, PMSM extrusion monitoring, and all live alongside all the safeguards the A1 featured when it was released.

One of the other features I have been really keen to see is the creative tool expansion, which essentially means, like the H2D, you can pop on an optional blade-cutting or pen-plotting module, so you can also work with stickers, card, leather, fabrics and a whole range of drawing and plotting projects alongside the 3D printing.

Really, this is a machine designed to sit there and get on with the work out of the box, and for less than £500/$500, you have a machine that can print multi-filament easily. If you do want to print engineering materials, you'll just have to spend a little bit more on one of the enclosed machines, but for most people, given the price, this is actually a fair option.

Bambu Lab A2L: Price and availability

The Bambu Lab A2L is available in the US for $469 direct from Bambu Lab - with a Combo version priced at $569.

It's also available in the UK for £319 at Bambu Lab, with the Combo version costing £429.

Bambu Lab A2L: Design

Bambu Lab A2L

(Image credit: Alastair Jennings)
Bambu Lab A2L specifications

Print Technology: FDM / FFF, single direct-drive servo extruder
Build Area: 330 × 320 × 325mm
Minimum Layer Resolution: 0.08mm
Maximum Layer Resolution: 0.28mm
Dimensions: 544 × 529 × 505mm
Weight: 12.8kg
Bed: Heated bed, max 80°C
Print Surface: Flexible steel build plate with Textured PEI Plate
Software: Bambu Studio; Bambu Handy app; cloud or LAN-only control
Materials: PLA, PETG, TPU, PVA; PLA-CF and PETG-CF with hardened nozzle.
Print Speed: Up to 500mm/s

It’s obvious that the A2L is in the same family as the A1. Essentially, it looks similar, just on a larger desktop-style frame, that measures 544 x 529 x 505mm, quite a substantial footprint, and it’s no lightweight at 12.8kg.

That scale of machine offers the current build area of 330 x 320 x 325mm, which is substantial, and in order to ensure proper rigidity for this large-format printer, the construction is made from aluminium with steel for the chassis, and a plastic outer frame to make it look nice rather than the look of printers past. To be honest, with Bambu Lab's usual design flair, this really does look like a great machine.

One thing to note is that this is an open-frame construction, and there is not, and probably will never be, an enclosure for it. There are higher-level machines like the Super P2S if you do need to utilise more engineering materials, and they don't cost a lot more.

What really appeals to me about this design is the optional cutting-and-drawing module that can be attached. This essentially boosts the machine's usability, and if you’re into crafting or modelling, as well as working in a small design business, having all these optional extras in one machine makes a lot of sense. One point to note here is that, unlike the H2D, which offers both of these modules to expand its functionality, it is slightly stripped down here, and for safety reasons, there’s obviously no laser module.

While it’s pitched to a wide range of users, it's primarily for a home enthusiast, although I’ve already spoken to several people who run print farms and are excited about this machine because of the sheer volume of prints they’d be able to produce on each print platform. Having run successive tests over a one-month period, I can confirm that the reliability for this type of use makes this a really great option, even in the commercial business sector, as long as you don’t want to print with engineering materials that require an enclosure.

Like all Bambu printers, it's designed for multi-filament printing and is fully compatible with both AMS and AMS Lite units. If you do purchase the combo unit, then you’ll get the AMS Lite, as you did with the A1. With this machine, you can link up four AMS units to get up to 19 colours.

Bambu Lab A2L: Features

Bambu Lab A2L

(Image credit: Alastair Jennings)

The first thing that should really be said about the A2L is that it’s not a huge leap in technology, although there are improvements across the board, mainly to facilitate its larger build area, more than material support or additional new features. So, firstly, the headline is the scale of this machine, and as stated before, the 330 x 320 x 325mm build volume is ideal for large-format printing. If you’re thinking about cosplay or prototyping larger objects, then, to be honest, for the price, there is really very little at the moment that can match this.

That larger size usually means it’s much more prone to errors, and whilst the larger H2 machines are in line with the print volume this machine offers, the one big difference here is that it is open-frame. That not only makes it much cheaper but also restricts the types of materials you can utilise. Essentially, day-to-day prototyping in PLA or one of the other more common materials is absolutely fine, and you can pop in a hardened nozzle if you do want to print with something like PLA-CF or PETG-CF. However, if you want to print with engineering materials, such as nylon, then you are going to have to look at an enclosed machine.

There are several features that really stand out that will help make the printer as reliable as possible. The first is the aluminium-and-steel construction of the frame and chassis, which results in an ultra-rigid unit. During the test, I was surprised to see that, even when printing flat out, it appeared just how stable it was. It is, of course, always a good idea to have a really good, solid table.

Built into the extruder is one of the major upgrades over the A1: a PMSM closed-loop servo extrusion system that offers smoother filament extrusion than the direct drive we saw on the A1. There’s also adaptive vibration compensation with multiple calibration and load-adaptation options, again helping with filament flow. Another surprising thing is that they’ve added granular dampers to the frame. This is essentially to cope with the high speed that this printer is capable of, and it’s worth noting that, at full pelt, this machine is quite ferocious in the corner of the workshop.

As with the A1, blob detection, run-out detection, clog detection and tangled-spool detection are all pretty much standard features.

Some of the standout features are the optional blade-cutting and pen-plotting modules, which expand the machine's capabilities and are ideal for crafters and enthusiasts, especially at this price point.

Once again, there’s full support for the AMS Lite system, and if you buy four AMS units, then you can print up to 19 colours, which is an impressive amount for a base machine at this price.

Bambu Lab A2L: Performance

Bambu Lab A2L

(Image credit: Alastair Jennings)

Getting started with the Bambu Lab A2 L is relatively quick and straightforward. Unlike the fully enclosed machines that we’re starting to get used to from the company, this does require a little bit of construction, but ultimately it’s just the vertical frame with the print head pre-installed, and once you’ve bolted it down and connected a couple of cables, you can then run through the initial calibration process.

This used to be the faffy part, and construction took some time. Now, the construction takes only 5 to 10 minutes; however, once you switch the machine on, you need to connect to your Wi-Fi before it can download and install any updates. You then have to run through the calibration process, which is fully automatic, so just let it run its course; it can take almost an hour on the first run. After that, it should be pretty much self-sufficient, with an automatic reminder alerting you as to when it needs recalibration or when the rails need a little oil.

As I ran through the first prints, all stored on the small MicroSD card, I was impressed by the machine's speed and robustness. Whilst it’s just an enlarged A1 with refinement, the rigidity feels just as good as that of the smaller machine, and Bambu Lab has really made quite a lot of adjustments to the base design in order to facilitate ultra-strong joints that don’t create any wobble or movement through the print process, which is definitely needed at maximum speed.

As the first few prints rolled off the print bed, they had that unique Bambu Lab look, with very fine layering and superb overall surface and inner print quality. Single-filament prints were exceptionally quick, and I checked the models as they were produced. I could see that the fine flow control was exceptionally good, with fine detail printed well.

The point I was going to see, especially with the test models, was that the overhangs and bridges seemed well handled, demonstrating that the new head is capable of producing enough cooling air to set the filament quickly throughout the print.

After checking a series of prints, from those just for fun to more functional parts, in both PLA and PETG, I was really impressed with the quality. Realistically, if you put the prints from this machine up against those from the H2D, which is obviously far more expensive, it’s actually extremely difficult to tell the difference. Whilst this machine is cheaper, the print quality on a purely visual side-by-side basis is identical. Realistically, at the base level, you are just paying for that enclosed space, but then it is obviously a lot more than that. However, for most people, that’s really all they need: a good, large machine for printing in these base materials, which, to be honest, is what most of us use.

If you’re working in design and you need to print out a large prototype, as I have with an air cooler this summer, then this is a really great option. For the models I was printing, it printed at full height, so I could quickly prototype an entire product without breaking it down into too many parts. If you do need to break it down into parts, there’s enough out there to support plenty of different models at the same time.

During the print process and testing, I printed solely for quality purposes, then looked at printing on sale to see how many models I could reliably print, and moved on to more functional models, including an air-cooling system and the associated parts. I am also using the printers to create many props and costume parts for various projects, and, again, the additional size offered by the Bambu Lab A2 L is extremely useful.

What I like about this printer is that, it’s large, and it printed large reliably. I have three or four large-format printers, all of the open design from various manufacturers. However, most regularly fail, whereas the A2 L was consistent with those larger prints, time after time. It’s also large enough for a fully wearable helmet, which is now my go-to test when testing print volume.

A quick check of the 3D test model, and to be honest, it’s as good as any. This test, which used to challenge so many printers, really now just highlights one or two printers that aren’t quite so good, and we just see a little bit of surface imperfection, which means that you need to have a little bit more oil on one of the rails, or give the machine a good clean or calibration, rather than anything more fundamental. Re-printing a 3D Benchy, it came out absolutely perfect.

Moving on to the more in-depth Kickstarter Autodesk 3D printer check, the model produced again looked good. I was a little surprised that there was only a bit of stringing on one of the overhangs, but otherwise the model itself looked exceptionally good, with fine flow control and dimensional accuracy that really highlighted what it was capable of. Whilst this is the larger of the two relatively entry-level models from Bambu, it’s still very, very capable.

Further, to put this to the test, I ran it for two weeks nonstop, producing multiple parts of the same model to check reliability. What I was interested in seeing was that after a certain number of hours, the interface asked me to maintain the rails. This is just a good reminder that Bambu Lab is really looking after the machines and notifying users when maintenance is required. I was also pleased to see that printing just pure PLA from four reels was consistent. I am not a huge fan of the AMS Lite four-reel design; however, there’s no doubting that it works. Here again in the workshop, it produced prints without issue.

The Bambu Lab A2 L is a natural progression as a 3D printer. It’s not one to get overly excited about; it is what it is and will enable you to print large. It’s relatively inexpensive. Budget-wise, what impressed me was just how reliable it proved to be, and with that large build area, you can not only print more but also print at a higher volume, at one of the lowest prices for this level of reliability and quality on the market.

If you run a print farm or you prototype goods, or you’re just looking for your next larger-format printer for producing cosplay costumes, then I can see the A2L being a popular choice that gives you far greater flexibility than its smaller and now slightly older sibling.

Bambu Lab A2L: Print quality

Bambu Lab A2L

(Image credit: Alastair Jennings)

Dimensional accuracy - score of 4/5

Target 25 = X: 4.88mm / 0.12mm Error | Y: 4.82mm / 0.18mm Error
Target 20 = X: 9.55mm / 0.45mm Error | Y: 9.89mm / 0.11mm Error
Target 15 = X: 14.86mm / 0.14mm Error | Y: 14.83mm / 0.17mm Error
Target 10 = X: 18.84mm / 0.16mm Error | Y: 19.81mm / 0.19mm Error
Target 5 = X: 24.81mm / 0.19mm Error | Y: 24.71mm / 0.29mm Error

X Error Average = 0.212
Y Error Average = 0.188
X&Y Error Average = 0.2

Fine Flow Control - score of 5
Fine Negative Features - score of 5
Overhangs - score of 5
Bridging - score of 4
XY resonance - score of 2.5
Z-axis alignment - score of 2.5

Adding up the totals gives a final score of 28 out of 30

BambuLab A2L: Final verdict

Bambu Lab A2L

(Image credit: Alastair Jennings)

When you are looking at the A2L, you have to think about the build quality, given its size, and what I’m really pleased to see is, firstly, that Bambu Lab has continued with its design principles. This is a large-format printer that looks great. It has all the features from Bambu that many have come to expect.

Set-up and maintenance are exceptionally easy. As long as you follow the prompts, you’re going to have trouble-free printing. The only thing I would say, like with Bambu Lab’s other printers, is that it can be a little overprotective of the print: at any sign of string or debris on the build plate, it will stop, and you will have to check it. It won’t just plough through, which in itself is actually a good thing, but I can’t help but feel it’s just a little bit oversensitive.

This is still an open-frame design, so whilst the size will definitely appeal to professionals and high-end enthusiasts, you do need to consider that it will only print materials such as PLA, PETG and specialist TPU. Anything you would probably choose to make functional parts does require an enclosure, so from that point of view, it’s a little limited. However, that’s not what the A2 series is about, and actually, as a large-format printer for printing PLA prototypes, costumes and all manner of other objects in that fashion, it’s a great choice.

The other point about this 3D printer is that it has printing and cutting ability with the pen and cutter, which lends it to even greater use. Whilst this is a good option and a space-saver for many, I definitely prefer a cutter that draws the material through rather than one that pushes it down, as this machine does. Still, for my stuff, as long as the blade is exceptionally sharp, it works very well for both cutting and plotting.

If you own a company and want to create large-scale models or PLA, it’s a brilliant 3D printer. In my tests, I found it to be good and reliable, except that it stops on almost anything. But a quick check, either physically or through the Bambu Handy app, and get it set going. If you’re a keen model crafter or enthusiast of any type, this is a superb option, as long as you’ve got that slightly larger space to keep it. If you’re working in product design and you just need a large-scale printer for prototyping, this is again a superb choice.

Bambu Lab A2L

(Image credit: Alastair Jennings)

Should I buy the Bambu Lab A2L?

Buy it if...

You need to print big.
There are a few other machines that can print at this size and quality, but with the open-frame design and Bambu Lab’s leading technology, it comes together in a combination that ultimately produces superb prints reliably.

You need mass printing.
Many print farms now utilise enclosed printers due to space and reliability. If you’re regularly printing multiple objects, the large print platform and reliability make this a superb option.

Don't buy it if...

Limited on table space
The A2 L does come in a size, so you will require quite some space in order for it to sit. It’s also a bed-slinger design, so whilst you might put it on your desktop, you do need to make sure that the print platform has enough room to move forward and back.

You need engineering materials.
The downside of the design is that you are limited to standard materials, so if you need engineering-grade materials for functional parts, you’ll have to use an enclosed printer.

For more models, I've tested the best 3D printers you can get right now.

NymVPN has released a huge iOS update adding Mixnet Tuning, Server Families, and app icon disguises — but some questions remain around the scale of some improvements

Nym Technologies has released a major update to the NymVPN iOS app, adding several new connectivity and convenience features.

At the core of the update are new features designed to give users control over the balance between privacy and performance.

NymVPN is one of the more technical VPNs on the market. Central to its operation is the titular Nym mix network, or mixnet, which hides user metadata by routing traffic through a mixture of servers, scrambling IP addresses on both sides of the connection.

At the same time, a blend of other users’ traffic and decoy traffic is sent through the same mixnet, making it effectively impossible to trace any actions back to you.

NymVPN has seen several notable improvements of late, adding post-quantum encryption as standard in June this year, split tunneling for Windows users in April, and an ad-blocker earlier in 2026.

It now resembles a typical VPN a little more closely, though the new features and fixes included in the 2026.11.0 iOS update are a bit more complex than your typical VPN update. Read on for a breakdown of the new features (based on the information NymVPN has given us, anyway).

Key features

A composite image of the NymVPN Server Families page

(Image credit: Nym Technologies)

The update introduces Server Families, a new alert system that lets users know when their chosen mixnet servers may belong to the same operator or subnet. This allows users to maintain decentralization by choosing servers from different operators for each node in the mixnet.

All Nym servers are community-run and decentralized using blockchain technology, but using different operators for each node maximises the possible obfuscation of network traffic.

Additionally, the update adds a new Mixnet Tuning feature in beta, allowing users to adjust the balance between anonymity and privacy.

Mixnets operate through a number of ‘hops’, referring to individual nodes between the origin and destination of network traffic. Nym uses a five-hop mixnet as standard, with an entry, exit, and three connection points in between.

This creates latency – according to Nym, its mixnet adds 15ms of delay per hop by default, totalling 75ms across five hops.

This is an intentional measure designed to hide the timing of your network traffic, as well as its origin and destination, but could be annoying for streaming video or playing online games, where latency should be as low as possible to maximise performance.

Mixnet Tuning adds two settings that allow users to adjust the NymVPN’s default instructions while maintaining connection. These are the ‘Send traffic continuously’ setting, which offers a range of 0.7Mbps to 2Mbps for decoy traffic, and ‘Packet mixing profile’, which changes how long each mix node holds onto your traffic, from 0ms to 200ms.

Keeping it convenient

A composite image of the NymVPN app icon disguise menu

(Image credit: Nym Technologies)

NymVPN’s latest iOS update also brings some quality-of-life improvements to the app, and while it’s still a fair way from our list of the best VPNs, it’s good to see that the app will now be easier to use on the best iPhones and best iPads.

These improvements include the ability to change the app icon to a calculator or notepad to avoid prying eyes, a bug fix for an issue that displayed subscription data incorrectly after a fresh install, and stronger ad blocking.

Nym’s blog says that the app’s daily data allowance has been increased, but at the time of writing the company hasn’t confirmed the total allowance or by how much it’s been increased.

Similarly, Nym has not expanded on its claim that the update makes it NymVPN easier to use in areas and territories that restrict VPN use.

TechRadar has reached out to NymVPN for more information on these areas, and we'll update this article once we know more.

Experts get Google, Microsoft to pull trusted ModHeader with 1.6 million installs after finding it could harvest all kinds of data

  • Stripe OLT found ModHeader v7.0.18 carried a hidden spyware SDK, exfiltrating visited domains daily to a Chinese‑owned server and acting as adware
  • The extension had 1.6M downloads across Chrome and Edge before being pulled but installed endpoints remain at risk
  • Researchers urge defenders to identify and remove existing installations, as removal from stores does not automatically remediate compromised devices

ModHeader, a trusted Chrome and Edge browser extension with more than 1.6 million downloads, was found to be malicious, apparently sending sensitive data to a Chinese-owned server, and has since been pulled on both repositories.

Security researchers Stripe OLT revealed the news in a new report, outlining how a ModHeader build v7.0.18 carried a hidden spyware SDK.

As per Stripe OLT, the spyware collects domains users visit, encrypts the data with AES-GCP, and then sends it - once a day - to a remote server. The collector was found inactive by default, but the required code, encryption key, and upload schedule were all already embedded in the extension.

Links to Chinese actors

Researchers found no command-and-control functionality, which means the server only receives the stolen data and cannot communicate back. The extension also worked as an adware, displaying ads and opening advertising tabs on updates, including on enterprise-managed devices.

The researchers attributed the attack, albeit with low confidence, to a Chinese-speaking threat actor. The exfiltration domain routes emails through Lark, which is a suite common with Chinese-speaking teams, it was said. They also found Chinese strings in the code, and said that the listing ships a Simplified Chinese locale.

ModHeader is a Chrome and Edge browser extension that allows users to modify HTTP request and response headers sent between their browser and websites. Developers and security researchers use it to test APIs, troubleshoot applications, and simulate different environments. It has around 900,000 users on Chrome, and another 700,000 on Edge.

According to The Hacker News, Microsoft pulled the tool from its repository on June 3 2026, followed by Google a week later, on July 10.

“Following our disclosure, Google has removed the extension from the Chrome Web Store,” Stripe OLT concluded. “We welcome this action, but removal from the store does not automatically remediate endpoints where the extension was already installed, so defenders should continue to identify and remove existing installations.”

8BitDo’s Nintendo-themed desk gear is the ultimate retro home office upgrade

Somewhere between "I need a new mouse" and "I have recreated a 1985 living room on my desk," there's a line, and 8BitDo's Retro lineup will happily walk you right over it.

The company's NES-styled mouse, keyboard, and numpad are built on the same off-white-and-red aesthetic, they pair over the same software, and stacked together, they turn a boring desk into something that looks like it should be plugged into a CRT.

While they're sitting at full price - and from what I've seen, rarely get a discount - the prices are still refreshingly reasonable for what you get. For the ultimate retro home office setup, this is an easy recommendation from me.

Go Retro

PAW 3395 optical sensor rated up to 26,000 DPI, Kailh Sword GM X micro switches on the main buttons, and a choice of Bluetooth, 2.4GHz, or wired USB-C connectivity, with polling rates up to 8,000Hz over the wire. The included charging dock doubles as a 2.4GHz receiver stand and looks like a tiny display plinth on its own.

In the UK: now £45View Deal

The full-size, 108-key version of 8BitDo's Retro keyboard, with an integrated numpad built in, Kailh Box White V2 hot-swappable switches, dye-sub PBT keycaps, and tri-mode Bluetooth/2.4GHz/USB-C connectivity. It also carries over the giant programmable Super Buttons from the smaller tenkeyless model, which double as an oversized macro pad or, if you're feeling nostalgic, a stand-in NES controller for 2D games.

In the UK: now £92View Deal

A standalone 18-key mechanical numpad in the same NES colorway, connecting over Bluetooth, 2.4GHz, or wired USB. It also has a party trick: a dedicated calculator mode, so it can moonlight as an actual desktop calculator when you're not using it to punch in spreadsheet figures.

In the UK: now £41View Deal

Why this combination works

The trick with 8BitDo's Retro line is that the nostalgia isn't hiding a corner-cut product underneath it. The keyboard uses genuinely hot-swappable Kailh switches and PBT keycaps, which is the kind of spec sheet you'd expect from a keyboard enthusiast brand, not a novelty NES tribute. The R8 mouse's PAW 3395 sensor and 8,000Hz wired polling are legitimately competitive with mice that don't have a charging dock shaped like a museum display stand. And the numpad, which could easily have been an afterthought, gets its own little identity with the calculator mode.

Buying all three together also solves the problem that usually comes with retro-themed gear: matching. A single retro-styled keyboard on an otherwise modern desk can look like a costume prop. A full matching set — same grey, same red accents, same rounded plastic — reads more like a deliberate aesthetic choice than a novelty impulse buy, and the shared 8BitDo Ultimate Software means the mouse and keyboard's macros and profiles live in the same app rather than three different pieces of bloatware.

An honest take before you commit to the full set: the keyboard's Kailh Box White V2 switches are genuinely loud — reviewers have clocked it noticeably louder than a typical mechanical board, so it's not the pick for a shared office or a thin-walled apartment unless you plan to hot-swap in quieter switches down the line. The numpad also doesn't yet support macro programming through 8BitDo's software, so for now it's a numpad and calculator first, macro pad second. And obviously, the whole appeal here is the aesthetic — if the retro look isn't your thing, the money is better spent on gear with a more neutral design.

For anyone who wants their home office to look like it moonlights as a 1985 living room, this trio is about as complete an NES-themed desk kit as you can currently assemble.

'God of War Laufey will be available on disc' — Sony Santa Monica may have hinted at the game's release window with physical announcement

  • Sony Santa Monica has confirmed God of War Laufey will be available on a physical disc
  • The studio's comment come after PlayStation's announcement to retire physical game discs from January 2028
  • This means God of War Laufey could release before the end of 2027

Following PlayStation's announcement to retire game discs, Sony Santa Monica has confirmed that God of War Laufey will be available on disc, suggesting the game could launch within the next year.

The studio's comment comes from X, where it shared its schedule for the God of War Laufey panel at San Diego Comic-Con.

In the thread, Sony Santa Monica added, seemingly in response to fans who have been asking for the past few weeks following PlayStation's announcement, that "We can confirm God of War Laufey will be available on disc."

Sony confirmed earlier this month that it would end the production of game discs starting from January 2028. Now that we know Laufey will get a physical disc, it suggests that the game will launch before 2028.

The new God of War entry was announced last month at Summer Game Fest 2026 and is set to star Kratos' wife, Faye. It would be great if the game launched in 2026; however, there are five months left in the year.

The latter half of the year is stacked with upcoming game releases, including GTA 6 in November and Marvel's Wolverine in September, so I find it unlikely that the new Laufey will release any time soon.

Given the studio's comment, it's more likely it will launch before the end of 2027, or, if we stretch it to the last possible moment, January 2028, before physical discs are retired.

Sony has faced overwhelming backlash since sharing its plan, with many fans hoping it will reverse its decision if there's enough support.

A petition has also been created, which now has over 310,000 signatures, urging Sony to back down, but for now, the PlayStation company has remained silent.

No, it's not age verification — privacy is the top reason UK children use a VPN

  • Government report shows British kids mainly use a VPN to improve their privacy
  • Only a fifth of VPN users use the tech to bypass age verification
  • Pretending to be older is the most common way to dodge age checks

As the debate surrounding potential VPN restrictions heats up in the UK, a government report has cast doubt on whether such drastic measures are justified.

According to the study commissioned by the Department for Science, Innovation and Technology (DSIT), digital privacy is the primary driver behind VPN use among British children.

Content unblocking ranks as the second most common motivation, with children using the tools to access specific apps and media from other countries.

Crucially, the desire to bypass mandatory age checks ranks much further down the list, with only about a fifth of young VPN users actively using the software to evade age checks. This equates to just 7% of all British children using a VPN to access restricted platforms.

These findings challenge the narrative that restricting VPNs is vital to enforcing current age verification laws and the government's proposed under-16 social media ban.

The government is set to share evidence of its public consultation on children's online safety and VPNs this month.

In response to requests for comment, a spokesperson for DSIT shared a press release that confirms that "VPNs play a limited role in circumventing age check."

"As platforms implement more robust age verification to comply with the newly announced restrictions, many of the common routes used to bypass age checks today will become increasingly difficult," they continued.

Kids and VPNs: What the DSIT report found

Liz Kendall, UK science, innovation and technology secretary, during a Bloomberg Television interview at the London Tech Week exposition in London, UK, on Tuesday, June 9, 2026

(Image credit: Jose Sarmento Matos/Bloomberg via Getty Images)

Following a nationwide survey of over 2,000 young people aged 11 to 17, researchers at BMG Research discovered that familiarity with virtual private networks among British children is high.

58% of children surveyed reported that they are aware of the software, while roughly a quarter of all respondents admitted to using a VPN in their lifetime.

The underlying motivations of these young users appear to challenge the argument in favor of stricter controls.

Among active VPN users, 30% state they use the software specifically to secure their online privacy. This aligns with warnings from digital rights advocates who argue that restricting VPN access could strip vital security tools away from minors.

And while young people do use these apps to bypass content restrictions, the study shows they are primarily interested in evading regional entertainment geoblocks or school network restrictions rather than maliciously outsmarting age verification.

Bypassing age checks ranks fifth on the list of motivations. These findings mirror separate YouGov research commissioned by the VPN Trust Initiative, which revealed that a mere 1.4% of surveyed minors use a VPN specifically to access platforms meant for older demographics.

So how do children actually bypass age checks?

It seems that British children have found much simpler workarounds to evade online controls than using a VPN.

Over half of the children surveyed admitted they simply migrate to different platforms, with 37% choosing websites that completely lack age verification and 34% opting for services known to enforce weak, easily tricked checks.

Posing as an adult remains the most common tactic, with roughly 63% of those who bypass checks admitting they pretended to be someone older.

Specifically, 45% do so by giving a false date of birth during self-declaration checks, while a notable minority (11%) use their parents' or relatives' identification details.

The findings follow a stark warning to Downing Street from a coalition of more than 20 tech firms and privacy advocacy groups, which urged policymakers to protect digital rights and ensure that VPN tools remain unrestricted.

IPVanish just made OpenVPN almost three times faster on Windows — but there's a catch

  • IPVanish added OpenVPN Data Channel Offload (DCO) to its Windows app
  • Internal testing recorded download increases of up to 196%
  • The feature cannot be used at the same time as OpenVPN Scramble

IPVanish has released a new Windows client built around High-Speed Mode, the provider's implementation of OpenVPN Data Channel Offload (DCO). The company claims the feature lifts OpenVPN download speeds by up to 196%.

OpenVPN remains one of the most widely supported protocols in the industry, prized for its maturity and its ability to work almost anywhere. Its weakness has always been pace, which is why so many of the best VPN services now steer users towards WireGuard by default.

OpenVPN DCO addresses this problem. It moves the heavy lifting of encryption out of the app and into the deepest core of the operating system, cutting latency and easing CPU load without changing the protocol's security.

IPVanish has also swapped its Windows OpenVPN cipher from AES-256-CBC to AES-256-GCM, a change it says trims 32% off the time needed to connect to a server.

OpenVPN DCO remains an exclusive for Windows users. As the provider confirms to TechRadar, "OpenVPN DCO isn't possible on macOS, iOS, or Android. Those operating systems have locked-down kernels."

What IPvanish's High-Speed Mode actually changes, and how to use it

IPVanish's High-Speed Mode settings on Windows

(Image credit: IPVanish)

Standard OpenVPN shuttles data back and forth between the VPN app and the operating system. Every one of those handovers costs time. DCO keeps the data channel closer to the Windows networking layer instead, so encrypted traffic moves through the system with fewer stops.

IPVanish tested servers in New York, London, Berlin, and Tokyo, three times a day across three consecutive days. Averaged out, downloads improved by 131% on TCP and 196% on UDP, while uploads rose 34% and 101% respectively.

"IPVanish is already known for offering fast VPN speeds, and today we're raising the bar for Windows OpenVPN," said Subbu Sthanu, General Manager, Consumer Cybersecurity at IPVanish, adding that streamers, gamers, and remote workers should all feel the difference.

You can turn the feature on by updating your Windows app and going to the OpenVPN protocol in the Settings tab.

One catch is that High-Speed Mode is not compatible with OpenVPN Scramble — IPVanish's obfuscation feature that disguises your VPN traffic to slip past networks that block it. Turn one on, and you lose the other. For anyone connecting from a school, an office, or a country that filters VPNs, Scramble is probably the more important feature.

Which other VPNs offer OpenVPN DCO

ExpressVPN was among the first providers to unveil OpenVPN DCO in March 2025, claiming a 2,000% jump in UDP performance. Windscribe also added DCO on Windows at the same time, recently extending it to Linux, too.

Norton VPN followed in September 2025, citing doubled speeds and 15% lower latency.

Surfshark, NordVPN, and PrivadoVPN all ship a DCO adapter in their Windows clients, too. It's still a short list, with most providers betting on WireGuard instead.

The new De'Longhi Rivelia Start is a super-compact coffee maker with a 10-drink menu — including the cold brew we desperately need for sweltering summer days

  • The Rivelia Start is De'Longhi's smallest automatic coffee maker
  • It has a menu of 10 coffee drinks, including cold brew
  • It's on sale now in the UK for £599.99 (about $800 / AU$1,160)

De'Longhi makes some of the best espresso machines I've tested here at TechRadar, and as the owner of a small kitchen, its latest model has particularly piqued my interest. The De'Longhi Rivelia Start is the company's smallest fully automatic coffee maker.

The Rivelia Start is a successor to the 2024 De'Longhi Rivelia, which our tester Josephine Watson gave a full five stars thanks to its consistently well-extracted espresso, clever Bean Adapt technology that optimizes brew settings to suit your preferred beans, and LatteCrema Hot system, which creates thick and creamy foam for milky drinks.

The Rivelia Start offers all that in an even smaller package, and adds the ability to prepare authentic-tasting cold brew. De'Longhi promises that your cold brew will be "ready in under five minutes", which tells me that it's not just pouring a shot of hot coffee over ice, like some other machines I've tested recently. Instead, the coffee is extracted using ambient temperature water, which results in fewer bitter compounds being dissolved for a more mellow flavor.

De'Longhi Rivelia Start coffee maker dispensing coffee and milk

The Rivelia Start can prepare hot milk foam, and you can upgrade it with a LatteCrema Cool kit if you want to make cold lattes and cappuccinos (Image credit: De'Longhi)

The Rivelia Start's standard menu contains 10 drinks, but if you like the idea of an iced latte or cappuccino to help you stay cool in the summer months, you can upgrade your Rivelia Start with the optional LatteCrema Cool set, which lets you create chilled milk foam for six further drinks.

Personally, the feature I'm most excited about is the pair of swappable bean hoppers. My job sometimes involves drinking a lot of lattes, and I always prefer to switch to decaf in the afternoon so I can still sleep after a day testing drip and espresso machines. With the Rivelia Start, there's no need to purge one type of coffee from the hopper before refilling with another; just unscrew the whole thing and swap it for one filled with a different type of bean.

Person pressing button on De'Longhi Rivelia Start coffee maker

The De'Longhi Rivelia Start has a clear and simple interface with illustrated touch buttons (Image credit: De'Longhi)

It's simple to operate too, with an interface of clearly-labelled buttons rather than a touchscreen, making it extra accessible for new users.

Its small size isn't the only thing that sets it apart from other coffee makers, either — it also comes in a palette of earthy colors that fit with the current trend for natural shades and textures, which makes a refreshing change from the stark black, white, and chrome that once dominated kitchen appliances.

It's available to buy now direct from De'Longhi in the UK for £599.99 (about $800 / AU$1,160) in two colors: maple brown and jade green. More hues will be available from third-party stores from September, and we're currently waiting for details of its international launch.

'A single entry point can rapidly expand to greater enterprise impacts': Microsoft introduces changes to tackle ShinyHunters

  • ShinyHunters abused OAuth trust in Salesforce by tricking users and later compromising SaaS integrations, stealing tokens to access hundreds of customer environments
  • Reports suggested up to 700 victims; attackers exfiltrated data via legitimate APIs, making activity appear normal and persistent
  • Microsoft responded with Defender for Cloud Apps upgrades, adding richer telemetry, near‑real‑time detection, and stronger governance over OAuth‑connected applications

The ShinyHunters cybercrime group were so creative in breaking into corporate Salesforce environments that they forced Microsoft’s hand, making the company introduce new security upgrades just to address the attacks.

Microsoft has revealed it is focusing on improving visibility into OAuth-connected applications and strengthening governance over third-party integrations in Microsoft Defender for Cloud Apps. The changes fall into two main categories: Improved detection and investigation, and new posture and governance capabilities.

It makes sense, given that some reports claimed as many as 700 victims of the year-long campaign.

Changes and improvements

But first, a little context: In August 2025, it was reported that ShinyHunters operatives were calling their targets on the phone, claiming to be IT support, and convincing them to authorize a seemingly legitimate Salesforce Data Loader application. This app was, in fact, controlled by the attackers and requested OAuth permissions which allowed them to access Salesforce data through official APIs.

Since everything happened through legitimate authentication and API calls, the activity looked like normal user behavior.

In the following months, the campaign evolved. Instead of tricking individual employees, ShinyHunters compromised third-party SaaS providers that integrated with Salesforce, including Salesloft's Drift integration, Gainsight, and later Klue.

By stealing OAuth tokens or integration secrets from these vendors, they accessed hundreds of downstream customer Salesforce environments without interacting with each customer individually.

At one point, Google told reporters it was aware of more than 700 potentially impacted organizations.

“Microsoft consulted with Salesforce to improve granularity in telemetry for Defender for Cloud Apps with near-real-time detection, offering connected application attribution and expanded application permission insights,” the company said in a new report. “This activity was not the result of a vulnerability inherent to Salesforce. Rather, the threat actors abused trusted OAuth relationships for unauthorized access, data exfiltration, and persistence.”

In other words, Microsoft enabled greater visibility into OAuth-connected applications and their activity, allowed for better detection of suspicious API and OAuth behavior through richer telemetry and correlation, and now provides stronger governance of connected apps through permission analysis, risk scoring, and lifecycle management.

How to watch France vs Spain: Free Streams, TV Channels & Kick-Off time for FIFA World Cup semi-final 2026, team news

Kylian Mbappe and Lamine Yamal headline a heavyweight FIFA World Cup 2026 semi-final as France take on Spain in Dallas — and you can live stream the game around the world for free.

France captain Mbappe scored his eighth goal of the tournament in the quarter-final against Morocco, breaking the deadlock on the hour mark with a sumptuous curling strike that set Les Bleus on course for a 2-0 win. The forward was withdrawn shortly after with what appeared to be an ankle issue, although he appeared confident that he would be fit to face Spain. Didier Deschamps' men have won all six games at this summer's tournament and are yet to concede a goal in the knockout stage, putting the two-time winners on the verge of a third successive final.

Yamal's impact on the World Cup has been rather more understated than Mbappe's, with the teenager scoring just once for a Spain team who have reached the last four thanks to the contribution of their less-heralded stars. Mikel Merino came off the bench to score a late winner for the second successive knockout game in the 2-1 victory over Belgium in the quarter-final and manager Luis de la Fuente must now decide whether to start the Arsenal midfielder or keep him as a supersub. La Roja have conceded just once on their way to their second World Cup semi-final, having only previously reached the last four when they lifted the trophy in 2010.

The winner faces England or Argentina in the final in New Jersey.

So, read on as we show you exactly how to watch France vs Spain for free from anywhere in the FIFA World Cup 2026.

How to watch France vs Spain for free

France vs Spain is available to watch for free in multiple countries, including the UK, Australia, Brazil, Belgium, Ireland, Netherlands, Switzerland and Turkey.

Abroad? Can't access your free stream? Unblock your free World Cup stream with Norton VPN — more on that below.

France vs Spain: Team News

France XI: Maignan; Koundé, Saliba, Upamecano, Digne; Rabiot, Tchouaméni; Olise, Barcola, Dembélé; Mbappé.

Spain XI: Unai Simon; Porro, Laporte, Cubarsi, Cucurella, Rodri, Fabian Ruiz, Olmo, Baena, Yamal; Oyarzabal.

Use a VPN to watch France vs Spain live streams

It’s the World Cup, and if you’re traveling, you might discover your usual France vs Spain stream is suddenly unavailable due to geo-restrictions.

Don’t worry, that’s exactly where a VPN can help. A virtual private network lets you connect to servers around the world so you can securely access your usual World Cup coverage as if you were back home.

We recommend Norton VPN. Here's why:

▶︎ Norton VPN MEGA Deal — 60-day money back guarantee

Watch your free World Cup stream without limits. Norton VPN delivers fast, secure connections with global servers, so you can stream from anywhere with ease.

💰 60-day money-back guarantee
🔓 Unlocks World Cup streams

Don’t miss a second. Stream the World Cup from anywhere with total confidence.View Deal

How to watch France vs Spain in the US

US flag banner

US viewers can watch France vs Spain on Fox (English commentary) or Telemundo (Spanish commentary).

Both Fox and Telemundo are available on cord-cutters like YouTube TV (free trial), Hulu+Live TV, Sling (select markets), Fubo or DirecTV.

Those looking for a streaming service instead can watch France vs Spain on Fox One (3-day free trial). Telemundo is available via Peacock ($10.99/month).

Visiting the US from the UK? You can still watch your World Cup stream for free thanks to Norton VPN (try for 60 days).

How to watch France vs Spain in the UK

UK flag

UK customers are in luck as they can stream France vs Spain for free on ITV. Live coverage is on ITV1 and ITVX and begins at 7pm BST ahead of an 8pm kick-off.

You will require a TV license and a valid UK postcode for an account (e.g. SE1 7PB).

Norton VPN can unlock your stream if you're abroad today.

How to watch France vs Spain in Australia

Australian flag

(Image credit: free)

France vs Spain will be shown for free in Australia on SBS On Demand.

The streaming platform has every game of the tournament for free, making it the perfect place for your World Cup viewing.

A new account requires an Australian postcode (e.g. 2004).

Traveling for work or on holiday? A VPN like Norton VPN can help unlock your free stream.

How to watch France vs Spain in Canada

Canada

(Image credit: Other)

In Canada, TSN and free-to-air channel CTV will be broadcasting France vs Spain.

You can live stream via the TSN+ streaming platform, which costs CA$8 per month or CA$80 per year.

CTV will require TV provider login details for you to watch for free online.

Outside of Canada? Use Norton VPN whilst you're traveling away from home to unlock your stream.

France vs Spain: Match Information

What time does France vs Spain start?

France vs Spain kicks off at 8pm BST / 3pm ET on Tuesday, July 14. That's 5am AEST on Wednesday, July 15 in Australia.

What are the squads for France vs Spain?

France

Goalkeepers: Mike Maignan (AC Milan), Robin Risser (Lens), Brice Samba (Rennes).

Defenders: Lucas Digne (Aston Villa), Malo Gusto (Chelsea), Lucas Hernandez (Paris St-Germain), Theo Hernandez (Al Hilal), Ibrahima Konate (Liverpool), Maxence Lacroix (Crystal Palace), Jules Kounde (Barcelona), William Saliba (Arsenal), Dayot Upamenaco (Bayern Munich).

Midfielders: N'Golo Kante (Fenerbache), Manu Kone (Roma), Adrien Rabiot (AC Milan), Aurelien Tchouameni (Real Madrid), Warren Zaire-Emery (Paris St-Germain).

Forwards: Maghnes Akliouche (Monaco), Bradley Barcola (Paris St-Germain), Rayan Cherki (Man City), Ousmane Dembele (Paris St-Germain), Desire Doue (Paris St-Germain), Michael Olise (Bayern Munich), Kylian Mbappe (Real Madrid), Jean-Phillipe Mateta (Crystal Palace), Marcus Thuram (Inter Milan).

Spain

Goalkeepers: Unai Simon (Athletic Bilbao), David Raya (Arsenal), Joan Garcia (Barcelona).

Defenders: Marcos Llorente (Atletico Madrid), Marc Pubill (Atletico Madrid), Pedro Porro (Tottenham), Aymeric Laporte (Athletic Bilbao), Eric Garcia (Barcelona), Pau Cubarsi (Barcelona), Marc Cucurella (Real Madrid), Alejandro Grimaldo (Bayer Leverkusen).

Midfielders: Rodri (Manchester City), Martin Zubimendi (Arsenal), Mikel Merino (Arsenal), Pedri (Barcelona), Gavi (Barcelona), Fabian Ruiz (Paris St-Germain), Alex Baena (Atletico Madrid).

Forwards: Victor Munoz (Osasuna), Mikel Oyarzabal (Real Sociedad), Ferran Torres (Barcelona), Lamine Yamal (Barcelona), Dani Olmo (Barcelona), Borja Iglesias (Celta Vigo), Nico Williams (Athletic Bilbao).

France vs Spain: Road to the semi-finals

Stage

France

Spain

Group stage

Group I: 1st, 9 points

Group H: 1st, 7 points

Last 32

Beat Sweden (3-0)

Beat Austria (3-0)

Last 16

Beat Paraguay (1-0)

Beat Portugal (1-0)

Quarter-finals

Beat Morocco (2-0)

Beat Belgium (2-1)

What is the weather for France vs Spain?

Thundery showers are forecast in Dallas on Tuesday, with temperatures at kick-off expected to be around 81F (27C).

The good news is that the stadium is fully air-conditioned and has a retractable roof, which will make the conditions much more comfortable for players and fans.

Can I watch France vs Spain on my mobile?

Of course, most broadcasters have streaming services that you can access through mobile apps or via your phone's browser.

You can also stay up-to-date with all of the key World Cup moments on the official social media channels on X/Twitter (@FIFAWorldCup), Instagram (@FIFAWorldCup), TikTok (@FIFAWorldCup) and YouTube (@FIFA).

We test and review VPN services in the context of legal recreational uses. For example:1. Accessing a service from another country (subject to the terms and conditions of that service).2. Protecting your online security and strengthening your online privacy when abroad.We do not support or condone the illegal or malicious use of VPN services. Consuming pirated content that is paid-for is neither endorsed nor approved by Future Publishing.

How to watch The Great British Sewing Bee season 12 online for FREE – stream cosy competition from anywhere

I’ve got a textile! Feeling lost over Love Island and fed up with football? Sewing Bee could be just the ticket, as 12 super seamsters gather in the hope to be crowned Britain's best sewer. Read on, as we explain how to watch The Great British Sewing Bee season 12 online from anywhere.

The biggest change this year is a new face at the helm in the form of actor and comedian Sophie Willan, who takes over from Sara Pascoe full time after making her debut in the most recent Christmas special. The ever reliable Patrick Grant and Esme Young return to judge every stitch and seam.

As ever, the contestants are a diverse bunch, with everyone from CFOs to Primary teachers, sopranos to engineers and care farm directors to chartered actuaries. Throughout the season, they’ll be tasked with the Pattern Challenge, in which they must follow a pattern as closely as possible, the Transformation Challenge, which sees the sewers reinvent existing garments and the Made-to-Measure Challenge, that gives the sewers freedom to create their own showstoppers.

The spiritual sister to The Great British Bake Off, Sewing Bee is a cosy treat, with moments that’ll leave you in stitches, and points so tense you could hear a pin drop. Read on and find out how to watch The Great British Sewing Bee season 12 online and from anywhere.

Can I watch The Great British Sewing Bee for free?

Viewers in the UK can stream all seasons and specials of The Great British Sewing Bee, including the upcoming season 12, for FREE on BBC iPlayer.

Not at home? Use a VPN to access you usual streaming services from abroad and watch the show for free.

How to watch The Great British Sewing Bee S12 from abroad

For those away from home looking to watch The Great British Sewing Bee, you’ll be unable to watch the show as normal if you're outside the UK due to regional restrictions. Luckily, there’s an easy solution.

Downloading a VPN allows you to stream geo-blocked services online, no matter where you are. It's a simple bit of software that changes your IP address, meaning that you can access on-demand content or live TV just as if you were at home. Our favorite is NordVPN – it's one of the best VPNs on the market.

Use a VPN to watch The Great British Sewing Bee from anywhere:

🟩 NordVPN – get the world's best VPN

Not having a VPN is like leaving your front door wide open in a busy city — anyone can walk right in and take a peek.

TechRadar regularly reviews all the biggest and best VPN providers and NordVPN is our #1 choice.

✅ 70% Off Today
✅ 3 Months Extra Free
✅ Unlocks BBC iPlayer

Get NordVPN and stream The Great British Sewing Bee.View Deal

How to watch The Great British Sewing Bee S12 online in the UK

UK flag

Brits can watch The Great British Sewing Bee season 12 for FREE on BBC iPlayer.

For those that prefer to watch on linear TV, the show will premiere on BBC One on Tuesday, July 14 at 8pm BST, with new episodes arriving weekly.

Away from the UK right now? Just use a VPN to alter your IP address so you can stream your favorite TV shows and films online just like you would at home. More details above.

How to watch The Great British Sewing Bee S12 online in the US

usa flag

In the US, The Great British Sewing Bee streams for free on its dedicated Roku Channel, though there's now news on when season 12 might arrive.

Brit in the US? Anyone from the UK who wants to watch their usual free streaming service from abroad can do so by using a VPN, as seen below.

Can I watch The Great British Sewing Bee S12 online in Canada?

canada flag

Canadians have been stitched up, with no streaming home for The Great British Sewing Bee in Canada.

UK viewer in Canada? Use a VPN to gain access to all the content you'd normally stream at home.

How to watch The Great British Sewing Bee S12 online in Australia

Australian flag

The Great British Sewing Bee streams on Binge in Australia, although we're still awaiting a release date for season 12.

Traveling from the UK to Oz? Try using a VPN as per our guide above.

What you need to know about The Great British Sewing Bee S12

When is The Great British Sewing Bee S12 release date?

Season 12 of The Great British Sewing Bee will premiere on Tuesday, July 14 in the UK. US and Australia release dates are TBC.

The Great British Sewing Bee S12 contestants

The Great British Sewing Bee season 12 contestants

(Image credit: BBC)
  • Adele, 36, Primary school teacher, West Yorkshire
  • Angie, 63, Retired, Warwickshire
  • Anna, 27, Barista & waitress, North Yorkshire
  • Beth, 24, Engineering Ph.D. student, Oxfordshire
  • Dawn, 64, Chief Financial Officer, London
  • Emma, 45, Classical soprano, Midlothian
  • Heather, 28, Project manager, West Midlands
  • Lewis, 29, Primary school teacher, East Sussex
  • Minnie, 30, Full-time mum, Bedfordshire
  • Rebecca, 27, Chartered actuary, London
  • Sam, 31, Heating engineer, West Yorkshire
  • Tim, 60, Care farm director, Suffolk

Who is the new presenter of The Great British Sewing Bee?

Actor and comedian Sophie Willan follows the likes of Claudia Winkleman, Joe Lycett, Sara Pascoe and Kiell Smith-Bynoe as the new host of Sewing Bee.

On her appointment, Cal Turner, Commissioning Editor, said: "We are delighted to welcome Sophie Willan to The Great British Sewing Bee. With her boundless enthusiasm and energy, Sophie will bring her own unique spark to the sewing room alongside Patrick and Esme."

We test and review VPN services in the context of legal recreational uses. For example:1. Accessing a service from another country (subject to the terms and conditions of that service).2. Protecting your online security and strengthening your online privacy when abroad.We do not support or condone the illegal or malicious use of VPN services. Consuming pirated content that is paid-for is neither endorsed nor approved by Future Publishing.

The 'absolutely superb' Bambu Lab P2S we tested in our workshop just dropped in price

We reviewed the Bambu Lab P2S and found it "about as refined as they come" for anyone upgrading from an entry-level 3D printer.

So, I was pleased to see the Bambu Lab P2S Combo with AMS 2 Pro is $699 (was $799) at Bambu Lab — a $100 saving on a fully enclosed CoreXY printer built for multi-color, engineering-grade work. In the UK, the Bambu Lab P2S Combo also got a discount down to £619 (was £699) at Bambu Lab.

In our testing, we ran the machine constantly for weeks with very little in the way of failures or misprints, and it was clear that many of the features — the touchscreen, the AI error detection, the general polish — had trickled down from Bambu's pricier X1 Carbon and H2D machines.

Today's top Bambu Lab 3D printer deal

Enclosed CoreXY 3D printer with a 256 x 256 x 256mm build volume, 600mm/s peak print speed, PMSM servo extruder (8.5kg extrusion force), AI-powered error detection, and a 5-inch touchscreen. The Combo adds the AMS 2 Pro, a four-color multi-material system with active filament drying.

In the UK: now £619 (was £699)View Deal

Scoring 4.5 stars in our review with a Highly Recommended award, we called the P2S "absolutely superb" and "about as refined as they come". It's a follow-up to the best-selling P1S, and we found the upgrades meaningful rather than just cosmetic.

The PMSM servo extruder is the standout hardware change. It delivers up to 8.5kg of maximum extrusion force — 70% more than the outgoing stepper-driven design — and samples resistance and position at 20kHz, so it can catch filament grinding or clogs in real time rather than letting a print fail silently. Combined with a high-frequency eddy current sensor for flow calibration, this printer is built to handle tricky or higher-flow materials with greater consistency than its predecessor.

The AMS 2 Pro included in this Combo bundle is worth the extra cost on its own. It's a four-spool multi-material system with active air-vent drying, sealed storage, and RFID filament sync with Bambu's own spools — useful if you print with moisture-sensitive materials like nylon or want to avoid the usual dry-box shuffle. It can double as a filament dryer even when you're not actively printing multi-color jobs.

Build quality elsewhere follows the same pattern of small, sensible refinements: hardened steel rods in place of the P1S's carbon rods, a metal build plate base, a quick-swap nozzle system that releases with a single clip, and a full enclosure with an Active Airflow system that draws in cool air for low-temp filaments like PLA, then switches to internal circulation to keep the chamber warm for higher-temp materials like ABS or ASA.

Worth considering: the P2S doesn't have an actively heated chamber, so while the enclosure holds heat reasonably well (around 50°C with a 100°C bed in our testing), it's not built for demanding high-temperature engineering filaments like PA-CF or PEEK the way Bambu's H-series machines are. Multi-color printing with the AMS still produces some filament waste from purging between color changes, and full remote-monitoring features depend on staying connected to Bambu's cloud — LAN-only mode works for printing but drops those extras.

For more top-performers, see our guide to the best 3D printers we've tested.

Also consider: More Bambu Lab 3D printer deals

The A1 Mini scored top marks in our 5-star review, earning an Editor's Choice award. We called it "nothing more than groundbreaking."

In the UK: now £239 (was £259)

Read our Bambu Lab A1 Mini reviewView Deal

This is what the P2S replaces, but it's still a solid pick at a superb price. While we haven't reviewed the Bambu Lab P1S, we gave its open enclosure counterpart the P1P 5 stars in our review.

In the UK: was £319 (now £339)View Deal

Our top-rated 3D printer overall. It's a particularly good choice for small businesses and crafters, as one of the bundles includes a laser engraver, plotter, and cutter for crafting.

In the UK: now £1399 (was £1649)

Read our Bambu Lab H2D reviewView Deal

Is the Nintendo Switch 2 a hit or a flop? Despite high sales, the console's been relatively contentious — and I have a feeling I know why

The Nintendo Switch 2 has been out for just over a year now, and it’s had a fascinating start to life.

It’s undoubtedly been a commercial success, becoming the second-fastest selling console in recorded US history, and it’s already seen its fair share of hits, whether that be the phenomenon that is Pokémon Pokopia or the 2025 Game of the Year nominee, Donkey Kong Bananza. But some are still unconvinced.

It’s not a stretch to say that, in spite of its high sales, the console has been highly contentious among gamers. While many speak with positivity about the Switch 2, there have been criticisms around the consoles battery life and performance, for instance.

Some gamers have also noted concerns around the lack of big first party hitters, such as a brand new 3D Mario, a new entry in the Legend of Zelda series (rather than a remake), and the system’s slightly patchy release schedule for 2026. Bundle that with some high-priced software and incoming console price rises, and I can see why some fans are yet to be won over.

My thoughts: a brief summary

Yoshi popcorn bucket holding Nintendo Switch 2 system

(Image credit: Future / Nintendo)

In my personal opinion, though, the Switch 2 has had a pretty strong start. Growing up, I saw the messy launch of consoles such as the PlayStation 3, and the simply woeful launch titles for its successor, the PlayStation 4 and its counterpart, the Xbox One. Meanwhile, the Switch 2 has some great multiplayer fun in titles like Mario Kart World and Kirby Air Riders, some exceptional single player experiences like the aforementioned Donkey Kong and Pokémon games, and a healthy dosage of third-party support to boot.

What’s more, I’d argue that performance is pretty strong, and with a 1080p 120fps display for handheld mode, it no longer feels like I’m sacrificing too much quality just to play without my TV. Throw in 4K visuals in docked mode, far comfier Joy Con 2 controllers, and surprisingly good virtual surround sound, and I for one am happy with the hardware upgrade brought to the table by Nintendo’s new hybrid console.

I do wish that some games were a little more affordable — $79.99 / £74.99 / AU$119.95 for a physical copy of Mario Kart World definitely feels excessive, even with modern pricing standards. And I really wish the console’s battery life was a bit better too, even if I have found a workaround of sorts.

All in all, though, I’ve had a great first year with the Switch 2, and its prolific sales are there for all to see. But I’m not just here to share my view — there’s something else I’m far more interested in.

Tell us what you think about the Switch 2

Woman playing Pokémon Pokopia on Nintendo Switch 2

(Image credit: Future / Nintendo)

That’s right: TechRadar Gaming wants to hear from you.

I’ve briefly spoken about some contentious points, but I want to gauge the thoughts and feelings of all of you out there. Do you think the Nintendo Switch 2 has been a hit or a flop?

Below, you’ll find a poll, where you can tell us what you think.

However, I’m also really keen to draw some specifics from our readers. If you’d like, you can comment below and make your voice heard — has the Switch 2 been a disappointment for you? Is it already among the console elite? We want to hear it all — and your comments may even feature in an upcoming article!

‘All the analog features you could wish for’: this is one of the most adjustable analog keyboards I’ve come across — but there’s one area where its rivals win out

MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2: One-minute review

The MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2 is a wired analog keyboard with a retro design that belies its advanced analog adjustability.

It certainly harks back to a time when the ‘gamer aesthetic’ was in full swing, with its translucent keycaps and faux-industrial body. The rear and side lighting are interesting touches, though.

It’s also a veritable slab of a keyboard. It’s very thick, although it gets thinner towards the front, which means the keys angle towards the user slightly. This is just as well, since the Made68 Ultra V2 doesn’t have any pop-out feet, as many of the best gaming keyboards do.

The materials feel premium enough and solidly put together. It’s heavy, which helps the board to stay planted, but this could be an issue if you frequently move your board around.

Although the Made68 Ultra V2 has bright RGB backlighting, it’s a misstep that it doesn’t shine through the keycap characters. In fact, it actively obscures them, so you’d best get familiar with touchtyping if you aren’t already.

Close-up of rear corner of MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2, on desk with pink wall in background

(Image credit: Future)

There are plenty of useful FN shortcuts, but unfortunately none of them is labelled on the relevant keycap, so you’ll have to refer to the manual and learn them by heart.

If you want to customize bindings, you can use MelGeek’s web app for this purpose. There are plenty of options here, but it’s the precise and copious analog adjustments that are even more impressive.This app is easily accessible via two taps of the Mode button on the rear, which is a thoughtful touch and one I wish more gaming keyboards featured. For a web app, it’s also very fast and stable.

In a word, the best way to describe the performance of the Made68 Ultra V2 is solid. The keys don’t wobble at all, and presses are firm with a satisfying thunk once they reach the end of their travel. This provides plenty of feedback, while the dampening is sufficient enough to prevent harshness. At the same time, they’re also very snappy and responsive, thanks to their quick rebound.

I also found the WASD position comfortable, and all peripheral keys were easy and comfortable to hit. I did find myself hitting its edge on occasion, but its springiness and dampening still make it better than many others I’ve encountered.

All of this performance and adjustability doesn’t come cheap, though. The Made68 Ultra V2 is more expensive than many of its rivals — even those with bigger names, which makes the Made68 Ultra V2’s price harder to swallow. But if you prize a sturdy construction and a solid feel above all else, there aren’t many that can beat it on these fronts.

MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2 review: Price & availability

Close-up of power button and USB-C port of MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2, on desk with pink wall in background

(Image credit: Future)
  • $219 (about £160 / AU$300)
  • Available now in multiple colorways
  • Top-of-the-sector pricing

The MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2 costs $219 (about £160 / AU$300) and is available now in multiple colorways from the brand’s website. International shipping is offered, with region-dependent charges.

This is expensive for any wired gaming keyboard, even analog models. It’s costlier than some offerings from the big hitters in the space, such as Razer and SteelSeries. For instance, the former’s Huntsman V3 Tenkeyless 8KHz costs $169.99, yet it has similar analog tweakability and even includes controller emulation, which the Made68 Ultra V2 misses out on.

As for SteelSeries, its Apex Pro TKL Gen 3 is also cheaper than the Made68 Ultra V2, and what’s more it’s one of the best analog gaming keyboards I’ve ever used in terms of build and performance. Its keys feel great and offer superb control. It might miss out on controller emulation, but it shines in virtually every other area.

MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2 review: Specs

Layout

TKL

Switch

KOM Lite Magnetic / Flip King Magnetic

Programmable keys

Yes

Dimensions

12.6 x 4.6 x 1.6 inches / 319 x 117 x 40mm

RGB or backlighting

Yes (customizable)

MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2 review: Design

Close-up of USB cable in MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2, on desk

(Image credit: Future)
  • Retro looks
  • Very thick and heavy
  • Advanced customization options

I think it’s fair to say that the appearance of the Made68 Ultra V2 will prove divisive. Some may view it as charmingly retro, while others will think it dated. The translucent keycaps allow the switches underneath to be seen and let the RGB shine through. The effect is nice, but it does look like something we might have seen 20 years ago.

The frame is also a throwback to a time when gaming peripherals had an industrial bent, with its metallic side plates and sharp corners. However, the large rectangular lightbar adds some interest, and I haven’t seen anything like this before on a keyboard. The same is true of the side light bars, so the Made68 Ultra V2 at least has something to distinguish it from others in the space.

Close-up of keys on MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2, on desk

(Image credit: Future)

Complementing that sharp and angular appearance is its thickness. This tapers off somewhat towards the front, which has the effect of tilting the keys towards you. This is a good thing, since the Made68 Ultra V2 has no folding feet, although I still would’ve welcomed some to create even more of an angle.

Perhaps the sheer weight of the unit is the reason for this absence. Whether this is a flaw or a feature will likely depend on personal preferences. If you want a solid, planted feel, then you may well appreciate its heft; however, if you move your board around frequently, or take it with you on your travels, you won’t.

There are numerous Fn shortcuts on the Made68 Ultra V2, although it’s a shame that none of them is marked on the keycaps themselves, which means you’ll have to commit them to memory.

But even if they were marked, you’d be hard pressed to see them, since the RGB backlighting fails to shine through the keycap characters. In fact, it actively obscures them; turning off the backlighting actually makes the keycap symbols easier to read, which defeats the point of the feature in the first place. This is perhaps the biggest design flaw of the Made68 Ultra V2.

Close-up of switch with keycap removed on MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2

(Image credit: Future)

If you want to customize these shortcuts, and rebind all the other keys, you’ll need to use MelGeek’s web app. This is easily accessed by double-tapping the Mode button on the rear of the board, which is a thoughtful touch and one I wish every keyboard featured. There are plenty of system and media commands available for mapping, but it's the analog features and adjustments that really stand out here.

Take the multi-binding features. There’s a counter-strafing mode that triggers a second input when releasing a key; so if you’re holding A to strafe left, you can set this same key to trigger a D input when released to stop you quicker. There’s also a Rappy Snappy mode that gives priority to a single input when two keys are pressed depending on which is pressed further down.

There are a pleasing amount of actuation adjustments, too. You can set the actuation point between 0.1mm and 3.3mm, and even alter the deadzone at the bottom of a key’s travel between 0mm and 0.07mm, which is something I haven’t seen before in other keyboards.

Side view of keys on MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2, on desk with pink wall in background

(Image credit: Future)

The Rapid Trigger mode also offers plenty of scope for meeting the demands of pro gamers. There’s an adaptive mode with three presets to choose from: Stable, Balanced, or Agile. But if you’re a tinkerer, there’s a manual mode with sliders for adjusting up- and downstrokes independently. These have a large range of 0.01mm to 2.4mm and increments of one hundredth of a millimeter. There’s also a Continuous Rapid Trigger mode, where a key only deactivates when you fully release the key, rather than merely releasing above your predefined actuation point.

This level of analog adjustability is very welcome. It’s a small shame, however, that there’s no controller emulation feature, as some other analog gaming keyboards have. But given the inconsistent effectiveness of such modes, I’m not too disappointed about its absence here.

I often find web apps less effective than standalone software, but I’m pleased to report that MelGeek’s is a fine example of the former. It’s fast, stable, and easy to use, thanks to its uncluttered layout and explanations of its various features. The only real drawback is the lack of visualization; I find this helps to inform all my actuation-related adjustments by letting me see their effects in real time.

MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2 review: Performance

Keycap in keycap removal tool with MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2 behind it, on a desk

(Image credit: Future)
  • Solid yet snappy keys
  • Reasonably comfortable WASD position
  • Great for typing

Perhaps the most striking aspect of the Made68 Ultra V2 is its key feel. The keys have no play to them and fire straight as an arrow. This makes them very secure, a feeling that’s bolstered by their mild but noticeable indentations. Their surface is pleasantly smooth without compromising traction.

Equally gratifying is the solid thud when the keys hit the end of their travel. There’s just enough dampening here to avoid them feeling harsh, and they still only require a light touch. They also rebound with impressive alacrity, which makes them feel snappy and responsive.

This combination of solid and springy means the Made68 Ultra V2 offers speed and control in equal parts, and makes it just as suitable for typing as it does for gaming. I made far fewer typos than I usually do with keycaps this tall and narrow, which is testament to the keyboard’s precise action.

Thanks to the forward tilt of the keys, the WASD position was comfortable, and reaching the outer keys was easy. I found myself hitting the edge of the space bar on occasion, but its lightness, feedback, and springiness made up for this. It’s a joy to use and one of the best I’ve experienced. I still wished the angle of the keys was a little steeper, though, and I would’ve welcomed a wrist rest for longer sessions to compensate for the thickness of the unit.

Should I buy the MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2?

Scorecard

Attributes

Notes

Rating

Value

Very expensive, even for an analog gaming keyboard. Equally capable boards from bigger names are sometimes cheaper.

2.5 / 5

Design and features

Very heavy and sturdy with a retro appeal. Plenty of customizations are available thanks to the web app.

3.5 / 5

Performance

The solid yet snappy keys are excellent for gaming and typing. The angle of the board is a bit too shallow, though.

4 / 5

Overall rating

The Made68 Ultra V2 is a high-performing and highly adjustable analog keyboard. But its faults are hard to excuse at this price point.

3.5 / 5

Buy it if…

You want solid keys
The thud of the keys is always satisfying, while their lightness and snappy rebound makes them easy to use.

You want plenty of customizations
Aside from controller emulation, the Made68 Ultra V2 has all the analog features you could wish for.

Don't buy it if…

You’re on a budget
Despite MelGeek being a relatively unknown brand, the Made68 Ultra V2 commands a premium price tag that would make even the big names blush.

You can’t touchtype
You’ll struggle to see the key markings when the RGB backlighting is on, which defeats the point.

MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2 review: Also consider

SteelSeries Apex Pro TKL Gen 3
In terms of sheer performance, the Apex Pro is one of the best analog gaming keyboards I’ve ever used. The feedback of the keys allows for precise control of inputs, while the myriad adjustments and customizations allow you to get the perfect setup. It’s also built very well, and is slightly cheaper than the Made68 Ultra V2. Read our full SteelSeries Apex Pro TKL Gen 3 review.

Razer Huntsman V3 Tenkeyless 8KHz
Another analog keyboard with a smorgasbord of adjustments and features, the Huntsman is a very competent performer. It perhaps doesn’t have the same satisfying feel as the Made68 Ultra V2, but it’s considerably cheaper. Read our full Razer Huntsman V3 Tenkeyless 8KHz review.

How I tested the MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2

Underside view of MelGeek Made68 Ultra V2, standing up on desk with pink wall in background

(Image credit: Future)
  • Tested for several days
  • Used for gaming and working
  • Plentiful gaming keyboard experience

I tested the Made68 Ultra V2 for several days, during which time I used it for gaming, working, and general browsing.

I played games such as Counter-Strike 2, which is a stern test for peripherals, given the demands it places on speed and precision.

I’ve been using gaming keyboards for years, and have reviewed a large number of them, across all manner of price points, switch types, and form factors.

Techland cancels PS4 and Xbox One versions of Dying Light: The Beast — 'It became clear that bringing the game to those platforms would require compromises that would prevent us from delivering the experience we set out to create'

  • The PlayStation and Xbox One versions of Dying Light: The Beast have been cancelled
  • Techland says the game "was built from the ground up to take full advantage of current-generation hardware"
  • The decision "reflected the technical realities of development and our commitment to delivering the best possible experience"

Techland has announced that Dying Light: The Beast will no longer be released for last-generation consoles.

The latest entry in the survival horror series launched in September last year for PlayStation 5, Xbox Series X and Series S, and PC, and it was Techland's plan to eventually bring the game to PlayStation 4 and Xbox One at a later date.

Now, in a statement shared on X today, the studio confirmed that it has "made the difficult decision" to cancel the ports "after careful consideration."

"Dying Light: The Beast was built from the ground up to take full advantage of current-generation hardware. Its open world, advanced visuals, and fluid combat and traversal all depend on processing power and memory that previous-generation consoles simply cannot provide," Techland said.

"As development progressed, it became clear that bringing the game to those platforms would require compromises that would prevent us from delivering the experience we set out to create."

It continued, saying the decision wasn't a "matter of choosing to leave those platforms behind" but rather one that "reflected the technical realities of development and our commitment to delivering the best possible experience."

"We know many of you were looking forward to playing on PS4 or Xbox One, and we are truly sorry for the disappointment this causes. Anyone who was expecting to play on either platform will be eligible for a refund. Thank you for your understanding and continued support."

In TechRadar Gaming's Dying Light: The Beast review, reviewer Christian Guyton said the game "went from potential expansion to a fully-fledged sequel, and although its origins are on full display in its narrative and protagonist, it never feels constrained by them."

"It’s not reinventing the wheel," Guyton wrote. "Techland has a solid formula that mixes traditional open-world action sandbox elements with a solid parkour-based movement system and high enemy density, so it’s understandable that The Beast wouldn’t be too much of a deviation from the norm. Still, the new setting is a breath of fresh air, and it still feels fantastic to dropkick a zombie off a roof."

A new edition of the game, Dying Light: The Beast Restored Land, was released earlier this year and included the base game, all post-launch content, and the 'Restored Land' survival mode.

LAPD hits pause on Flock surveillance cameras due to 'serious concerns around civil liberties and privacy' — as the backlash continues to grow

  • Three-year contract won't be renewed, police officials claim
  • Data and privacy concerns have been cited
  • Flock cameras have faced a backlash from a privacy-concerned public

Officials from the Los Angeles Police Department have told the Los Angeles Times that its contract with surveillance camera company Flock will not be renewed due to "serious concerns" around privacy and the data they gather.

The cameras, which are owned by Flock and used by more than 5,000 law enforcement agencies across the US, scan and track billions of vehicle license plates every month, with the resulting data used by police departments to help make arrests and build cases.

However, there has been widespread public backlash due to privacy concerns, with some residents taking matters into their own hands. Recently, an Air Force engineer from Virginia has been accused of cutting down 13 Flock cameras over a six-month period.

According to Military.com, privacy advocates across the country have donated more than $15,000 (about £11,220 / AU$21,660) to the accused's legal defense.

What's more, developers have created a free online mapping tool that allows US drivers to plot routes that actively avoid areas with a dense population of Flock cameras.

The LAPD's chief information officer, Dean Gialamas, told reporters that the contract was not being renewed due to "serious concerns around civil liberties and civil rights issues, particularly around privacy and the data that is being collected from these cameras."

Gialamas added that he hoped the data, privacy, security, and sharing concerns would eventually be "ironed out through a contractual relationship." There is currently no word on whether Flock's cameras will continue to record and distribute data in the meantime.

Analysis: The public fights back

A flock camera next to SignalTrace cameras on a post

(Image credit: Getty Images / Leonardo)

Flock's network of some 80,000 cameras in the US has been chastised by data privacy advocates, with the likes of 404 Media carrying out numerous investigations that highlight how easy it is for this surveillance data to fall into the wrong hands.

According to TechCrunch, researchers have also identified an increase in the number of documented cases where motorists have been pulled over, detained, and even jailed due to false positives and errors with license plate readers.

We also recently reported that an investigation by the Electronic Frontier Foundation found that more than 50 federal, state, and local agencies ran hundreds of searches through Flock's national network of surveillance data in connection with protest activity.

One motoring journalist in the US was even tracked for days and eventually 'boxed in' by police over a Flock-based mix-up with the license plates attached to the press loan vehicle he was driving.

As public distrust in Flock's safety cameras mounts, we could see more agencies follow LAPD's lead in pushing back on the technology.

WD-Black's SN8100 2TB Gen 5 SSD hits a blazing-fast 14,900MB/s read speeds — and it's down to $400

If you're building or upgrading a PCIe Gen 5 system, this is one of the fastest consumer drives you can buy. Right now, the 2TB WD_Black SN8100 is $400 (was $440) at Amazon, a $40 savings on a drive that tops out at nearly 15,000 MB/s.

That speed matters most for large sequential transfers — moving big game installs, video files, or disk images — where you'll actually see the difference over a Gen 4 drive.

For typical everyday use like booting Windows or opening applications, the gains over a good Gen 4 SSD are much smaller, since most everyday tasks don't come close to saturating even Gen 4 bandwidth. But if you're running video editing projects, AI applications, and games, the difference will be immediately noticeable.

Today's top WD-Black SSD deal

PCIe Gen 5x4 NVMe SSD in the M.2 2280 form factor, rated for up to 14,900MB/s sequential read and 14,000MB/s sequential write. Non-heatsink version, for systems with their own M.2 cooling or motherboard-integrated heatsinks.View Deal

The SN8100 is WD's flagship consumer drive, built on SanDisk's latest PCIe Gen 5 controller and 3D NAND. Its rated 14,900MB/s read speed puts it near the top of the current consumer SSD market, and it's one of the drives we recommend as a best-overall pick for anyone with a Gen 5-capable motherboard looking to actually use that bandwidth rather than leave it on the table with an older Gen 4 drive.

This is the non-heatsink version, which is the right call if your motherboard already includes an M.2 heatsink or shroud over the Gen 5 slot (increasingly common on recent boards) — stacking a drive heatsink underneath an integrated one can trap heat rather than dissipate it.

If your board doesn't have one built in, factor in the cost of a separate M.2 heatsink, since Gen 5 drives run hot under sustained load and can thermal-throttle without adequate cooling.

One honest caveat: PCIe Gen 5 drives like this only reach their rated speeds on a motherboard and CPU platform with genuine Gen 5 M.2 support — check your board's specs before buying, since plugging this into a Gen 4 slot caps performance at Gen 4 speeds and makes the premium harder to justify.

If you have a Gen 5-ready system and want genuinely top-tier storage speed, the SN8100 is a strong buy.

For more savings, see our round-up of all the current best SSD deals.

US and security allies warn Russian attacks on critical infrastructure are ramping up against 'poorly configured and vulnerable networking devices worldwide'

  • NSA, FBI, CISA, and 15 allied agencies warn Russia’s FSB Center 16 is exploiting weak/default credentials and old Cisco flaws to compromise critical infrastructure devices
  • Advisory highlights CVE‑2018‑0171 (Smart Install DoS/RCE) and CVE‑2008‑412813 (CSRF in Cisco IOS 12.4) as examples of vulnerabilities still being abused
  • TTPs overlap with Chinese groups but attribution points to Russian actors like Berserk Bear and Energetic Bear; full IoCs and mitigations were published in the joint advisory

Russian state-sponsored threat actors are continuously targeting broken and poorly configured networking devices belonging to critical infrastructure providers all around the world, a joint security advisory published by the US National Security Agency (NSA) and more than a dozen other agencies has warned.

As per the advisory, hackers working for the Russian Federal Security Service (FSB) Center 16 are constantly scanning for routers and other internet-connected devices that can be accessed with “common or default” login credentials.

Once found, these devices are instructed to copy device configuration files and later exfiltrate them via the Trivial File Transfer Protocol to servers under their control.

Berserk Bear and Salt Typhoon

In cases where default or weak credentials don’t work, the threat actors also try to exploit vulnerabilities. In the advisory, the agencies specifically mentioned two flaws in Cisco devices - CVE-2018-0171 and CVE-2008-412813. The former is an eight-year-old bug in the Smart Install feature of Cisco IOS Software and Cisco IOS XE Software that allows an unauthenticated, remote attacker to cause a denial of service (DoS) condition, or to execute arbitrary code.

The latter is an even older (18 years old) set of multiple cross-site request forgery (CSRF) vulnerabilities in the HTTP Administration component in Cisco IOS 12.4 on the 871 Integrated Services Router that allows remote attackers to execute arbitrary commands.

Even though many of these tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) overlap with Chinese hackers Salt Typhoon, the agencies suggested they are primarily focusing on Russian hackers known as Berserk Bear, Energetic Bear, Crouching Yeti, Dragonfly, Ghost Blizzard, or Static Tundra.

The joint advisory is co-authored by the NSA, FBI, and CISA, as well as 15 other agencies from Australia, the United Kingdom, Canada, New Zealand, Estonia, Finland, France, and Italy.

The Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua cordless stick vac-and-mop is a versatile floor cleaning combo for both vacuuming and light mopping duties

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua: two-minute review

The Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua is one of those products that leaves you feeling both impressed and slightly perplexed. No question, this is an impressive cordless stick vac with suction powerful enough to deal with everything from fine dust to larger debris, especially when used on carpet. However, while the provided multi-floor head is well engineered, I do wish Dreame had included its clever GapFree hard floor head as featured with the Dreame V20 Pro, which I consider a much better bet for hard floor sweeping.

Battery life is a respectable 35 minutes or so in Auto mode, and the whole machine feels fairly light in the hand, well balanced and easy enough to maneuver. Whether you're tackling carpets or rugs, it performs with the confidence you'd expect from what is essentially a flagship model. However, it’s not the best hard-floor model I’ve seen, at least when it comes to picking up larger debris.

While its detachable mopping unit is a class leader at collecting accidental spills and lifting everyday grime, its twin water tanks are simply too small to support cleaning across an entire home without frequent refills. As a result, it feels more like a maintenance tool than a genuine wet-cleaning solution, making it best suited to localized cleaning and single-room mopping rather than cleaning the floors of an entire house.

I'm not convinced by Dreame's docking solution, either. Instead of the elegant wall-mounted charging docks offered by some rivals, the Z30 Pro Aqua comes with an ungainly stand featuring a collection of bolt-on accessory holders. It's undeniably practical, but it looks more like an afterthought than something designed to complement a modern home. Put another way, you may want to tuck this stand well out of sight.

Nevertheless, strip away the awkward storage system and you’re still left with a very decent cordless vacuum cleaner and exemplary spot mopper for occasional household mishaps.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua review: price & availability

  • List price: £549 (about $730 / AU$1,060)
  • Launched: May 2026
  • Availability: UK and Europe

The Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua sits firmly in the premium end of the cordless vacuum market. In the UK, its official retail price is a lofty £549 (about $730 / AU$1,060) but Dreame is currently selling it for a more reasonable £479 (about $640 / AU$920). Across Europe, pricing varies by country but generally lands at around €479.

While you can purchase the vac-only Z30 variant in the USA, the Z30 Pro Aqua we’re reviewing here hasn't been officially released over there yet, though Dreame is expected to bring the Pro Aqua (or a similar wet-dry variation) Stateside sometime later in 2026.

The Z30 Pro Aqua is competing against some seriously capable cordless cleaners and, while its vacuuming credentials are generally excellent, you are paying a premium for a mopping system that doesn't quite live up to the rest of the package. Unless your hard-floor cleaning needs are limited to quick maintenance mops, you may find better value elsewhere.

One alternative is to buy a stick vacuum and a dedicated wet-dry floor cleaner separately. Pairing something like the Dreame R20 (around £179 in the UK) or Shark PowerDetect (around £330) with a specialist floor washer such as the Dreame H15 Pro, Tineco Floor One S7 Pro or Roborock F25 Ultra will deliver much better range for whole-home mopping without constant refills and emptying. Yes, you'll need storage space for two appliances, but you'll also end up with a far more capable cleaning setup that excels at every task instead of compromising on either.

  • Value for money score: 3.5 out of 5

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua specs

Type

Cordless vacuum with wet-and-dry unit

Bagged / bagless

Bagless

Weight

7.72lbs / 3.5kg

Bin size

20.2 fl oz / 0.6 litre

Max runtime

Claimed 90 mins in Eco mode

Max suction

310 AW (28,000Pa)

Clean water tank:

13.5 fl oz / 400ml

Dirty water tank:

10.8 fl oz / 320ml

Hot air drying time

30 mins

Hot air drying temperature

158F / 70C

Charging time

4 hours

Tools

TangleCut Multi-Surface Brush, AquaCycle 2.0 Wet Cleaning Brush, wide fluff tool, crevice tool, dusting bush

Noise level

90dB

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua review: design

  • Elegant hand unit
  • Impressive suction stats
  • Unattractive docking system

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua on test at home

(Image credit: Future)

There are two main floor-cleaning disciplines — vacuuming and mopping — and both require a completely different approach. For vacuuming of hard floors and carpet you obviously need a vacuum cleaner — preferably of the cordless stick variety — but when it comes to mopping hard floors you have several choices.

There’s obviously the classic mop and bucket (which reigns supreme despite the paraphernalia and elbow grease required), a large handful of paper towels for liquid spills, or the good old damp tea towel for either messy spills or general hard floor cleaning. However, I know of a more practical solution and it’s called a cordless hard floor cleaner or, for want of a better description, a wet-dry vacuum cleaner.

These machines use a self-dampened spinning roller to quite literally suck up liquid spills of almost every variety — even vomit and puppy wee if you can handle the thought — depositing the disgusting mess into a large dirty water tank which is then emptied into the toilet bowl while holding one’s nose.

The big bonus with wet-dry vacs is that they cleverly eliminate the need for a bucket of water or any other accoutrements, so when you’re faced with a liquid spill, you simply grab the machine, run it over the mess a few times and return it to its charging plinth where it undergoes a robust self-cleaning regime in readiness for the next calamity.

Of course, these handy home helpers are also sterling floor moppers in general, removing most stains and grime off kitchen and bathroom floors in record time. However, the upshot is that you end up with two machines cluttering the home, which is where this all-in-one vaccy-moppy model from Dreame comes into the equation.

Before I discuss the Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua’s versatile list of credentials, I must chip in with a quick caveat regarding its looks. Attired in Dreame’s usual posh rose gold bling, the Z30 Pro Aqua’s main vacuum unit is actually very stylish and elegant but I can’t say the same for the storage system-cum-charging-and-mop-cleaning plinth, which is so ugly that even Dreame is shying away from making a song and dance about it on its web page.

I’m struggling to think of what this tangled melange of bendy pipes and bolted-on plastic accessory holders looks like but it’s quite an eyesore that you will definitely want to hide deep in the recesses of the utility room – or at the very least well away from any living areas.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua on test at home

(Image credit: Future)

The Z30 Pro Aqua’s charging system entails pushing the suction tube into a pair of arm clamps until they click shut, and it’s a bit of wobbly affair it must be said. But here’s the thing — the suction tube needs to be attached to the mopping head because the charging contacts don’t line up if docked with the vacuum head. Given that most of the time you’ll be using the vacuuming function, I think this is a major oversight because it requires having to change the vacuum head to the mopping head every time you dock the unit. Anyway, to remove the unit, you simply push back against the clamps to release it.

I’ve never been a fan of multiple accessories, but this one comes with a mini banquet, namely the obligatory dusting brush, flat head and crevice nozzle, which all clip into the charging base assembly. However, it’s not very often that I’m able to attach any of the detail tools to the storage post without fiddling about with the connectors. There’s only one way to insert them and even this requires wiggling the accessory until you finally locate the correct entry angle. This is not such a good thing when you’re in the middle of a clean and you’re swapping tools like a plumber fixing a leaky pipe.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua on test at home

(Image credit: Future)

Disappointingly, you get just one universal brush head with this machine, and not the clever edge-cleaning hard floor-specific head that shipped with the excellent Dreame V20 Pro stick vac. Yes, I know that would perhaps be one accessory too many but I’d be happy to find someone to store it, mostly because it’s so good at cleaning right to the very edge of skirting boards.

The 8.6-inch (22cm) brush head itself is essentially a solid, molded cylinder with protruding paddles, each with a soft nylon bristle attached. Despite its simplicity, it makes an extremely good fist of beating dust out of carpets but it feels and sounds too rigid for hard floors. On the plus side, the brush head is easy to maneuver around furniture legs and I like the suction reduction vent on the front of the head which is handy on deeper pile carpet. A full blue beam of blue light, meanwhile, illuminates detritus when sweeping in darker areas, though it’s not a patch on Dyson’s Lazer Dust Detection system.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua on test at home

(Image credit: Future)

This leads me to the last part of this unusual entry into the world of floor cleaning – the detachable mop head. Unlike purpose-built wet-dry hard floor cleaners like the class-leading Roborock 25 Ultra – which comes with a large 33.8 fl oz (1L) clean water tank and 24.3 fl oz (720ml) dirty water reservoir – the Z30 Pro Aqua’s detachable mop head is equipped with a titchy 13.5 fl oz (400ml) fresh water tank, an even smaller 10.8 fl oz (320ml) one for the filthy stuff and, uniquely, a separate collection box for solid debris.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua on test at home

(Image credit: Future)

Unlike dedicated electro moppers that port all muck — liquid and solid — into one large container for pouring into the toilet, this one separates the waste into liquid and solids. I can see the reasoning behind it if one were to use the sink for disposing the contents because it keeps the solid stuff aside for emptying into the kitchen bin by simply lifting out the solids container.

Granted, the mop system is self cleaning, but this process uses most of the water in the tank so you’ll likely need a refill for the self-cleaning process followed by yet another refill and emptying session before you can take it out on its next run. On the plus side, the front-mounted wooly spinning mop head – thicker and more absorbent than others I’ve seen – is thoroughly cleaned and then dried on its bucket-shaped base for 30 minutes using hot air at a very effective 158F (70C).

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua on test at home

(Image credit: Future)

Let’s take a closer look at the engine room of this new vac-and-mop system. The handheld unit alone weighs 5lb (2.3kg) and 7.7lb (3.5kg) with the suction tube and floor head attached. This is the exact same combined weight as the Dyson Gen5Detect, and par for the course given its larger-than-average 20.3 fl oz (0.6L) dust bin capacity. To empty the bin, you simply tap a side button and it lifts off the unit to be taken to the bin and emptied by pressing another button to eject all detritus. In terms of suction power, the Z30 Pro Aqua produces a whopping 28,000 Pascals – more than enough oomph for deep-pile carpet cleaning duties.

The Z30 Pro Aqua’s hand unit doesn’t come with a trigger. Instead you press the On button and choose from Auto (which increases suction automatically when heavy deposits of dust are detected), Eco or Turbo. You can see which mode you’re in by looking at the circular display which, incidentally, also illustrates the levels of debris being collected in Auto mode, a bit like a Dyson only nowhere near as bright or as readable.

Dreame’s 90-minute running time is based on it being in Eco mode on hard floor and that may be true or taken with a pinch of salt. However I have always used Auto mode, for which I got about 35 minutes of suction and/or mopping when running the unit on a hard wooden floor. That’s not too bad for a stick vac in auto mode — I’ve seen worse.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua on test at home

(Image credit: Future)

I’ll end this chapter with a shout out to the rose gold suction tube that bends 90 degrees for reaching under sofas and beds. If I’m not mistaken, Shark was the first to produce an articulating suction tube. It’s a great feature to have, mostly because it saves having to get on one’s knees when cleaning under low-slung furnishings.

My final thoughts on the design of the Z30 Pro Aqua? Firstly, build quality is excellent throughout. The main unit feels reassuringly solid without becoming too cumbersome, while the large transparent dust bin, easy-release battery and intuitive controls all contribute to a very premium vacuuming experience.

In essence, it looks to me like this product was created mostly for vacuuming, but with the ability to clean up small spills and odd stains as and when they occur. I don’t think it’s a valid alternative to a dedicated wet-dry vacuum cleaner which is suitable for cleaning a whole home. But, hey, if the concept of a multipurpose two-in-one floor cleaner floats your boat then by all means go ahead. Just be aware that you may not be able to mop more than half a large kitchen before having to perform an empty-and-refill session.

  • Design score: 4 out of 5

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua review: performance

  • Exceptional carpet performance
  • Not as efficient on hard floors
  • Perfect for spot mopping

Aside from some daily vacuuming and low-level mopping, I also set up three performance tests for the Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua: carpet and hard floor vacuuming using a variety of dry ingredients, including rice, partly broken cornflakes, oats and flour; and hard floor mopping using a splash of milk and a few cornflakes. For both tests I set the suction mode to Auto, which adjusts the power according to the amount of dust and dirt the built-in sensor detects.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua floor test

(Image credit: Future)

The result for the hard floor test in my kitchen was about average. It certainly wasn’t a match for my Dyson Gen5Detect with its hard floor-specific attachment fitted. Although it collected the cornflakes, oats and flour well enough, the Z30 scattered more rice than it should have. I put this unexceptional performance down to the design of the universal brush head which doesn’t seem particularly well suited to hard floors. It also sounded a wee bit clattery as if it was crying out for a smooth velveteen brush roller. A very good reason, me thinks, for Dreame to include its excellent GapFree hard floor-specific head with this product.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua floor test

(Image credit: Future)

The carpet test, on the other hand, was a much rosier picture. In fac, I’d say that the Z30 may well be one of the better carpet sweepers on the market since it had no issues collecting everything in a single stroke bar a few obstreperous grains of rice. It also left no trace of flour, even when examined close up. The Z30 has also proved very adept at collecting huge amounts of Labrador hair during its general cleaning routines.

Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua floor test

(Image credit: Future)

For my final test I grabbed the mopping unit, filled it with fresh water and introduced it to some spilled milk and soggy cornflakes. Blow me down with a feather! This thing performed exceedingly well in this test, collecting every last flake of corn and all the milk in a single pass. I put this down to the material used for the roller which is thick, dense, and has a slightly grippy feel. In fact, I also noticed the effectiveness of this roller during standard mopping duties because it dealt with general stains and floor marks with consummate aplomb. I have also been impressed by how well the mop has steered around furniture and how it can be angled to over 90˚ for tight areas.

  • Performance score: 4 out of 5

Should you buy the Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua?

Attribute

Notes

Rating

Value

The Z30 Pro Aqua is expensive, but its powerful vacuuming and integrated mopping may justify the outlay for some households, though not everyone.

3.5 / 5

Design

An intriguing combo for those after a two-in-one floor-cleaning solution but the jury’s out on the ungainly look of the mop-cleaning dock.

4 / 5

Performance

This isn’t the best option for hard floors but it’s excellent on carpet. And while its mop is intended for short bursts, it’s surprisingly excellent at cleaning up stains and spills.

4 / 5

Buy it if...

You want decent vacuuming performance

Powerful suction and an effective floor head make light work of carpets, rugs and, to a lesser degree, hard floors.

You need to perform occasional spot mopping

This model is just the ticket for quick mopping duties.

You love premium build quality

The Z30 Pro Aqua feels every bit like a flagship appliance, with solid construction and refined ergonomics.

Don't buy it if...

You need to perform whole-home mopping

The mop unit’s small clean and dirty water tanks limit how much floor you can tackle before stopping for a refill.

You have an eye for aesthetics

The stand works okay, but its bulky, ugly design and silly charging system are a let down.

You don’t need a mopping system

This may not be the model for you.View Deal

How I tested the Dreame Z30 Pro Aqua

After I’d had my eyes abused by the sight of this model’s convoluted dock design, I managed to find somewhere out of sight to store it before embarking on a series of tests. Aside from a two week period of using it for general cleaning purposes – at which it mostly excelled – I set up a couple of challenging vacuum tests, plus a mopping test using a liquid spill.

I also evaluated its weight in the hand and overall maneuverability on both carpet and hard floors – the mopping attachment is especially impressive in this department. However, on even closer inspection of the dock, I still maintain that there’s work to do in improving its looks and functionality, especially the disappointing charging system that only works if the mopping head is attached. But, hey, each to their own.

Read more about how we test

  • First reviewed July 2026

Which Ninja air fryer should I buy? Here are our personal favorites — plus top tips on how to choose

Ninja makes some of the best air fryers on the market, but considering how easy these appliances are to use, it sure is difficult to figure out which one to buy. This brand's air fryer range has grown to incorporate dozens of models with different capacities and capabilities.

We've tested ... okay not all, but a decent number of them, so we're in an ideal position to help. The good news is they almost always score highly in our tests, which means you're unlikely to come away disappointed, whichever one you go for.

However, some models will be better suited to your needs than others. Below, I've rounded up all the Ninja air fryers that we've tested and recommend, and which are still available — and if you hit the 'View details' button you can see exactly what we thought of each one. Skip to the bottom of the page for some top tips on how to choose the right one for your kitchen.

Let's fry, let's fry away

Ninja
Double Stack XL 9.5L Air Fryer SL400UK
Ninja
French Door Premier Air Fryer Convection Oven Toaster
Ninja
5-in-1 Grill and Air Fryer
Ninja
Crispi
Ninja
Crispi Pro Glass Air Fryer
Ninja
Foodi Health Grill & Air Fryer
Ninja
AF300UK Foodi Dual Zone Air Fryer
Ninja
Foodi FlexDrawer Air Fryer 10.4L
Ninja
Foodi Max Dual Zone Air Fryer AF400UK
Ninja
DCT451 12-in-1 Smart Double Oven Air Fryer
Ninja
Air Fryer Max AF160

How do I choose?

If you're feeding larger numbers or want to create multi-component meals (and have enough counter space), look at the Foodi Dual Zone options — these feature-packed air fryers have two drawers that can be set to different temperatures, and the machine will sync up cooking for you so the food in both sections is ready at the same time. Or, for the same functionality but a smaller footprint, you can't beat the Double Stack, which puts one drawer on top of the other (there are a few capacities available).

Those with small kitchens should consider a Crispi model. These have an innovative design that's essentially a glass container onto which an air fryer hat attaches. The containers can be used as serving or storage dishes, for maximum versatility.

If you don't just want an air fryer, plenty of Ninja's appliances double up as different kinds of cooker. One of the most versatile additions to the range is the French Door Air Fryer, which offers 10 cooking modes and can fit a whole roast or pizza inside. Alternatively, you have things like the 5-in-1 Grill & Air Fryer, which come with a range of accessories including a griddle plate for an authentic chargrilled finish.

If you're still feeling overwhelmed, I don't blame you. There's a lot of overlap between what these air fryers can do, so I'd start by looking at how much space you have on your counter, and how much capacity you need in your air fryer, and use those requirements to narrow your options down.

AI does not solve poor finance infrastructure: it weakens it

Artificial intelligence has quickly become the boardroom's favorite solution. From forecasting and reporting to scenario planning and budgeting, finance leaders are under growing pressure to demonstrate how AI can improve efficiency and drive better decisions.

But against the rush to adopt AI, many organizations are overlooking a fundamental truth: that AI is only as effective as the systems, processes and data that support it.

This is particularly true in finance, where many teams continue to rely on fragmented technology stacks, disconnected data sources and spreadsheet-heavy workflows. While AI promises to automate analysis and surface deeper insights, it cannot compensate for weak foundations. In fact, it often does the opposite, exposing issues that previously remained hidden beneath layers of manual work.

The reality is that many finance functions are less prepared for AI than they realize.

The spreadsheet problem AI cannot solve:

Spreadsheets remain deeply embedded within enterprise finance. They are familiar, flexible and accessible. However, they were never designed to serve as the backbone of modern financial planning and analysis for large enterprises.

In many organizations, critical forecasting models, budgeting processes and reporting workflows are still maintained across countless spreadsheets, often with limited governance and varying levels of accuracy. Data is copied between systems, formulas evolve over time, and key assumptions can become difficult to trace.

Introducing AI into this environment does not eliminate these challenges. It amplifies them.

If an AI model is drawing insights from inconsistent data sources or outdated spreadsheets, it will simply generate the wrong answer faster. Automated recommendations may appear sophisticated, but their reliability is ultimately determined by the quality and integrity of the underlying information.

This is why the familiar principle of ‘garbage in, garbage out’ remains so relevant to finance teams today.

Why finance teams may be overestimating their AI readiness:

Many organizations assess AI readiness by evaluating tools. They ask whether they have access to the latest models, whether employees are using generative AI and AI agents, or whether automation opportunities exist within their workflows.

Far fewer assess the quality of the infrastructure feeding those systems.

True AI readiness starts with questions such as:

  • Is financial data consistent across systems?
  • Can teams trust the numbers they are working with?
  • Are planning, reporting and forecasting processes standardized?
  • Is there a single source of truth for business performance?

If the answer to these questions is unclear, AI adoption risks introducing new complexity rather than delivering meaningful value.

The challenge is not a lack of ambition; most finance leaders recognize the potential of AI. The challenge is that many organizations are attempting to build advanced capabilities on top of foundations that were never designed to support them.

Data quality is becoming a strategic priority:

As AI becomes more embedded within finance operations, data quality is shifting from an operational concern to a strategic business priority.

Finance teams have long spent significant amounts of time gathering, reconciling and validating data before analysis can even begin. AI has the potential to reduce that burden, but only when the underlying information is accurate, connected and accessible.

Organizations that invest in modern finance infrastructure gain a significant advantage. Centralized platforms, integrated data environments and standardized planning processes create the conditions necessary for AI to deliver meaningful outcomes. They also improve transparency, governance and trust in financial decision-making.

Without these foundations, AI initiatives risk becoming expensive experiments that fail to deliver lasting value.

Building the foundations before scaling AI:

The future of finance undoubtedly involves AI. The technology's ability to improve forecasting, accelerate reporting and support more strategic decision-making is too significant to ignore.

However, the organizations that realize the greatest benefits will not necessarily be those that adopt AI first. They will be those that prepare for it properly.

Before automating processes or deploying new AI capabilities, finance leaders should take a closer look at the systems supporting their operations. Are they creating a trusted, connected and scalable environment for decision-making, or are they simply digitizing existing inefficiencies? AI is a powerful multiplier, but multipliers work in both directions.

For finance teams still relying on fragmented systems and spreadsheet-driven processes, the priority should not be adopting AI faster. It should be strengthening the infrastructure that allows AI to succeed.

Because AI will not fix weak finance foundations. It will expose them.

We've featured the best AI tool.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

Autonomous AI worms mark a new era of adaptive cyberattacks

Researchers at the University of Toronto have demonstrated a computer worm that reasons its way across a network, working out a different attack for each machine it lands on, with no humans involved.

Much of the coverage has called this a breakthrough in demonstrating how the AI worm can target any online device, but that capability has been visible on the horizon for anyone watching the criminal underground.

What the paper does is settle the argument about whether it is buildable and, in doing so, reopens three issues most internet security teams would rather not confront directly.

The first of these is cost, and this is the story that matters. Building attacks aimed at specific systems used to be slow and expensive, requiring skilled operators.

That expense is one reason many mid-sized organizations were largely ignored - they were not worth the engineering effort. The Toronto worm removes that constraint by running an open-weight model on the GPUs of machines it has already compromised.

Devices too weak to host a model send their reasoning upstream to an infected node elsewhere on the network. The attacker’s compute bill is paid by the victims, and each captured machine extends the worm’s own infrastructure.

Once tailored attacks cost almost nothing, being uninteresting stops protecting you. Being reachable starts to matter far more than being interesting.

Patching complications

The next issue, patch management, is where things become a little more complicated. Traditionally, when a conventional worm would ride a specific vulnerability, the conventional response would be to patch it, and the worm would die. WannaCry spread across more than 150 countries in 2017 on a single flaw, reinforcing the lesson that rapid patching limits damage.

This worm, however, does not give defenders a single flaw to patch. It reasons out a different route per host, and in one experiment, when copies repeatedly failed on older systems because of a detection bug, the parent process identified the failing check, removed it, and tried again. You cannot rely on closing a single door against something that rewrites its approach as it goes.

And finally, and more worryingly, the worm was able to consume newly published security advisories during execution and generate attacks against vulnerabilities that did not exist when the underlying model was trained. That challenges the assumption that knowledge cutoffs meaningfully constrain offensive AI.

If the model can read today’s advisory and reason from it, the training date matters far less than many assume.

Working, with limitations

However, its limitations deserve to be stated plainly. Exploitation attempts succeeded 44 percent of the time, and the researchers noted that most failures were malformed payloads rather than flawed reasoning.

It was also slow. Yet according to the researchers, across fifteen experiments the worm obtained elevated access on about 74 percent of hosts, replicated onto roughly 62 percent, and reached seven generations of self-replication within a week.

A 44 percent success rate that continually retries is not a wall the threat runs into. It is a baseline, and that baseline tracks what open-weight models can do today, a capability that has so far moved in one direction.

Another underappreciated point is that the model runs inside an environment the attacker controls. That makes many of the safety mechanisms discussed by AI vendors (refusals, filters, and rate limits), largely irrelevant. There is nothing to rate-limit when inference is occurring on infrastructure the attacker already owns.

If your AI risk model assumes a platform provider will enforce guardrails, this is a scenario that will bypass them entirely.

Plan around the attacker

What to do about it is less dramatic than the threat itself. Keep patching. The problem is that patching was already a treadmill against capable adversaries, and this only makes the treadmill faster.

The more effective solution is to plan around an attacker that eventually gets in and adapts once inside. Segmentation and containment, for instance, should take priority over chasing individual vulnerabilities. If the entry point can be almost anything, then the critical question becomes how far an intrusion can spread.

There is also the issue of exposure. A worm like this will seek the easiest foothold first, just as human operators do. These can include leaked credentials, forgotten infrastructure, internet-facing services, or access already circulating in criminal markets.

Monitoring external exposure is primarily about buying time, rather than preventing compromise entirely, which is precisely what an autonomous attacker is designed to take away.

The worm remained in the lab, and the code is gated for defensive researchers, which was the right decision. But academic containment is not quite the same as reassurance.

The economics that once shielded many organizations are weakening, the patch-it-and-move-on model is losing effectiveness, and some researchers and practitioners are placing operationally relevant autonomous attacks within roughly twelve to eighteen months.

Therefore, the question we should be asking is whether to take this seriously now, on your terms, or later, on an attacker's.

We've reviewed and ranked the best endpoint protection software suites.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

Real Housewives of London season 2 release date confirmed as Hayu promises 'most personal season yet' — I just hope it doesn't repeat the same annoying mistake

  • Real Housewives of London season 2 will stream on Hayu from September 7
  • Core cast Juliet Angus, Amanda Cronin, Karen Loderick-Peace, Juliet Mayhew, Panthea Parker and Nessie Welschinger are returning
  • New episodes promise ' shifting alliances, mounting tensions and unmissable moments'

Look lively, reality TV fans: Real Housewives of London season 2 is set to return to Hayu on September 7.

According to NBCUniversal, housewives Juliet Angus, Amanda Cronin, Karen Loderick-Peace, Juliet Mayhew, Panthea Parker and Nessie Welschinger are all returning, and "old friendships are tested, new loyalties are questioned and even the most glamorous postcode cannot contain the drama."

The synopsis continues, "Picking up in the aftermath of a fracturing off-camera dinner, the women attempt to move forward through charity galas, Fashion Week front rows, Lunar New Year celebrations and a jaw-dropping trip to Antigua."

Following the September 7 premiere, remaining episodes are set to drop weekly. With 10 episodes in total, the season will culminate with a reunion special hosted by author and podcaster Katherine Ryan.

It's this final detail that I have the biggest problem with... and I'm desperately hoping that the hit series doesn't repeat the same mistake that so many of the international versions have year-on-year.

Opinion: Real Housewives needs to change its reunion show format ASAP

I would apologize for being a hater, but really it stands me in good stead to be a Housewife myself. After streaming multiple episodes of catty VTs, explosive showdowns and domestic setups that truly boggle the mind, I often feel my shoulders sink when the reunion show rolls around.

Essentially, a host will sit the entire cast down in a live studio format to recap the drama of episodes past, getting their individual takes on what happened and if anything has changed since filming.

If you loathe overly edited and contrived TV scenes like I do, this is an absolute nightmare. It's part and parcel of the Real Housewives IP that drama is both heightened and engineered, but reunion shows channel this in the most inorganic way possible.

At least if someone is having a fight at a restaurant on a kitchen island, they're genuinely in the moment — they're not having to perform their emotions too much because they're feeling them in real time. But raking back over the past is merely a way to create a viral moment rather than engaging television.

Instead, I'd prefer it if the reunions were scrapped altogether to allow the next season (which hasn't been greenlit in this instance) to come sooner rather than later.

Real Housewives of London season 3 isn't going to be a bad decision for anyone, so what are we waiting for?

Why is a Kodak point-and-shoot with worse picture quality than your phone the best-selling camera year after year? The answer is surprising, but also kind of obvious

  • Kodak PixPro FZ45 and FZ55 top best-selling lists in multiple regions
  • They are currently the most popular models at Amazon US and elsewhere
  • Prices start from as little as $100 / £90 / AU$145

Camera fans might expect Sony or Canon to top the best-selling charts, but for outright popularity beyond various high-end categories, you'll have to set your sights a little lower, to humble point-and-shoots.

Over recent years, two particularly cheap digital compact cameras have been flying off Amazon US shelves, and from other retailers across the world such as Yodobashi Camera in Japan. They are the Kodak PixPro FZ55 (pictured above) and PixPro FZ45. Other models such as the waterproof PixPro WPZ2 are also in the picture.

The major reason why these PixPro models are so popular is pretty obvious — you'll struggle to find another digital camera with genuine 4x optical zoom for less than the PixPro FZ45's approximate price of $100 / £90 / AU$145. Or one with a 5x optical zoom and built-in rechargeable lithium-ion battery that costs less than the PixPro FZ55.

Both pocketable models shoot 16MP stills and HD video onto SD card, and come in a range of colorways, including black, white, blue and pink.

These cameras are no mere trend — they have dominated best-selling lists month after month, year after year, just when we thought that such cheap cameras had had been replaced by camera phones. So what's really going on here?

kodak pixpro wpz2 waterproof camera

Another popular Kodak is the fully waterproof PixPro WPZ2, which we found surprisingly good for the price (Image credit: Future | Sam Kieldsen)

A surprising truth behind the name, and shopping habits

In addition to the low price point and immediate availability of these PixPro models, the trust in the Kodak name has to be a factor for casual buyers. After all, Kodak is one of the most recognizable names in photography, from its roots in making popular camera film through to pioneering digital camera tech.

However, there's something that you might not know about Kodak today. The original Kodak — Eastman Kodak, which dates back 138 years — stopped its production lines of consumer digital cameras long ago, and due to crippling debts it may not survive at all.

Today, Kodak is instead one of a string of legendary photography brands (alongside Yashica, Rollei, Agfa, Minolta and more), who have licensed their names to third-parties, who are largely manufacturing low-cost digital cameras. The outfit manufacturing the PixPro FZ45 and FZ55 is in fact JK Imaging Ltd, which has less of a ring to it.

There's something further going on here, too: a general rise in camera sales spearheaded by compact cameras, a pushback against always-connected tech, and burgeoning privacy concerns.

A camera such as the PixPro FZ55 shoots directly onto local storage, an SD card. It's not connected to the cloud. It's simple, it's lo-fi, and the kind of tech being embraced by Gen Z.

Will you get better quality photos using these Kodak point-and-shoot compact cameras over your phone? Absolutely not. Even a basic mid range phone will take better snaps.

What you will get, however, is the nostalgic simple pleasure in the simple act of taking everyday snaps, the data of which you are in complete control of.

Mini PC deals for video editing and gaming: I found the best space-saving desktop gear from GMKtec, Geekom, Minisforum, and Corsair

Whenever we review mini PCs in our studio, we always perform two key tests: first, we see how well the machine handles 4K editing in Premiere Pro and DaVinci Resolve. Second, we play a range of games, from DiRT Rally to AAA titles like Hogwarts Legacy and Indiana Jones and the Great Circle.

So, for my latest roundup, I've focused on some of the best-value mini PCs we've tested for video editing and gaming, including the GMKtec K16 for $640 (was $950) at Amazon and the Geekom A8 Max for $949 (was $1099).

Alongside these machines, which support either OCuLink or USB4 for hooking up an eGPU, I've also selected some graphics card docking stations and a power supply unit, all geared towards productivity, gaming, and content creation.

Top mini PC deals for gaming & video editing

The GMKtec K16 mini PC delivers Ryzen 7 7735HS performance with 32GB LPDDR5 RAM and a 1TB SSD. Featuring OCuLink eGPU support, triple-display output, dual 2.5GbE LAN, Wi-Fi 6E, and USB4, it’s a versatile compact system for gaming and creative workloads.

Read our full reviewView Deal

The A8 MAX packs Ryzen 9 8945HS power, 32GB DDR5 RAM, and a 1TB SSD into a compact mini PC. With USB4, dual 2.5GbE LAN, and 8K output, it’s built for AI, design, gaming, and productivity.

Read our full reviewView Deal

The K8 Plus packs a Ryzen 7 8845HS processor, 32GB DDR5 RAM, and a 2TB PCIe 4.0 SSD for gaming, editing, and demanding workloads. With OCuLink eGPU support, dual 2.5GbE LAN, USB4, and 8K display output, it’s a powerful compact desktop alternative.

Read our full reviewView Deal

External GPU docks & power supply

The DEG2 eGPU Dock supports both OCuLink and USB4 V2/TB5 connectivity, enabling flexible GPU upgrades. It adds ATX/SFX PSU compatibility, 2.5GbE networking, USB ports, and an M.2 slot for a versatile desktop expansion hub.View Deal

The DEG1 eGPU Dock turns compatible mini PCs into powerful gaming systems with OCuLink PCIe 4.0 connectivity. Its open design supports ATX/SFX power supplies, offering a flexible, affordable external graphics upgrade.View Deal

The SF750 is a compact 750W SFX power supply with 80 Plus Platinum efficiency, ATX 3.1 compliance, and PCIe 5.1 readiness. Its fully modular design, quiet PWM fan, and premium components make it ideal for powerful small-form-factor gaming PCs.View Deal

Two of the featured mini PCs above include OCuLink connectivity, making them ideal for users who want the lowest-latency, highest-bandwidth connection to an external graphics card.

The first of those, the GMKtec K16, packs an AMD Ryzen 7 7735HS, 32GB of LPDDR5 memory, and a 1TB SSD into a compact chassis.

Its native OCuLink support provides high-performance eGPU connectivity, alongside USB4, dual 2.5GbE LAN, Wi-Fi 6E, and triple-display output. It’s ideal for gaming and content creation. Usually priced at $950, it's currently available for $640 on Amazon.

Powered by AMD’s Ryzen 7 8845HS processor, the GMKtec K8 Plus combines 32GB of DDR5 memory with a spacious 2TB SSD for fast performance in gaming, video editing, and multitasking.

OCuLink support here enables external GPU upgrades, while dual 2.5GbE networking and HDMI 2.1 deliver excellent connectivity for high-performance desktop setups. That will usually set you back $940 but is now $810.

Finally, the Geekom A8 Max, high high-speed USB4 support, is a powerful mini PC featuring AMD Ryzen 9 8945HS processing, 32GB DDR5 RAM, and a 1TB PCIe 4.0 SSD.

Built for AI workloads, creative tasks, and gaming, it offers USB4, dual 2.5GbE LAN, 8K display support, quiet cooling, and expandable storage in a compact desktop alternative. That usually sells for $1,099, but it's currently just $949.

I’ve also included two external GPU docks from Minisforum. The DEG1 costs $109 and is designed for OCuLink, while the DEG2 (normally $300 now under $240) supports both OCuLink and USB4.

Both make it easy to connect a desktop graphics card to your mini PC, dramatically boosting gaming frame rates, accelerating video rendering, and improving AI-assisted creative workloads without sacrificing the compact footprint that makes these systems so appealing.

Finally, no eGPU setup is complete without a reliable power supply. For reference, running an RTX 5080 card needs about 360W power, so that’s why I’ve also picked out a high-capacity Corsair SF750 PSU (normally $200 but currently $160). It has enough headroom to comfortably power today’s flagship graphics cards, like the GeForce RTX 5090, while leaving plenty of room for future upgrades.

I’ll likely revisit this roundup in the coming weeks as prices change and new deals emerge, but for now, these are some of the best deals for anyone looking to build a compact workstation or gaming rig without maxing out their credit card.

For more top-performance devices, check out our guide to the best mini PCs.

This new macOS infostealer poses as an Apple crash reporting tool to try and steal all your valuable data

  • Jamf researchers uncover “CrashStealer,” a notarized macOS infostealer disguised as Apple’s CrashReporter
  • Distributed via a fake site called “Werkbit Setup”, it bypasses Gatekeeper, installs a LaunchAgent
  • It then uses a fake password prompt to unlock Keychain, exfiltrating credentials, cookies, files, and data from 80 crypto wallets and 14 password managers

A new macOS infostealer has been spotted in the wild, masquerading as an Apple crash reporting tool, experts have warned.

Called CrashStealer, this C++ infostealer was designed to nab login credentials, keychain information, as well as data related to more than 80 cryptocurrency wallets.

Cybersecurity researchers Jamf published an in-depth report on the malware, noting CrashStealer is most likely distributed via a fake software site that was only registered recently.

Unlocking Keychain

Victims who land on the site (either via a social media recommendation or search engine results) need to know the PIN code before initiating the download. This was most likely done to avoid analyst scrutiny, as well as to increase perceived credibility and a sense of exclusivity.

Usually, apps downloaded from third-party sources are scanned by Gatekeeper, Apple’s built-in security system. However, Jamf says that this payload is delivered via a signed and Apple-notarized installer and distributed as a disk image named “Werkbit Setup”, which allowed it to bypass Gatekeeper without any warnings.

Those that download and run the program will get a binary named ‘CrashReporter.app’, which will create a LaunchAgent (‘com.apple.crashreporter.helper’), and will see a fake macOS password prompt.

That prompt unlocks the user’s Keychain where most of their secrets are stored (passwords, private cryptographic keys, and more) and then exfiltrates all information to a third-party server.

Besides Keychain data, the CrashReporter malware also pulls browser credentials and cookies from most browsers, data from 80 cryptocurrency wallet extensions, 14 password managers, locally stored files, and more.

Jamf said CrashReporter overlaps, to some extent, with other known infostealers (AMOS, for example), but is still unique enough given its client-side encryption mechanism, as well as the native C++ implementation.

Exclusive: Listen to one of Resonance: A Plague Tale Legacy's 'most epic tracks' first here

  • We can exclusively reveal The Fight of the Braves from the Resonance: A Plague Tale Legacy soundtrack
  • Composer Olivier Derivière describes it as 'one of the most epic tracks' on the whole soundtrack
  • Resonance: A Plague Tale Legacy releases on August 27, 2026

Action-adventure game Resonance: A Plague Tale Legacy is the next game in the brilliant Plague Tale series, and we've got one of the tracks from its soundtrack to reveal exclusively right here.

It's the one track that composer Olivier Derivière describes as "the most contrasted score from [the] A Plague Tale series". The Fight for the Braves is an intense and pulsating song that goes big on percussion, crescendos, and haunting choral vocals. A cheery tune this is not.

Derivière says, "The Fight of the Braves is one of the most epic tracks on the OST. We needed something truly glorious to capture the spirit of the ancient Minoan warriors. Rather than relying on a full orchestra, the rousing energy of the magnificent Amalgamation Choir, combined with thunderous percussion, perfectly conveys the relentless challenge ahead."

Derivière goes on to say that, "The echoing musical phrases also beautifully depict the deep connection between Sophia and that distant era, a mystical resonance traveling across the ages."

The soundtracks to the first two Plague Tale games are some of my absolute favorites from recent years, and perfectly aligned with the games' bleak and dark stories. From what the composer says about the wider soundtrack, it sounds like we're in for something special.

Resonance, although part of A Plague Tale universe, is a very different game and therefore needed a fresh musical approach without leaving the core emotions and musical traits of the franchise,” explains Derivière.

Using musicians and vocalists from Cyprus and Greece to get an authentic feel, the Amalgamation Choir were sought out to create a spell-binding score to accompany Sophia's adventure.

The Resonance: A Plague Tale Legacy soundtrack will launch on music streaming services and be available for digital download alongside the game on August 27 this year.

"It mirrors real life better than most gym exercises" A celebrity PT recommends this simple move as the best strength exercise most over 50s aren't doing

There’s a reason why some of the most effective exercises tend to mirror movements in real life. It’s not because personal trainers and coaches lack imagination, but because the body doesn't care how creative your programming is — it cares whether you can climb a flight of stairs without grabbing the banister, for example, or if you can catch yourself from a stumble.

These are just a few of the benchmarks that matter in later life, and for elite performance coach David Higgins — who has trained everyone from Margot Robbie and Scarlett Johansson to Samuel L. Jackson, David Harbour, Game of Thrones' Richard Madden and the entire cast of The Batman, among many others — one exercise sits at the top of the list for anyone over 50: the step-up. Here’s why.

Lower-body power matters so much after 50

Most people understand that strength declines with age. What they underestimate, however, is how quickly it begins to matter in practical terms, despite not being able to be measured on the best smartwatches' fitness age metrics.

“Lower body power becomes critical after 50 because we naturally lose muscle mass, reaction speed and balance as we age,” says Higgins. “The glutes, quads and calves are what keep you upright, stable and independent.”

If you can't generate force through the floor, he says, “everyday movements like climbing stairs, getting out of a chair or catching yourself from a fall become harder.” The step-up addresses all of this in a single movement: “it trains strength, balance and coordination all at once and mirrors real life better than most gym exercises.” It's slightly similar to the farmer's carry, an application of a real-life movement.

It’s also the reason Higgins places it above more popular alternatives. Walking is excellent, of course, but doesn't load the body enough to preserve muscle. Squats are bilateral — they share the work equally between both legs, which means they don't expose or address the kind of side-to-side imbalances that tend to develop quietly over decades. Step-ups, however, are unilateral, as each leg works independently, building the stability and gait mechanics that bilateral training misses.

“If I could only choose one lower-body movement after 50,” says Higgins, “step-ups would be near the top because they combine strength, stability, balance, gait mechanics and unilateral control in one movement; they bridge the gap between rehab and performance.”

Watch the tutorial video below for advice on how to do a step up:

The mistake most older adults make

Before thinking about adding height, load or additional reps, Higgins is more concerned with something more fundamental: the quality of the movement itself. “The biggest mistake older adults make is chasing fatigue instead of quality movement,” he says. “Rushing through reps, leaning through the hips, or pushing through the stronger side of the body.” Your nervous system, he says, “has to trust the movement before your body can own it.”

Rushing through step-ups doesn't just reduce the benefit — it reinforces the compensations you're trying to correct. If you're relying on the trailing leg to push you up, or leaning forward as you step, you're not actually building the unilateral strength and hip control the exercise is there to develop.

Instead, Higgins’ coaching cue is worth memorising: “push the floor away and finish tall through the glutes.” Most people pull themselves up through the knee, instead of driving through the hip. It's a subtle distinction, but makes an enormous difference to where the effort is actually made.

How to get started — and when to progress

Muscular Man doing weighted step ups in gym

(Image credit: Getty Images / Ildar Abulkhanov)

To perform the step-up, stand facing a sturdy bench, box, or step. Place one foot fully on the platform, then drive through that heel to lift your body up until both feet are on the step. Step back down with control and repeat for the desired reps before switching legs. Keep your chest up and avoid pushing off excessively with the trailing leg.

For step height, beginners should start with a low box, roughly ankle to mid-shin height. "You want control, not compensation," he says. Fitter adults with solid mobility, balance and hip control can work up to knee height.

As for volume, Higgins prescribes 2–3 sets of 8–12 controlled reps per leg. "Tempo matters more than volume," he says. Drive through the whole foot, stand tall at the top and lower slowly under control.

Higgins confirms that just your bodyweight is sufficient resistance to begin with and, for many people over 50, it's exactly where they should stay — probably for longer than they'd expect. “Most people over 50 need to relearn movement patterns before adding load,” he says. “Once control, balance and posture improve, adding dumbbells or a weighted vest is a brilliant progression.” The dumbbells can wait. As for frequency? Two to three sessions a week is enough to see real benefit, Higgins says. “Consistency beats intensity every time.”

Precautions

Step-ups are accessible to most people, but Higgins flags a few situations worth considering. Anyone with severe knee osteoarthritis, significant balance issues or acute hip pain should approach the exercise carefully and ideally with professional guidance. “Often it's not that the exercise is wrong,” he says, “it's that the height is too ambitious or the body isn't controlling the movement properly yet.” Low and slow is always the right answer.

What leg-day moves are your go-tos in the gym? Have you tried the step-up yet? Let us know below.

VPN firms and digital rights groups join forces to urge the UK government to leave VPNs alone

  • 20+ digital rights groups and tech firms urge the UK not to restrict VPNs
  • Age-gating VPNs would undermine the online privacy of millions, they warn
  • Signatories believe VPN restrictions are ineffective, technically unfeasible

The UK government's ongoing debate around tightening online safety rules to protect kids has drawn fierce pushback from the global cybersecurity sector.

On July 9, a coalition of 24 major digital rights organizations and top VPN providers, including Amnesty International, ExpressVPN, NordVPN, Surfshark, and Mozilla, issued a stark warning to the UK government: leave VPNs alone.

In an open letter to the Secretary of State for Science, Innovation and Technology, Liz Kendall, the group stressed that while keeping kids safe is a shared goal, it must not come at the cost of breaking the internet's fundamental privacy infrastructure.

As lawmakers weigh up potential restrictions ahead of an expected online safety consultation update this month, the stakes for your digital privacy have never been higher.

If you currently use the best VPN to protect your personal data on public Wi-Fi or secure your connection while working remotely, new regulations could fundamentally alter how these tools work. Any move to force VPN providers into verifying the age of their users would require you to hand over sensitive personal data, effectively destroying the anonymity you pay to protect.

"Restricting VPNs would undercut security"

The heart of the coalition's argument is that virtual private networks (VPNs) are, first and foremost, essential security software.

"The challenge is ensuring measures strengthen child safety without weakening the privacy and security millions of people rely on every day, including children," the letter explains.

Beyond everyday consumers, the coalition notes that VPNs provide critical protection for vulnerable groups.

The open letter emphasizes that these tools are a lifeline for "human rights defenders and journalists, domestic abuse survivors, the LGBTQ+ community, and others at heightened risk online." As rights groups have noted previously, weakening this protection could actively infringe human rights.

Addressing the reality check of age verification head-on, the group didn't mince words about the dangers of ID checks.

"Age-gating VPNs would require everyone to surrender sensitive personal information simply to access tools designed to protect privacy," the letter states.

A technically unfeasible approach

Critics of the UK's proposed teen social media ban have repeatedly pointed out that restricting privacy tools is a flawed approach to child safety. The letter backs this up with hard data, pointing to Ofcom research which "found that only around 3% of children had used VPNs to access content meant for older audiences."

The coalition also highlights that teenagers will simply find other, lower-tech ways to bypass rules. "Evidence from Australia shows children are much more likely to get around age checks by not being asked, giving false information, or even drawing on a moustache," the letter adds.

Ultimately, the cybersecurity industry is warning that while restricting privacy tools is failing to protect kids, it will succeed in punishing regular users. "Blocking VPN traffic reliably is technically unfeasible," the letter warns, noting that it risks locking employers and schools out of the web, while pushing regular citizens toward "unregulated, data-exploiting services that are harder to oversee, leaving them less secure."

Rather than breaking encrypted tools, the coalition urges the government to focus its upcoming policies on the root causes of online harms, suggesting investments in "strong enforcement of platform obligations, better parental controls, investment in digital literacy, and safety- and privacy-by-design obligations."

I’m a computer expert, and I recommend jumping on this nearly half-price 1TB WD_BLACK SN7100 NVMe SSD while it's still under $190

If your PC is starting to feel sluggish, upgrading the storage drive is one of the quickest ways to give it a major boost. And this is one of the best deals I've seen recently.

Right now, the WD_Black SN7100 1TB NVMe SSD has dropped to just under $190 (was $375) at Amazon, which is a massive 49% saving on a speedy PCIe Gen4 drive.

Read speeds reach up to 7,250MB/s, while write speeds climb as high as 6,900MB/s, making it an excellent upgrade for anyone tired of waiting for Windows and large applications to load.

Today's top SSD deal

This is a high-performance 1TB PCIe Gen4 NVMe SSD delivering read speeds up to 7,250MB/s and write speeds up to 6,900MB/s, using next-generation TLC 3D NAND for fast boot times, quicker loading, and responsive everyday performance.View Deal

At almost half its regular price, this is one of the best SSD deals I've seen recently.

The SSD uses next-generation TLC 3D NAND, providing speedy responsiveness and dependable everyday performance.

The compact M.2 2280 form factor makes installation straightforward in compatible desktops, laptops, and handheld gaming devices.

1TB of storage isn't massive, but it provides plenty of room for a growing software library, creative projects, photos, videos, and everyday files.

Power efficiency helps compatible laptops and handheld systems run for longer between charges, making it a sensible choice if you regularly work away from your desk or travel with your computer.

Windows users can also download the WD_BLACK Dashboard to monitor drive health, check performance, and keep everything running smoothly over time, providing a useful extra layer of management.

The impressive transfer speeds will be handy for creators, professionals, and anyone moving large files every day.

Faster boot times, quicker application launches, and reduced loading screens will make a noticeable difference across almost every workload.

If you've been planning to upgrade an ageing PC, replace a slower drive, or add fast storage to a compatible system, this is a great opportunity to pick up a high-performance 1TB PCIe Gen4 SSD for a bargain price.

Other top SSD deals

Crucial's P310 NVMe SSD delivers blazing read speeds up to 7,100MB/s, ensuring faster boot times, game loading, and file transfers. Its compact, heatsink-free design suits desktops and laptops, offering reliable, high-capacity storage with efficient everyday performance.View Deal

KingSpec's SSD offers up to 4,000/3,700 MB/s read/write speeds, 3D NAND flash, reliable thermal management, and solid performance for gaming, content creation, laptops, desktops, and PS5 upgrades.View Deal

HP's LaserJet Pro 4000 Series is 'one of the fastest laser printers' in its class with blistering 42ppm speeds — and it just got a major price cut

If your home office or small business is crying out for a faster, more capable printer, I've found a great, money-saving deal for you. The HP LaserJet Pro 4001dn is currently just $289 (was $449) at HP - a solid $160 saving for a laser printer built to handle demanding workloads.

In the UK, the wireless version with the exact same specs, the HP LaserJet Pro 4002dw has dropped to £164 (was £421) at HP.

Print speeds can reach up to 42 pages per minute, with the first page arriving in as little as 6.1 seconds, making it a terrific choice for anyone printing lengthy reports, invoices, shipping labels, or business documents. It’s also rated for a monthly duty cycle of up to 80,000 pages, with a recommended monthly volume of between 750 and 4,000 pages for the best balance of performance, reliability, and longevity.

Today's top HP printer deal

A fast monochrome laser printer with speeds up to 42ppm, automatic duplex printing, 1200dpi output, Gigabit Ethernet, AirPrint support, and a recommended monthly volume of 750 to 4,000 pages for busy home offices and businesses.

In the UK: now £164 (was £421)View Deal

Paper handling is nicely practical, thanks to a 100-sheet multipurpose tray, a 250-sheet input tray, and a 150-sheet output bin.

If your workload grows, you can expand the printer with an optional third paper tray, giving you greater flexibility without constantly refilling paper.

Print quality reaches 1200 x 1200 dpi, producing crisp text and fine lines that are ideal for contracts, presentations, spreadsheets, and professional correspondence.

Automatic duplex printing also helps reduce paper use while making larger print jobs easier to manage.

The printer connects via Gigabit Ethernet for dependable wired networking and it also supports Apple AirPrint, Mopria, and the HP app, making it simple to print from Windows, macOS, ChromeOS, iOS, and Android devices.

A 256MB memory and 1200MHz processor ensure documents output quickly, even during heavier workloads.

Security features include SSL/TLS, SNMP support, WPA3, and 802.1x authentication, making it a sensible choice for shared office environment. HP also includes a one-year onsite repair warranty for added peace of mind.

In his four star review, our Senior Printer Editor, Jim said: "I found the HP LaserJet Pro 4001dn to be an easy printer to use, with the right features to meet a heavy print load and print quality that’s good enough for most purposes." He also declared it "One of the fastest laser printers in its price category."

Although it isn't the cheapest laser printer available, this is a great price for a dependable HP business model that balances speed, print quality, and everyday practicality.

For more options, check out our round up of the best HP printers, best home printers and fastest printers we've tested and reviewed.

Also consider

A color laser printer delivering up to 35ppm in both black and color, with automatic duplex printing, 512MB memory, ImageREt 2400 technology, a 4-line LCD, and support for busy offices printing up to 4,000 pages monthly. In his review of this model, our printer editor Jim rated it even higher than the 4001dn, stating: "I love this laser printer’s rich black text, and hate the retro dial."

In the UK: now £432 (was £500)View Deal

Thought smart glasses were creepy? These bone conduction headphones have a tiny 4K camera — but luckily they're aimed at cyclists

  • The W&O X1 headphones come with a camera attached
  • They raise new concerns over illicit recordings
  • There is a recording light that turns on when the camera is active

The debate around smart glasses with cameras attached continues to rumble on — and apparently Meta still has plans for glasses that are constantly recording the world around them — and we now have a new pair of bone conduction headphones that lose the spectacles but keep the camera.

They're called the W&O X1 (via New Atlas), and of course they're packed with plenty of AI. This on-board assistant can help you navigate to locations, identify landmarks, look up facts and answers online, and even translate between languages. All this happens through voice control and spoken responses.

In order to provide some of that AI functionality, the W&O X1 headphones are fitted with a 4K video camera supplied by Samsung. It can take photos and videos with a tap or a voice command, which can then be saved and analyzed as needed — and in the interests of privacy, a small recording light shows when the camera is active.

The headphones can also double up as a miniature action camera, grabbing high-resolution video at 30 frames per second with a 130-degree wide angle view, with what looks like some impressive anti-shake technology built in too. Oh and did we mention they can play music and make phone calls too?

"Most headsets are made for listening," explains W&O in the product listing. " X1 is built for seeing, hearing, understanding, recording, translating, navigating, and staying connected in motion. It is a wearable AI system designed for the world outside the screen."

Privacy concerns

W&O X1

The X1 can give you directions while biking (Image credit: W&O)

The idea of wearable cameras is becoming even more popular now, with the growing capabilities of AI and the continued shrinking of the necessary components. There's something appealing about being able to capture memories instantly, without having to dig out a phone and find the camera app.

At the same time, there are real concerns when it comes to privacy. The smart glasses already on the market make it a little too easy to record surreptitiously, and a tiny camera attached to a pair of headphones is even harder to see. There's even now a BanRay movement calling for smart glasses to be banned from certain spaces.

To be fair to W&O, they seem to be targeting these headphones at cyclists, hikers, and other outdoor types, so it's more for solo photo and video recording. Still, together with other gadgets in the pipeline, it highlights a growing need for proper safeguards to be put around devices with tiny embedded cameras.

The W&O X1 have blasted through their $3,000 funding goal on Kickstarter many times over, and if you're interested in a pair you can put in a reservation for $139 (about £105 / AU$200) — with the usual Kickstarter caveat that crowdfunded hardware doesn't always end up reaching consumers.

There are some decent specs here: IP6X dust and water protection, a lightweight 48 gram build, support for Bluetooth and Wi-Fi, and 30 hours of music playback between charges thanks to an integrated 800 mAh battery.

'Removing discs doesn’t represent progress – it simply removes choice' — The Entertainment Retailers Association denounces Sony's decision to kill physical discs

  • The Entertainment Retailers Association has slammed Sony's decision to kill physical discs
  • The UK trade organization says digital games "should complement physical formats, not replace them"
  • The ERA says, "Removing discs doesn’t represent progress – it simply removes choice"

UK trade organization, Entertainment Retailers Association (ERA), has criticized Sony's decision to end production of physical PlayStation discs.

The gaming company has received overwhelming backlash since announcing its plan to retire physical discs in 2028, and now, as reported by The Game Business, the ERA, which represents most major video game retailers in the UK, including Amazon, Game, Sainsbury’s and HMV, has condemned the plan, calling it "a triumph of corporate convenience over consumer choice."

"Every year, millions of gamers still choose to buy physical copies because they value true ownership," CEO Kim Bayley said in a statement. "A disc can be shared with family, traded in, collected, preserved and, crucially, still played years from now. A download licence often offers none of those freedoms."

Per NielsenIQ and market research firm GfK, The Game Business reports that 45 percent of all physical games sold in the UK in 2025 were for PS4 or PS5, which represents almost half of all physical game revenue during this period, and a majority of sales were made through the post as opposed to in-store pick-ups on release day.

The ERA also said that 25 percent of gamers under 25 use discs and the total UK disc-based games market was valued at over £300 million in 2025, "demonstrating that there remains a substantial and committed audience for boxed games."

"Retailers see this demand every day," Bayley said. "Physical games continue to bring people into shops and give consumers real value through gifting, collecting and resale. The industry should be embracing every legitimate way consumers want to buy games, not narrowing their choices."

The CEO continued: "Digital distribution has transformed gaming and is hugely popular, but it should complement physical formats, not replace them.

“Consumers deserve the freedom to choose how they buy their entertainment. Removing discs doesn’t represent progress – it simply removes choice. That’s bad for gamers, bad for retailers and ultimately bad for the long-term health and preservation of our games industry."

Since its announcement earlier this month, Sony has remained silent in the face of the backlash. Many fans have banded together to urge the company to reverse its decision, including signing a petition that now has over 310,000 signatures.

Black Ops 7 Season 5 has been fully revealed, with the next Call of Duty update bringing a raft of fresh content

  • Call of Duty: Black Ops Season 5 has been revealed
  • The update drops on July 23, 2026
  • Big additions include new weapons, maps, and modes

With Call of Duty: Modern Warfare 4 on the way, Activision has revealed the next batch of content coming to 2025's Black Ops 7 and the free-to-play Warzone battle royale.

As detailed on the Call of Duty blog, the major additions include five new multiplayer maps, three of which drop alongside the season's launch on July 23.

The one I'm most looking forward to is Jubilee, an all-new 6v6 environment set in a rural Japanese town. It's joined by Frequency, a remaster of a Black Ops 4 map, and a remake of Black Ops 2's iconic Dig (itself a version of World at War's Courtyard).

The two other maps, Tubro Tilt and Freerun: Descent, will be added in the subsequent Season 5 Reloaded update.

A wealth of new modes

The Black Ops 7 Season 5 roadmap.

(Image credit: Activision)

Some new limited-time modes are dropping as part of the update as well: Overdrive Domination (a twist on the classic Domination mode that incorporates the power-up stars from Overdrive), Gauntlet Rush (which rotates between five distinct game modes), and, in the mid-season, the return of Cranked Moshpit.

It wouldn't be a new season without some fresh weapons and attachments, and the ones coming in Season 5 are some of the wildest yet.

At launch, you'll be able to unlock the FG42 assault rifle, a modernized version of the WW2 weapon with serious damage and almost no horizontal recoil, and the dual Gremlin SMGs, which trade the ability to aim down sights for extreme firepower and mobility.

Later in the season, the Mammoth LMG is being added and, true to its name, it's a massive gun with two high-power barrels that fire continuously in addition to a new mace melee weapon.

On the attachment side, completing weekly challenges will unlock the likes of the Jäger 45 Grid-Breaker Kit — a crazy pistol conversion that turns your side-arm into a portable EMP blaster — or the M34 Novaline Garand Conversion that transforms the futuristic burst-fire rifle into an old-fashioned top-loaded one.

If you're keen to dive in, Black Ops 7 is available now for PC, PlayStation 5, PlayStation 4, Xbox Series X and Series S, and Xbox One.

Unlucky Redditor orders Corsair DDR5 RAM from Amazon and gets sent dummy light sticks instead — but one trick saves their skin

  • A Reddit user bought what they thought was computer RAM off Amazon
  • Instead, Amazon shipped them a light kit inside a RAM box
  • The Redditor filmed themselves opening the box to aid with their return

High prices spurred by the current RAM crisis are making it almost impossible to buy a set of computer memory without bankrupting yourself, so it can be tempting to pull the trigger on an eye-catching bargain whenever you see one. But a cautionary tale from social media shows why certain deals might not be all they seem.

That warning comes from a Reddit post from user BupMaster titled “Decided to buy RAM from Amazon despite my better judgement and it happened to me...” That foreboding header hinted at the potentially disastrous situation that was to come.

The poster explained how they decided to buy RAM from Amazon for a setup upgrade, despite hearing stories about return scams. These typically involve a scammer buying an expensive product then returning it with a cheaper, different or counterfeit item, which then gets sent onto an innocent buyer.

"Thankfully I made sure to record my unboxing," the Redditor explained. "Lo and behold I open the package and see that someone swapped the sticks for light enhancement kits instead. Sold and shipped by Amazon too. Hopefully they don't give me too much of a hard time on the return.”

This example highlights how careful you’ve got to be when buying memory — or other in-demand computing components like storage — during this highly unusual era. With RAM in record low supply thanks to the demands of artificial intelligence (AI) data centers, scammers are sniffing out opportunities wherever they can. Unfortunately for this Redditor, they ended up falling prey.

Keep your wits about you

Decided to buy RAM from Amazon despite my better judgement and it happened to me... from r/pcmasterrace

Interestingly, Corsair — the company whose RAM BupMaster bought — changed its packaging earlier this year specifically to thwart scammers. Instead of cardboard boxes, the company now sells its memory modules in clear plastic blister packs. The unit received by the Redditor was in a cardboard container, though, hinting that the scammer wanted to obscure their actions.

Another intriguing point about this account is that the scam was not perpetuated by some dodgy website or even a rogue trader on Amazon. The RAM kit was sold directly by Amazon itself, suggesting that someone inside the company swapped the memory modules for the dud product.

Sadly, this Redditor is far from the only person to have suffered in this way. In the same thread, another user claimed that the same thing happened with a laptop. And we've reported on countless similar cases, suggesting that scams like this are an all-too-common occurrence.

This case also shows how important it can be to record yourself opening a package if you’re at all unsure or wary about it. Doing so gave them the perfect evidence to prove to Amazon that they had been scammed, making the return process much easier.

Amazon is known for being very willing to accept returns, but it’s better to be safe than sorry — especially when buying rare and expensive products like computer memory.

Former Rockstar producer jokes he's 'pretty happy' he's not working on GTA 6 because of how 'monstrous' it seems — 'Every single time they do a GTA, it's like ludicrously bigger than before'

  • Former Rockstar Games producer John Ricchio thinks Grand Theft Auto 6 will be "monstrous" in scale
  • He says the developer tends to make every game bigger than the last
  • However, he wouldn't want to work on the game because of how ambitious it is

Former Rockstar Games producer John Ricchio believes Grand Theft Auto 6 will be a massive game and is glad he isn't working on such an ambitious project.

In a new podcast interview with Kiwi Talkz, where the developer discussed his time at Rockstar and the crunch culture that came with the role, Ricchio was asked whether there was any part of him that wanted to work on GTA 6, or if thinking about the project stressed him.

"I think the fact that every single time they do a GTA, it's like ludicrously bigger than before is like something that I think about," Ricchio said. "I can only imagine the size of GTA 6. It must be monstrous, or if not monstrous, it's probably way more detailed."

GTA 6 will have a much larger Vice City map, allowing players to explore several regions of Leonida. There will also be a ton of open-world activities and features to access, including car shops, clothing stores, hairdressers, safehouses, as well as boats that players can take on the water.

The developer suggested that if Rockstar "kept the same footprint as GTA 5, which was significantly bigger than GTA 4, significantly bigger than RDR [Red Dead Redemption] and continued to build upon that framework, GTA 6 will be a massive game.

"Between RDR and GTA, I think they were continually growing the size of the world, which is a big deal, right?" he said. "It's a lot more stuff to build. It's a lot more performance to deal with. There are a lot of considerations with going with a bigger world, but it really does make you feel like you're in a place, right? It makes you feel like you're in a huge place."

For this reason, Ricchio jokingly added, he's "pretty happy" he's not working on the game.

"Not that it wouldn't be cool to work with those people. I still think about my Rockstar teams all the time," he said.

"It is really difficult, and it's a hard period of your career when you're working that hard on something, and getting to the end and then getting to have people be really excited about what you've done is just magic, it is so rewarding.

"I'll never forget some of the play with the public events for Max Payne or for RDR, and even GTA, we were involved in very specific pieces, but just having people so excited about what you've made or being a part of something. It is so incredible. It is such a good feeling to make something, to spend a lot of time [on something] and have people appreciate it."

Ricchio continued, saying if he was still at the studio and working on GTA 6, he wouldn't be "amenable" to how things operate currently, which would "probably lead to an exit for me."

"I've learned a lot about different ways that you can do things and different ways to build successful, kind of hard projects, and it doesn't require that way to do it on the backs of burning people out," the developer said. "Clearly it works, and they make games that do really well, and I expect GTA [6] to do really well even at the higher price point."

How to watch 2026 FIFA World Cup in Singapore: free live streams

Prior to the tournament, Singapore's Mediacorp broadcaster announced that it would stream 28 World Cup 2026 matches completely FREE on both TV and online via its MeWatch streaming platform. While that's nowhere close to the likes of the UK's BBC/ITV or Australia's SBS On Demand, which are streaming all 104 matches for free, it's still a significant jump from the nine matches that were streamed free in 2022.

The good news for football fans in Singapore tuning in for the business end of the tournament is that all four remaining matches, including the two semifinals, the third-place playoff, and the all-important FIFA World Cup final, are available to watch free of charge in the country.

But can you watch these free streams from anywhere in the world? And what if you're a foreigner travelling in Singapore during these matches? Can you still access your usual free World Cup coverage? Follow our guide below to find out where to watch FIFA World Cup 2026 live streams in Singapore, including free streams.

How to watch World Cup 2026 in Singapore

Mediacorp has made all 104 matches available live and on demand via its MeWatch streaming platform. A FIFA World Cup Pack costs S$118, including taxes.

However, if you're tuning in now, there's no need to get a subscription, as the remaining four games are free-to-air on MeWatch. The platform is also showing highlight videos of all 104 matches for free.

However, you can only access World Cup 2026 live streams on Zee5 with an Indian IP address. Abroad right now? Here’s how to unblock Zee5 from anywhere in the world...

Can I watch FIFA World Cup 2026 for free in Singapore

As mentioned earlier, while the entire tournament might not have been free-to-air, the remaining four matches, including the third-place clash, are FREE on the MeWatch streaming platform.

And if you're a cable TV loyalist, you can watch all the action live and free on Mediacorp's Channel 5 TV channel.

But free streams aren't just limited to Singapore's borders. Lots of streaming platforms from around the world are offering free World Cup streams. So, if you're traveling in Singapore during the tournament, you can use a VPN to connect to a server in your home country and watch your usual free streams.

Here are the countries showing every game of the FIFA World Cup 2026 for free:

Abroad? Can't access your free stream? Unblock your free World Cup stream with Norton VPN – more on that below.

Watch FIFA World Cup 2026 live streams from anywhere

If you’re traveling, you might discover your usual World Cup live stream is suddenly unavailable due to geo-restrictions.

Don’t worry, that’s exactly where a VPN can help. A virtual private network lets you connect to servers around the world so you can securely access your usual World Cup coverage as if you were back home.

We recommend Norton VPN. Here's why:

▶︎ Norton VPN MEGA Deal — 60-day money back guarantee

Watch your free World Cup stream without limits. Norton VPN delivers fast, secure connections with global servers, so you can stream from anywhere with ease.

💰 60-day money-back guarantee
🔓 Unlocks World Cup streams

Don’t miss a second. Stream the World Cup from anywhere with total confidence.View Deal

FIFA World Cup 2026 remaining fixtures and dates

Tuesday, July 14 — Semi-finals
France vs Spain: 3 p.m. ET / 12 p.m. PT / 8 p.m. BST

Wednesday, July 15 — Semi-finals
England vs Argentina: 3 p.m. ET / 12 p.m. PT / 8 p.m. BST

Saturday, July 18 — Third-place playoff
TBC vs TBC: 5 p.m. ET / 2 p.m. PT / 10 p.m. BST

Sunday, July 19 — Final
TBC vs TBC: 3 p.m. ET / 12 p.m. PT / 8 p.m. BST

We test and review VPN services in the context of legal recreational uses. For example:1. Accessing a service from another country (subject to the terms and conditions of that service).2. Protecting your online security and strengthening your online privacy when abroad.We do not support or condone the illegal or malicious use of VPN services. Consuming pirated content that is paid-for is neither endorsed nor approved by Future Publishing.

'We love this... except gradual rollouts': Windows 11 search is being improved in a big way, with users impatient to get these changes — and I don't blame them

  • Microsoft is improving Windows 11 search in multiple ways
  • That includes a calmer search panel, the ability to turn off web results, a better way of prioritizing returned results, and a more stable search overall
  • This is in testing for now, and the main worry is how long it might take for Microsoft to usher all this through to release

If you're fed up with the way Windows 11's search functionality works – and you wouldn't be alone – some incoming changes are set to greatly improve this experience.

Microsoft revealed the tweaks to the search box in a blog post, explaining that they're being delivered via a gradual rollout to testers in the Experimental channel for Windows 11 preview builds.

The first major change is simply to make search a calmer place, so when the panel appears, it only contains a list of your recent searches (allowing you to easily fire up one of those again if you wish). The current clutter to the right of that list, including recommendations – some of which are outright adverts – along with trending searches has all been banished.

And the second important piece of work here is that Microsoft is finally giving Windows 11 users the ability to get rid of web results in search. Currently, when searching for a file in the operating system you get not just local results (for files on your drives), but also some web results which can get in the way.

In this new scheme of things, you'll be able to switch off all web results in Settings, and also ditch Microsoft Store suggestions too.

If you keep these results on, Microsoft notes that they won't be prioritized, although this is something the company had already started to address (it used to be the case that web content could appear at the top of the returned results in a truly baffling fashion). Web results have also been stripped of any 'promotional content' so you'll only get the most relevant answers if these results are enabled.

Microsoft has also bolstered the handling of results for Windows 11 settings so that more relevant options are flagged up higher in the pecking order, and Microsoft says further fine-tuning is planned on this front.

The search box will also be able to handle typos, with an improved ability to guess what you really meant ('Chrome' rather than 'Chome' for example), and it'll start to surface possible results after typing just two characters (another enhancement we've already heard about).

While this is mostly all about streamlining, Microsoft is going the other way in one notable respect — adding a bit more detail in for the files returned in the results. Search will now provide more info about files (such as when they were last opened) and a more in-depth preview in the right-hand panel, so you can more readily tell what you'll be opening if you click on that result.

Finally, Microsoft is making search more reliable, which involves "reducing [the] likelihood of crashing and loading issues" which is obviously a welcome move.

Analysis: the rollout fly in the soothing search ointment

Screenshot of Windows 11 search revamp in 2026 showing old results versus new more streamlined panel

(Image credit: Microsoft)

Windows 11 search has always been a somewhat painful affair for me, thanks mainly to the clutter of the thinly veiled (or not even veiled at all) ads, and the irrelevant results which were surfaced with a baffling level of priority, as noted. Windows 10 isn't a lot better, frankly, but at any rate, I'm very happy to see the fresh direction Microsoft has taken here.

The calmer search results are a major boon, with Microsoft following in the same vein as the streamlining it recently announced for the widgets panel, which was made a quieter place. (All this follows a broader early promise to rein in the upselling with Windows 11 and generally make the interface a more chilled place).

I was hoping that the option to turn off web results would be brought in, and this is the most important addition for me personally. I'm not alone, and the reaction to these various changes has been very positive, with the only real sticking point being impatience around when these new features will be rolled out. That's both in terms of testers wanting to try the revamped search box now, and the general computing public wondering when they will eventually get their hands on all this.

As this tester posts on Reddit: "We love this... except gradual rollouts. We don't like when things are inconsistent from PC to PC despite running identical [test] builds [of Windows 11]. It's really obnoxious and breaks muscle memory. But the changes seem great and I look forward to trying them."

As Microsoft points out in its blog post, it's worth remembering that there are now feature flags that can be enabled if you're really keen to try out something in a preview build, and it's not on your PC yet.

However, as for those asking: 'For those of us on release, when might this arrive?'

Well, that's a very different kettle of fish, as it could take quite some time for this work to progress through testing. Mainly because there are a lot of changes involved, and it's not something Microsoft will want to rush (especially given the drive to make search more reliable and stable).

And when these search improvements are eventually released outside of testing, it'll be on a controlled rollout that you won't be able to jump the queue with. However, there's a reason for that – Microsoft will need to observe the changes going live in a gradual manner to ensure no unexpected gremlins are crawling around in the works.

So, you will have to be patient, and there's some frustration around the length of time it can take for controlled rollouts to proceed these days (the Start menu overhaul from last year being a key example here – some folks still don't have it even now). But the good news is that these changes are coming, and they promise to revamp search in Windows 11 to a considerable extent. I can't wait (but I'll have to).

Is this the ultimate 'back to school' laptop? Students can get a brand new 2026 Dell XPS 13 for just $599

I'm always keeping my eye out this time of year for the ultimate 'back to school' laptop deals for our readers. Today, I think I've spotted a listing that could actually lay claim to that title.

It's the brand new Dell XPS 13, which is currently on sale for just $599 if you're a student. This new model has just been released at $699, but it looks like Dell is doing a particularly aggressive intro deal for prospective students right now.

To be honest, even at $699, I'd say this Dell XPS 13 is a strong contender. We haven't reviewed it yet here at TechRadar, but this iteration looks like a very compelling alternative to the likes of the new MacBook Neo, which is also $699.

It's surely no coincidence that the new XPS 13 is priced to compete with the MacBook Neo, as both offer a premium, lightweight laptop at a rock bottom price. The XPS 13 is obviously a Windows 11 machine, however, so it's the one to go for if you prefer Windows over MacOS.

Get the new Dell XPS 13 for just $599 today

Processor: Intel Core 5-320 
RAM: 8GB
Storage: 512GB

In a time where laptop prices are spiralling out of control, Dell's latest XPS 13 looks like a rare deal on a premium model. OK, so this is the baseline model with only 8GB of RAM, but the XPS 13 is a great laptop with a fantastic 120Hz display and excellent build quality. Considering that Dell are also offering students an impressive $100 discount at launch, this XPS 13 looks like a very competitive alternative to the likes of the MacBook Neo.View Deal

While we haven't reviewed this model yet, our sister-site Windows Central managed to check it out in-person earlier this year. Initial reports are exceedingly positive, with the price, display, and overall build quality being particular highlights.

Interestingly, Dell had MacBook Neos on display next to the New XPS 13, so journalists could directly compare the to models. According to Windows Central, the XPS 13 had better build quality, a better display, and it was lighter. Of course, they do love Windows laptops over on that site, so your preference may vary.

We still rate the MacBook Neo here at TechRadar with its eye-catching colors and incredible battery life.

With that said, if I were choosing between the two, I'd definitely be tempted by the XPS 13. Generally, I prefer Windows laptops, and the XPS 13's Thunderbolt 4 ports are more useful to me than the Neo's standard USB-C ports. I'm also partial to the XPS 13's display, which I think it is a little more modern-looking than the Neo's, with its thick-bezels.

I've been hunting for the best travel charging gadgets to avoid low-battery stress on vacation — here are my top recommendations

Heading off on a vacation? It's easy to forget about boring things like charging solutions, but when you're away from home, keeping your devices juiced up is both more important than usual, and more difficult than usual. I speak from experience — I've found myself in one too many foreign city after a long day of exploring, trying to memorize Google Maps directions to a hotel while my phone battery dwindles alarmingly into the red.

This year, though, I've decided to get myself prepared, and avoid all that stress by arming myself with the right travel gadgets. Luckily, at TechRadar our reviews team members have tested dozens of charging gadgets of all kinds, and below I've rounded up our top recommendations for travel.

I've included a mix of options here. There are plug-in charging stations that will let me juice up multiple gadgets at once if I end up in a hotel room with limited power outlets (or it's a foreign socket and I've only brought one plug adaptor). There are also plug-in or MagSafe power packs that I can keep in my bag for charging when out and about. I've also thrown in a couple more specialized options: a foldable pad that can juice up three different Apple devices at once, and a 6-port beast that can handle charging power-hungry laptops and tablets — ideal while working while on the go.

I've included a handy specs comparison table at the bottom of the page, and if you want to dig into more options, we have separate, dedicated guides to the best wireless chargers and the best power banks. Bon voyage!

Top travel chargers

UGreen
Uno 100W USB-C Charger

Why's it good for travel? This is our very favorite charger overall, and it's very well-suited for travel. Charging is super-speedy and there's a good number of ports (four in total) for juicing up multiple gadgets at once. The mini robot styling, complete with changing facial expressions, isn't strictly necessary, but who doesn't want a bit of extra friendly company when they're away from home?

Read our full review

Pros

  • Super-fast charging
  • Fun display and emojis
  • Four ports including USB-A and USB-C

Cons

  • Not the cheapest charger on the market
  • Display could be a touch brighter
UGreen
MagFlow Magnetic Wireless Power Bank 10000mAh Qi2 25W

Why's it good for travel? We called this "the ultimate on-the-go charging solution". There's a wireless charging pad, a speedy USB-C port, and an integrated USB-C cable, and it's compact, high-quality and charges fast. If you can stretch to the higher price, it'd make a superb travel buddy.

Read our full review

Pros

  • Reliable performance
  • Great build quality
  • Integrated cable and USB-C port add flexibility

Cons

  • Can get a little hot
  • Price may be a turn-off
UGreen
Nexode 65W Charger with Retractable USB-C Cable

Why's it good for travel? An integrated, retractible USB-C cable means you don't have to worry about remembering to bring an extra cable or remember where you've put it. It's a generous length, which is helpful if your power outlet isn't optimally placed. In our tests, charging was impressively speedy, too.

Read our full review

Pros

  • Convenient retractable cable
  • Strong overall performance
  • Compact build

Cons

  • Multi-port power distribution won’t suit all
  • In-built cable doesn’t support Samsung Super Charge 2.0 45W
  • Non-foldable prongs on UK model
Anker
MagGo Wireless Charging Station (3-in-1 Foldable Pad)

Why's it good for travel? This palm-sized, fold-up, wireless charger is perfect for traveling Apple fans. It unfolds to offer up charging modules for an iPhone and AirPods, plus a certified Apple Watch fast-charging module. It also turns into a landscape stand for your iPhone.

Read our full review

Pros

  • Light-weight and travel-sized
  • Good iPhone and Apple Watch charging speeds
  • Can charge Apple Watches with loop bands
  • Turns into a landscape stand for iPhone

Cons

  • Tricky to take phone off charge one-handed
  • Moves on surfaces easily
  • It’s pretty pricey
Anker
Nano Power Bank 10K 45W Built-In Retractable USB-C Cable

Why's it good for travel? This compact power bank has an integrated, retractable charge cable — ultra-helpful if you're traveling about and don't want to have to remember a separate one — and a handy cord to clip on a backpack or belt loop.

Read our full review

Pros

  • Convenient retractable cable
  • Useful display
  • Solid overall performance

Cons

  • Not enough wattage for more power-hungry devices
  • Could recharge a little faster
  • Thermal throttling can prevent peak performance
Anker
MagGo Power Bank (10K Slim)

Why's it good for travel? If you have a MagSafe device you want to keep powered up, this slimline Anker power bank is a great choice. It's well-built, the charging is speedy, and the grip is strong enough that you won't have to worry about it dropping off.

Read our full review

Pros

  • Charges fast
  • Strong magnetic grip
  • Slim for a 10K battery

Cons

  • Heavier than expected
  • On the pricey side
Anker
Prime Charger 200W 6 Ports GaNPrime

Why's it good for travel? It's overkill for casual travelers just looking to juice up their phone and earbuds, but if you're working on the go, this charge station is an excellent choice. It has the most power-out ports of any featured in this list (four USB-C ports and two more USB-A) and packs a hefty output of 200W, making it suitable for power-hungry devices like laptops.

Read our full review

Pros

  • Six speedy charging ports
  • High build quality
  • Great value

Cons

  • No Anker app compatibility
  • Lacks any kind of display
ESR
Qi2 Mini Wireless Charger

Why's it good for travel? This Qi2 charger is light in weight, compact in size and has a reinforced power cable that won't mind being shoved into your luggage. The magnetic grip is secure and it's perfectly possible to keep using your phone while it's charging. If you just have one MagSafe device to charge, it's a great choice.

Read our full review

Pros

  • Easy to hold
  • Robust power cable
  • Reassuringly secure magnet

Cons

  • Integrated power cable
  • Slides around on surfaces
  • Not as comfortable to hold as some alternatives

Specs compared

Marvel is said to be making a Nova movie instead of a Disney+ TV show — and a divisive MCU writer is reportedly leading development on it

  • Marvel is reportedly making a Nova movie with the aid of Loki's showrunner
  • The cosmic hero was originally going to star in a Disney+ TV show
  • If true, the film will need to address three big questions about the MCU

Marvel is turning its attentions to the stars again as it begins work on a movie starring fan-favorite character Nova.

Per Deadline, the comic-book titan has pivoted away from telling a story about the cosmic hero on Disney+ to give him the full big-screen treatment. Furthermore, Michael Waldron, who was Loki's showrunner and rewrote parts of the Doctor Strange and the Multiverse of Madness script, is leading development on the untitled Nova project.

According to Deadline's sources, the Marvel Cinematic Universe (MCU) flick is still in the early planning stages. Nonetheless, I've already got four big questions that Marvel and Waldron need to shed light on regarding their next sci-fi project…

1. Who will play Nova?

Glen Powell as Chad Powers

Tenative rumors have circulated online that Powell could play Nova in the MCU (Image credit: Hulu)

Chief among the answers I seek is which actor will portray the eponymous character.

With Waldron also the creator-in-chief on acclaimed sports comedy Chad Powers, a Hulu TV Original that starred Glen Powell, it's little surprise to see that the aforementioned actor has been linked with the titular role. Add in the fact that Marvel has prioritized casting A-listers in its movie and TV productions recently, and the charismatic Powell would fit the bill as a big name who could draw a crowd, too.

That said, Powell is far from the only star that Waldron has worked with before. Additionally, Marvel President Kevin Feige has occasionally stated his belief that the comic giant needs to reduce the costs of its films and TV series, which includes the salaries of those who appear in said screen projects. Powell's hiring, then, is certainly not a foregone conclusion.

2. Which version of the superhero will we see — Richard Rider, Sam Alexander, or Frankie Raye?

A screenshot of Richard Rider/Nova from a Marvel comic book panel

It's unclear which version of Nova we'll see in this Marvel production (Image credit: Marvel Comics)

Like the Green Lantern Corps that exist in DC Comics, there are hundreds of individuals who have held the rank of 'Nova' in Marvel Comics.

There are three particular human characters who are part of the insterstellar cop agency known as the Nova Corps, though — those being the aforementioned Rider, Alexander, and Raye.

Of that trio, Rider is the most famous, so it would make sense if Marvel decided to center Nova around this well-known individual. However, should Marvel want to go down the route of introducing a younger Nova to audiences, Alexander would be the way to go. Furthermore, if Marvel isn't worried about the fan backlash that could come from casting a female lead in this film and/or taking creative liberties with Raye's comic-book origins, it could turn heads by selecting the least likely member of this group to star in it.

For what it's worth, I think Marvel will play it safe and go for Rider — but that's just my view. Vote in the poll below to let me know which character you'd like to see!

3. Will Nova show us the off-screen destruction of Xandar at Thanos' hands?

Thanos

Thanos brought wrath and ruin to Xandar prior to the events of 2018's Avengers: Infinity War (Image credit: Marvel)

Think you've heard the word 'Nova' before in the MCU? You'd be right. We were actually introduced to the Nova Corps in 2014's Guardians of the Galaxy Vol. 1, which saw the titular ragtag group travel to — and then save — Xandar, aka the capital city of the Nova Empire and, by proxy, the space cop agency's headquarters.

At the end of that film, the Nova Corps was entrusted with the Power Stone, aka one of the Infinity Stones. Unfortunately, as part of his genocidal plan to destroy half of all life in the universe, the Mad Titan known as Thanos soon came calling for said cosmic gem. Long story short: he acquired the Power Stone and, as punishment for Xandar's role in trying to stop him obtaining it, decimated the planet.

So, will we witness Xandar's destruction in a flashback sequence as part of Nova's story? If it had been developed and released by now, I believe we already would have. However, Nova won't arrive before the Marvel Multiverse Saga comes to an end with Avengers: Doomsday and Avengers: Secret Wars. And, with that Marvel Phase 6 duology set to reboot the MCU, I think it's incredibly unlikely that Xandar's annihilation at Thanos' hands will be depicted in Nova.

4. Can Waldron win over the MCU sceptics?

Michael Waldron smiles as he poses for photographs at D23 Expo

Waldron is something of a divisive figure among Marvel fans (Image credit: Alberto E. Rodriguez)

There's no denying that Waldron's apparent involvement in Nova has caused something of a ruckus online. Indeed, following the publication of Deadline's article, fans have taken to various Reddits, the ResetEra forums, and other social platforms to criticize or defend Waldron's hiring.

There are valid arguments on both sides of the debate, too. As Loki's head writer, Waldron proved he had the necessary writing chops to tell a sci-fi story that was focused on a beloved Marvel character. In sharp contrast to the praise he received for his work on that show, though, Waldron is often 'credited' with not only turning Doctor Strange 2 into a narrative mess, but also with undoing all of the growth that Wanda Maximoff/Scarlet Witch underwent in WandaVision and positioning her as a one-dimensional villain in Multiverse of Madness.

Of course, Loki and Doctor Strange 2 aren't the only screenwriting credits on Waldron's resume, but they're the ones that MCU diehards will know him from. In that sense, he's one for two in the 'great MCU project' department. The jury is still out, then, on whether it'll be one or two for three before Nova's arrival.

The 4.5-star-rated Shokz OpenRun Pro drop to a record-low price on Amazon

Shokz is a big name in running and fitness headphones. And if you've been intrigued by its bone conduction headphones but put off by the cost, there's now a chance to bag the Shokz OpenRun Pro at Amazon for $109.95 (was $124.95) — that's a record-low price.

Yes, these may be the older first-generation model, but they remain an excellent pair of headphones to this day. They boast excellent audio quality, a slim and comfortable design, and solid battery life of up to 10 hours.

While the OpenRun Pro 2 do offer better sound, a slightly larger battery, and more convenient charging options, I'd say these upgrades are not super-important to more casual users — and certainly aren't worth paying up to $70 more for.

Shokz OpenRun Pro — record-low price

If you've never tried bone conduction headphones before, maybe this record-low price for the Shokz OpenRun Pro is what finally encourages you to pick up a pair. This may be the older model, but you still get excellent audio quality, a comfortable and slim fit, and good battery life of up to 10 hours. If you're a runner or fitness enthusiast who wants to avoid in-ear options or be aware of your surroundings, these are a great budget buy.View Deal

When we originally reviewed the Shokz OpenRun Pro, we called them "the best bone conduction headphones you can buy.' New models have been released now that improve the unique tech and add quality-of-life features, such as USB-C charging and longer battery life, but these are still a good buy at this low price.

If you are set on the tech but would prefer a newer model, though, do check out our guide to all of the best bone conduction headphones for several other options from top brands including Shokz, H2O, and Nank.

Three 'massive' Future Games digital showcases will air next month during Gamescom 2026, offering viewers world premieres and exclusive trailers from 'some of the industry’s most creative studios'

  • Future Games Show will return for Gamescom 2026
  • The main showcase will begin on August 26, followed by the FGS Live, and the FGS Best Of Gamescom will air on August 30
  • Future Games Show at Gamescom will feature world premieres, new trailers, and more

The Future Games Show will officially return next month for Gamescom 2026 with three digital showcases.

Future Games Show at Gamescom will air the same day the industry event kicks off, on August 26, and feature new announcements from "some of the industry’s most creative studios," including world premieres, exclusive trailers, developer deep dives, and brand-new game demos.

The recent Future Game Show Summer Showcase in June included 40+ games and 11 world premieres, and reached over 17.8 million live and launch-weekend views, so viewers should expect some more exciting game reveals.

FGS Live From Gamescom will immediately follow the main showcase on August 26, be hosted by the FGS editorial team, and feature more world premieres and exclusive trailers, as well as news and interviews from the Gamescom show floor.

To round out the event, the FGS Best Of Gamescom broadcast will kick off on August 30 and take viewers to the show floor to wrap up the best games of the event. Those tuning in can also expect exclusive booth tours, developer interviews, and a recap of Gamescom’s most exciting announcements.

All three digital shows can be watched on Future Games Shows' Twitch, YouTube, X, TikTok, Facebook, and GamesRadar+.

"The Future Games Show is the best place to discover new games, from indie gems like acclaimed-puzzler Blue Prince to AAA blockbusters such as sci-fi RPG Exodus," said Daniel Dawkins, Content Director of Future Games Show at Future. "Our Summer Showcase delivered 3.72 wishlists per live viewer, comfortably outperforming industry averages, thanks to our super-engaged viewers.

"Since launching in 2020, we have been proud to showcase the industry's most exciting titles alongside premier hosts like Troy Baker, Alix Wilton Regan and Ben Starr. This Gamescom, we are delivering three massive digital showcases packed with the latest news and world premieres for PC and consoles. Don’t miss it!”

'You essentially pay for intelligence twice, once with money, and again with something even more valuable': Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella warns AI users not to give away too much

  • Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella has warned AI companies are training their models on the business secrets of their customers
  • These secrets are then used to train new, more powerful models, that are sold to their customer's competitors
  • But, Nadella says there is a way to remain competitive without being locked in to one AI vendor

Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella has warned the big players in the AI industry are using their proprietary models to learn the business secrets of their customers, which they can then use to train and deploy more advanced AI models.

The crux of the issue, Nadella said in a blog post, is that, “You essentially pay for intelligence twice, once with money, and again with something even more valuable: the proprietary knowledge you must reveal to make that intelligence useful. The better you want the model to perform, the more of that knowledge you have to feed it!”

What Nadella is saying in essence, is that AI companies are harvesting sensitive business data from their customers, using it to make training their models cheaper, and then launching these models for use by their own customer’s competition.

“The kind of knowledge a competitor could never buy”

“Models learn from ‘exhaust,’ the prompts people write, the tools agents use, and especially the corrections people make when the model is wrong. Every correction is distilled into institutional know-how,” Nadella explained.

Nadella also criticized how AI companies are increasingly complaining about how their models are being distilled by their own competition. For example, Anthropic accused retailer and e-commerce company Alibaba for using thousands of Claude prompts to distill their own models. By figuring out how a proprietary model works, you don’t have to spend the enormous amount of capital needed to source training data and create your own AI model.

This, for Nadella, is a major contradiction in how AI companies work. “While the great innovation that comes from model providers having fair use rights to train models on public data is needed, I find it ironic that the status quo is to then turn around and impose restrictive terms on distillation,” he said.

It is also therefore hypocritical for AI companies to accuse other companies of distilling their own product, and then include within their AI usage contracts clauses that allow AI companies to “reserve the right to learn from customer usage and interaction data.”

“In consuming intelligence, you are creating intelligence. And what you create should belong to you,” Nadella added.

On-prem is back in fashion

Nadella’s fix for this growing problem? It’s time to move back to on-prem. Nadella encourages businesses to “retain ownership” of the data they feed AI models by switching to the use of “proprietary learning environments” built on the cloud.

The added benefit of moving to these environments is that they allow businesses to switch between different AI models provided by different companies using “orchestration layers” and AI gateways.

There is also a growing trend of businesses switching to using open source technologies, which goes hand in hand with businesses operating in the cloud. Businesses can train open source AI models using their data that is already available in cloud environments to do much of what the proprietary models do, for far cheaper — and without handing over that same sensitive data to be used by AI companies to train their own models.

The on-prem solution also has additional benefits. AI models operated on-site within manufacturing plants, stores, and other premises are far cheaper and require less specialized hardware. Businesses that operate using a centralized cloud are increasingly encountering issues with data egress fees, storage bloat, and idle specialized hardware.

Google Cloud recently released a report about these very issues, and also encouraged businesses to move towards using AI gateways and on-prem models to reduce latency, improve resilience, and cut per-token costs by switching to local, highly optimized models.

Via TechCrunch

‘Those non-pro colors are incredible:’ the Google Pixel 11 series has leaked on Amazon, and the colors are going down better than the specs

  • Early listings for the Pixel 11 series were spotted on Amazon
  • These include renders of the phones in various shades
  • Some of the listed specs would be a downgrade

We’ve just seen perhaps the biggest Google Pixel 11 series leak yet, as listings for the Pixel 11, Pixel 11 Pro, Pixel 11 Pro XL, and Pixel 11 Pro Fold have all appeared on Amazon.

These were spotted by 9to5Google and — while they’ve now been removed — the site claims that they appear to be part of the ‘Google Store’ seller, which suggests they might be official listings, albeit a bit early.

In any case, you can see some images taken from the listings below, with the Pixel 11 itself being shown in Midnight (black), Fuchsia (pink), and Moss (green) shades. The Pro and Pro XL meanwhile appear in Dune (a pale pink), Sterling (a grayish lavender), Pine (green), and Light Fog (a pale blue), and the Pixel 11 Pro Fold is listed just in Midnight and Pine.

There’s a mix of bright and understated shades here, and reactions to the images — particularly the brighter ones — seems quite positive so far. Over on Reddit, comments include “those non-pro colors are incredible if true. That’s green and pink are just perfect,” “in pink omg,” and “Dune is pretty nice.”

That said, some reactions to the Pro shades are a bit less positive, including “Why can't the pro like get some fun colors too?,” and “imagine seeing the popularity of the bold orange iPhone Pro color and STILL choosing to offer the same boring muted colors for the Pro.”

Leaked images showing the Pixel 11 and Pixel 11 Pro
Leaked images showing the Pixel 11 and Pixel 11 Pro9to5Google / Amazon
Leaked images showing the Pixel 11 Pro Fold
Leaked images showing the Pixel 11 Pro Fold9to5Google / Amazon

And when it comes to the other details in these listings, reactions are more universally negative. According to the listings, the standard Pixel 11 will have a 6.3-inch 1080 x 2424 screen, a 4,985mAh battery, 256GB of storage, and 12GB of RAM for $899 (probably £899 / AU$1,149 based on Google Pixel 10 pricing in these regions).

That’s the same price as the 256GB Pixel 10 launched at, though that’s also available in a cheaper 128GB version, and it’s unclear whether there will be a 128GB model this time. The listed specs are also identical, except the battery which is 15mAh higher capacity this time.

Less RAM and smaller batteries

As for the Pixel 11 Pro, that’s listed with 12GB of RAM, down from 16GB in the Pixel 10 Pro, and 9to5Google also mentions a 5,115mAh battery in the Pixel 11 Pro XL (down from 5,200mAh in the Pixel 10 Pro XL), and a 4,750mAh one in the Pixel 11 Pro Fold (down from 5,015mAh in the Pixel 10 Pro Fold).

So these incomplete specs lists point to a mix of similar specs and downgrades, with Reddit responses including “people already thought the 10 Pro was a small upgrade,” and “iPhone 17 is such a better value.”

Still, while these early listings seem like they might be the real deal, there are some red flags, with 9to5Google highlighting that Android 16 is mentioned on them, when these phones are certain to run Android 17.

So there’s a chance these aren’t in fact official listings, and even if they are, that error means other details could be wrong too. We should find out for sure on August 12, as that’s when Google is unveiling these phones.

Inference needs memory: how context is becoming AI infrastructure

As enterprise AI systems evolve, the limiting factor is shifting. Model quality still matters, but it’s no longer the main issue holding systems back. Increasingly, what constrains performance, scalability, and cost is context.

Large language models are now expected to support long conversations, multi step reasoning, and complex workflows that span time, users, and systems.

Every one of those interactions generates tokens, and those tokens produce key value (KV) cache — the working memory that allows models to reason efficiently without constantly recomputing prior steps.

Most AI architectures still treat this context as temporary. KV cache typically lives in GPU memory, is tied to a single inference process, and is discarded as soon as resources are exhausted.

That approach might be acceptable for small scale experimentation, but it quickly breaks down in enterprise environments where context lengths grow, concurrency increases, and recomputation becomes expensive.

Inference context has quietly become one of the largest bottlenecks in enterprise AI.

KV cache as AI native data

To understand why this matters, it helps to stop thinking about KV cache as “just a cache.”

Enterprises have spent decades building strategies around structured data and unstructured data, but AI introduces a third class that deserves just as much attention: AI native data. This is data generated by model execution itself, and KV cache is one of its most important forms.

KV cache directly determines inference latency, throughput, energy consumption, and cost. As context windows get longer and reasoning chains become deeper, the volume and importance of this data grow faster than token counts alone. When KV cache is constantly thrown away, systems pay for it through rising latency, lower GPU utilization, lost reasoning context, and higher inference costs.

At scale, this inefficiency becomes structural rather than incidental.

Why existing infrastructure assumptions don’t hold

KV cache also exposes a mismatch with traditional infrastructure design.

GPU memory delivers exceptional performance, but it is scarce and local to a single server. CPU memory extends capacity but remains volatile. Local NVMe storage adds scale yet keeps context trapped at the node level. Traditional shared storage provides durability and resilience, but it wasn’t designed for highly dynamic, inference time state.

This leaves enterprises with a fragmented memory hierarchy where context is either fast but fragile, or persistent but difficult to access efficiently. No amount of tuning can fully resolve this, because the problem isn’t optimization — it’s architecture.

What enterprise AI needs is a way to treat inference context as system memory rather than disposable state.

Introducing an inference context memory layer

That shift is what we describe as an inference context memory layer.

Instead of forcing all KV cache to live and die inside GPU memory, this approach allows context to be created close to the GPU for low latency, then managed across a hierarchy of memory and storage tiers designed explicitly for inference workloads. Inactive context can move out of high cost memory without being discarded, while relevant context can be restored on demand without recomputation.

This changes the behavior of inference systems in a fundamental way. Inference is no longer a series of isolated executions that start from scratch each time. It becomes a continuous, stateful process where knowledge accumulates, moves, and is reused across sessions, agents, and nodes.

When storage becomes part of AI memory

Making this work places new demands on storage.

Inference context is large, mostly immutable, and technically recomputable — but regenerating it at scale is costly and inefficient. A storage architecture for inference context must preserve locality when performance matters, enable sharing without manual replication, and provide resilience so context isn’t lost when hardware fails.

When storage is designed this way, it stops being just a place to store data and becomes an extension of AI memory itself. That shift has real economic consequences: faster time to first token, higher GPU utilization, support for much longer sessions, and dramatically lower cost per query.

For enterprise workloads like tax advisory, legal analysis, healthcare reasoning, financial planning, and customer support, this is critical. These systems depend on preserving reasoning history and conversational context, not repeatedly rebuilding it from scratch.

Context is now infrastructure

Enterprise AI is entering a new phase.

Models will continue to advance, but the systems that scale successfully will be defined by how well they manage the intelligence those models produce. Tokens are no longer fleeting artifacts, and context is no longer something enterprises can afford to lose.

KV cache is AI native data. It represents system state. And increasingly, it must be treated as infrastructure.

The architectural principle is simple: generate context once, manage it intelligently, and reuse it wherever possible. That shift is foundational to making enterprise AI reliable, efficient, and scalable — and it’s why storage once again plays a central role in the future of computing.

Use the best business cloud storage to manage your data.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

The AI job apocalypse is a myth. We need more human talent than ever before

London Tech Week’s focus on AI - from a £12 million investment in AI for SMEs to AI bootcamps for graduates and more - has reflected the pressure to compete in an AI-era.

As this digital revolution progresses, the job economy is changing, but the mantra that AI is taking our jobs is simply not correct and potentially fueled by an undercurrent of classicism.

When the Luddites famously started to break the first machines of the industrial revolution in 1811 in England, fearing for their job as textile artisans, the “Bourgeoisie” would describe them as “ignorant workers”, with no understanding of basic economics.

More than two hundred years later, with the rise of GenAI, it is no longer the blue-collar workers who fear for their job, but the white-collar workers. This time it is the “bourgeois” who live in the anxiety of an uncertain world.

Since ChatGPT introduced AI into the everyday lexicon, it has been clear that we would experience an unprecedented revolution. The rhetoric that immediately began to dominate social discourse has been that AI tools would render most jobs insignificant.

Furthermore, whilst other technological revolutions ended up being creative destruction, ‘this time it was different’.

But is that really the case? Or are we more fearful, more concerned about destroying the status quo, because this time it’s a different ‘class’ of people being impacted? This time it’s the desk workers, not the physical laborers, who risk losing jobs, and suddenly there is alarm.

Artificial Intelligence relies on humans - and more humans than ever

AI is a human creation and still relies on humans to evolve. First, we have those who build the infrastructure, like data centers, which accounted for almost all of the United States’ GDP growth in the first half of 2025 (according to Harvard economist Jason Furman).

Then, we have those who train the models, which still need to be constantly retrained. Even if models are able to train themselves eventually, there is no consensus that human intervention in training will become obsolete, because human behavior and the entropy of organizations are in a constant state of flux and evolution.

And even when trained, AI constantly needs to also understand the “context” in which it is prompted to perform efficiently. AI then needs to be deployed. Managing security, defining guardrails for agents, understanding how to use AI and tracking agentic AI’s actions, all comes with inherent challenges.

The CIOs of the largest global corporations are already investing hundreds of millions of pounds to understand this. Startups based in San Francisco - a city I recently visited where 95% of out-of-home ads were about AI agents - are focused entirely on resolving these problems for large enterprises.

The fact that both Anthropic and OpenAI have launched their own consulting companies is proof that managing AI complexities in the coming years will be the biggest source of growth for all consulting and outsourcing companies of the world.

Sourcing the right human talent in the AI era is the biggest challenge

Software engineering is a job category where GenAI - perfectly trained on open-source code and GitHub repositories - can now code better than even the most experienced developers.

Additionally, developers in AI labs - with privileged access to “tokens” on Claude Code or OpenAI Codex - now develop 100% of the time without writing a single line of code. Nonetheless, when asked about their biggest challenges, all AI startups would point to recruitment.

A report by the UK's National Foundation for Education Research showed a 50% increase in tech job adverts between 2019/20 and 2024/25, with entry-level roles particularly affected. However, we’re now seeing a surge in demand driven by Gen Z, according to Employment Hero’s March Jobs Report.

This demand for AI expertise is reflected in a new Malt Tech Trends Report, which analyzed 1.2 million searches of tech freelancers in 2025. It reveals that AI is now the second most-in-demand skill, irrespective of company size, industry, or project type. More specifically, demand for freelancers with agentic AI expertise exploded by 5,800% in just twelve months.

Observer of the AI revolution, Andrew Ng, explains that if, for example, a team of 3 developers builds 10 times faster, then they need more designers or product managers to fuel the creative process. Doing more faster, with fewer people creates more work to fuel and execute the output.

More people are echoing the same rhetoric as Ng, calling out the phenomenon of ‘AI washing’, whereby companies have justified mass redundancies with AI disruption. In reality, in many cases, they were either adapting to geopolitical and economic uncertainties or had simply employed too many in the crazy post-COVID bull market.

The AI job apocalypse is not yet here… Still, the fear is real and needs to be understood

Software engineering is a perfect example of a job category that has constantly evolved. Since the inception of computer science, programming has become progressively more about “natural language”. Whilst there were 50,000 developers worldwide in the 1960s, today there are almost 50 million. Undoubtedly, the eradication of barriers to entry to build software increases that number tenfold.

History, data, and observation shows us that the AI job apocalypse is not yet here. Still, the fear is real and needs to be understood. The reason every science fiction novel paints an inhospitable world and unattractive paradigm is because the human mind always fears change. We assume the worst.

AI transformation, like all transformations, will be a cultural change first. And it’s companies, not professionals, who are most at risk if they fail to adapt. If one thing will be different in this digital revolution, compared to the last (arguably comparable is the advent of the internet), it’s the rate of change.

CEOs will have to be imaginative, change org charts and processes, admit they are not omniscient, take risks, and invest in training. Schools and universities also face the challenge of teaching soft skills: how to adapt to live and work in a more uncertain world. Because we can only harness top-tier AI talent if we understand how to truly adapt to change.

Independent professionals - those who create their own roles - from freelance developer to fractional manager and strategic consultants - have already redefined work.

On average, freelancers spend 4 hours a week on upskilling and keeping up with the job market and already have the habit of switching from one client project to another. They were the first to adapt to AI and realize that a job is more than just a bundle of tasks.

As Jensen Huang, CEO of Nvidia, recently said, if someone were to observe him at work, we would conclude that his day consists of tasks like making hundreds of calls and sending emails. AI will replace, augment, and improve these tasks. But it will not take Jensen’s job.

We've featured the best AI chatbot for business.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

Five reasons switching from IP VPN to SD WAN will help you build an AI-ready network

In the early 2000s, IP VPN was the enterprise networking technology of choice for IT leaders.

MySpace was the go-to social network, we used Skype for video calls, we listened to music on our new MP3 players and the Nokia 1100 was the most popular mobile handset.

It feels like a different era entirely, yet many businesses are still running on legacy networks that were perfect for their needs back then but are now holding them back.

By today’s terms, networks were built for low levels of traffic. Cisco estimates global IP traffic levels were around 175 petabytes per month in 2001. Compare that to today’s figure, which is around 522,000 petabytes per month, or approximately 3000 times higher than 2001 levels, and you can understand why 87% of businesses in an Accenture study believe their legacy network is compromising their ability to advance on cloud, data and AI and digital transformation.

Untangling and replacing the complex web of enterprise networks built up over years is an unavoidable and costly necessity. It’s a bit like replacing the windows in your home - you know you’ll improve security, stormproof your home and cut energy costs by upgrading, but the process feels like a hassle.

Today, IT leaders aren’t just ‘replacing the windows’ by modernizing outdated networks; they’re going further and building high capacity, low latency, secure architectures designed to withstand the explosive demands of AI.

Making the move to SD WAN

Millions of businesses are switching from IP VPN to Software-Defined Wide Area Networks, or SD WAN. Strong market growth is forecast in SD WAN, with one market forecast anticipating SD WAN CAGR of almost 40% (38.9%) from 2023 to 2030.

This growth is being driven by multiple factors including a shift to cloud-native architectures; a change in workplace practices and rise in remote working environments; and strong demand for network architectures that can manage current and future AI-related applications and services.

SD WAN is faster, more cost effective and more secure, with built in zero trust protection. It’s purpose built for distributed users and for managing cloud, AI workloads, data flows, and SaaS traffic.

But, to be truly AI ready, IT infrastructure must be software driven, and this is where SD WAN excels: it gives your business the security, flexibility, and reliability needed to operate confidently in an AI driven future. Here are five ways switching to SD WAN will help you build an AI-ready network:

1.Built for AI-scale performance

High-bandwidth, low latency SD WANs are critical for the delivery of AI workloads, particularly as businesses move towards AI inference. They provide fast access to cloud services and dynamic bandwidth allocation as they monitor network conditions and reroute over the best available path.

For example, imagine a drive-through restaurant that uses an AI voice to take and relay orders or a supermarket that uses an AI model to scan shelves in its store, to detect gaps in stock, alert staff and predict which items will run out next. A high-performance, low latency network is essential here to guarantee a seamless customer experience.

SD WAN’s application-aware routing levels this up even further, prioritizing AI traffic and deprioritizing the transfer of, for example, bulk file transfers or back-ups.

2.Security that matches today’s threat landscape

The global cyber attack surface has expanded dramatically. AI now plays a dual role, enabling more sophisticated attacks while also powering new, advanced defense capabilities. Traditional IP VPNs offer traffic encryption but lack native security features. In contrast, SD WAN is built to protect modern networks from today’s high volume, highly sophisticated cyber threats:

- Zero trust access protects users, devices and applications

- Traffic is encrypted end to end, so that all data between sites, platforms and applications is secure

- Threat prevention at the edge protects core infrastructure from threats, with features such as intrusion detection and prevention, malware scanning and DNS security

- Automated real-time security updates with threat intelligence pushed globally within minutes

3.Cloud connectivity without compromise

SD WANs provide direct, optimized access to major cloud environments, such as Microsoft Azure, AWS, and Google Cloud, by using automated secure tunnels and intelligent path selection.

This ensures cloud and AI services run with lower latency, higher performance, and more reliable connectivity. Also important to note is that SD WANs provide high levels of autonomy and automation, so it’s easy to make changes quickly and easily as businesses navigate dynamic market conditions.

4.Data insights that power automation

SD WAN captures real-time data including latency, packet loss and application usage patterns – data which can be fed into AI-based network monitoring, automation and predictive maintenance management tools, so that networks become self-optimizing, self-healing and proactively secure.

5.A foundation ready for SASE and Zero Trust

When combined with Secure Access Service Edge (SASE), SD WAN creates a single, secure, high performance network foundation that’s built to drive AI opportunities while protecting against cyber risks with integrated security solutions including zero trust, secure web gateways and cloud firewalls.

SASE is a cloud based networking and security framework that combines SD WAN with integrated security services (like Zero Trust, secure web gateways, and cloud firewalls) into a single unified architecture. It’s the gold standard of AI-ready architecture.

As enterprises accelerate toward an AI driven future, the networks that once served them well are now becoming a barrier to progress. SD WAN offers a clear path forward: a software defined, secure, high performance foundation built to handle the scale, speed and complexity of modern cloud and AI workloads.

By making the shift now, businesses can replace aging infrastructure with an agile, intelligent network that not only supports today’s demands but unlocks the full potential of tomorrow’s AI innovation.

We've ranked and reviewed the best antivirus software available.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

'It's exploding now?' — Reddit user's Zotac RTX 5090 'explodes' while playing Assassin's Creed Black Flag Resynced, and I'm starting to get worried that high-powered GPUs aren't safe

  • A Reddit user's Zotac GeForce RTX 5090 GPU reportedly exploded during gameplay
  • The power connector wasn't damaged, but a visible burn mark was present on the PCB gold finger
  • It's yet another point of concern for RTX 5090 users

Nvidia's RTX 5090 has been the subject of controversy ever since its launch, with several well-publicised cases of melting power connectors causing malfunctions — and this time, it's arguably the worst case yet.

As reported by Wccftech, a Reddit user's Zotac RTX 5090 GPU has exploded, 'five minutes' into playing the tutorial for Assassin's Creed Black Flag Resynced. Interestingly, the 16-pin power connector (often the case of the RTX 5090's woes) wasn't damaged. Instead, the user claims they heard a loud pop and crackle, followed by a cloud of smoke.

The 16-pin power connector has been blamed for several RTX 5090s melting, either due to high temperatures or connectors that aren't properly seated. It also shouldn't be a surprise that these melting complications are effectively exclusive to Nvidia's flagship GPU, since it draws a significant amount of power (575W maximum).

Instead, the PCB gold finger (the part that goes into the motherboard's PCIe slot) on the user's Zotac RTX 5090 has a visible burn mark. The cause isn't exactly clear, but speculation suggests that a crack in the circuit board may have caused the GPU to short-circuit.

Desktop Computer Burned Damage CPU GPU video card, memory, chip , cooler

(Image credit: Zoomik / Shutterstock)
Comment from r/pcmasterrace
Comment from r/pcmasterrace
Comment from r/pcmasterrace

Perhaps the most concerning aspect of this case is the suggestion from fellow Reddit users that the supposed crack and short circuit may be the result of GPU sag — and if that's the case, it should be a major concern for high-powered GPU users.

Plenty of modern GPUs, notably from third-party Nvidia partners, are quite chunky, which leaves little clearance to fit in smaller cases and, most importantly, not enough space to use GPU sag brackets.

Fortunately, the RTX 5080, RTX 4080, and RTX 4080 Super (which is the GPU I use) aren't cards that draw nearly as much power as the RTX 5090, so there isn't too much concern in terms of power connectors melting. However, if GPU sag can lead to a short circuit, it raises concern for any GPU that's heavier than most, especially the high-powered RTX 5090, as it's an additional issue to be wary of alongside melting connectors.

A melting or exploding GPU in this current PC hardware market is possibly the worst-case scenario, particularly for RTX 5090 users (who are seemingly most at risk), as prices are completely out of the affordable range due to the ongoing RAM crisis.

Frankly, it makes me want to steer clear of high-wattage GPUs completely (or at least undervolt them). TechRadar has contacted Nvidia for a response.

Britain's AI push is exposing a memory crisis inside business

Somewhere right now, a customer is repeating themselves. They are explaining their problem for the third time, to the third person, because the organization on the other side has no shared memory of the previous two conversations. It is an infrastructure problem that AI is making harder to ignore.

It is also becoming impossible for policymakers to ignore. Just in April, the Mayor of London launched a new AI and Jobs Taskforce to examine how AI is changing work across the capital, signaling that the conversation has moved well beyond investment announcements and into the harder question of what AI does inside organizations.

It is also shining a spotlight on a memory crisis inside modern business.

AI is accelerating work, not clarity

As UK organizations rush to deploy AI in the workplace, many are layering it onto fragmented systems that were never designed to preserve institutional memory in the first place.

According to research published in Harvard Business Review, knowledge workers toggle between applications and tools roughly 1,200 times per day, a pattern known as "toggling tax". That figure alone tells the story: we aren’t short of tools, but there is no coherence among them.

The result is a new kind of productivity paradox. Work is moving faster, but clarity is not improving.

This is where much of the current enterprise AI conversation unravels. A surprising amount of what is marketed as AI today still relies on humans to do the synthesis work themselves. The system retrieves documents. It summarizes conversations. It surfaces links. But employees still carry the burden of reconstructing meaning, and so do the customers and end-users waiting on the other side of those decisions.

Notably, when these types of AI tools do the retrieval, but humans skip the synthesis, the output feels hollow. That creates a trust and credibility problem - not just for the individual, but for AI as a category. People start associating "AI-assisted" with "low-effort".

When context is lost internally, the effects aren't invisible. They surface as slow responses, repeated requests for information that customers already provided, support experiences that feel fragmented, and sales teams reconstructing account history manually before every renewal, escalation or executive review.

Stateless systems cannot preserve organizational memory

The AI models themselves are becoming more capable, but the organizational foundation beneath them remains fragmented.

Most AI systems today are fundamentally stateless. They generate outputs based on temporary context windows rather than durable organizational memory. Every interaction requires the system to repeatedly reconstruct understanding from fragments.

Consider how databases work. We do not recompute everything from scratch every time a query arrives. We cache and index, then preserve relationships between entities, because continuously recomputing context is computationally irrational.

Yet much of enterprise AI is still being deployed exactly this way and the industry has started mistaking activity for intelligence.

What I believe organizations should focus on is whether they have structured, durable memory that lets AI and humans reason from the same shared context. Without that foundation, AI outputs remain generic.

Most collaboration systems multiply this problem in two ways. First, they encode knowledge into naming conventions and tribal memory – the kind that lives in channel names nobody can decode and folder structures only three people understand. New employees are not learning the business, they are learning the conventions.

Second, even when information exists, it remains inaccessible. The same decision appears as "PostgreSQL migration", "database move Q3", and "backend infrastructure change" across three different channels. They are semantically identical but textually invisible to any system trying to surface it.

This problem becomes even more acute in distributed organizations. I don’t believe you can build modern global companies on a "you had to be there" culture. Yet many businesses still operate as though important context naturally transfers through proximity and synchronous communication.

Search is not the same as understanding

Search was designed to discover information, whereas modern enterprise work requires systems that understand the relationships in data.

A customer escalation is not just a support ticket. It is connected to product decisions, engineering discussions, account history, contractual obligations, and revenue impact. A sales opportunity is tied to customer sentiment, historical support patterns, product usage, and internal stakeholder alignment.

Traditional collaboration systems flatten these relationships into disconnected channels and documents, whereas AI knowledge graphs preserve them.

Researchers call this a transactive memory system: the collective understanding of who knows what, how decisions were made, and how work is coordinated across teams. The same logic now extends to AI. Intelligent systems can participate in that process too by encoding context, surfacing relevant history, and routing knowledge to the right people at the right time.

Britain's productivity problem is becoming an AI problem

The Office for National Statistics has consistently flagged weak productivity growth as one of the UK's most persistent economic challenges. Since 2010, UK productivity has grown at 6.2%, compared with roughly 10% across the euro area and nearly 15% in the United States over the same period. AI is increasingly being positioned as a mechanism to help close that gap.

But productivity does not improve because your business has added more AI agents to the workflow. If every important decision still requires humans to manually reconstruct fragmented context, organizations just accelerate confusion.

What UK businesses need are systems capable of preserving context, maintaining institutional memory, and grounding AI systems in trusted organizational knowledge. Better AI infrastructure starts with a simple question: Does your organization remember anything? For most, the honest answer is no.

We've featured the best AI tool.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

'AI writing is now a problem everywhere on social media': Study finds nearly half of all LinkedIn long posts are AI-generated, and that's only the start

  • Study finds social media posts are increasingly AI-generated
  • LinkedIn particularly affected, with 40% of long-form posts written by AI
  • Substack and Twitter/X also badly hit

LinkedIn and other social media networks are rapidly being consumed by AI-written slop posts, new research has claimed.

A report from AI detection firm Pangram Labs found nearly half of all long posts (over 250 words) on LinkedIn were created entirely by AI, with the likes of Substack and X/Twitter also seeing a huge rise in such content.

"LinkedIn was the most AI-saturated platform, where more than 40% of longform posts flagged as fully AI-generated," the company's report said.

Social media drowning in AI slop

The study, which also examined Medium and Reddit alongside the other social networks for a data set of over a million posts, found one in four longform posts on social media flagged as fully AI-generated, with lengthier content much more likely to be created with AI than shortform.

Pangram found that LinkedIn was the most AI-saturated platform, where more than 40% of longform posts were flagged as being fully AI-generated, with Substack the least affected, with longer posts often far less likely to be AI-generated.

LinkedIn was also identified as having the highest AI share of any platform included in the report, as although its posts only made up a third of scanned items, it accounted for nearly two-thirds (62%) of all AI content flagged by the system.

"Professionals come to LinkedIn to hear from real people and their unique insights and perspectives," a LinkedIn spokesperson told us.

"We actively work to reduce low quality, automated or generic content, and while AI can be used to beat the blank page problem, our focus is on surfacing professional conversations that help people advance their careers. You can learn more about how we’re keeping the Feed trusted and professional here”.

However, when mixed AI and human content were included, X/Twitter was by the most swamped by AI, with the study finding almost half of articles on the site were either fully AI-generated (23.9%) or AI-assisted/mixed (22.9%), with only 53.2% of X articles flagging as fully human-authored.

"Our data shows that AI-generated content is a problem across all platforms, and it is hitting longform content especially hard," Pangram said.

"Contrary to what one might expect, people are overwhelmingly willing to use AI to speak on their behalf in professional settings that are associated with their real identity, and less likely to use it on casual and anonymous platforms."

"AI writing is now a problem everywhere on social media," Pangram Labs CEO and co-founder Max Spero noted. "An internet that is completely flooded with undisclosed AI content is bleak, but we don't believe it's inevitable."

Marvel has reportedly cast a former Star Wars actor as Magneto in its new X-Men movie — and they nearly played The Fantastic Four's Reed Richards in the MCU

  • Marvel has supposedly cast a major star as Magneto in its new X-Men film
  • The actor in question was linked with another major role in the MCU
  • They were said to be close to playing The Fantastic Four's Reed Richards

The Marvel Cinematic Universe (MCU) has reportedly found its Magneto.

According to multiple industry insiders, none other than former Star Wars actor Adam Driver has supposedly signed on to play the iconic metal-manipulating mutant in the comic giant's new X-Men movie.

Adam Driver smiling while wearing a tuxedo during an event

Fans will know Driver from Star Wars, A Marriage Story, Ferrari, and many other movies and TV show (Image credit: Gareth Cattermole/Getty Images)

At the time of publication, the Hollywood trades are yet to corroborate this via their own sources. Furthermore, with this rumor being circulated online by leakers with spotty track records, including MyTimeToShineHello and KnightEdgeMedia, Driver's casting is mere speculation at this stage.

That said, another insider, Apocalyptic Horseman, who's more trustworthy than the aforementioned pair, has backed up their claims. So, until we get an official line from Marvel and/or some form of verification from Deadline, Variety, or The Hollywood Reporter, it's just as likely that Driver won't appear in the MCU's first X-Men film as it is that he will.

What are the chances of Driver's involvement being confirmed sooner rather than later? Well, San Diego Comic-Con (SDCC) 2026 is right around the corner, and Marvel is set to take the stage for its traditional Hall H panel on Saturday, July 25. Given that Marvel has had a surprise or two up its sleeve for past editions of SDCC presentations, I wouldn't rule out the prospect of some form of official X-Men movie casting news at this year's event.

Driving the Marvel rumor mill

X-Men: First Class Magneto

Michael Fassbender has also portrayed Magneto on the big screen (Image credit: Fox)

If Driver becomes the third A-lister to portray Magneto in a live-action film — the others being Michael Fassbender and legendary actor Ian McKellen — it'll put an end to speculation about his long-rumored involvement in the MCU.

In October 2022, Driver was supposedly in talks to play Doctor Doom in Marvel's Fantastic Four film. Seven months later, Driver was apparently among the stars up for consideration for playing The Fantastic Four's Reed Richards instead. Said whisper was just one of many Fantastic Four casting rumors that sent MCU fans into a tailspin but which didn't come to pass.

Will this Magneto-specific rumor prove to be a case of third time's a charm for Driver? Some fans aren't convinced — indeed, threads on ResetEra and various Reddit pages are full of comments saying Driver would be a better fit for famous X-Men villain Mister Sinister, or that he should steer clear of a franchise whose best days are arguably behind it.

With or without Driver, Marvel's untitled X-Men movie is slowly taking shape. Lee Isaac Chung and Jake Schreier (Beef, Thunderbolts*) are already on board as its respective writer and director, and Marvel President Kevin Feige recently revealed (per Collider) that the mutant-led feature could be the first MCU film post-Avengers: Secret Wars.

Meanwhile, with speculation swirling online that Sadie Sink is playing iconic X-Men member Jean Grey in Spider-Man: Brand New Day, as well as Obsession star Inde Navarrette saying she recently met with Schreier, and Apocalyptic Horseman claiming that Marvel is searching for the MCU's Cyclops, Storm, and Rogue, this new X-Men movie's cast might soon be in place. All eyes will be firmly fixed on Marvel's SDCC 2026 presentation, then, for confirmation of any or all of the above.

No, NordVPN does not drain your phone battery

  • West Coast Labs found that the VPN battery drain is just a myth
  • Leaving NordVPN on for 24 hours drains just up to 1.8% of battery
  • NordVPN's NordLynx uses up to 31% less battery than OpenVPN

One of the biggest reasons people turn off their cybersecurity apps is the fear of a dead smartphone. For years, the conventional wisdom has been that running a virtual private network (VPN) in the background will relentlessly chew through your daily charge.

However, new independent research commissioned by NordVPN reveals that this long-held belief is actually a massive misunderstanding. If you've been avoiding firing up the best VPN to save a few precious battery percentage points, your phone has probably been lying to you.

West Coast Labs carried out an evaluation across flagship Apple, Samsung, and Google devices. Testing showed that running NordVPN continuously for a full 24 hours added a mere 1.4% to daily battery use on Android and just 1.8% on iOS.

To put that into perspective, leaving the VPN active all day on a premium Android device means you would only need to charge it roughly half a day earlier over the course of an entire month.

Why your phone's battery screen is lying to you

NordVPN graphic on West Coast Labs' VPN phone better drain results (July 2026)

(Image credit: NordVPN)

"Battery drain is one of the biggest reasons people avoid using a VPN," says Marijus Briedis, chief technology officer (CTO) at NordVPN. "We wanted to know if that myth holds up, and it turns out it largely doesn’t. Your phone makes VPN battery use look a lot scarier than it actually is."

The confusion stems from how Android and iOS calculate power consumption. When a VPN is active, your device routes all its internet traffic through that encrypted tunnel. Because of this, your smartphone's operating system labels all that transferred data as belonging to the VPN app.

If you stream a video or browse the web, your battery usage screen blames the VPN for the power drop. During an hour of streaming, West Coast Labs found that phones attributed an average of 49% of the session's battery drop to NordVPN.

However, when researchers used hardware instruments to measure the actual electrical current draw, the real VPN overhead was just 1.6% to 2.1%. Essentially, your phone's battery screen is simply counting data volume, not actual power loss. When idle, the background overhead is less than 0.5% of battery capacity per hour.

The commuter test and modern protocols

Another scenario notorious for eating up battery life is the daily commute. Phones rapidly switching between Wi-Fi and mobile data networks can force apps to constantly reconnect, draining juice in the process.

West Coast Labs simulated a two-hour commute with automated network switches every nine minutes. Even under this stress, NordVPN's transition overhead stayed at just 5.1% on Android and 6.8% on iOS. The app also successfully reconnected after more than 99 out of every 100 network switches.

So, where did the battery-draining myth come from? The report points the finger at older technology, specifically OpenVPN. Built in 2001, OpenVPN was designed long before mobile battery efficiency was a priority.

In contrast, NordVPN’s proprietary NordLynx protocol — which is built on the much lighter WireGuard standard — uses modern cryptography requiring significantly less processing power. Benchmarking tests showed NordLynx uses 31% less battery per unit of data than OpenVPN on Android, and 24% less on iOS.

“People deserve to make informed choices about their online security. If battery drain was the reason someone wasn’t using a VPN, we hope this report puts that concern to rest for good," says Briedis.

Co-existing with AI: why replacement narratives are holding the public sector back

Spend any amount of time reading about AI and you'll quickly notice a pattern. Stories about new capabilities and investment are rarely far removed from questions about what the technology means for jobs.

It's not difficult to see how that has shaped public perception. Much of the conversation around AI tools continues to be framed through the lens of workforce reduction, creating anxiety about what the technology might take away rather than what it could enable.

Research from Acas reflects that unease, with more than a quarter of UK workers identifying job losses as their biggest concern about workplace AI.

Those concerns matter because across sectors, organizations are introducing AI at a time when employees are already navigating economic uncertainty, budget pressures and increasing workloads. In that environment, fears about replacement can shape how new technologies are received long before people experience their benefits.

Yet, focusing on jobs alone risks missing a much more important conversation. For many organizations, particularly those delivering essential public services, the challenge isn't a lack of work. It's a lack of capacity. The real question is whether AI can help people work more effectively in increasingly challenging circumstances.

The reality of frontline work

That challenge is particularly visible across public services.

Housing officers support residents through difficult circumstances, social workers assess risk in complex situations, and customer service teams help vulnerable individuals access essential support. In each case, outcomes depend on judgement, context and human relationships so these aren't environments where technology can simply step in and take over.

What many frontline staff struggle with isn't a lack of expertise, but the admin burden that prevents them from applying their expertise where it matters most.

Critical information is often spread across multiple systems. The platforms that underpin these services were rarely designed to share information easily. In practice, they are often a mix of the ERP system and older line-of-business applications, each holding part of the picture.

As a result, staff spend valuable time searching for records, reviewing case histories and piecing together information before they can take action. These challenges may sit behind the scenes, but they consume significant amounts of time.

Supporting expertise, not replacing it

AI delivers the greatest value when it gives people faster access to information and more time to focus on the decisions that matter.

A housing officer could quickly surface relevant tenancy history from multiple systems, while a social care worker could be alerted to emerging risks or significant changes that warrant attention. These case workers might use AI to identify patterns in service demand and prioritize their approaches more effectively.

Crucially, this works by drawing on the systems they already depend on, the ERP and case management platforms that hold their data, rather than buying additional solutions and adding to the fragmentation. The value comes from connecting and making sense of information that already exists, not from adding to the systems of record.

In each case, the case worker remains responsible for the decision, with AI helping them reach that point faster and with better information.

For many teams, demand already outstrips capacity. The challenge is creating enough time for skilled professionals to focus on work that requires experience, judgement and human interaction.

Used effectively, AI can help create that capacity. By reducing administrative friction and making information easier to access, it allows people to spend more time applying the skills that organizations depend on.

This principle extends well beyond the public sector. Whether in business, financial services, customer operations or government, the greatest value often comes from making expertise easier to access and apply, rather than attempting to replace it altogether.

Why perception matters

When AI is introduced alongside discussions about efficiency savings and workforce pressures, it's easy for people to view it through the lens of cost reduction rather than capability building. That perception can create resistance before new tools have had the chance to demonstrate their value.

This is why successful AI adoption requires more than technical implementation. One of the clearest lessons from digital transformation is that technology alone doesn't drive change, people do.

Anyone who has worked on a major ERP program will recognize this. The systems that succeed are rarely the ones with the most sophisticated functionality, but the ones that teams understand, trust and actually use day to day.

Organizations that make progress tend to focus on practical outcomes rather than the technology itself. They engage teams early, involve them in how tools are deployed and demonstrate how AI can help address genuine operational challenges.

When people can see the impact on their day-to-day work, whether that's reducing admin, improving access to information or supporting faster decision-making, adoption becomes far more natural.

Trust develops over time through involvement, transparency and tangible results. People need to see how technology supports their work before they are likely to embrace it.

Moving beyond the replacement narrative

The debate around AI has become disproportionately focused on what work might disappear. That focus is understandable, but it risks obscuring a more immediate challenge facing organizations today: how to help people manage growing workloads, increasing complexity and rising expectations.

For the public sector in particular, the opportunity is far more practical than a distant vision of fully automated services. It lies in helping frontline staff spend less time searching for information, enabling them to identify risks more quickly and giving them better access to the insights they need to act. In most cases, that means getting more value from core systems rather than chasing wholesale reinvention.

Those may not be the stories that generate the most attention, but they are the ones most likely to determine whether AI delivers meaningful value.

If organizations want employees to engage with AI, they need to move beyond conversations centered on replacement and focus instead on the problems the technology can solve at grassroots. This cohort is less interested in what the AI is capable of doing, but rather how it helps them to do their jobs better.

We've featured the best AI website builder.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

Japan's largest taxi operator Nihon Kotsu hit by cyberattack which forces systems to be shut down

  • Japan’s largest taxi operator confirms July 11 malware attack forcing shutdowns of its IT systems and disrupted dispatch and reservation services
  • Nihon Kotsu isolated networks, notified authorities, and brought in third‑party experts; customers were advised to use alternative taxi apps during the outage
  • No data leaks have been confirmed, but Nihon Kotsu warned it may disclose and notify affected parties if evidence of personal information exposure emerges

Japan’s largest taxi operator, Nihon Kotsu, hasconfirmed suffering a cyberattack which forced it to temporarily shut down parts of its IT infrastructure.

In a statement published on the company’s Japanese website, Nihon Kotsu said the attack took place in the early morning of July 11 - on a Saturday, when unnamed threat actors infected its devices with malware.

“We have recently discovered that our internal systems have been subjected to unauthorized external access (malware infection),” the machine-translated statement reads. “We deeply apologize for the great inconvenience and concern caused to our customers, business partners, and all related parties due to this incident.”

Services unavailable

As soon as it spotted the intrusion, Nihon Kotsu did what most companies do - shut down its network to prevent further damage, notified relevant law enforcement and data protection authorities, and brought in third-party experts to assess the damages and assist with the repairs.

The shutdown means some customer-facing services are unavailable: “As a result, the hire car web order and reservation management system, taxi dispatch service by phone, and some internal systems are temporarily unavailable,” the company said.

It advised its customers to use a different taxi app, which allows users to choose a taxi service to their liking.

So far, there is no evidence of any data exfiltration, or leaks to the dark web. However, the company did leave it as a possibility.

“At this time, no information leakage has been confirmed, but if any leakage or possibility of personal information of customers or related parties is newly discovered, we will promptly make official announcements and contact the affected parties individually in accordance with laws and regulations,” the company concluded.

Nihon Kotsu is Japan’s largest taxi operator, employing more than 18,000 people and running a fleet of more than 8,500 taxis and more than 2,000 chauffeur vehicles.

Via BleepingComputer

The new rules of software supply chain security: visibility, vigilance, validation

The global digital economy runs on a thriving ecosystem of third-party vendors, enabling organizations to scale and innovate faster than they possibly could do on their own.

This digital ecosystem is teeming with software suppliers, not just business software that you can buy but also a vast array of software libraries that are embedded in third-party products.

Speed, however, can sometimes be the enemy of risk, as many organizations have not adequately validated whether these third-party technologies are sufficiently safeguarded against cyber threats and other digital risk.

So, while software is a great enabler, it also brings risk, given that it often is built with frameworks and libraries that are not known or well supported.

Consider that companies employ an average of 106 SaaS apps within their IT environments , and the picture becomes quite clear: software supply chain security is a serious concern.

It’s no wonder that half (51%) of participants in the latest Supply Chain Risk Survey ranked software vulnerabilities in supplier products as the most disruptive cybersecurity threat to their organization’s supply chain, behind only data breaches (64%) and malware or ransomware (52%).

An ever-changing attack surface that comprises cloud services, micro-services, APIs, SaaS platforms, third‑party services and now AI agents has expanded well beyond what once was an understood perimeter before widespread digital transformation took hold.

How secure is your own extended digital ecosystem? If this question makes your heart race, then take a closer look at three key considerations for addressing software supply chain security.

1. Visibility: Determine what’s actually in your multi-layered supply chain

Since the software supply chain is part of a vast, interconnected digital ecosystem, organizations likely do not have full visibility of what and who make up their third-party providers. Recent high-profile incidents have signaled just how fragile supply chains can be.

Assuring business continuity requires organizations to scrutinize partners before placing such deep trust in them. That effort starts with knowing who is in your interconnected digital ecosystem before you can start to manage the risk.

Understanding risk across a supply chain is conceptually easy, but it is practically difficult. While clearly outlining security parameters and requirements in supplier contracts is a great starting point, it is not enough, as contracting is generally a point-in-time activity and should be paired with monitoring. You must be able to see and measure software assets so you can better manage them.

After all, you can’t protect what you can’t see, and many businesses still don’t have a complete, accurate asset inventory, meaning that their vulnerability exposure is incomplete. If you don’t know what systems, apps, devices and libraries are in your environment, vulnerability management is supposition, inference and guesswork.

It is crucial to understand what your suppliers are doing both upstream and who you supply downstream, because their decisions are now part of your organization’s own risk profile. Software often presents the biggest blind spots in asset management, thanks in large part to a lack transparency in software build and dependencies, shadow IT, shadow AI and unmanaged endpoints.

An organization's exposure is tied directly to the security posture of every supplier they rely on. Attackers know this, increasingly targeting upstream or downstream partners. You can secure your own environment perfectly and still be vulnerable through others’ oversight. Tools that can profile, quantify and score risk across the supply chain, therefore, are essential, as is tooling that monitors for unusual activity.

2. Vigilance: Prioritize the security of AI integrations across your software supply chain

Threats can lurk anywhere and everywhere across your supply chain. But there’s a new kid in town: AI. The software supply chain has expanded to include the unique risks of AI ecosystem, such as reliance on external foundational models and highly connected agents.

This escalating integration of AI tools makes the multi-faceted software supply chain even more of a concern. Cybersecurity professionals who participated in the latest Cybersecurity Workforce Study revealed a troubling AI-related security event their organization experienced in that prior year: data poisoning (cited by 11%).

Data poisoning happens when bad actors intentionally insert corrupted, misleading or malicious data into the training dataset of a machine-learning model. Even a small amount of poisoned data can change the model’s behavior, in turn resulting in misclassifications, degraded accuracy or malicious outcomes. So suddenly that seemingly helpful ChatBot that is embedded in your CRM, CMS or other purpose-driven enterprise software may not be so friendly after all!

Indeed, organizations simply have little / no control over the software that suppliers are using, making it much more difficult to ensure vulnerabilities are identified before widespread rollout, as well as supported and patched once deployed, but they do have control over scrutinizing suppliers.

Therefore, the people on your security team and the processes they follow matter more than ever. Technology accelerates both sides of the fight, so your real advantage comes from having skilled practitioners who understand how AI changes your risk profile, attack surface and can put the right controls in place to compensate.

Cybersecurity professionals who specialize in software supply chain security can quantify the risk of model poisoning / steering, prompt injection and model inversion, and assess the inherent bias of pre-trained open-source models, protecting the integrity of software and services from upstream vulnerabilities. Such a holistic approach ensures that every component, from third-party libraries to the training data itself, meets the organization’s security and ethical standards.

In addition, reviewing and evaluating vendor agreements is an important task for cybersecurity teams and stakeholders. Think of these disciplined actions as a necessary stress-test meant to identify and address weaknesses and changing needs. A good contract with clear deliverables and expectations is part of a cybersecurity defensive strategy alongside your people and your defense technologies and ongoing monitoring of systems and services.

3. Validation: Adopt skills frameworks and codes of practice for software supply chain security

No organization must stand up against the heightened threat of software supply chain security alone. Take advantage of existing guidance such as the U.K.’s Software Security Code of Practice to follow when you’re trying to batten the software hatches at your own organization.

Not only does this code support software vendors as they adopt secure software lifecycle development practices; it also supports software customers in mitigating the likelihood and impact of software supply chain attacks.

In addition to following code and other guidance frameworks, organizations can look to skills frameworks and vendor-neutral certifications to validate that their cybersecurity professionals demonstrate certain skills needed to build and strengthen supply chain security and resilience.

Skills development in the disciplines of governance, risk and compliance (GRC), secure software development and AI skills better enable cybersecurity and risk professionals to make informed decisions regarding software supply chain security and risk management.

From complexity to better security

Supply chains are complex, longer than you think and multidimensional. Organizations must place much greater focus on stress-testing the resilience of software suppliers and continuously evaluating exposure.

This approach goes well beyond being careful about what software makes it all the way to procurement. The potentially more damaging layer to address in the macro supply chain involves the embedded software and integrated AI tools that other suppliers are using.

The question is not whether your digital supply chain will face disruption. It's whether you have the visibility, vigilance and validation to operate when it does. That’s resilience: the north star of software supply chain security. Without question, transparency has to run through supply chains instead of just sitting inside organizations.

We've rounded up the best endpoint protection software suites.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

How to watch England vs India 2026 ODI series: cricket live streams, schedule, preview

The three-match 2026 England v India ODI series, from July 14 to 19, sees Virat Kohli and Jasprit Bumrah return to the Indian team after prolonged absences.

Kohli will play his first game for the national side since January. Bumrah has not played a ODI since the 2023 ODI World Cup final. India have named an experienced squad with Rohit Sharma also back alongside captain Shubman Gill.

India, the top-ranked ODI side, will be looking for an upturn in their fortunes on this tour, which so far has seen 2-0 and 4-0 defeats to Ireland and England respectively in T20Is.

England, under Harry Brook, will be looking to take the momentum from the T20 series into the ODI series. They also need some decent ODI results to ensure automatic qualification for the 2027 World Cup. The top eight teams in the rankings automatically qualify and England are currently on the cut line in eighth position.

So read on as we explain how to watch the England vs India 2026 ODI series online, on TV and potentially for free wherever you are.

Can you watch the England vs India 2026 ODI series for free?

England vs India ODI coverage is locked behind a paywall, but in Australia there are free trials.

Kayo Sports in Australia comes with a 7-day free trial, after which a subscription starts at AU$30/month.

You'll need a VPN to prevent you from getting geoblocked if you're abroad right now. We recommend NordVPN.

How to watch any England vs India 2026 ODI stream using a VPN

A VPN is handy piece of software that can make your device appear as if it's back in your home country, so you can unlock your usual service. The best VPN right now? We recommend NordVPN – it does everything and comes with up to 75% off.

🟩 NordVPN – get the world's best VPN

Not having a VPN is like leaving your front door wide open in a busy city – anyone can walk right in and take a peek.

TechRadar regularly reviews all the biggest and best VPN providers and NordVPN is our #1 choice.

Up to 75% off today
3 extra months free
Unlocks all necessary streaming services

Get NordVPN and live stream the England vs India 2026 ODI series from anywhere.View Deal

How to watch England vs India 2026 ODI live streams in the US

USA flag

(Image credit: Other)

In the US, dedicated cricket streaming service Willow TV is the place to watch every game of the England vs India 2026 ODI series.

If you don't have it as part of your cable package, you can watch Willow coverage through your choice of Sling TV's Desi Binge Plus or Dakshin Flex plans – starting from $10 per month.

Outside the US? Use NordVPN to watch Willow TV's England vs India ODI coverage from anywhere.

How to watch England vs India 2026 ODI live streams in the UK

UK flag

(Image credit: Other)

The England vs India 2026 ODI series is being shown on Sky Sports.

Sky Sports plans start from £35/month, or £20 if you're an existing Sky subscriber. Alternatively, grab a Now Sports subscription from £14.99/day or £34.99/month.

Outside the UK right now? Use NordVPN to access your preferred coverage of the ENG vs IND ODI series.

How to watch England vs India 2026 ODI live streams in India

India flag

(Image credit: Wikimedia Commons)

The England vs India 2026 ODI series is being shown on the Sony Sports Network in India, with live streaming available via Sony LIV.

Sony LIV subscription plans in India start at ₹599 for the Mobile-Only yearly plan, while the Premium yearly plan costs ₹999.

If you're currently out of India but want to watch an England vs India ODI live stream, you'll need to get yourself a VPN, as per the instructions above.

How to watch England vs India 2026 ODI live streams in Australia

Australian flag

(Image credit: free)

The England vs India ODI series is being shown on Fox Cricket via Foxtel in Australia, with live streaming available via Kayo Sports.

Kayo Sports starts at AU$30 per month after a 7-day free trial. Or you can get your first month for AU$1.

Remember if you're out of Australia at all during the series, get yourself a VPN to stream ENG vs IND from anywhere in the world.

How to watch England vs India 2026 ODI live streams in South Africa

South Africa flag

The England vs India 2026 ODI series is being shown on Supersport in South Africa.

You'll need to get a DStv access package to watch all five games, with prices starting at Rs99/month for the streaming version.

Abroad right now? Just use a VPN and tell your device that you're back home and you'll be good to go.

How to watch England vs India 2026 ODI live streams in New Zealand

New Zealand flag

In New Zealand, Sky Sport NZ is showing the England vs India ODI series.

You can access Sky Sport through satellite TV or get a live stream, with the Sky Sport Now subscription service starting at $29.99 per day or $54.99 per month.

Those outside of New Zealand for any part of the series can use NordVPN to gain access to their home streaming service.

England vs India 2026 ODI Series FAQs

What is the England vs India 2026 ODI schedule?

1st ODI: Tuesday 14 July, Edgbaston, Birmingham, 11am (BST)

2nd ODI: Thursday 16 July, Sophia Gardens, Cardiff, 1pm (BST)

3rd ODI: Sunday 19 July, Lord’s, London. 11am (BST)

What are the England vs India 2026 ODI squads?

England ODI squad: Harry Brook (captain), Joe Root, Jos Buttler, Ben Duckett, Will Jacks, Jacob Bethell, Tom Banton, James Coles, Sam Curran, Liam Dawson, Rehan Ahmed, Jofra Archer, Gus Atkinson, Saqib Mahmood, Adil Rashid, Josh Tongue.

India ODI squad: Shubman Gill (captain), Rohit Sharma, Virat Kohli, Shreyas Iyer, KL Rahul, Ishan Kishan, Washington Sundar, Axar Patel, Shivam Dube, Kuldeep Yadav, Jasprit Bumrah, Prasidh Krishna, Arshdeep Singh, Gurnoor Brar, Prince Yadav.

We test and review VPN services in the context of legal recreational uses. For example:1. Accessing a service from another country (subject to the terms and conditions of that service).2. Protecting your online security and strengthening your online privacy when abroad.We do not support or condone the illegal or malicious use of VPN services. Consuming pirated content that is paid-for is neither endorsed nor approved by Future Publishing.

Xiaomi unveils its first range-extender SUV and it looks like a private jet on wheels

  • Xiaomi reveals its first extended-range electric vehicle
  • SkyNomad will sit separately from its pure EV Xiaomi Auto company
  • The 1.5-liter engine is manufactured by Changan's subsidiary Harbin Dongang

Xiaomi is set to enter the hotly contested luxury SUV sector with an all-new business that it has dubbed SkyNomad.

Fresh off the success of both the SU7 and YU7, the former of which has outsold the Tesla Model 3 in the Chinese market, smartphone-maker Xiaomi sees a gap in the market for its first extended-range electric vehicle (EREV), which sees a gasoline engine act as a generator to charge battery packs on the move.

While the powertrain is still in its infancy in Europe, with just the Leapmotor C10 REEV and Mazda MX-30 R-EV currently on sale in many markets, it has experienced sales success in much of China.

Li Auto is the current market leader, with six models offering a mix of combustion engines and battery packs, while AITO, Deepal, Avatar and Leapmotor also offer similar solutions.

Unlike traditional plug-in hybrids, which use a gas engine to drive the wheels or charge the batteries, EREVs rely solely on a fully electric powertrain for propulsion, with the combustion engine serving as a generator to charge the batteries.

According to Car News China, Xiaomi's SkyNomad brand will offer the N70 and N90, the latter coming as a full-size, three-row SUV with rotating front seats, a full leather premium interior, and an N90 Max Camping Edition that adds a pop-up roof and a built-in side awning for upmarket camping trips.

SkyNomad is also selling the idea of modularity, stating in its promotional material that the cabin can transform into a studio for one, a cafe for two, a meeting room for three, or a play area for the whole family.

Under the skin, a 1.5-liter gasoline engine from Changan's subsidiary, Harbin Dongang, sends power to a 76 kWh ternary NMC battery pack in the N90, while a pair of electric motors team up to deliver 310 kW (416 hp) of power.

Analysis: unnecessarily enormous

Xiaomi SkyNomad N90

(Image credit: Xiaomi/SkyNomad)

Xiaomi's decision to launch an EREV-focused brand, SkyNomad, is a clear shot at market leader Li Auto, which is experiencing a 74% year-over-year sales decline in the first four months of 2026, according to Electrek.

The introduction of EREVs to Xiaomi's stable will undoubtedly help it boost sales in China, but it's difficult to get away from the fact that the N90 is absolutely enormous. It measures over five meters in length and weighs 3,361 kg, which makes the 416 hp feel slightly underpowered.

Car News China says the N90 can manage around 230 miles before the batteries are depleted, by which point the 1.5-liter engine is called upon. Overall range is in excess of 1,500 km — or around 930 miles.

It's also interesting that Xiaomi, a company that found great success with pure EVs, is pivoting back to fossil fuels.

All of the PR coming out of China suggests that its public EV charging network is both faster and more widespread than most other markets, which raises the question of why the market needs big, heavy range extenders like this in the first place.

The American Dream is killing me — until I see Billie Joe Armstrong's new Marshall guitar amp (and then I'm as consumerist as they come)

  • Marshall's 1959BJA Signature amp was first seen at the Super Bowl
  • Built on Marshall’s handwired 1959HW platform, with a custom 'Dookie Mod'
  • The color? A nod to Billie Joe Armstrong's first guitar, Blue (are you even an Idiot?)

When Billie Joe Armstrong et al took to the stage for Green Day's Super Bowl performance earlier in the year, I'm pretty sure most guitarists stopped listening for the "MAGA agenda" lyric switcheroo that never came and instead simply breathed "That amp though…"

And now, shredders can buy their own striking baby-blue Marshall head, just like the one that was set up behind Billie Joe Armstrong — for a not insignificant sum of $3,999.99 / £3,099.99 (which is around AU$5,779, where sold).

It is Marshall's first artist signature amp in 14 years, and its full name is the Billie Joe Armstrong 1959BJA Artist Signature. Yes, it's inspired by one of punk rock’s most recognizable guitar tones, and yes, that means it has a special "Dookie mod".

Basket Case? No, just the amp please

Marshall x Billie Joe Armstrong's baby blue guitar amp head, held by the star, whose arms are just visible

(Image credit: Marshall)

The amp was developed with Billie Joe Armstrong (it even bears his signature on the front and back) and is built on Marshall’s hand-wired 1959HW platform, refined with a custom “Dookie Mod”. This, says Marshall, is "inspired by the tone shaped alongside producer Rob Cavallo during Green Day’s breakthrough era".

The promise? A classic plexi but with modern performance flexibility, "increased gain, tighter lows and the saturated punch that brings Billie’s signature sound into a modern stage-ready format."

The design, of course, is a nod to Billie’s first guitar, Blue (seen in the main image), combining baby-blue with brass and silver panel details, all hand-wired in the UK.

It is released as a head-only unit, so axe men (and women, and in fact all humans who play guitar, I salute you) can pair it with the cabinet of their choice — but I'm sure a blue cabinet is possible to purchase as well…

And this isn't Billie Joe Armstrong's first rodeo with Marshall. Back in 2024, he actually appeared in the Monitor III ANC headphones campaign. So, the 1959BJA simply marks the natural progression of that relationship? It certainly looks that way.

Armstrong himself is quoted as saying, “I’m so overjoyed to have my own signature Marshall amp", adding "These amps have been a part of my musical life, from my heroes down to little old me. Turn it the f**k up!!”

You'll be able to buy the 1959BJA Billie Joe Armstrong Artist Signature from July 21, and again, you'll need to part with $3,999.99 / £3,099.99 (or around AU$5,779) to get yours when they become available.

Sometimes you don't find the amp; it finds you. It's something unpredictable, but in the end, it's right…

Risk of darkness looms across Europe and America as power-hungry AI data centers and electric cars drain the grid, decimate factory capacity, and engineer a four-year wait for transformers

  • AI expansion is overwhelming transformer factories across global electricity markets today
  • Power transformer delivery times have stretched from months into several years
  • Aging electricity grids are driving an urgent wave of transformer replacements

Electricity grids across Europe and North America are facing a serious equipment shortage that could delay new electricity connections for years, experts have warned.

Power transformers, the large devices that regulate voltage before electricity reaches homes and factories, now take considerably longer to manufacture.

Orders that once took 6 to 12 months before 2020 can now take between 24 and 48 months to complete.

What is fueling the surge in demand?

The rise of electric vehicles and the shift toward industrial electrification are placing significant new demands on local power grids.

Utility companies increasingly compete directly with private developers for the same limited factory capacity, extending wait times for nearly everyone.

Much of the substation infrastructure built 30 to 50 years ago across the United States and Western Europe now requires urgent replacement.

Wind farms and solar installations also require specialized step-up transformers to convert the power they generate before long-distance transmission occurs.

Battery storage projects add further complexity, since each installation requires its own dedicated transformer connected directly to the wider power grid.

The most significant new demand originates from data centers built to support artificial intelligence and AI tools, which consume electricity at an extraordinary rate.

A single facility of this kind can draw several hundred megawatts, comparable to the electricity consumption of a mid-sized city.

Large technology firms can pay in advance to reserve years of factory output, leaving smaller buyers to wait even longer.

The situation is so critical that the largest transformers, rated above 100 MVA and 230 kV, once shipped within 12 to 18 months, can now require well more than 36 months for delivery.

Why factories cannot simply build faster

The principal constraint lies at the material level, since transformer cores depend on grain-oriented electrical steel that remains in short supply.

Alternative steel grades cannot satisfy strict efficiency standards set by the European Union and the United States Department of Energy.

Copper prices for internal winding materials have remained high, adding considerable cost pressure to already constrained manufacturing budgets across the industry.

Skilled labour shortages further complicate matters across the industry, since transformer assembly still depends heavily on precise, hands-on manual craftsmanship.

Factory testing facilities, where each unit undergoes impulse voltage and short-circuit evaluation, can only process a limited volume weekly, further limiting overall output.

As a result, equipment prices have climbed 50% to 80% above pre-2020 levels, driven largely by rising material and labour costs.

While industrial transformers take more time, smaller units used in residential and commercial settings ship faster, usually within 12 to 20 months.

Industry analysts regard these pressures as structural rather than temporary, suggesting sustained capacity investment will be required before conditions ease

Buyers who plan early, secure factory slots in advance, and standardize technical specifications appear better equipped to manage prolonged delays.

Diversifying supplier relationships beyond congested manufacturers may offer flexibility as global demand continues to outpace available production capacity worldwide.

Via Evernew Electrical (originally in Swedish)

'We have not ruled this out': The water-based battery that could turn whole data centers into energy storage

  • QinetiQ testing of SuperDielectrics' water-based zinc cells showed up to 13x longer high-power cycle life, 100C discharge in 36 seconds, and zero thermal runaway
  • The company is pitching its solution to AI datacenters as a 'shock absorber' that can deal with power requirement spikes safely and reliably
  • SuperDielectrics' Faraday 3's first commercial deployment is slated for early 2027 as it goes up against existing Lithium-ion battery-based energy storage as an alternative that can be deployed inside the data center

Cambridge-based advanced battery technology company SuperDielectrics recently published independent test results for its upcoming water-based Zinc battery, which could help cement its de facto presence in most projects that leverage renewable energy, whose output is often inconsistent.

The next-generation battery offers up to 13 times longer life cycle under high-power cycling, zero thermal runway, and charging and discharging gains that eclipse those of Lithium-ion-based batteries.

This makes it a great add-on for critical infrastructure, as well as for a new, fast-growing sector that is extremely power-intensive with huge power spikes in tow: AI data centers.

A solution that caters specifically to the AI power problem?

SuperDielectrics is painting its battery technology as the holy grail for AI data center problems, and with good reason: it is where all infrastructure spending will be concentrated over the next decade, and the firm decidedly wants a piece.

SuperDielectrics’ core innovation is a unique, patented polymer that enables it to deliver results that dwarf those of similarly configured single-layer lithium-ion cells. With the battery leveraging Zinc in addition to the proprietary polymer, the abundantly available metal could mean that batteries would be cheaper, immune to geopolitical and supply chain vulnerabilities, and easier to scale.

Room temperature testing of the battery showed impressive results when compared to lithium-ion-based alternatives, with SuperDielectrics claiming:

- Up to 13x longer cycle life under high-power cycling (10 mins charge and discharge, 100% depth of discharge);

- 10x better discharge performance (maintained >85% nominal capacity, achieved at 36 seconds)

- 8x better charging performance (maintained >70% nominal capacity, achieved at 1 minute, 12 seconds)

“These results provide independent benchmarking of the technology at the heart of our batteries: a proprietary polymer separator that combines rapid ion transport with the safety advantages of an aqueous electrolyte system," noted Shelley Brown, CTO of SuperDielectrics.

"The outcome is an energy storage solution purpose-built for high-power, fast-cycling applications, offering an alternative to lithium-ion systems that typically rely on extensive oversizing and additional safety infrastructure to manage demanding power profiles."

There is more to the story that makes the solution ideal: Unlike lithium-ion-based solutions, the battery is safe to deploy in datacenters, whereas off-site deployments are currently required for lithium-ion-based solutions due to their potential as a fire hazard.

AI datacenters are known to be particularly power-intensive and often require significantly higher peak power when performing certain computing tasks. Lithium-ion batteries are not ideal for this because not only do frequent charging and discharging degrade them fairly quickly, but they also do not charge or discharge as fast as the Zinc-based offering from SuperDielectrics.

As a result, as noted by the CTO of SuperDielectrics, data centers need to overcompensate for this limitation by buying more capacity than needed to allow smooth operations without pushing existing lithium-ion-based infrastructure too hard.

There is a trade-off, however: Zinc batteries generally sacrifice energy density to offer advantages over lithium, and SuperDielectrics' silence on capacity does not work in its favor here.

Despite this, thanks to AI compute requirements' near-violent power swings requiring a moderator, SuperDielectrics seems to have a winner on its hands, at least on paper, but it might have its limits for datacenters that require longer backup times. The question that comes to mind is whether a smoothing layer can grow into genuine storage, especially for rack-scale product deployment.

On the flip side of the equation, SuperDielectrics is not the only one toying with a 'safe' battery solution; Chinese researchers are concentrating on a similar approach even as the automobile industry is already using sodium for EVs, which is already racking up wins in extreme low-temperature conditions.

Quordle hints and answers for Tuesday, July 14 (game #1632)

Looking for a different day?

A new Quordle puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Monday's puzzle instead then click here: Quordle hints and answers for Monday, July 13 (game #1631).

Quordle was one of the original Wordle alternatives and is still going strong now more than 1,500 games later. It offers a genuine challenge, though, so read on if you need some Quordle hints today — or scroll down further for the answers.

Enjoy playing word games? You can also check out my NYT Connections today and NYT Strands today pages for hints and answers for those puzzles, while Marc's Wordle today column covers the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about Quordle today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

Quordle today (game #1632) — hint #1 — Vowels

How many different vowels are in Quordle today?

The number of different vowels in Quordle today is 5*.

* Note that by vowel we mean the five standard vowels (A, E, I, O, U), not Y (which is sometimes counted as a vowel too).

Quordle today (game #1632) — hint #2 — repeated letters

Do any of today's Quordle answers contain repeated letters?

The number of Quordle answers containing a repeated letter today is 1.

Quordle today (game #1632) — hint #3 — uncommon letters

Do the letters Q, Z, X or J appear in Quordle today?

• No. None of Q, Z, X or J appear among today's Quordle answers.

Quordle today (game #1632) — hint #4 — starting letters (1)

Do any of today's Quordle puzzles start with the same letter?

The number of today's Quordle answers starting with the same letter is 0.

If you just want to know the answers at this stage, simply scroll down. If you're not ready yet then here's one more clue to make things a lot easier:

Quordle today (game #1632) — hint #5 — starting letters (2)

What letters do today's Quordle answers start with?

• E

• A

• R

• C

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

Quordle today (game #1632) — the answers

Quordle answers for game 1632 on a yellow background

(Image credit: Merriam-Webster)

The answers to today's Quordle, game #1632, are…

  • EBONY
  • AVOID
  • RODEO
  • CUTIE

There was a while when I doubted my three starter words of “duchy”, “robin” and “slate”, but they really have helped me whiz through games recently.

Today, for example, I had three words where I had all the right letters (but not necessarily in the right order) and one word where the missing letter was obvious.

Daily Sequence today (game #1632) — the answers

Quordle Daily Sequence answers for game 1632 on a yellow background

(Image credit: Merriam-Webster)

The answers to today's Quordle Daily Sequence, game #1632, are…

  • SEDAN
  • VALVE
  • FAULT
  • SMELT

Quordle answers: The past 20

  • Quordle #1631, Monday, 13 July: VOICE, BISON, BURNT, BUILT
  • Quordle #1630, Sunday, 12 July: STAIN, BINGO, LARVA, DICEY
  • Quordle #1629, Saturday, 11 July: WORTH, PRONG, DINGO, DRUID
  • Quordle #1628, Friday, 10 July: GREET, STEAK, DUSKY, HAUTE
  • Quordle #1627, Thursday, 9 July: CRUMP, PHONE, SHINY, STONY
  • Quordle #1626, Wednesday, 8 July: GHOST, TREND, EXALT, ALONG
  • Quordle #1625, Tuesday, 7 July: ARRAY, SUITE, KIOSK, BOULE
  • Quordle #1624, Monday, 6 July: TRAWL, SPICE, PIANO, SHARK
  • Quordle #1623, Sunday, 5 July: PINEY, SWOON, TITLE, PINTO
  • Quordle #1622, Saturday, 4 July: ARGUE, MOTEL, OPERA, TRUCE
  • Quordle #1621, Friday, 3 July: AVERT, MOTOR, MANIC, WORDY
  • Quordle #1620, Thursday, 2 July: BULKY, PARSE, BELOW, MOVIE
  • Quordle #1619, Wednesday, 1 July: EASEL, OTTER, LYRIC, SHACK
  • Quordle #1618, Tuesday, 30 June: HALVE, DRYER, THERE, MINTY
  • Quordle #1617, Monday, 29 June: SLURP, CRACK, CRANK, PHONY
  • Quordle #1616, Sunday, 28 June: RUPEE, TOPAZ, FULLY, BEING
  • Quordle #1615, Saturday, 27 June: PRINT, MARRY, SADLY, BICEP
  • Quordle #1614, Friday, 26 June: JUICE, ARRAY, BONEY, SKIFF
  • Quordle #1613, Thursday, 25 June: SHELF, TAWNY, HYPER, SOLVE
  • Quordle #1612, Wednesday, 24 June: SOBER, ECLAT, GOOSE, NINNY

NYT Connections hints and answers for Tuesday, July 14 (game #1129)

Looking for a different day?

A new NYT Connections puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Monday's puzzle instead then click here: NYT Connections hints and answers for Monday, July 13 (game #1128).

Good morning! Let's play Connections, the NYT's clever word game that challenges you to group answers in various categories. It can be tough, so read on if you need Connections hints.

What should you do once you've finished? Why, play some more word games of course. I've also got daily Strands hints and answers and Quordle hints and answers articles if you need help for those too, while Marc's Wordle today page covers the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about NYT Connections today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

NYT Connections today (game #1129) - today's words

NYT Connections hints for game 1129 on a purple background

(Image credit: New York Times)

Today's NYT Connections words are…

  • U-TURN
  • PICNIC
  • CUT
  • SHUFFLE
  • LAUNDRY
  • RECYCLING
  • DEAL
  • COPY
  • BARGAIN
  • GROCERY
  • UNDERSTANDING
  • THIS SIDE UP
  • PASTE
  • AGREEMENT
  • EASTER
  • DELETE

NYT Connections today (game #1129) - hint #1 - group hints

What are some clues for today's NYT Connections groups?

  • YELLOW: A treaty or pact
  • GREEN: Choices for changing text
  • BLUE: Like a bucket, but with holes
  • PURPLE: Graphics with a point

Need more clues?

We're firmly in spoiler territory now, but read on if you want to know what the four theme answers are for today's NYT Connections puzzles…

NYT Connections today (game #1129) - hint #2 - group answers

What are the answers for today's NYT Connections groups?

  • YELLOW: CONTRACT
  • GREEN: EDIT MENU OPTIONS
  • BLUE: KINDS OF BASKETS
  • PURPLE: SYMBOLIZED WITH ARROWS

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

NYT Connections today (game #1129) - the answers

NYT Connections answers for game 1129 on a purple background

(Image credit: New York Times)

The answers to today's Connections, game #1129, are…

  • YELLOW: CONTRACT: AGREEMENT, BARGAIN, DEAL, UNDERSTANDING
  • GREEN: EDIT MENU OPTIONS: COPY, CUT, DELETE, PASTE
  • BLUE: KINDS OF BASKETS: EASTER, GROCERY, LAUNDRY, PICNIC
  • PURPLE: SYMBOLIZED WITH ARROWS: RECYCLING, SHUFFLE, THIS SIDE UP, U-TURN
  • My rating: Hard
  • My score: 1 mistake

With PICNIC, LAUNDRY and GROCERY locked in I made the mistake of selecting BARGAIN instead of EASTER.

There was logic to my error. My parents used to run a grocery store and they would put items that were close to their sell-by date or damaged in a basket that became known as the BARGAIN basket. I thought it was a universal thing, but maybe not.

The next two groups came pretty easily, especially the four tiles that made up the yellow CONTRACT group, as they are words that seem to be constantly in the news in regards to negotiations surrounding the Strait of Hormuz.

Yesterday's NYT Connections answers (Monday, July 13, 2026, game #1128)

  • YELLOW: INTERROGATE: EXAMINE, GRILL, PUMP, QUESTION
  • GREEN: THINGS WITH HANDLES: BUCKET, DRAWER, MUG, UMBRELLA
  • BLUE: FICTIONAL CATS: FIGARO, PUSS, SALEM, TOM
  • PURPLE: STARTING WITH SMOOCHES: BUSSIN, KISSER, PECKISH, SMACKDOWN

What is NYT Connections?

NYT Connections is one of several increasingly popular word games made by the New York Times. It challenges you to find groups of four items that share something in common, and each group has a different difficulty level: green is easy, yellow a little harder, blue often quite tough and purple usually very difficult.

On the plus side, you don't technically need to solve the final one, as you'll be able to answer that one by a process of elimination. What's more, you can make up to four mistakes, which gives you a little bit of breathing room.

It's a little more involved than something like Wordle, however, and there are plenty of opportunities for the game to trip you up with tricks. For instance, watch out for homophones and other word games that could disguise the answers.

It's playable for free via the NYT Games site on desktop or mobile.

NYT Strands hints and answers for Tuesday, July 14 (game #863)

Looking for a different day?

A new NYT Strands puzzle appears at midnight each day for your time zone – which means that some people are always playing 'today's game' while others are playing 'yesterday's'. If you're looking for Monday's puzzle instead then click here: NYT Strands hints and answers for Monday, July 13 (game #862).

Strands is the NYT's latest word game after the likes of Wordle, Spelling Bee and Connections – and it's great fun. It can be difficult, though, so read on for my Strands hints.

Want more word-based fun? Then check out my NYT Connections today and Quordle today pages for hints and answers for those games, and Marc's Wordle today page for the original viral word game.

SPOILER WARNING: Information about NYT Strands today is below, so don't read on if you don't want to know the answers.

NYT Strands today (game #863) - hint #1 - today's theme

What is the theme of today's NYT Strands?

Today's NYT Strands theme is… Make yourself comfortable

NYT Strands today (game #863) - hint #2 - clue words

Play any of these words to unlock the in-game hints system.

  • RELIC
  • SOCK
  • BREAK
  • ERASE
  • HORN
  • RAVE

NYT Strands today (game #863) - hint #3 - spangram letters

How many letters are in today's spangram?

Spangram has 9 letters

NYT Strands today (game #863) - hint #4 - spangram position

What are two sides of the board that today's spangram touches?

First side: left, 2nd row

Last side: right, 5th row

Right, the answers are below, so DO NOT SCROLL ANY FURTHER IF YOU DON'T WANT TO SEE THEM.

NYT Strands today (game #863) - the answers

NYT Strands answers for game 863 on a blue background

(Image credit: New York Times)

The answers to today's Strands, game #863, are…

  • CHAIR
  • ROCKER
  • BEANBAG
  • OTTOMAN
  • RECLINER
  • THRONE
  • SPANGRAM: HAVEASEAT
  • My rating: Easy
  • My score: Perfect

Today’s search takes from the high-born of the seating world (THRONE), to the lowest (BEANBAG).

If I am going to make myself comfortable then I would pick the BEANBAG any day. Although it does depend on how long you’ve owned it; a baggy bean bag is nobody’s friend. Having said that, I’ve not sat in many thrones. Or indeed any, but judging by House of the Dragon, they’re not particularly ergonomic.

Anyway, it was hard not to whizz around today’s game, with even the longest and most obscure word, OTTOMAN, being easy to spot thanks to the double T.

Yesterday's NYT Strands answers (Monday, July 13, game #862)

  • PLEASANT
  • DELIGHTFUL
  • ENJOYABLE
  • SATISFYING
  • SPANGRAM: HITSTHESPOT

What is NYT Strands?

Strands is the NYT's not-so-new-any-more word game, following Wordle and Connections. It's now a fully fledged member of the NYT's games stable that has been running for a year and which can be played on the NYT Games site on desktop or mobile.

I've got a full guide to how to play NYT Strands, complete with tips for solving it, so check that out if you're struggling to beat it each day.

Like photosynthesis in plants: This CPU uses solar power to 'run computations' without the need for batteries

  • Penn State researchers built a monolithic 3D chip that runs entirely off ambient light without leveraging a battery
  • The chip stacks silicon photovoltaics, MoS₂/WSe₂ complementary logic, and graphene chemical sensors within ~50 nm of each other
  • The development also opens the door for larger 2D circuits that incorporate some of the same design philosophy in the future

Research at Penn State university has come up with an interesting breakthrough in engineering, building out a compact integrated circuit that runs entirely off solar power.

The IC, which skips batteries altogether aims to run calculations and be able to sense chemicals in its vicinity by harvesting solar power available to it aims to do so by stacking everything monolithically versus splitting things up across different dies.

The move comes as engineers continue to grapple with the need for long-lasting and versatile IoT and edge computing systems, many of which are deployed in remote or hard to access locations, making changing batteries a hard, if not impossible proposition at times.

A vertically-stacked solution that centers around solar

Battery-free electronics that rely on renewable power are in greater focus as engineers, stakeholders, and consumers seek such devices to meet growing market demand.

What makes the research team at Penn State's development so unique is that it has attempted to address what conventional electronics have failed to do so far: cutting losses by investing in a structure that effectively skips a significant part of the board area requirements, wiring losses in terms of power and latency that are in play for such devices.

The chip does so by leveraging two types of semiconducting materials (MoS₂ and WSe₂), a silicon photovoltaic module, and graphene-based sensors, and stacking all three layers vertically.

The graphene-based sensors at the top respond to liquids placed on them, sending electrical signals that are processed in the middle logic layer, where the semiconductor layer lies, while the silicon photovoltaic module at the bottom generates power by converting ambient light into electricity.

"We showed that heterogeneous materials—silicon, graphene, MoS2 and WSe2—can be integrated monolithically in three dimensions to create a self-powered sensing and computing system. This is different from simply placing separate chips next to each other or connecting them externally. We show that sensing, computation, and energy harvesting can be brought into nanoscale proximity, which can reduce footprint, interconnect length, and energy loss," said Saptarshi Das, one of the authors of the paper documenting this approach.

While the move itself documents a small purpose-built chip, it has interesting ramifications for the future, where larger circuits could use the design as a building block for IoT needs, especially in remote settings where batteries might be difficult to replace even as efficiency takes center stage for lower-powered, nanoscale circuits.

Quote of the day by Steve Jobs: 'The only problem with Microsoft is they just have no taste' — a potshot at a bitter rival

Many consider two of the most valuable companies in the world, Microsoft and Apple, to be at different ends of a spectrum. While different in their broad target market, they compete intensely in similar markets like operating systems, consumer hardware and enterprise software. It's little surprise, then, that their respective leaders have looked at each other with disdain throughout history.

Big Macs and chips

Apple's co-founder Steve Jobs compared Microsoft to the fast food chain McDonald's in an interview for the 1995 PBS documentary series 'Triumph of the Nerds'.

Quote of the day

This article is part of TechRadar Pro's QOTD project to provide an insight into the minds of the brightest and most recognized figures in the technology industry today and in years gone by. Read the full series here.

In a set of scathing comments, he said the company that Bill Gates founded was only able to enjoy its reach and success due to a "Saturn-5 booster called IBM". Gates used the opportunity granted by IBM outsourcing the operating system for the first IBM PC to Microsoft, called MS-DOS, with Gates retaining the rights to license the software and "create more opportunity", as Jobs phrased it.

Although he praised this aspect of the business – reiterating that Microsoft deserves its success – Jobs was adamant the firm doesn't add any originality into the broader ecosystem and isn't interested in the user experience. They have no "spirit" he said, and described their products as "very pedestrian".

From enemies to friends

Despite the decades-long sparring that Gates and Jobs engaged in, they eventually underwent a multi-stage reconciliation process that eventually led to a very different kind of relationship before Jobs' death in 2013.

In today's technology landscape, the two companies enjoy less of a heated rivalry that peaked during the operating system wars in the 1990s – with each enjoying a moat (Microsoft in the enterprise space and Apple in the consumer space).

Instead, they now compete in domains like AI and cloud computing alongside plenty of other Silicon Valley rivals. However, that doesn't mean there isn't the occasional jab – like outgoing Apple CEO Tim Cook dunking on the Surface Pro.

Like Google’s Project Loon, but for missiles: Ukraine is weaponizing stratospheric balloons to boost strike range

  • Kyiv has floated more than 1,000 cheap balloons into Russia as decoys, relays, and now even launch platforms, with a balloon-dropped Hornet drone reportedly doubling its strike range to around 300 km
  • The DART missile drops from balloons at 12–18 km and deliberately kills its own navigation in the terminal phase, leaving Russian jammers nothing to attack
  • Prevailing west-to-east winds hand Ukraine a near-monopoly on the tactic, even as Russia trials its Barrazh-1 relay balloon as an alternative to Starlink

Google might have written off its Project Loon endeavor, a goal to use stratospheric balloons as flying cell towers due to economic considerations, but they are back in an unexpected setting: a deepening frontline between Ukraine and Russia.

This is largely because Ukraine has cracked the economics with the business model that Alphabet, Google's parent company, could not have: a cheap, easy-to-employ weapons platform that can't be jammed or shot down affordably while building up on its threat to Russian cities far from the frontlines.

The DART is a Ukraine-deployed, balloon-launched missile system developed by the Ukrainian firm Center of Innovative Technologies Program (CITP), which launches projectiles from the lower stratosphere at intended targets.

A smart 'dumb' missile approach by design

While most of the world continues to focus on better smart satellite- or laser-guided missiles (or precision-guided weapons), Ukraine is taking a different approach altogether, and it might be a much smarter play given how it could play out.

The balloon-based DART missile starts off 'smart', relying on satellite guidance to align and aim at a target before cutting off guidance altogether for the last 6km of the journey, relying only on its solid-fuel engine to reach its intended position.

The approach, though slightly crude, renders Russian jammers completely ineffective, unable to pull a DART missile off-target or 'confuse' it in any way. The target seems not to be civilians or combatants but rather to restrict Russia's ability to wage war by targeting infrastructure because of how the missile functions.

DART carries a warhead of roughly 10 kilograms that scatters conductive graphite filaments, a small-scale graphite bomb meant to short out electrical infrastructure. This also means it might not need the level of precision that many other missiles do: power stations and electric grids tend to sprawl, making them much easier targets than alternatives.

The more impressive part might be that the balloons, which often cost as little as $200, can lure out expensive S-300 and S-400 interceptors to respond, depleting far more costly ammunition and batteries on the Russian side.

Ukraine is also a direct beneficiary of geography: winds across the front generally blow west to east, allowing balloons from Ukraine to easily reach Russian territory, while Russian ones have to fight the current, often floating back into their own territory as a result.

While DART remains uncodified by Ukraine's military, it has already been showcased at trade shows, with the Eurosatory defense expo outside Paris in June marking its first major outing. It also has both allies and adversaries taking notice as the Ukrainian conflict continues to offer modern battlefield lessons.

The US Army has been evaluating tethered aerostats for drone detection and communications relay, with an eye toward launching drone swarms from them in the future.

Russians, on the other hand, are investing in a different kind of drone technology: the Barrazh-1, a stratospheric relay balloon carrying a communications payload of roughly 100 kilograms, which it says is entirely domestically built and aims to balance out the lack of Starlink terminals available to the country for data and internet services on the battlefield.

How to download the iOS 27 public beta — and 3 new things to try first

There has been a developer beta of iOS 27 for a while, but now it’s available in public beta, which both makes it slightly easier to get hold of and suggests it might be more stable than it was initially.

That said, this still isn’t finished software, so while stability may have improved, you’re still likely to encounter bugs and potentially unfinished features.

So this isn’t for everyone, and as a general rule we’d recommend running it only on a secondary handset. If in doubt, simply wait for the finished iOS 27 release, which we’re expecting in September.

But if you do have a spare phone lying around or want to take the jump with your main device, then the beta could be worth checking out, as it comes with loads of new and improved features — some of which we’ve looked at further down.

How to install the iOS 27 public beta on your iPhone

Before you start downloading and installing the iOS 27 public beta, make sure your iPhone is backed up, just to be on the safe side. We won’t detail that here because we’ve got a full guide covering how to back up your iPhone.

Once your data is safely backed up, the next step — if you haven’t run a beta before — is to sign up for Apple’s beta program. You can do this by heading to the Apple beta page and tapping ‘Sign up’, after which you’ll have to log into your Apple account to enroll. If you’re not sure whether you’ve already signed up for this or not, then instead press the ‘Sign in’ button on that page — if it doesn’t let you sign in, then sign up instead.

Once you’re registered, you can simply head to Settings > General > Software Update > Beta Updates on your phone, and tap ‘iOS 27 Public Beta’. There may be other betas listed too, but this is the one you want.

Then tap the back arrow at the top of the screen, and the page you were on before will now show the beta you selected, complete with notes on it and a download size. From there, just tap ‘Update Now’ to grab it, or ‘Update Overnight’ if you’d rather wait until you’re sleeping to put your phone temporarily out of action.

Then you just need to wait for it to install. Once it has, there’s plenty to check out, but below we’ve highlighted some of what you might want to try first.

3 things to try first

iOS 27 has an enormous number of features — so many in fact that we found 21 that Apple didn’t even have time to mention during its announcement. But below, you’ll find some of the biggest and best to start off with.

1. Siri’s AI overhaul

Two hands holding iPhones showing the new Siri AI feature in iOS 27

(Image credit: Apple)

By far the biggest thing in iOS 27 is the long-awaited AI overhaul for Siri. There are many elements to this, but the main one is that Siri now works much like ChatGPT or other AI chatbots — you can have natural, back-and-forth conversations with it, and its responses aren’t just preset or based on basic web searches.

Siri can both search the web and interact with apps to get answers or carry out the tasks you need, and it now comes with a dedicated Siri app where you can find and pin previous conversations.

2. Improved photo editing

An iPhone on a blue background showing the Apple Photos app in iOS 27

(Image credit: Apple)

Photo editing has also gotten a lot better with iOS 27, allowing you to do things like reframe or extend photos after they’ve been taken, and remove larger objects than previously.

It makes the photo editing tools far more powerful and brings them more in line with those available on Pixel and Samsung phones.

3. New ‘Describe a Shortcut’ tool

An iPad, iPhone and MacBook on a blue background showing the Shortcuts app in iOS 27

(Image credit: Apple)

Shortcuts has long been one of the most powerful apps that comes with your iPhone, but it can also feel a bit impenetrable. Now, though, it’s far simpler.

Rather than creating a shortcut or automation through various menus and complicated ‘if this then that’ rules, you can now simply use natural language to describe what you want.

So, for example, you could say “When I’m leaving work, message Pedro I’m on my way with my ETA,” and the app will automatically create an automation that does exactly this.

Watch out Windows users, a Secure Boot update has been blocked on Windows 11 PCs due to failing on some devices — here's how to check if you're affected

  • Microsoft has blocked Secure Boot updates on some devices
  • There have been issues with some devices updating from the 2011 certificate to the latest 2023 certificate
  • Some older devices or those not supported by their OEM may be restricted in downloading the latest Secure Boot certificates

Microsoft has blocked some Windows 11 PCs from installing Secure Boot updates due to known issues with certificate updates.

The company is currently rolling out an update for Secure Boot on devices using certificates issued in 2011, which are now expired. The new 2023 certificate is being applied through Windows Update, but issues on devices with faulty firmware have forced Microsoft to halt the rollout.

“Devices in this group are affected by a known issue. To reduce risk, Secure Boot certificate updates are temporarily paused while Microsoft and partners work toward a supported resolution,” Microsoft said.

Secure Boot issues

Secure Boot has long been a device-saving feature when it comes to removing malicious files, as it allows the device to verify and load only authentic software before booting to Windows. However if the device cannot receive certificate updates it can fall victim to threats at the boot-level before Windows is loaded.

Microsoft is currently working with manufacturers to issue a patch that will allow affected devices to install the new Secure Boot 2023 certificate, with HP issuing a BIOS update to allow the installation of the latest certificate.

What this means in practice is that some older devices, or devices that no longer receive updates via their Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), will not be able to apply Secure Boot and Boot Manager protections. Microsoft clarified that, “this results in a gradual reduction in long-term security—not an immediate risk or system failure. Continue to follow standard security practices, including staying current with Windows updates.”

So even if your device is blocked from installing the latest Secure Boot certificate, it will continue to work properly, other Windows updates will continue to work, and your Secure Boot version will continue to protect against known vulnerabilities. It’s just future vulnerabilities that users affected by this issue will need to be aware of.

Many users may not be aware of issues until they need to use Secure Boot, so the silver lining in Microsoft’s warning is that now is the perfect time to check if your Secure Boot is working properly.

How to check Secure Boot is up to date

To check if you are using the latest Secure Boot certificate, take the following steps:

  • Open the Windows Security app using the search bar
  • Navigate to the Device Security dashboard using the menu on the right hand side
  • Look at the Secure Boot section, and check for the following messages:

The Windows Secure boot section on the Device Security dashboard, showing that Secure Boot is working properly.

(Image credit: Microsoft)
  1. "Secure Boot is on"

If you see this message, Secure Boot is likely working properly. However, this does not display your certificates’ current state. Microsoft has been rolling out an update to show if your Secure Boot is running on the latest certificate, so make sure your don't have any pending Windows updates.

The Windows Secure boot section on the Device Security dashboard, showing that Secure Boot is affected by a known issue but can be updated by the OEM.

(Image credit: Microsoft)
  1. “Devices in this group are affected by a known issue.”

Devices with this message will likely be able to install the latest certificates once a firmware update has been issued by your OEM. Check your OEM update channel for availability.

The Windows Secure boot section on the Device Security dashboard, showing that Secure Boot is not supported for the latest Secure Boot certificate.

(Image credit: Microsoft)
  1. “Secure Boot is on, but your device does not support the automated Secure Boot certificate update due to hardware or firmware limitations.”

Devices with this message may no longer be supported by your OEM, or the OEM might no longer be able to provide the firmware updates needed. Microsoft recommends checking your OEM’s Secure Boot support page to confirm whether your device is out of support.

Via WindowsLatest

Space Force has a new weapon to target enemy satellites — Meadowlands electromagnetic beam marks a 'huge milestone' in US capability

  • 32 “Meadowlands” Counter Communication Systems have been commissioned by U.S. Space Force Combat Forces Command
  • Rather than laser, microwave or plasma, the weapon is an electromagnetic beam
  • Enemy satellites can be disabled and signals jammed using the weapon

A fleet of 32 “Meadowlands” Counter Communication Systems (CCS) is being assembled by US Space Force Combat Forces Command, which has just taken receipt of the first mobile electromagnetic warfare system.

While recent projectile-free weapons systems have employed lasers, microwaves, and ionized plasma gas, a Meadowlands unit – portable enough to be transported by air – uses targeted electromagnetic fields.

Electromagnetic warfare has proved successful in recent years, with Operation Midnight Hammer – the June 2025 US airstrikes on Iran – using the technology to create a “silence zone” over the country to facilitate the attack. By disrupting communications with the electromagnetic weapon on that occasion, targets were struck with minimal countermeasures deployed.

What does an Electromagnetic Weapon (EW) do?

Systems like Meadowlands CCS have the capability to interfere with enemy satellites and jam their signals (affecting uplink and downlink transfers). Described as being able to “detect, deny, disrupt, and degrade adversary capabilities” the technology can also change or disrupt target data, and generate confusion.

US Space Force Col. Angelo Fernandez is the commander of Mission Delta 3 – Space Electromagnetic Warfare, a unit dedicated to “training and equipping electromagnetic warfare professionals.”

He states: “Our Guardians are at the forefront of joint operations, so we are fielding capability that best enables their success and the success of the joint force. Every day, Space Force electromagnetic warfare forces become better organized, trained, equipped, and mentally prepared to operate in hostile environments.

The Meadowlands units are mounted on a six-wheel chassis, and appear to be intended for ground deployment using a separate tractor. They’re small enough to be deployed in harsh environments or behind front lines, and can be controlled remotely.

What is Space Force?

It was reported in February 2026 that Space Force was involved in Operation Midnight Hammer, which included gaining control of the electromagnet spectrum.

While sounding like a fictional arm of the military, Space Force was created in 2019 to protect U.S. interests in space. Operating under the Department of Air Defense, it is concerned with putting satellites into space, managing GPS, and tracking space debris. Its operatives are referred to as “Guardians.” These are recruited from the USAF, other branches of the military, or from civilian application pools.

(Conversely, NASA is concerned with exploration and scientific research, and is a civilian agency.)

Meadowlands CCS join existing high-powered microwaves, precision lasers within the arsenal of Space Force, which holds no kinetic weapons for deployment.

“This upgraded system enables us to more effectively and efficiently support the joint scheme of maneuver across the continuum of conflict,” said U.S. Space Force Lt. Col. Ryan Skilling, 4th Electromagnetic Warfare Squadron commander.

This AI-powered shape-shifting wing could make aircraft tails obsolete — and slash travel costs

  • Engineers at the German Aerospace Center are developing a morphing wing currently intended to reduce drag and replace functions of other parts of the plane’s design
  • A drone equipped with a morphing wing has been used in testing
  • The Morphing Technologies and Artificial Intelligence Research (morphAIR) project has a one million Euro budget

A wing that changes shape is in development at the German Aerospace Center, as part of a one million Euro project that could redefine the traditional view of an aircraft.

Rather than a tube with fixed wings and tailplane, future aircraft based on this technology could change shape to cope with changes in flight conditions, reduce drag, and even morph a portion of the wings to handle pitch control and other tailplane functions.

Engineers have tested the technology – part of the Morphing Technologies and Artificial Intelligence Research (morphAIR) project – with a 70 kilo drone, equipped with a 3-meter wide morphing wing.

How does the AI morphing wing work?

The morphing wing relies on a smooth surface with motorized components inside that can alter its shape. Success so far has led to the introduction of a follow-up program, UAdapt (Unmanned Aircraft Wing Adaption) to focus on reducing fuel consumption, by making the plane’s surface less prone to drag, and potentially removing the tail completely.

On the team is Martin Radestock, senior adaptive systems engineer, who told Aerospace America that current wings are essentially inefficient: “Aircraft are flying with turbulent flow over their wings, because they have steps and gaps [e.g. ailerons and flaps] between their control surfaces.”

Smooth wings have no gaps, no screws and rivets, and are assembled in a completely different way to standard aircraft. The wing is described as a “morphable trailing edge” and appears to be a series of motorized, actuator-controlled arms that move left, right, up, and down.

Morphing aircraft is nothing new

While morphAIR’s approach takes full advantage of modern technology, the concept of employing multiple profiles for aircraft to suit different flight conditions and deployment purposes is an old concept given a new life.

The most famous implementation of this is the “swing wing” technology, first tested in 1951 (the Bell X-5 experimental craft) and later a key element of 1967’s F-111 Aardvark. 13 production craft used the tech in total, although the most famous is probably the Grumman F-14 Tomcat, which co-starred with Tom Cruise in the movie Top Gun. These craft were able to sweep the wings backward, sharpening their angle (to 68 degrees from perpendicular to the fuselage) for stable high-speed flight, while the "straight" wings (22 degrees) generated lift for short takeoffs, such as on an aircraft carrier, where the runway is short.

Interestingly, a Grumman Gulfstream II was fitted with morphing flaps as part of testing by FlexSys in partnership with NASA and the U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory, so morphAIR is not the only group researching the next stage of flight.

Developments in aerodynamic flight technology and flight control made the swing wing generation obsolete, but morphAIR’s intriguing re-visitation of the concept of a craft that changes shape in midair could take it in a whole new direction.

‘The fate of humanity must not be decided behind closed doors’: US artificial intelligence sovereign wealth fund sees surge in support as AI job losses mount — 69% of Americans want to see half of AI stock placed into new state-owned investment fund

  • Americans want the massive wealth of AI firms added to a sovereign wealth fund
  • 69% would see AI firms forced to transfer 50% of stock into a sovereign fund
  • The fund would help redistribute wealth and back new infrastructure and developments for working class Americans

A national survey has found over two-thirds (69%) of US citizens want to see AI firms transfer half of their stock into a sovereign wealth fund.

The survey, conducted by Verasight among 1,690 adults, also found that there was overwhelming support (89%) for AI companies to publicly disclose the results of all internal safety testing.

The sovereign wealth fund, proposed by Senator Bernie Sanders, would provide wealth for current and future generations, as well as acting as a source of capital for investment in new projects and developments designed to improve the lives of working class Americans.

Americans want AI wealth redistribution

At the announcement of Sanders’ proposed American AI Sovereign Wealth Fund Act, the senator said, “It would guarantee that the economic benefits generated by AI are used to improve the lives of all of us — not simply to make the richest people in the world even richer.”

“The future of AI and the fate of humanity must not be decided behind closed doors in Silicon Valley by billionaires seeking to maximize their power and profit,” Sanders said.

Interestingly, the survey only saw a small dip in support to 64% when the sovereign wealth fund was tied directly to Sanders, showing the bi-partisan desire for the enormous growth in AI wealth to be redistributed among Americans.

According to a Goldman Sachs report, companies operating in the AI industry have added more than $27 trillion in market value since late 2022, with corporate profits and tech investment soaring. But at the other end of the scale, working class Americans are seeing jobs replaced and entry level positions disappearing due to AI technologies.

A further report from Goldman Sachs predicts that during the 10 year AI transitional period, up to 15 million US workers could lose their jobs - around 9% of the current US workforce.

In 2026 alone, the tech sector has seen more than 166,000 layoffs, with many attributed to the adoption of new AI technologies. The trueup layoff tracker expects this number to rise to 312,000 by the end of the year.

Electricity prices are also surging in the US due to the demand of AI data centers, raising the cost of day-to-day life of millions of Americans. As a result, US representatives have put forward a bi-partisan Ratepayer Protection Act that would force AI companies and hyperscalers to pay for the energy they use, with additional charges to help fund the expansion of electricity infrastructure that has been placed under additional load by data centers.

Via CNBC

No room in your kitchen for a Ninja Slushi? We tested 3 blenders that make perfect slushies for one for a fraction of the price, and actually fit in your cupboard

The Ninja Slushi is one of my all-time favorite kitchen appliances, but it's simply too large for my kitchen. Thankfully there are personal blenders that are smaller, cost a lot less, and make perfect slushies for one in just a few seconds — and here I've picked three of the best that can tackle ice and other frozen ingredients with ease.

Some single-serve blenders struggle to tackle any ingredients tougher than an apple, but each of the models here will crush ice effortlessly despite their compact size. Once you're done, you can take your drink on the road, to work — or just to the back yard for sipping in the sunshine.

Slushies made this way won't be identical to those created with a Slushi machine, but they can come close. The Slushi works by taking liquid ingredients and freezing them while stirring to create small ice crystals, whereas blenders create slush by chopping up large pieces of ice. If you want an undiluted slushie without added water, try freezing ingredients like juice or soda in an ice-cube tray. Provided you add the recommended amount of liquid to your blender's cup (usually around 6oz / 170ml) you should get a very similar (and equally tasty) result.

Ninja BlendBOSS

Ninja BlendBOSS blender on kitchen counter with ingredients
Future
Ninja BlendBoss
Amanda Westberg
Ninja BlendBoss
Amanda Westberg
Ninja BlendBoss
Amanda Westberg
Ninja BlendBoss
Amanda Westberg
Ninja BlendBoss
Amanda Westberg

At 1,200 watts, the Ninja BlendBOSS has the most powerful motor of all the blenders in this list, and transforms ice and frozen fruit into slush with ease. It consists of a sturdy, unusually-shaped base (which reminds me of a UFO) and a Stanley-style cup, with a sip lid and straw that you can carry, or tuck into your car's cupholder.

It has three preset options (smoothie, ice crush, and blend) plus a pulse option so you can take control yourself. The preset programs will blend and pause in different patterns to ensure all the ingredients come into contact with the blades — and they're very effective. Our reviewer Karen Freeman reported that her smoothie with frozen berries "came out perfectly smooth [with] no chunks of blueberry skin or spinach" and the blender "turned ice into snow incredibly quickly and thoroughly" for iced lemonade. Your recipe needs to include at least 6oz / 175ml liquid along with the ice for proper blending.

Some single-serving blenders tend to jump across your kitchen counter when dialled up to full, but the BlendBOSS has a cleverly designed base with a circle of grippy silicone, plus suction cups to ensure it doesn't dance onto the floor when preparing iced drinks.

The only downside we found is that the lid of the chug cap sometimes fell down and bopped us on the nose mid-slurp, but that was only a very minor annoyance. This is otherwise a brilliant tool for making slushies and smoothies, and very reasonably priced too.

Read our full Ninja BlendBOSS review

Nutribullet Flip

Nutribullet Flip blender on kitchen counter with fruit
Future
Nutribullet Flip blender with extra lid, strap, and cleaning brush
Future
Measurements marked inside empty Nutribullet Flip blender
Future
Top-down view of Nutribullet Flip blender full of smoothie ingredients
Future
Nutribullet Flip blender containing fully blended smoothie
Future
Nutribullet Flip blender with two glasses of iced coffee
Future
Nutribullet Flip blender with USB-C charging cable plugged in
Future
Nutribullet Flip blending cap upside down, showing blades
Future

Unlike the two other blenders here, which comprise a plug-in base that you keep in the kitchen and a detachable cup to take with you, the Nutribullet Flip is fully portable and rechargeable so you can whip up drinks on the move (particularly handy if you're at the gym and want a fresh protein shake, for example). Just add your ingredients to the cup, screw on the lid, flip it upside down and press the button. Thirty seconds later, you can turn it upright again and start sipping. What could be easier?

I was a bit apprehensive about drinking from the part of the blender that contains the motor, but you're in no danger at all of cutting yourself; the blade assembly is well away from the drinking spout and the motor can't activate unless the cover on the drinking spout is fully closed.

The Flip handles ice with ease, and I used it to prepare some very nice iced coffee drinks during testing. Particularly large frozen strawberries sometimes required a second blending cycle to be fully pulverized (the Flip only has one program) but nothing I tested could withstand a minute in contact with its blades. When you're done, the insulated cup keeps your slush and shakes cold for hours. You'll need to add at least 8oz / 235ml liquid along with your ice.

Something I particularly like about the Flip is that its blades are at the widest point of the cup, which means everything falls down onto them rather than getting stuck on the sides. It's especially easy to clean as well; add water and a drop of dish soap, run a cycle, then rinse.

Read our full Nutribullet Flip review

Ninja Blast Max

Ninja Blast Max blender with smoothie ingredients on kitchen counter.
Future
Ninja Blast Max blender
Future
Ninja Blast Max blender
Future
Ninja Blast Max blender
Future
Ninja Blast Max blender
Future
Ninja Blast Max blender
Future
Ninja Blast Max blender
Future

I awarded the Ninja Blast Max a full five stars thanks to its ability to turn even the toughest ingredients into a silky smoothie or tasty slush. Ice and frozen fruit were transformed into a frosty treat in no time at all, and tough fibrous vegetables like kale were no match for its powerful motor and super-sharp blades.

The Blast Max has a 'crush' setting specifically designed for ice, which turns rock-solid strawberries and raspberries into slushies in less than a minute. Alternatively, add plenty of ice, a shot of espresso, and a good splash of milk for a delicious iced coffee. Provided your drink includes at least 6oz / 175ml liquid, the Blast Max will handle it with ease. "The resulting blended iced coffee looked as good as anything you might get from a coffee shop, with a nice layer of foam on top and no chunks of unblended ice crystals," I said.

The Blast Max has a travel cup that detaches from the charging base for sipping on the move, with measuring lines clearly marked on the side. Ninja suggests that you might need to give it a little shake during blending to loosen any ingredients stuck to the sides that might miss the blades, but during my tests I never found that necessary.

The Blast Max is the most affordable of these three blenders right now, and no less impressive than the other two. For me, the only drawback was that, unlike the Nutribullet Flip, the Blast Max doesn't have an insulated cup to keep slushies frosty when you're on the go.

Read our full Ninja Blast Max review

'The precision and quality of the print finish are exceptional': We love the beginner-friendly Anycubic Kobra S1 Combo 3D printer — and it's got a massive discount right now

We absolutely loved the Anycubic Kobra S1 Combo when we tested out this 3D printer. It's fast, user-friendly, and suitable for beginners, hobbyists, and even micro-business users.

I'm always on the look-out for unmissable 3D printer deals, so I was very happy to see the Anycubic Kobra S1 Combo is currently on sale for $430 (was $650) at Amazon.

Built around a high-speed CoreXY motion system, the Kobra S1 Combo reaches print speeds of up to 600mm/s without loss of accuracy, which is important when producing prototypes, home projects, or detailed models. In the UK, the Kobra S1 is now £400 (was £599)

Today's top 3D printer deal

This fully enclosed 3D printer offers fast 600mm/s CoreXY printing, built-in four-color support, active filament drying, automatic bed leveling, smart app control, and reliable performance for detailed, multi-color creations.

In the UK: now £400 (was £599)View Deal

In his rave review, our 3D printer expert Alastair said the Kobra S1 delivered "next-generation multi-filament printing at an outstanding price" and called it "a printer that you can't fail to be impressed with."

He added that the model "blends build quality, price, and absolute precision" and "when it comes to single-material printing, not only can you print with a wide variety of materials, but it's fast and the precision is hard to beat."

One of the features we liked most is the built-in active filament drying system. This helps prevent moisture-related problems such as bubbles and clogged nozzles. Keeping filament dry improves print quality and reliability, especially during long, multi-day jobs.

Beginners will appreciate one-click auto-leveling, vibration compensation, and flow rate calibration which work together to produce consistent results with minimal setup.

The fully enclosed design maintains stable temperatures for more demanding materials such as ABS.

The Kobra S1 Combo brings color printing within easy reach and supports four-color printing out of the box. Connecting two Ace Pro units expands that to eight colors while reducing filament waste via an optimized printing algorithm.

The Anycubic app and LAN connectivity allows you to monitor and control jobs remotely. Maintenance is simple thanks to a quick-swap nozzle system that lets you replace nozzles in seconds instead of dismantling the print head.

Having tested a wide range of machines, the Kobra S1 remains one of our favorite 3D printers thanks to its combination of speed, ease of use, and excellent print quality. As Alistair noted, "there's a lot to be impressed with here."

If you’ve been thinking about getting into 3D printing or upgrading your current setup, this is an excellent opportunity to pick up a highly capable multi-color 3D printer at a fraction of the usual price.

For other options, check out the best 3D printers we've tested.

Also consider

Anycubic's fast CoreXY 3D printer offers native four-color printing, expandable to 19 colors, 600mm/s print speeds, AI monitoring, automatic bed leveling, Wi-Fi connectivity, and a spacious 260 × 260 × 260mm build volume.

In the UK: now £280 (was £329)View Deal

This high-speed 3D printer offers native seven-color printing, expandable to 19 colors, automatic bed leveling, AI monitoring, Wi-Fi connectivity, a spacious 260 × 260 × 260mm build volume, and print speeds up to 600mm/s.

In the UK: now £500 (was £629)View Deal

'Exceptional performance for an extremely balanced price': GMKtec M6 Ultra is our number one mini PC for work and study — and it's $100 off at Amazon right now

I'm forever looking out for great mini PC deals and was pleased to see that Amazon has cut the price of the GMKtec M6 Ultra mini PC to $600 (was $700) ahead of the back-to-school season.

Ideal for students, professionals, creators, multitaskers, and even gamers, the M6 Ultra is powered by an AMD Ryzen 5 7640HS processor with six cores and 12 threads, reaching speeds of up to 5.0GHz and featuring integrated Radeon 760M graphics.

In his glowing review, our mini PC expert Alistair said the M6 Ultra offered "exceptional performance for an extremely balanced price." He went on to sum up the device, saying: "If you're looking for an exceptionally well-priced mini PC that offers plenty of upgradeability and is able to handle pretty much anything you throw at it, then the GMKtec M6 Ultra is a perfect option."

Today's top mini PC deal

This compact mini PC features an AMD Ryzen 5 7640HS processor, 32GB DDR5 RAM, a 1TB SSD, triple 4K display support, USB4, dual 2.5G Ethernet, Wi-Fi 6E, and Windows 11 Pro pre-installed.View Deal

The M6 Ultra comes with 16GB DDR5 RAM and a fast 1TB PCIe SSD. There's also room to grow, with support for up to 128GB of memory and dual M.2 SSD slots offering up to 8TB of storage.

Dual 2.5Gb Ethernet ports, WiFi 6E, Bluetooth 5.2, USB4, HDMI 2.0, DisplayPort, and multiple USB ports make it easy to build a flexible workstation or connect loads of peripherals.

It can drive up to three displays, and USB4 output means it is capable of up to 8K at 60Hz — making it a great fit for home offices, students, creative workflows, and anyone who likes spreading work across multiple screens.

Despite its tiny size, the M6 Ultra includes dual-fan cooling to help maintain consistent performance during longer, more intensive workloads.

With a welcome $100 discount, this is easily one of the top mini PC deals available right now. If you're after a compact desktop with modern connectivity and plenty of upgrade potential, this Amazon deal is not to be missed.

For more options, take a look at our roundups of the best mini PCs you can buy right now.

'Class-leading 4K camera': The impressive DJI Osmo Pocket 3 Creator Combo delivers 'amazing video quality and beautiful slow-motion scenes' — and content creators will love the Amazon discount too

Amazon has slashed the price of the DJI Osmo Pocket 3 Creator Combo to $549 (was $629), saving you $80 on one of the most capable pocket-sized 4K cameras for content creators and travel vloggers.

The Osmo Pocket 3's compact size means it's easy to slip into a pocket, hence the name, or small bag, yet it packs features normally found on much larger cameras. If you regularly create videos for YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, or travel content, this is a terrific opportunity to save big on a premium model.

In his glowing review, our expert Paul called the DJI Osmo Pocket 3 "an impressive camera that delivers amazing video quality and beautiful slow-motion scenes. The all-new 1-inch sensor boosts the image quality in low light, while the portrait filming mode enables on-board filming in this orientation, and the timelapse and motion lapse features further expand the functionality."

Today's top DJI creator camera deal

The DJI Osmo Pocket 3 Creator Combo captures stunning 4K/120fps video with smooth 3-axis stabilization, intelligent face and object tracking, plus an included microphone for clear, professional-quality audio.View Deal

A 1-inch CMOS sensor captures detailed footage in up to 4K at 120fps, giving you plenty of flexibility for smooth slow-motion clips and crisp everyday recording.

It also performs well in challenging lighting, ensuring night scenes and sunsets don't lose any important detail or clarity.

Filming while walking or moving around is where the Osmo Pocket 3 really shines thanks to the 3-axis mechanical stabilization system that keeps footage impressively stable when exploring a city, hiking a trail, or following fast-moving subjects.

The rotating 2-inch touchscreen makes switching between horizontal and vertical recording quick and simple, and lets you create content for different platforms. ActiveTrack 6.0 keeps faces and moving subjects centered, making solo filming less of a challenge.

Fast autofocus helps lock onto subjects quickly, keeping footage sharp. Support for D-Log M and 10-bit color gives creators far greater flexibility during editing, with up to one billion colors available.

Stereo recording captures clear sound alongside your footage. The Creator Combo includes a microphone, making it even easier to record clean dialogue without the need to splash out on extra accessories.

While at $549, this isn't what I'd term a budget purchase, it is one of the best prices I've seen for the Creator Combo, and it's highly recommended.

Also consider: More DJI camera combo deals

The DJI Osmo Action 5 Pro Essential Combo records stunning 4K video at 120fps, featuring a 1/1.3-inch sensor, advanced stabilization, subject tracking, dual OLED touchscreens, 47GB built-in storage, and a waterproof design for adventures.View Deal

This camera can record immersive 8K 360° video with a 1-inch imaging sensor, plus 4K at 120fps and a wide 170° Boost mode. Three batteries provide extended shooting time for longer adventures and creative projects.View Deal

This model can record crisp 4K video at up to 240fps with a 1-inch CMOS sensor, smooth 3-axis stabilization, 2x lossless zoom, 107GB built-in storage, and a rotatable 2-inch touchscreen for flexible shooting.View Deal

Ransomware negotiator jailed for 70 months after he just helped infect victims with malware

  • Ransomware negotiator Angelo Martino will serve 70 months in prison for secretly aiding BlackCat (ALPHV) attackers
  • Martino forfeits crypto proceeds, houses, cars, and boats, and must pay 10% of future salary after release
  • Martino was the third negotiator exposed; his co‑conspirators Ryan Clifford Goldberg and Kevin Tyler Martin previously received four‑year sentences for similar insider collusion

A ransomware negotiator who worked with the attackers behind his clients’ backs has been sentenced to almost six years in prison.

A sentencing memorandum published by the US government said 41-year-old Angelo Martino will spend the next 70 months in prison, and will also lose all of the cryptocurrency the attackers paid him for sharing insider information, as well as all of the houses, cars, and boats, he had bought with this money.

He will also have to pay 10% of any salary he earns after his release.

Asking for a shorter sentence

In November 2025, it was reported that three men who worked as ransomware negotiators to help victims minimize the damages of these attacks were actually agents for the dreaded BlackCat (ALPHV) ransomware collective.

Over the next months, it was reported that the men - Ryan Clifford Goldberg of Georgia, Kevin Tyler Martin of Texas, and Angelo Martino of Land O'Lakes, Florida, not only did not help their victims, but actually infected some of them with ransomware, and later shared valuable insider information with other BlackCat affiliates, in order to maximize the payment.

Their victims included at least five companies: a medical device company from Florida (demanded $10 million in ransom, ended up paying around $1.2 million), a pharmaceutical company from Maryland, a doctor’s office and an engineering company in California, and a drone manufacturer based in Virginia.

While all three faced serious prison time (between 10 and 20 years), they received far less. Martin and Goldberg were each sentenced to four years in prison in April 2026, while Martino will spend five years and ten months behind bars. Martino pleaded guilty and asked for a 24-month sentence, stating he “provided substantial assistance that contributed to the indictment and conviction of two co-defendants.” It didn’t work.

Via Ars Technica

Best SSD deals 2026 — big savings on Samsung, SanDisk, WD and more

My PC lets me handle many activities from watching movies to playing games, editing videos, and of course writing detailed product reviews for my audience. This intensive use requires having more storage space than usual and the ability to transfer files quickly.

To get extra storage, I previously opted for a hard disk drive (HDD) but later switched to a solid-state drive (SSD) for the extra speed, durability, and reduced battery consumption. Although the cost is generally higher than an HDD, an SSD has been a worthwhile investment for my productivity. It’s one of the few purchases where I can confidently speak of having no regrets.

Here, I’m bringing you the best SSD deals you can take advantage of and obtain better storage for the lowest possible price. These SSDs are discounted significantly from their original price, presenting a time-limited opportunity you shouldn’t miss.

Best SSD deals: Quick links

Best SSD deals: Internal solid-state drives

Offering up to 14,700MB/s read speeds, this PCIe 5.0 NVMe SSD pairs 2TB of storage with hardware encryption, advanced thermal control, Magician Software support, and excellent performance for creative workloads, AI applications, and demanding multitasking. You can read our complete review to learn more.View Deal

The Samsung 990 Pro is one of the best SSDs around, especially at an unbeatable price like this. In our review, we hailed it as "an absolutely stellar M.2 SSD for both professional users and gamers." View Deal

The WD_Black SN7100 PCIe 4.0 NVMe SSD offers up to 7,000MB/s / 6,700MB/s read/write speeds. Capacities range from 1TB to 4TB. View Deal

Crucial's P310 NVMe SSD delivers blazing read speeds up to 7,100MB/s, ensuring faster boot times, game loading, and file transfers. Its compact, heatsink-free design suits desktops and laptops, offering reliable, high-capacity storage with efficient everyday performance.View Deal

KingSpec's SSD offers up to 4,000/3,700 MB/s read/write speeds, 3D NAND flash, reliable thermal management, and solid performance for gaming, content creation, laptops, desktops, and PS5 upgrades.View Deal

This internal SSD from WD_Black is a perennial favorite of ours. It reaches up to 7,300 MB/s read speeds and up to 6,300 MB/s write speeds. Capacities range from 1TB to 4TB. View Deal

One of our top SSDs is currently discounted, with the Samsung 990 Evo Plus dropping in price. It features read/write speeds of up to 7,250MB/s / 6,300MB/s respectively.View Deal

Best SSD deals: Portable & external drives

Supports read and write speeds up to 2000MB/s using USB 3.2 Gen2, with IP65 water and dust resistance and capacities reaching up to 4TB. Our review highlighted its excellent performance and durability. View Deal

Transfer, edit, and back up files at speeds of up to 2,000MB/s with this rugged portable SSD. Our in-depth review of the Samsung T9 SSD notes its 1TB of storage, hardware encryption, advanced thermal management, and broad compatibility with PCs, Macs, cameras, consoles, and smartphones. View Deal

Store, transfer, and back up files quickly with this compact portable SSD, offering 1TB of storage, read speeds up to 1,050MB/s, USB 3.2 Gen 2 connectivity, and broad compatibility for work, study, gaming, and travel.View Deal

Offers read and write speeds up to 2000MB/s through USB-C connectivity, with password protection, AES 256-bit encryption, and capacities available up to 4TB. Our review of the SanDisk Extreme PRO notes its advanced encryption and superb performance.View Deal

This ultracompact 2TB portable SSD offers transfer speeds of up to 1,050MB/s and supports Apple ProRes 4K 60fps recording. With IP65-rated dust and water resistance, our review found it a great choice for creators.View Deal

I tested the first Freely 4K streaming box that instantly upgrades your TV with tons of live channels with no monthly subscription or aerial, plus access to the key streaming services — here’s why it impressed me

Manhattan Aero review

The Manhattan Aero might just be the streaming device you’re looking for. Especially if you want live TV without an aerial, as well as must-have streaming apps, 4K playback and user-friendly software.

The Manhattan Aero is a small streaming box packed with just about all of the essentials for UK viewers — more than 450 channels via Freely, as well as Netflix, Prime Video and all that good stuff. All you need is a Wi-Fi connection and a TV, and you're good to go. But is it actually worth buying? Here are my thoughts after a few days testing it out for myself.

Let me start by saying that the initial setup process for the Aero is extremely simple and speedy. Just hook the device up to your TVs HDMI port, plug it into the power, and you’ll be able to get started. From here, I followed some basic setup instructions, connected the box up to my network, and landed right on the home page.

Navigating through various menus is also incredibly easy with the included remote, which — in spite of a fairly plasticky and basic build — is responsive and effective in use. It comes with all the expected buttons, as well as shortcuts to certain streaming apps, and a voice control option too.

Voice controls are very intuitive on TiVo OS (which is what the Aero uses), and if you want some inspiration for what to watch, it’s a great tool. For instance, I tried saying: ‘show me films about cats’ and got an accurate selection of feline-related flicks.

Manhattan Aero with remote balanced on top

(Image credit: Future)

Let’s loop back to the Manhattan Aero’s OS, though, and discuss TiVo for a minute. I’ve used this before on TVs like the Bush 43UT24SB, and I’m a fan. It’s pretty similar to a lot of the competition, and you can quickly find whatever channel or app you need without a hitch. Loading varying apps and channels is quick, and you can easily customize what apps you want to see on the homepage in the settings menu.

Speaking of apps, it’s worth noting that some of the heavy hitters are actually missing on TiVo. For instance, Apple TV+, Paramount+, NOW TV and Sky Go are all absent. These apps are available via devices like the Apple TV 4K set-top box, though.

Anyway, you may be wondering by now: how does the Manhattan Aero perform? Pretty well, actually — although you’ll need broadband speeds of at least 10Mbps to enjoy live TV and streaming at their best (Ethernet connectivity is available if needed). When watching broadcast TV, the Aero did a great job with all kinds of content. For instance, I watched a bit of Wimbledon, and the vivid green of the court jumped out, while finer details on players’ clothing were easy to make out.

News and the usual daytime TV channels also looked just about as good as on my Sky Glass Gen 2 TV, which uses Wi-Fi to show its channels too, rather than a dish or aerial. It’s also worth noting that the Aero supports HLG HDR, as used by BBC iPlayer.

With streaming apps, the Aero remains a strong performer, but there are a couple of sacrifices you’ll have to make. Namely, there’s no Dolby Vision support — no problem for Samsung TV owners, but something I would’ve liked to have seen, since pretty much all other TV brands use it.

There is, however, HDR10+ (and HDR10) compatibility, which is used on services such as Netflix and Prime Video — and the Aero supports AV1 natively for HDR10+ content, which is necessary for Netflix to work in this format. When watching Kung Fu Panda 4 in HDR10+, I thought it looked fantastic — colours looked punchy and accurate, textures were well-defined and sharp, and contrast was solid too.

I did experience a bit of judder while watching the movie, and motion appeared to be choppy at first. But after messing around with my TVs settings and activating the Aero’s Auto Frame Rate option, I was able to solve this, and experience the sort of quality I’d typically expect from Netflix and other streaming apps when built into the set.

When it comes to audio, there’s basic Dolby Audio support, and you can also enjoy Dolby Atmos content if you have a compatible soundbar or speaker system or similar connected up to your TV. You can also use one of the box’s USB-C ports to play stored media files, which is a welcome inclusion and not you'll find on much of the competition.

Reverse side of the Manhattan Aero

(Image credit: Future)

One question I’ve seen a few people ask about the Aero, is whether it can record TV programs — like you’d be able to do with a Sky Q box, for instance. The answer to this one is no — but that’s not a strike against Manhattan’s streaming box. And that comes down to one key thing: Freely is delivered as an internet stream rather than a broadcast signal, and broadcasters don’t allow such content to be recorded. It’s still worth bearing in mind, however, if recording is a must for you.

Before we wrap up, there are a few other things worth noting. There’s CEC volume control on offer here, which enables you to control the volume of your connected display and audio devices (like soundbars) using the Aero's remote with any extra setup needed, something that is pretty practical.

You can also connect Bluetooth devices, such as headphones, to the Aero, which is great if you don’t want to distract someone else while watching your favorite shows, if your TV doesn't support this option.

You can even connect wireless game controllers and play a few mobile style games — a feature I didn’t expect to see. In fact, Blacknut Cloud Gaming is arriving to the Aero shortly, giving gamers more options. Google Cast is also available if you want to beam content across from your phone.

So, is the Manhattan Aero worth the money? At £89.99, I think it is. There are cheaper options out there, such as the Roku streaming sticks, which can also plug into your TV’s USB port for a more discreet look, but these don’t offer Freely — the big selling point of the Aero.

Alongside its intuitive TiVo platform with handy voice commands, solid array of apps, and impressive picture quality, I’d argue that the Aero offers plenty for the price you pay, and if you have a TV devoid of smart apps or want access to loads of channels without the hassle of an aerial or dish, it’s a very practical device.

Manhattan Aero balanced upright

(Image credit: Future)

Manhattan Aero review: price & release date

  • Released in February 2026
  • Priced at £89.99

The Manhattan Aero released in February 2026 and is available with a wide range of UK retailers. However, there’s no stock available at Amazon right now — this may change in the future, though, so we’ll update this article accordingly if we see an increase in availability.

The streamer is priced fairly affordably, coming in at £89.99 — that's much less than the Apple TV 4K, though is more than the likes of the Amazon Fire TV Stick 4K Max.

Should I buy the Manhattan Aero?

Attribute

Notes

Score

Features

Intuitive software and voice control, good connectivity options, Freely and smart apps with 4K picture quality — but some apps are missing.

4 / 5

Performance

Very good picture quality with HDR10+ and HLG support, and Dolby Atmos passthrough support for immersive audio. No Dolby Vision is a shame, though.

4.5 / 5

Design

Fairly compact and sleek, remote not the best quality but very responsive.

4 / 5

Value

Not the cheapest, but the inclusion of Freely and solid app line-up helps it earn its price.

4 / 5

Buy it if…

You want access to loads of TV and movies without subscriptions
Thanks to its inclusion of Freely, the Manhattan Aero allows you to watch loads of TV and movies without needing to subscribe to any kind of subscription service. Sure, if you have subscriptions, you can enjoy the likes of Netflix, HBO Max, and Prime Video, but you’ll have endless content at your disposal regardless.

You’re using an old TV with limited smart features
If you’re still using an old TV that’s got limited smart features, then the Manhattan Aero is a great solution. You get more than 450 live TV channels, YouTube, most of the major streaming apps, and an intuitive TiVo interface at a pretty modest price, all things considered.

Don’t buy it if…

You want Dolby Vision
Although HDR10+, HDR10, and HLG are supported on the Manhattan Aero, it does omit Dolby Vision, which might be a dealbreaker for some users.

You want the cheapest option around
I think that the Manhattan Aero earns its price when all is said and done, but it’s not the cheapest streaming option on the market. Amazon and Roku streaming sticks provide live TV and an expansive set of apps for a fair bit less — check out my recommendation below for more.

Manhattan Aero review: also consider

Roku 4K Streaming Stick Plus
After a cheaper option? Then this Roku streaming stick could be perfect for you. It offers live TV, a great array of streaming apps, and a compact form factor. It lacks the intuitiveness and seamlessness you get with Freely (featured on the Aero), but it’s still a fantastic budget-friendly option. Read our full Roku 4K Streaming Stick Plus review.

Sky Glass Air
The Sky Glass Air is a cheap TV that has all the apps you need, and it provides live TV over Wi-Fi. With solid 4K picture quality, a slim build, and responsive UI, it’s a very solid budget TV that has everything you need built-in. You can even pay for it monthly, as you would with a phone contract, with flexible payment plans available. Read my full Sky Glass Air review.

How I tested the Manhattan Aero

Manhattan Aero with remote and cables

(Image credit: Future)
  • Connected to my Hisense 4K mini-LED TV
  • I watched broadcast TV as well as content on streaming services
  • Used across multiple days at home in everyday life

I spent a few days testing the Manhattan Aero streamer, testing it out at home to enjoy live TV and content via my usual streaming apps. I had it hooked up to a HDMI port on my Hisense U7K TV, which is a 4K mini-LED set.

During the testing period, I made sure to cycle through various channels when watching broadcast TV in order to assess performance for sports, news, movies, and more. However, I also dipped into apps like Netflix, where I watched content in 4K HDR10+, as well as Disney+ and YouTube.

More generally, I’ve spent years testing all kinds of gadgets here at TechRadar, including everything from Dolby Atmos soundbars like the JBL Bar 1300MK2 through to TVs like the Sky Glass Gen 2. I was also familiar with the TiVo interface before commencing this review, having used it extensively while testing the Bush 43UT24SB.

Apple vs OpenAI lawsuit: 8 bombshell accusations and how the legal war might change your next iPhone

Having spent decades covering Apple, I understand and respect its efforts to maintain a shroud of secrecy over its product development. Reading this line in the blockbuster Apple vs OpenAI lawsuit, I can hear the voices of countless Apple execs and PR people who, rightly or not, feel deeply wronged by what it considered a trusted partner: "OpenAI’s nascent hardware business now rests on the shakiest of foundations, rotten to its core by its illegal reliance on misappropriated trade secrets."

Late last week, Apple filed a lawsuit against OpenAI and, more specifically, a pair of key employees who, over the last two years, left Apple to join OpenAI's hardware business. The massive filing, which calls for a jury trial, accuses the pair of corporate espionage, essentially stealing a raft of trade secrets to help bolster OpenAI's still unrealized efforts to build AI hardware (it's currently working with Jony Ive to build what may eventually become a wearable device).

I've spent some time poring over the documents and, to be honest, the accusations are stunning and, if true, seem unaccountably brazen for people who spent years with the Cupertino tech giant.

From the inside out

Tang Yew Tan, who currently serves as OpenAI's Chief Hardware Officer, was at Apple for a quarter of a century and, according to his own LinkedIn profile, "Oversaw the design and development of iPhone and Apple Watch Product Design, Interconnects Design, Acoustics and Materials technology centers."

Chang Liu (whose LinkedIn handle is "changliu-apple") spent almost a decade as an iPhone Electrical Engineer.

Apple's NDA's that they hand to journalists like me are almost legendary (the first time I signed one, I swear my hands were shaking). I can only imagine the intensity of the Intellectual property agreements (IPAs) Apple says it asks employees to sign from time to time. The language is probably appropriately terrifying; it's hard to conceive of how Liu and Tan could ignore them, and yet, according to the lawsuit, that's exactly what the pair did both during their waning days at Apple and in the time after when they joined OpenAI.

OpenAI's only public response so far has been from its Director of Strategic Communications Drew Pusateri, who said on X, "We have no interest in other companies' trade secrets. We remain focused on building innovative technology that empowers people everywhere."

The company's co-founder and CEO Sam Altman also only obliquely referenced it on X when someone accused him of being afraid of Apple. He wrote, "I am not afraid of Apple, but I have tremendous respect for them. s-tier company." ("S-Tier" basically means "elite").

i am not afraid of apple, but i have tremendous respect for them. s-tier company.July 11, 2026

I won't ask you to read the full document and instead have cherry-picked the most eye-watering accusations:

A potentially sneaky exit

When Liu left Apple, he allegedly took his work laptop with him. If you've ever worked in a corporate environment, you know this is a no-no. Most companies will pursue you to the ends of the earth to retrieve that hardware and whatever corporate access and secrets it contains.

It gets worse

Lui apparently didn't shelve the old (we assume) MacBook. Instead, he, according to Apple, exploited a network vulnerability and used the system to access Apple network folders. If true, that's an incredibly bold move. Surely Liu would've known how Apple's internal forensics could discover what was accessed by whom and when.

Boasting

While allegedly downloading Apple's proprietary files (details on unreleased products, presentations, tech data, specs, and more), Liu may have messaged someone through the Apple-issued laptop, celebrating how he was pulling the wool over Apple's eyes with "LOL" and "so funny". Again, was Liu the most careless corporate spy ever? Who would boast when they know Apple would eventually stumble on these details?

Coaching recruits

Apple claims Liu was actually recruiting Apple employees and coaching them on how to gather data before leaving the company. He may have told them how to email themselves files before exiting Apple.

Now, I understand how some of your, say, personal data, can end up intertwined with corporate data and you may want to hold onto some of that. On the other hand, if you didn't keep a firm line between work and personal files, that's on you.

A real betrayal

Tang Yew Tan spent 25 years with Apple, and what he's being accused of has surely enraged and disappointed Apple. "Mr. Tan has been methodically using Apple’s confidential information to benefit OpenAI," claims Apple.

Like Lui and other Apple recruits, Tan may have emailed himself proprietary Apple info.

Using Apple codenames

Apple claims Tan is asking Apple recruits about upcoming projects using code names only Apple employees would know.

We have their OK

This one is kind of mind-blowing. Apple alleges that OpenAI has used Apple info to get a partner to apply a "specific trade-secret metal finishing technique," because they convinced the partner Apple was OK with them doing so.

Carry out

This last one might be the boldest move of all. Apple alleges that OpenAI instructed potential Apple recruits to bring everything from CAD files to actual prototypes or parts to OpenAI interviews.

That's a particularly stunning accusation, and again, just seems so reckless. What kind of corporate spies operate with this level of impunity?

Naturally, OpenAI will, at some point, respond properly to this lawsuit, perhaps with one of their own. Apple could also eventually settle this suit out of court. They've done so before with similar cases, though I don't think they were quite at this level.

Can they come back from this?

Whatever happens with this case, it's hard to imagine the Apple / OpenAI relationship, which is already somewhat fraught, survives.

For now, you can explicitly choose to use ChatGPT to handle requests in the new Siri in iOS 27 dev beta, and it's a key part of Image Playground and Visual Intelligence. Apple could pull those options and lean harder into its Google Gemini foundation Model partnership while this case works its way through the courts.

I don't think that will materially impact your iPhone experience, but the loss of direct access to those hundreds of millions of iPhone customers could hurt OpenAI, a company that, as Apple acknowledges, is trying to build its own hardware business.

Plus, if OpenAI loses, it could see a lot of the in-house hardware innovation potentially tied to Apple's work blocked from ever reaching consumer hands.

And, obviously, it'll be hard for the partnership to come back from this passage in the suit:

"Apple lacks visibility into what’s been happening behind closed doors at OpenAI, where such misconduct is normalized and exemplified by leadership. This much is clear, however: at every level, from members of its Technical Staff to its Chief Hardware Officer, and in coordination with business partners, OpenAI has been stealing Apple’s trade secrets and confidential information."

Experts say they were able to create a rogue agent in Google’s AI platform with just a single edit permission

  • Varonis uncovered CVE‑level flaws in Google Cloud Dialogflow CX, where malicious Code Blocks in Playbooks could hijack agents, exfiltrate chat logs, and steal credentials
  • Shared Cloud Run environment with excess privileges meant one compromised agent could control all others in a project, with attacks virtually undetectable in Cloud Logging
  • Google patched the issue between April–June 2026; researchers advise reviewing audit logs, checking anomalous errors, and manually inspecting Code Blocks for unauthorized code

Researchers recently found a critical vulnerability in Google Cloud’s Dialogflow CX, allowing threat actors to take over different AI agents, access chat logs, and even exfiltrate sensitive data such as login credentials.

Dialogflow CX is Google Cloud’s conversational AI platform used to build many voice and text chatbots. This platform lets developers add Code Blocks, which are custom Python snippets, into conversation “Playbooks”. These blocks all execute inside a single Google-managed Cloud Run service, shared across all agents in a Google Cloud Platform project.

Security researchers Varonis said they discovered a critical vulnerability in which the theoretical attacker didn’t need broad admin access. With permission to edit a single chatbot’s settings, they would be able to plant malicious code relatively easily. The Cloud Run environment had no code restrictions, Varonis further explained, but had a writable filesystem, public internet egress, and ran with excess privileges. Key files could have been overwritten entirely, it was added.

Google issues a fix

As a result, the attacker had access to full conversation history and session state. They could call internal functions and fake LLM-generated replies which, they claim, could lead to phishing and credential theft.

Since the environment is shared per-project, one compromised agent could take over every other agent in that project, and since Cloud Logging doesn’t capture the file overwrite or injected logic, the attack would be "virtually undetectable."

Varonis reported the issue to Google in November 2025, and the latter came back with an initial fix in April 2026. However, the issue had not been fully resolved until June 2026.

In the report, the researchers said there is no evidence of in-the-wild exploitation attempts and advises customers to review DATA_WRITE audit logs for Playbooks.UpdatePlaybook calls, check for anomalous Sessions.DetectIntent errors, and manually inspect each agent's Code Blocks for leftover unauthorized code.

New Steam Machine red light warning isn't anything to worry about — an overzealous overheating warning is reportedly due to a BIOS bug

  • There's a new red light issue with the Steam Machine
  • This time a solid red light is being displayed which indicates the device is running hot
  • That isn't necessarily the case, and in fact the Steam Machine's temperatures can be normal, and a bug in the BIOS can cause the light to come on

If you're an early adopter who's been worrying about a red light being displayed by your Steam Machine while gaming, then there's not necessarily anything to panic about, as apparently this temperature warning light is being mistakenly triggered.

VideoCardz noticed a thread on Reddit where the original poster shares correspondence from Valve's support team about what's happening in terms of the red light coming on when the temperature is nowhere near the intended warning threshold.

As per Valve's FAQ on the Steam Machine's light bar, the red light comes on solidly (across the whole bar) when the device is deemed to be overheating, meaning the CPU temperature is over 95C or the GPU is over 90C (or indeed both).

The Redditor noticed that the red light was on when their Steam Machine was at temperatures of 75C and 81C for the GPU and CPU respectively, neither of which should have caused the warning light to appear.

As the message from Valve explains, there is a "known issue with the current BIOS" that means the red light comes on "much earlier" than it should.

The problem is entirely related to the temperature threshold for the light, and the Steam Machine is not overheating in any way in these cases, it should be noted.

The message from Valve informs us that a BIOS update will be coming to fix the problem soon. In fact, that update will increase the threshold to 100C for both the CPU and GPU, which is the point at which the Steam Machine will throttle the components to ensure they don't get any hotter.

In case you were wondering, if either the CPU or GPU does get any hotter than 100C, the device will then shut down to protect itself from any potential damage.

Analysis: false alarm

The Steam Machine next to a fish bowl

(Image credit: Valve)

What this means is that if you're seeing the red warning light a fair bit, it's likely a symptom of this overkeen BIOS which is turning on the light way earlier than it should be. Odds are that your CPU and GPU are running cool enough, and you can check this using the Steam performance monitor or a third-party tool as the Redditor did.

In any case, even if you do see the red light and it's correctly indicating temperatures at Valve's threshold levels, this isn't going to damage the Steam Machine – it just means the components will be throttled back to run slower to prevent any such damage. If that doesn't work, and the component temps aren't brought back under control, as noted the PC will turn itself off to avoid any potential GPU or CPU-frying scenarios.

It's not a pleasant thought that your Steam Machine is throttling and not running as fast as it should, though, if this happens – but based on this (and other) reports of this incident, that isn't the case, and the only error is the light showing when it shouldn't. There's no actual overheating, throttling, or anything else going on under the hood.

If you're worried that Valve's new temperatures for throttling and the warning light seem high at 100C, this is in line with what's to be expected from AMD laptop parts (which are what's used for the Steam Machine's CPU and GPU).

For now, all those who have bought one of Valve's gaming PCs can do is wait until the next BIOS update which should hopefully fix this problem. It's also worth noting that the 'Red Line of Death' is a completely separate issue, and we've had some troubleshooting advice on that knottier problem since it was first highlighted.

A superb open world racing game is coming to Nintendo Switch 2, finally giving us a proper Forza Horizon alternative

  • Ubisoft has revealed that The Crew Motorfest is coming to Nintendo Switch 2
  • The port will release on October 8, 2026
  • A physical edition is planned in addition to the digital version

With all eyes on the recently released Assassin's Creed Black Flag Resynced, there's a strong chance that one of Ubisoft's most interesting announcements has passed you by. Last week, the company quietly confirmed that The Crew Motorfest is coming to Nintendo Switch 2.

Under the Radar

Under the Radar is our way of highlighting great games that might have passed you by. Through a regular mix of news stories and features, we'll cover great experiences that we feel haven't found the audience they deserve. Read the full series here.

In my eyes, this is pretty excellent news as the Switch 2 has been in serious need of some more quality racing games.

Sure, you have the excellent Mario Kart World (not to mention Kirby Air Riders), but if you want something a bit more realistic, your only real option so far has been Grid Legends: Definitive Edition, which focuses solely on track racing.

The Crew Motorfest is a proper AAA open-world experience that lets you drive anywhere in hundreds of officially licensed cars, plus a handful of planes and boats when you want to spice things up.

It's set in a massive recreation of Hawaii, with loads of real-world towns and landmarks represented, in the midst of hosting a huge international car festival. Yes, it's a very similar premise to the Forza Horizon games — but is that really such a bad thing?

It's a proven formula and, with no word of a Forza Horizon 6 Nintendo Switch 2 port yet, I think The Crew Motorfest will fill a very significant niche.

The port is set to arrive on October 8, with a physical retail version planned alongside a digital release.

Moana's live action remake failed to make a splash at the box office as movie fans call it a 'lifeless carbon copy'

  • Moana had a disappointing weekend at the box office, only making $95 million from its huge $250 million budget
  • The live action remake currently sits at 33% on Rotten Tomatoes
  • Fans have criticized Moana for being an exact replica of the beloved animated movie

Moana set sail for theaters recently, but its opening weekend was a poor performance for one of July's biggest new movies.

The original Moana movie was a huge success for Disney, bringing in $687.2 million at the global box office. But based on the opening weekend, it doesn't feel like the 2026 live action remake will be following in its footsteps.

At the time of writing, the new Moana has only made $95 million on its huge $250 million budget, making it one of Disney's poorest performing movies.

It has also received a disappointing Rotten Tomatoes score of 33%, with its critics consensus saying: "The sea calls to no one in this underwhelming new version of Moana, an endeavor that solidifies its animated predecessor as the superior adventure."

Moana has been branded 'lifeless' by viewers

Rachel Zegler's Snow White holding up her right hand in her self-titled live-action movie adaptation

Rachel Zegler's Snow White movie was also panned by the critics. (Image credit: Walt Disney Studios)

Many fans of the original Moana movie have expressed their disappointment, describing the new live action version as being flat and a "carbon copy" of the original, per this scathing review by Associated Press.

Fans on X have also had a lot to say, with some wonder what the point in making a live action movie for Moana was. There's been plenty of backlash, making it a disappointing entry into Disney's library.

The original Moana is incredible. I have it on Blu-ray.This live-action remake (which is also mostly animated) makes no sense to me, not from an artistic reasoning, nor from a consumer standpoint.I mean, money is the ultimate motivation I suppose, but who wants a lesser… https://t.co/UtmsmHm2p7July 12, 2026

Another X user commented on how their main issue was the lack of quality, noting that nothing about the Moana live action was better than the original. They also cited The Lion King and Aladdin as having "new elements that justified their existence", but claimed that Moana did not have this.

My main issue with Disney Live-Action remakes isnt how lazy they are but how much the quality overall has dipped. Like at least with Lion King and Aladdin, they're technical marvels with new elements that justified their existence, what does Moana have that's better the original? https://t.co/8nAg33HGOFJuly 12, 2026

Moana is the first time theyve done a live action remake of a movie *I* love and it makes me so depressed why is it so lifelessJuly 2, 2026

Finally, another user pointed out that they'd rather watch the Snow White remake over Moana. Snow White also underperformed at the box office, but has a slightly higher Rotten Tomatoes score of 39%.

I wouldn't go so far as to say anyone owes the SNOW WHITE remake an apology but I would 100% watch it again over ever looking at MOANA '26 a second time. A truly dispiriting experience, flat and lifeless. Better than that LION KING movie though.July 8, 2026

If you want to see for yourself, Moana is now playing in theaters globally. But judging by initial reports, you might want to head to Disney+ to check out the original, and it's admittedly very good sequel, Moana 2.

The FCC is going after third-party companies that it suspects are sneaking rebranded DJI drones and cameras into the US

  • The FCC is chasing suspected DJI front companies
  • Multiple rebranded DJI-like devices are on sale in the US
  • New DJI products were banned in the US last year

Since last December, new DJI devices have been banned in the US, because the drone and camera maker is on the Covered List — a list of foreign manufacturers deemed to fall short of the security and safety standards put in place by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC).

However, the FCC thinks that DJI is sneaking products into the United States through front companies with different branding, and it's now taking action: as The Verge reports, eight of these companies have now been hit by $25,000 fines, with further investigations from the authorities pending.

The companies in question are Cogito Tech, Fikaxo Technology, Lyno Dynamics, Skyhigh, Spatial Hover, SZ Knowact Robot, WaveGo Tech, and Xtra Technology. You can check out the range of Cogito Tech drones on its website here, and decide for yourself how much they do or don't resemble DJI's offerings.

Xtra Technology also has a website showing off its vlogging cameras: as noted by The Verge, the company is promoting an Xtra Muse 2 Pro camera with the tagline "from Pocket to Pro", which bears more than a passing resemblance to the DJI Osmo Pocket 4P.

Cracking down

DJI Osmo Pocket 4P vlogging camera in a person's hand in a city street, screen rotated horizontal

The DJI Osmo Pocket 4P (Image credit: Tim Coleman)

These companies have so far failed to respond to questions from the FCC, and it seems the regulatory body is now ramping up its efforts to get some answers. Some of the test labs that these devices are passing through are being targeted as well.

The Verge also reports that gadgets previously approved for sale before the ban took effect have now disappeared from the FCC website — gadgets including the DJI Osmo Pocket 4 Pro. However, there's no indication that DJI products that have already been sold in the US are going to stop working or be recalled.

In order for any electronic device using radio frequencies to be sold in the US, from phones to drones, it has to be approved by the FCC — which is why we get so many detailed hardware leaks from FCC filings. Any company on the Covered List isn't going to get that approval, essentially meaning their products are banned.

While DJI has been vocal in calling its ban unfair, it hasn't commented on the claims around these alleged front companies so far — and it appears that the companies themselves aren't being at all communicative either. We've reached out to DJI for comment on the report, and will update this story if we hear back.

Amazon launches a big Fire TV sale — streaming sticks, TVs, and soundbars from $19.99

Amazon's line-up of Fire TV streaming sticks, televisions, and soundbars is one of the best options out there when it comes to convenience and affordability. Another plus is that they are regularly on sale. And that's the case right now, with several devices reduced by up to 45%, so I've picked out the 8 best deals.

Browse all of today's best deals at Amazon

I've stuck with a relatively old Fire TV Stick for a few years now, so it is tempting to upgrade to one of these newer models while they're reduced to gain the benefits of better performance, a more reliable Wi-Fi connection, and improved video and audio quality.

Of course, I would normally suggest waiting for Amazon Prime Day if you're a Prime member and thinking of buying one of these — and that advice still stands, as that's when you can pay the lowest prices. However, as Prime Day was just last month, it'll be a while until similar discounts are back, and these prices aren't too far off in most cases. Best of all, you don't need to be a Prime member, either.

Today's best Fire TV deals at Amazon

Amazon Fire TV Stick HD

Amazon
Fire TV Stick HD

Amazon Fire TV Stick 4K Select

Amazon
Fire TV Stick 4K Select

Amazon Fire TV Stick 4K Plus

Amazon
Fire TV Stick 4K Plus

Amazon Ember 2-Series TV

Amazon
Ember 40-inch 2-Series Fire TV

Amazon Ember 4-Series TV

Amazon
Ember 55-inch 4-Series Fire TV

Amazon Ember QLED Series TV

Amazon
Ember 55-inch QLED Series Fire TV

Amazon Fire TV Cube

Amazon
Fire TV Cube

Amazon Fire TV Soundbar

Amazon
Fire TV Soundbar

Confused about your PC specs or hardware? Windows 11's Copilot app is getting new powers to help you 'understand your device'

  • Windows 11's Copilot app has a new feature in testing
  • 'PC insights' provides an easy way to receive clear answers to hardware-based questions about your device and its specs
  • While there are some fears over privacy (and bloat), Microsoft has made it clear that Copilot needs to be granted permission to access your system and files

Copilot is getting a new ability to answer questions about your PC's hardware, allowing the AI to tap into the relevant hardware details to do so – and while Microsoft is treading carefully with privacy here, that's unlikely to stop some level of paranoia.

Windows Latest flagged the introduction of 'PC insights' for the Copilot app on Windows 11, which as Microsoft explains, "enables customers to conversationally ask Copilot questions about their Windows PC and receive clear responses based on their device's state without having to dig through system settings."

This is currently an experimental feature, so still in testing, and an optional ability that you must turn on for it to be in play. Windows Latest notes that it's gradually rolling out, but only in the US for now.

You can ask Copilot how much RAM you have, or storage space left, or what your GPU is, and the current level of usage for your processor, and a whole bunch of similar component-related queries. You can ask about elements as diverse as whether you have an antivirus running, or what your laptop's battery health is, diving into mild troubleshooting territory should you wish.

To get its answers, the Copilot app hooks up to Windows APIs to analyze your system, and the AI asks for permission to do this. You can allow it access to your PC's hardware details on a one-time basis for that session only, or you can elect to 'always allow' if you're happy to give Copilot this access on a more permanent basis.

Analysis: fears over hallucinations and bloat

Young woman using Windows 11 laptop, looking annoyed

(Image credit: Getty Images)

As ever, this is AI, and as Microsoft notes, Copilot "may not always provide complete or accurate information", especially during this testing phase. So, if you do get a chance to try out PC insights, maintain a healthy sense of skepticism with the responses you get.

As Windows Latest makes clear, there's also a certain irony about a Windows 11 user checking up on resource usage, perhaps due to system sluggishness, employing the Copilot AI to run diagnostics when the app itself uses the best part of 1GB of RAM when running in the background and doing nothing.

That doesn't stop this new PC insights feature from being situationally useful, of course. Some of the reaction has come from a place of disdain, though, as you might guess, with comments such as the one from this Redditor: "Oh hey it's like Task Manager except instead of lightweight and authoritative, it's bloated and might be lying to me."

Of course, this is a feature aimed at less well-informed PC owners, not those who can easily understand what's happening in Task Manager at a glance. Criticism around the bloat of the Copilot app is fair enough, mind, and this is because in its most recent incarnation, Microsoft changed things so the app is essentially a standalone spin-off of the Edge browser.

Another worry is that of privacy, and having Copilot 'snoop around' on your machine, but as noted, there are clear requests for permissions, and the new feature is strictly opt-in. You don't ever have to go near PC insights if you don't want to. It's also worth noting that giving the Copilot app access permissions doesn't mean it can read the actual contents of files, but only their sizes (for weighing up questions about storage and the like).

At the moment, this is a purely informative or troubleshooting feature, and in the case of attempted diagnostics, it may point to issues with your PC, but won't resolve them for you. However, it's not difficult to envision where Microsoft might head with this, in terms of getting Copilot to implement fixes for certain issues that the AI flags up. I'm talking simple Settings changes rather than anything in-depth, and this has always been the idea of Copilot (even though it hasn't yet been realized to much of an extent).

When we get AI agents in Windows 11 – and they are coming, make no mistake – this kind of functionality may turn into a full-on troubleshooting agent. The trouble (pun not intended) with that being that the mistakes and hallucinations that AI can make could be considerably more aggravating in this kind of scenario.

NordVPN is now part of Mastercard’s lifestyle perks — find out if you are eligible

  • Some Mastercard’s users can install NordVPN for free
  • The VPN now offers its services as part of the credit card’s perks
  • This move indicates that digital awareness is growing among consumers

Do you have a Mastercard? If so, you'll be happy to know that you may be eligible to use NordVPN's services for free.

These days, we know that using a VPN has become crucial for protecting one's digital identity. But when a major payment service provider enables its cardholder to access one of the best VPNs for free as part of the benefits included in their package, you realize that digital security has truly become an integral part of everyday life.

Indeed, Mastercard cardholders can now redeem a NordVPN subscription in exactly the same way they currently access airport lounges, fast-track services, and other lifestyle perks included in Mastercard's list of exclusive benefits.

How to get your VPN

NordVPN on a mobile phone

(Image credit: Pixabay)

Depending on your bank or Mastercard issuer and the country where you live, your Mastercard payment plan may now include NordVPN Basic and NordVPN Standard.

The basic version is already packed with features and serves as a golden ticket to digital security, thanks to its excellent unblocking capabilities, servers in 126 countries, 10 simultaneous connections, and the ability to block ads and malicious domains.

The luckiest users will be able to take advantage of NordVPN Standard, which exceeds all expectations, especially thanks to its next-gen antivirus digital suite.

The service helps protect your device from ads, trackers, malware, and malicious websites or downloads, and was previously ranked by the cybersecurity specialist AV-TEST and West Coast Labs (WCL) as the best tool for blocking malicious websites and anti-malware evaluation. We also tested it and can confidently confirm that it outperformed most other VPNs.

Mastercard cardholders can redeem their NordVPN subscription by checking their eligibility at https://nordvpn.com/partners/mastercard.

Customers are advised to contact their bank or card issuer to ensure that NordVPN’s digital benefits are included in their plan. Once they activate their NordVPN subscription, the service will ask them to set up their Nord account and download the NordVPN app.

A huge lifestyle plus

The partnership between NordVPN and Mastercard reflects a growing focus on privacy protection within financial services, particularly in industries where digital security is critical because sensitive data is constantly being shared.

In fact, virtual private networks (VPNs) allow cardholders to boost privacy by encrypting their browsing data and masking IP addresses. This provides solid protection against the risks associated with transactions made on public Wi-Fi networks, offering a defense against hackers who might intercept sensitive data.

The fact that a VPN is included among the lifestyle benefits offered by a payment giant shows that customers are paying closer attention to the digital world and view VPNs as an essential tool in their lives — just like vacations or entertainment.

"Digital security is becoming an essential part of everyday life, especially as people increasingly manage their finances, shop, and access important services online," stressed Kestas Saulis, Head of Payments at NordVPN.

Indeed, we might expect an ever-growing demand for digital security among payment services customers as they become increasingly aware of the real risks they face every time they conduct online transactions and share personal data.

We've tested 28 pairs of headphones this year — these are our favorite over-ears, from budget to blowout

We're just over half-way through the year, and of the 28 pairs of headphones we've had the pleasure of testing so far, there are a number of standout over-ears from both ends of the price spectrum. If you're looking for a new pair of cans, these are the models you should be checking out.

At the affordable end of things we have the Nothing Headphone (a), which manage to be both way better and much cheaper than their predecessors. We praised their "impactful and well-balanced sound, good active noise cancellation" and "excellent and truly useful app". A little pricier but still affordable are the retro-styled and ridiculously comfortable Marshall Milton ANC, and the clear-sounding JBL Live 780NC, with their never-ending battery life.

For true audiophiles with deep pockets, we've tested two blow-the-budget bangers. The Audio-Technica ATH-ADX7000 are the only pair of over-ears to earn a perfect five stars, with their "beautifully precise and engaging audio with exhilarating low-end performance" (here are all the five-star buys of the year so far, if you're interested). We were also blown away by the Grado Signature S750, a pair of handmade, open-back headphones that offer "an exceptional soundstage and excellent clarity", and sound "amazing" on well-produced music.

Scroll down for a comprehensive list of our top-rated over-ear headphones of the year so far — hit the 'View details' button for a summary of the main pros and cons of each one, plus a link to read the full review. Alternatively, head to our general best over-ear headphones list for a run-down of our favorite sets of all time.

Outstanding over-ears

Ath-Adx7000 Open-Air Dynamic Headphones

Audio-Technica
ATH-ADX7000

Pros

  • Beautifully detailed
  • Exceptional low end
  • Lightweight and comfortable

Cons

  • Very expensive
  • Very high impedance
Apple
AirPods Max 2

Meze Audio Strada

Meze Audio
Strada

Grado Signature S750 Headphones - Over-Ear, Open-Back, S2 50mm Driver, New B Cushion With 12 Conductor Detachable Cable

GRADO
Signature S750

Pros

  • Very wide soundstage
  • Excellent positioning and clarity
  • Amazing on well produced music

Cons

  • Relatively expensive
  • May be too bright for some
  • Divisive fit
Marshall
Milton ANC

Pros

  • Incredible comfort for on-ears
  • Clean, spacious sound
  • Fantastic battery life
  • Excellent, sustainable design

Cons

  • Bass is a little overzealous out of the box
  • ANC is a bit limited
  • No wear detection
JBL
Live 780NC
Nothing
Headphone (a)

Pros

  • Great sound that's a big upgrade over Headphone (1)
  • Fantastic on-ear control options and app
  • Gigantic battery life

Cons

  • Still heavy, with a strong clamping force
  • Some rivals offer better sonic detail
  • No auto-pause feature or case

Tom Cruise's new movie Digger just got an absolutely unhinged first full trailer — but the Mission: Impossible star's 'wild' transformation is not what I'm most excited about

  • The first full trailer for Tom Cruise's new movie Digger is here
  • Cruise plays 'an incredibly powerful corrupt oil tycoon, who embarks on a frantic mission to prove he is humanity's savior'
  • Directed by Alejandro G. Iñárritu, it also stars Sandra Hüller, Jesse Plemons, and John Goodman

The first trailer for Digger, Tom Cruise's next movie, has now been released — and the Mission: Impossible star is appearing as he never has before.

Cruise is seen in heavy prosthetic makeup, transforming into someone that, per the film's synopsis, os "an incredibly powerful corrupt oil tycoon, who embarks on a frantic mission to prove he is humanity's savior."

Directed by Birdman and The Revenant's Alejandro G. Iñárritu, its supporting cast includes Sandra Hüller, Jesse Plemons, John Goodman, Riz Ahmed, and Emma D'Arcy. Digger will be in theaters worldwide from October 2, 2026.

Unsurprisingly, the internet is beside themselves thanks to Cruise's new look. "Seeing an old Tom Cruise is wild," one YouTube comment reads, while another says:, "The biggest physical transformation Tom Cruise has had since Tropic Thunder."

With so much chaos happening at once, it's still anybody's guess as to how the full film will play out. But, in my opinion, Cruise is the least exciting part of what's coming.

Opinion: Digger will finally turn Sandra Hüller into the Hollywood leading lady she deserves to be

Despite being nominated for a Best Actress Academy Award in 2024 for her lead role in Anatomy of a Fall, Hüller still hasn't cemented her status as a leading lady.

Since then, she's had supporting roles in Project Hail Mary, The Zone of Interest, and yet-to-be-released Cannes period drama Fatherland. I've got a feeling, though, that Digger will finally give her the global recognition that she deserves.

Why? A simple answer: Tom Cruise. Aside from his death-defying stunts, the actor has made a name for himself through his consistent kindness and willingness to show up. Not only has he done this for his fans — just look at any press tour he's done in the last 10 years — but he also does it for his fellow actors.

By the time Digger is being promoted across the world, I can guarantee that Cruise will spend the entire time singing Hüller's praises. He's a man who bring along those around him while he's on the way up... and his own performance is likely to be a significant talking point for the 2026-2027 awards season. If Hüller isn't a routine Hollywood booking after this, I'll be at a loss for words. Know talent when you see it, people.

Vibe coded threats shift again — hackers are using AI chatbots to write malware using natural language

  • Huntress analyzed AI‑generated malware “Untitled1.ps1,” a noisy custom AD enumeration tool likely built by low‑skilled attackers using generative AI
  • Attackers paired it with s5cmd for rapid data exfiltration and SharpShares.exe for share enumeration before being detected and removed
  • Report warns AI “vibe coding” lowers barriers for cybercrime, producing unique payloads that evade signature‑based defenses, requiring behavioral analytics to catch attack lifecycles

“Unsophisticated” cybercriminals can now easily write malicious code using Artificial Intelligence (AI) and run devastating data breach attacks with speed, forcing defenders to rethink their strategies, researchers have claimed.

Security experts Huntress thoroughly investigating a piece of AI-written malware, and explained how the bespoke, AI-generated payload was a “highly aggressive, noisy, custom-built AD enumeration tool.”

Since cybercriminals are generally careful not to make too much noise and to try and do their bidding without raising any alarms, the researchers hint this was the work of a low-skilled attacker.

Significant challenge

The malware, labeled Untitled1.ps1, was designed to map the Active Directory environment and apparently, it did its job well. In the next step, the crooks deployed a legitimate high-speed command-line tool for Amazon S3 operations called s5cmd which, according to Huntress, is often used for data exfiltration.

Before being spotted and kicked out, the attackers also deployed a known enumeration tool called SharpShares.exe, filtering common administrative shares while hunting for further user-accessible data repositories.

The move from off-the-shelf frameworks to custom, bespoke AI tools is a “significant challenge” for the defenders, Huntress warns.

“Historically, AVs and EDR platforms have relied heavily on file hashes and static string signatures,” they say. “Vibe-coded scripts are inherently unique. Untitled1.ps1 has never existed before and will likely never be compiled in this exact configuration again.”

As a result, defenders must focus on the “fundamental behaviors of the attack lifecycle.” AI can change the code syntax, they’re saying, but cannot change the underlying mechanics of Active Directory enumeration.

“Vibe coding lowers the barrier to entry for cybercrime, allowing unsophisticated actors to generate highly capable, evasive tooling on the fly,” the researchers concluded. “While the code itself may be messy, over-engineered, and filled with AI hallmarks like left-behind comments, the threat it poses is very real. To combat this, defenders must abandon rigid, signature-based thinking and embrace behavioral analytics to catch the underlying actions that no LLM can hide.”

It looks like Garmin is finally preparing its Google Fitbit Air-style screenless band, the Cirqa, for launch — but I hope it doesn't copy Google's approach to revamping its fitness app

  • The Garmin Cirqa, Garmin's long-rumored screenless smart band, is breaking cover
  • Trademark filings have been spotted with governing bodies for the US, Canada, and EU, suggesting an imminent launch
  • Google launched its screenless band with a redesigned, AI-powered app — but I hope Garmin doesn't follow suit

Garmin's long-rumored screenless smart band, designed to compete with the rising trend of 'focus wearables' such as the Google Fitbit Air and Whoop bands, is on the way. We initially thought it was the Garmin Index Sleep Monitor (pictured above), but that turned out to be a different product entirely.

The screenless fitness band is instead likely to be named the Garmin Cirqa, according to leaks; it's going to be a cool new deviation from Garmin's existing fitness watches list, and we now have more evidence that it's going to be launching soon.

Garmin has been filing trademarks for the name 'CIRQA' (styled in all caps, but we'll refer to it as Cirqa in text the same way we do Whoop, which is styled on its official branding as 'WHOOP'), with an entry to the US Patent and Trademark Office database spotted earlier this year.

However, Gadgets & Wearables have also found trademark filings for relevant governing bodies in Canada and the EU, adding fuel to the rumors that a launch may be imminent.

Garmin Cirqa Trademark listing from USTPO database

(Image credit: Future)

All the filings connote a body-worn sensor rather than a communication device, suggesting the Cirqa isn't just a new smartwatch: it's exclusively for health and fitness.

This is quite exciting: at the moment, people looking for screenless, discreet wearables have no shortage of options, from the Oura Ring 5 to the Fitbit Air to last year's Polar Loop strap. Clearly, the category and people's interest are growing, and a top-quality device from Garmin would sell like hot cakes.

However, I hope Garmin doesn't repeat one aspect of Google's Fitbit Air launch. At the same time as the Fitbit Air came out, Google transformed the Fitbit app into Google Health, eliminating the last of its community features like shareable badges and challenges, controversially redesigning the app, and turning the Premium tier into an AI 'Health Coach' chatbot.

Garmin's user base would revolt if such dramatic changes came to the Garmin Connect app. There was widespread outrage last year when Garmin introduced a Premium tier with AI-powered features — the community is a passionate and outspoken one that loves its technology, and any hint that features are being scrapped or the app transforming to better conform to the AI-first nature of most screenless trackers would be met with an enormous outcry.

Garmin will have to make its Cirqa band work within its existing watch-focused ecosystem, unless it wants to launch a separate app or risk losing some frustrated customers.

TeraBox AI review

TeraBox built its name on 1TB of free cloud storage, which is still the headline pitch. What's changed is everything sitting next to the storage. An AI Presentation Maker, an essay writer, a scanner, a transcriber, and a research tool called Deep Research are now baked into the same free account I've used for years.

Until recently, TeraBox functioned more like a toolkit than a dedicated AI assistant. Many of the tools only did one job, like generate a deck, paraphrase a paragraph, or scan a document — then handed back results rather than a conversation.

But now, Terabox has added a dedicated research assistant that can access the web and parse through complex queries for information. It can also generate graphics and create properly-formatted documents to help with your research tasks. It's neat, but the most capable versions of these tools sit behind a Premium+ subscription priced under $4 a month.

I've covered hosting, storage, and AI software for TechRadar Pro since 2012, including our 2026 buying guide for vibe coders. If you'd like to see a wider selection of dedicated AI tools to pick from, check out our list of 70+ other AI tools across different categories. For this Terabox AI review, I had access to a 7-day trial of Premium+, which let me try all of the platform's features in depth over the review period.

What is TeraBox AI?

TeraBox AI is the set of generative tools Flextech Inc. has added to TeraBox, the free storage app it took over from Baidu in 2020. Rather than one assistant, it's a handful of single-purpose tools, an essay writer, presentation maker, paraphraser, transcriber, scanner, and research assistant, living inside the app I use for backups.

I'd call it a productivity add-on rather than an AI platform in its own right. You pick a tool, type or upload your input, and get a finished result. That suits someone wanting a quick deck or a tidier paragraph, but the platform left something to be desired when it came to more complex tasks requiring advanced reasoning.

TeraBox AI: At a glance

Attribute

Notes

Underlying model(s)

Not publicly disclosed. TeraBox doesn't name the large language models powering its tools.

Best for

Quick presentation drafts, document scanning and OCR, meeting transcription, light essay and paraphrasing help, existing TeraBox users.

Distinguishing functions

AI Presentation Maker with Agent Mode, Deep Research reports, AI Scan, AI Transcribe, bundled 1TB free storage.

UI features

Web app at terabox.com/ai, plus desktop and iOS/Android clients, each with a simple prompt box per tool.

Subscription costs

Free (basic AI, ad-supported, 1TB storage), Premium around $3.49/month (2TB storage, no AI), Premium+ around $3.89/month or $39.99/year (full AI suite, 2TB storage).

API pricing

No dedicated AI API. A separate OAuth-based Open Platform API covers file storage access only.

Buy it if…

  • You already use TeraBox for storage. The AI suite rides on cloud space you may already pay for, so the extra cost is small.
  • You need quick scans and transcripts. AI Scan and AI Transcribe handle everyday OCR and meeting notes well for casual use.
  • You want a fast presentation starter. One prompt turns into a usable slide deck in seconds, ready for further editing.

Don't buy it if…

  • You need a serious writing or design tool. Dedicated tools go deeper than TeraBox's essay writer and paraphraser for professional output.
  • Data jurisdiction matters to you. TeraBox's storage business began inside Baidu before Flextech took over in 2020, which still gives some professionals pause.
  • You can't stand ads. The free tier's AI tools sit behind the same ad-supported experience as TeraBox's storage.

My time with TeraBox AI

I tested TeraBox AI through the web app and Android client, running presentations, transcriptions, and scans over several days. The Presentation Maker stood out. A one-line prompt about small business marketing trends produced a ten-slide deck, icons and chart included, in under a minute.

AI Scan and AI Transcribe felt the most useful day to day, turning a printed invoice into clean, editable text in seconds. Transcribing a short interview gave me a readable summary alongside the full transcript. The essay writer and paraphraser, by contrast, were serviceable but generic.

However, my experiences with the dedicated AI chat and Research Assistant were somewhat mixed. A simple query asking for Elon Musk's updated net worth returned accurate input, but a more complex task involving generating a graphic of his net worth over the years seemed to fail entirely.

TeraBox was able to offer the information as a table instead on further attempts, which led me to believe that the failure was a result of being unable to pull up the necessary integrations for data visualization rather than an error in the research itself. That does redeem it in my eyes given the price point, just don't go in expecting the same level of functionality as a dedicated AI platform like ChatGPT.

On value, Premium+ is an easy call. It costs under $4 a month and bundles 2TB of storage with the full AI suite. The caveat is that nothing here matches a tool built solely around AI writing or design.

TeraBox AI: Features

TeraBox AI isn't the best do-everything assistant, which also shows in how the features are organized. Presentation, writing, scanning, and research tools each live in their own corner of the AI tab, which keeps things simple but means there's no unified chat for mixing tasks together.

The Presentation Maker impressed me most, with Agent Mode generating decks up to 40 slides from a prompt or uploaded document, complete with citations when it pulls from web sources. A separate Beautify option restyles slides you've already made. For students or small business owners needing a deck fast, this alone might justify upgrading.

AI Scan and AI Transcribe are the most practically useful tools for office work, handling OCR, ID document capture, and on-the-fly translation on one side, and audio-to-text conversion with an AI summary on the other. Both worked reliably in my testing, needing only minor cleanup afterward.

Deep Research, the suite's research tool, builds a structured outline you can edit before it writes a full report. The output reads more like a market briefing than original analysis, so treat it as a starting point rather than a finished document.

The essay writer and Smart Paraphraser are the weakest links. Output reads competently but generically, and TeraBox doesn't disclose which model is doing the writing. Given the price for Premium+, the overall feature set still feels reasonably generous for a bundle riding on storage you might already want.

TeraBox AI: User experience

I got started in under a minute. I logged into my existing account, tapped the AI tab, and was generating a presentation within seconds, with no separate sign-up or onboarding flow to slow things down. Each tool opens to a simple prompt box, so the learning curve is close to zero.

But the experience feels bolted onto a storage app rather than designed around AI from the ground up. Switching tools means backing out to the main AI menu each time, and the free tier's ads occasionally interrupt what otherwise feels quick and uncluttered.

TeraBox AI: Customer support

Support looks decent on paper. Users across review platforms rate TeraBox's customer service 4.0+ out of 5 and Flextech representatives respond to public reviews directly, including the ones flagging slow replies.

I didn't need to contact support during testing, since the AI tools worked as expected. The bigger caveat is documentation, since TeraBox's help content for the AI suite leans on blog posts and FAQs rather than a structured knowledge base.

TeraBox AI chat session

(Image credit: TeraBox)

TeraBox AI: Pricing

  • Free tier includes limited AI access, plus 1TB of ad-supported storage.
  • Premium adds 2TB of storage and removes ads, but doesn't unlock the AI suite.
  • Premium+ is the only tier with full AI access, priced from around $3.89 a month or $39.99 a year.

TeraBox's free plan gives a limited taste of the AI tools, including a small number of free presentation generations, on top of the full 1TB allowance. That's enough to test whether the tools suit your workflow before paying anything.

Premium+ is where the AI suite lives, bundling the essay writer, presentation maker, transcriber, scanner, paraphraser, and search tools alongside 2TB of storage for under $4 a month. TeraBox's official pricing page renders dynamically and didn't return visible data when I checked the source directly, so these figures come from cross-referenced third-party listings instead. There's no separate API pricing, since TeraBox doesn't offer developer access to the AI tools.

TeraBox AI: alternatives you should consider

  • pCloud: A privacy-focused cloud storage service with optional zero-knowledge encryption, starting around $49.99 a year for 500GB, without TeraBox's bundled AI tools.
  • Google Drive with Google AI Pro: Google's storage plans now fold Gemini directly into Drive, Gmail, and Docs, bundling 5TB of storage with AI access for $19.99 a month.
  • Canva: A more polished option built for AI-assisted presentations and design, with Magic Studio included in Canva Pro for around $15 a month.

How I tested TeraBox AI

  • Used the Presentation Maker, AI Scan, AI Transcribe, Deep Research, and Smart Paraphraser across free and Premium+ access.
  • Tested the AI suite through TeraBox's web app and Android app over several days of regular use.
  • Cross-checked pricing and ratings against TeraBox's official site, G2, and Capterra, noting where the vendor's pricing page wouldn't render visibly.

I focused testing on the tools most useful for a typical small business or student workflow, presentations, scanning, and transcription, rather than edge cases. Beyond the data obtained from their official website and documentation, I cross-referenced features across multiple third-party sources. as well as verified them during my own testing, to confirm consistency before including them here.

What the CAIO wave signals for UK companies yet to follow suit

Something shifted in early 2026. In the space of just a few months, HSBC named David Rice as its first Chief AI Officer, Lloyds appointed Sameer Gupta as Chief Data and AI Officer, and the UK government hired Kalbir Sohi to the newly created role of Chief AI Officer, the most senior AI leadership role in the public sector. This is just the tip of a massive iceberg.

Nearly half of Britain's biggest companies have now appointed dedicated AI leaders, with 42% of those appointments made in just the last year alone.

For organizations yet to act, the more pressing question is what is actually holding them back, and whether they have thought clearly enough about what the role needs to look like to be worth doing at all.

In fact, Thoughtworks research found that 69% of UK financial services organizations have already appointed a Chief AI Officer, well above the 46% average across industries. A further quarter are actively recruiting.

In its early form, the Chief AI Officer was often more of a coordinator aligning teams, reassuring regulators and shepherding pilots. In some organizations, that model still exists, with the role functioning more as a symbolic PR appointment than a genuine driver of change.

The Chief AI Officers who are making a real difference today look very different. They are evolving into P&L owners: controlling budgets, shaping investment decisions and being held directly accountable for business outcomes.

They sit at the heart of commercial strategy rather than on the edge of it, directly influencing how AI drives revenue, product innovation and customer experience.

A broader shift

This evolution reflects a broader shift in what boards are actually asking for. For several years the AI conversation centered on efficiency, covering automation, productivity and cost reduction. Those gains are now largely understood and, in many cases, already realized. The harder question dominating boardrooms now is growth.

Growth is a completely different brief. It requires calculated risk, long-term investment and a genuine rethink of how value is created. It also demands faster decisions and clearer accountability. Committees and distributed ownership models struggle with this, particularly when AI initiatives cut across technology, data, operations, legal and customer-facing functions simultaneously.

That is where empowered Chief AI Officers earn their place. Backed by a mandate to prioritize initiatives, a strong Chief AI Officer will halt projects that are not delivering and scale the ones that are, bringing focus to what can otherwise become a sprawling, fragmented AI program.

They also play a critical role in balancing ambition with responsibility, embedding governance and ethics into delivery from the start rather than bolting them on at the end.

Outside of financial services and professional services

For UK organizations outside financial services and professional services, the recent wave of appointments should land as a practical prompt. Across HSBC, Lloyds and the government, this is no longer a sector-specific story. To organizations that have just appointed this role, make sure your new leader is given the genuine authority, budget and accountability to actually matter.

Timing matters too. Lloyds reported that generative AI delivered around £50 million of value in 2025, with more than £100 million in additional value expected this year. These are the returns that flow from having leadership in place early. The gap between organizations experimenting with AI and those scaling it with clear ownership is already widening quickly.

Lessons learned

The lesson from this wave of appointments is not to appoint a Chief AI Officer at all costs, but rather to be clear-eyed about what specific problem the role is meant to solve.

First, audit how AI decisions are actually being made today. If ownership is split across innovation teams, data functions, risk committees and product leaders, your AI strategy is almost certainly moving more slowly than the business expects. At scale, it becomes a liability.

Second, get explicit about outcomes, not activity. AI roadmaps that focus purely on use cases and tools miss the point. The question boards are now asking is how AI will drive measurable growth, new revenue, better customer retention and faster product cycles. If AI leadership cannot be tied directly to those levers, the role will never carry the authority it needs.

Third, embed AI leadership alongside financial and product strategy, not beside it. The most effective Chief AI Officers sit with CFOs and CPOs, rather than operating as a technical advisory layer. Budget ownership and commercial responsibility matter far more than job titles.

The cost of delay

Finally, move. The cost of delay is rising. Organizations that clarify ownership now will be better placed to scale responsibly and competitively. Those that wait risk discovering, too late, that they have a huge leadership gap.

What is often underestimated is how far the CAIO role stretches beyond technology. The most fundamental challenges presented by AI are not purely about bringing in new tools. They are about people, practices and the processes that underpin everyday business. In that sense, the role has as much in common with a Chief People Officer as it does with a senior technologist.

Building organization-wide AI literacy, managing cultural change and setting clear guidelines around what tools staff can use and what data they can use them with are just as central to the job as any technology decision.

We've reviewed and ranked the best online collaboration software.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

'The death of privacy online' — Proton launches interactive map to show age verification laws are spreading fast

  • Proton launches a map to show how age verification laws spread globally
  • Proton CEO said these laws will lead to "the death of online privacy"
  • Alternatives to prevent digital safety are possible, Proton argues

It feels like an eternity ago, but it has only been less than a year since Australia made global headlines by introducing the world's first nationwide under-16s social media ban. Even longer, perhaps, since mandatory age verification checks have landed in the UK.

Over the past 12 months, however, mandatory age-verification regulations have been spreading rapidly across the world. The era of anonymous browsing — and perhaps the very concept of online privacy — may be quickly coming to an end.

To keep pace with these seismic changes, Proton — the Swiss-based company behind one of the best VPN and secure email services on the market — has launched an interactive map tracking the global spread of age verification laws.

While these laws continue to provoke criticism from scientists, tech experts, and digital rights advocates, Proton aims to ensure that the public remains properly informed by providing timely updates as new legislation advances.

Proton's age verification map

Proton's map on age verification [July 2026]

(Image credit: Proton)

Proton's age verification map provides a real-time overview of where these measures are being introduced and how they are being implemented.

Clicking on any country reveals information about the progress of legislative proposals in that region, with the tool offering a detailed overview of the different approaches adopted by governments regarding age verification legislation.

A glance at the map is enough to show just how rapidly laws are proliferating.

In Europe, for example, 18 countries have already implemented or proposed age verification requirements targeting adult content. Fifteen of these have already introduced measures specifically aimed at social media platforms.

On the other side of the pond, 49 US states have put forward proposals, and 27 have successfully implemented mandatory age checks for websites with harmful content for minors. In addition, many states have either successfully implemented or are considering parental consent or verified age mechanisms for mainstream social apps.

But this pattern stretches way beyond Europe and North America. In the Asia-Pacific region and the emerging markets of Latin America, governments are targeting a wide range of channels, including adult websites, social media platforms, online gaming platforms, and apps.

The death of privacy worldwide?

Andy Yen, founder and CEO of Proton, strongly argued that requiring every user to provide their identifying information is simply tantamount to "the death of privacy online."

He is not alone in holding these views. Many privacy advocates and digital rights organizations argue that current age verification methods encourage the growth of surveillance while compromising users' privacy.

Critics also point to past failures in ensuring the security of sensitive data. Breaches involving Discord's third-party age verification service affecting over 70,000 users or the EU’s age verification app, allegedly hacked in two minutes, are just a few examples of the scale of the problem.

The picture looks even bleaker when one considers that many experts from youth organizations and children’s charities seem to agree that such methods could have harmful effects on young people browsing the Internet.

As opposition continues to grow — from scientists calling for the suspension of mandatory age verification to gaming groups and digital rights activists joining forces to prevent the erosion of Internet freedom — Yen argues that alternatives are possible.

Proton advocates for a different approach to child protection. One that does not compromise the very concept of online privacy and is based on client-side processing, with results that are fully anonymized thanks to end-to-end encryption and publicly accessible open-source code.

"We simply can’t afford to get this wrong. Who stands to benefit? The same tech giants who build today’s privacy nightmare," Yan said.

The House of the Dragon season 3 episode 5 trailer teases a game-changing betrayal that you won't see coming — here's why it'll be so important to the HBO Max show's story

  • HBO has released a mid-season trailer for House of the Dragon 3
  • It teases the high fantasy show's next major battle in the Targaryen Civil War
  • A game-changing betrayal could happen soon, too

The Dance of the Dragons is about to get even deadlier and more deceitful in House of the Dragon season 3.

Indeed, with its fourth episode officially marking the midpoint of the show's latest installment, HBO has released a foreboding new trailer that teases what's to come in the weeks ahead. Judging by the latest round of footage, we can expect another major battle to take place — in episode 5 or beyond — that'll reshape the entire Targaryen Civil War, too.

There's plenty to unpack from this new hype-inducing teaser — Rhaenyra's continual descent into madness and the return of Aemond Targaryen, whom we haven't seen since episode 2, being chief among the biggest reveals.

It's the HBO Max TV series' interpretation of the First Battle of Tumbleton, though, that takes center stage here. Indeed, we see Daemon Targaryen's forces converging on the market town that — at this moment in time, anyway — is still loyal to Rhaenyra and Daemon. However, with Ormund Hightower's forces occupying the strategic settlement's buildings and streets, a life-threatening fight for Tumbleton — and, by proxy, the Iron Throne itself — awaits in the Game of Thrones prequel's next chapter.

Why the First Battle of Tumbleton is such an important event in the Targaryen Civil War

Ormund Hightower shouting as he leads some soldiers into battle in House of the Dragon season 3

The First Battle of Tumbleton is a significant event in the Targaryen Civil War (Image credit: HBO)

It would be incredibly unfair of me to spoil everything that happens during the First Battle of Tumbleton, especially with the conflict potentially being the focus of next week's episode.

That said, there's a particularly vital incident that occurs— one that House of the Dragon has been sowing the (dragon)seeds for since its third season premiered — that's worth raising. The reason? Basically, it turns the tide of the Targaryen Civil War in favor of House Hightower, aka Team Green.

Full spoilers immediately follow for Fire and Blood, the book that House of the Dragon is based on. Turn back if you don't want this season's fifth chapter ruined before it airs on one of the world's best streaming services.

Ulf the White and Hugh Hammer in a field in House of the Dragon season 3

Will Ulf and Hugh betray Rhaenyra during the show's next tentpole conflict? (Image credit: HBO)

If you've read Fire and Blood, and/or know your Thrones lore, you'll know I'm referencing the moment known as the Two Betrayers.

During the First Battle of Tumbleton, Hugh Hammer and Ulf the White, both of whom are of Targaryen blood and swore their allegiance to Rhaenyra in season 2, defect to Team Green. As part of their betrayal, the pair use their dragons Vermithor and Silverwing to burn Tumbleton to the ground. Not only does Rhaenyra lose two of her dragon-riding allies, she also a key stronghold in a vital region of Westeros.

Fire and Blood doesn't contain an explanation as to why Hugh and Ulf turn their backs on Team Black and join the Hightowers' cause.

Admittedly, Rhaenyra hasn't helped her cause — after all, among other things, she refused Ulf's request to officially bear the Targaryen name when he was knighted, and she's been incredibly short-tempered and cold with Hugh since taking the throne. Nonetheless, with two less dragons on her side, things could be about to get even dicier for Rhaenyra as she struggles to retain her sanity and the wider support of the realm.

Anyway, HBO's adaptation has taken certain creative liberties with its source material and added narrative content to illustrate why characters make the choices they do. So, don't be surprised if, as long as the First Battle of Tumbleton occurs in season 3 episode 5, it includes some new material that, the above reasons notwithstanding, spells out why Hugh and Ulf symbolically stab Rhaenyra in the back.

'Cryptomining can be a lucrative post-compromise activity in cloud environments': Experts warn AI gateways connected to Amazon Bedrock are being hijacked to steal crypto

  • Darktrace reports cryptojacking via a compromised AI gateway (LiteLLM‑Proxy on AWS Bedrock), breached through exposed SSH and abused with XMRig mining
  • Attackers also showed suspicious IAM activity, hinting at possible cloud credential misuse, with connections traced to Vietnam
  • Experts warn AI gateways concentrate privileged access, urging strict port closures, least‑privilege roles, and control‑plane monitoring to reduce blast radius

If you are using AI gateways as part of your tech stack, be wary - they are being leveraged in cryptojacking attacks, experts have warned.

Cybersecurity researchers Darktrace have published a new report on a cloud-hosted AI gateway, connected to Amazon Bedrock, which was compromised and used for cryptocurrency mining.

An AI gateway is a piece of software that runs between users or applications and one or more AI models. It is not unlike a reverse proxy or an API gateway, but just for AI services. In this case, an Amazon EC2 instance running an AI gateway called LiteLLM-Proxy was given centralized access to large language models (LLM) hosted on Amazon Bedrock (AWS’ fully managed generative AI platform).

Shady Vietnamese accounts

According to Darktrace, threat actors gained access most likely through a brute-force attack, since the EC2 instance was configured to accept SSH connections from anywhere on the internet.

After breaking in, they downloaded XMRig, by far the most popular cryptocurrency mining program. Within minutes, the instance started making repeated encrypted connections to a cryptocurrency mining pool, which also set off Darktrace’s alarms and spotted the attack.

Soon after, Darktrace spotted more suspicious activities, this time involving an AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) user. This account started giving out unexpected and previously unused commands, such as enumerating and invoking Amazon Bedrock foundation models, or trying to set up a new IAM user account.

The final red flag was the IP address of that user - tracing back all the way to Vietnam. Darktrace said there was insufficient evidence to conclusively link the IAM activity with the earlier compromise of the AI gateway, but stressed that the behavior could indicate attempted cloud credential misuse.

Brave Leo AI review

Brave Leo arrived in November 2023 as a sidebar AI assistant for the Brave browser, and it has grown into one of the more unusual offerings in the AI chat market. Unlike most platforms that treat privacy as an afterthought, Leo bakes it into the architecture: no IP logging, no conversation storage, and no requirement to create an account. In late 2025, Brave went further by introducing Trusted Execution Environments (TEEs) powered by NEAR.AI and Intel TDX technology, giving users cryptographically verifiable assurance that requests are processed exactly as described.

Two features set Leo apart from the field. The Bring Your Own Model (BYOM) option lets you connect Leo to locally-running models via Ollama or your own API endpoints, which is rare among browser-native AI tools. The Skills feature, launched in December 2025, lets you assign keyboard shortcuts to frequently used prompts to cut down on repetitive setup.

Agentic browsing, which lets Leo autonomously navigate and complete tasks on your behalf, entered early testing across all Brave release channels in May 2026.

I've been covering AI platforms and B2B software at TechRadar Pro since 2018, including our 2026 vibe coding buying guide and the Microsoft Build conference this year in San Francisco. Here's how Leo holds up.

What is Brave Leo AI?

Brave Leo is an AI chat assistant built directly into the Brave browser, accessible from a sidebar panel, a full-page view, or the address bar. It's available on Windows, macOS, and Linux on desktop, and on Android and iOS on mobile. No separate installation, app, or account is needed to get started with the free tier.

Leo's defining quality is page awareness. It reads the content of the active tab, whether that's a webpage, PDF, Google Doc, Google Sheet, or YouTube video, and uses that content as context for your questions. You don't need to copy-paste anything or upload files to an external server.

Moreover, Brave Search pulls in real-time information from across the web when your question calls for it.

The platform targets privacy-conscious individuals, students, and professionals who want AI assistance without feeding personal data to third parties. It's also a practical option for people already running Brave who'd rather not switch tabs to reach a separate AI app.

Brave Leo AI: At a glance

Attribute

Notes

Underlying model(s)

Qwen, Meta Llama, Google Gemma (free); Claude Haiku, Claude Sonnet, DeepSeek V3.1 (premium); all hosted on Brave's own secure infrastructure

Best for

Privacy-conscious users, web research, document summarization, coding assistance

Distinguishing functions

Privacy proxy, BYOM, Skills shortcuts, Automatic mode, agentic browsing (early access)

UI features

Sidebar panel and full-page mode; address bar integration; in-chat model selector

Subscription costs

Free (open models, rate-limited); Leo Premium at $14.99/month or $149.99/year

API pricing

Not available; Leo is a browser-only product with no public API

Buy it if…

  • You prioritize AI privacy above all else. Leo doesn't log your conversations, store your IP address, or use your chats for model training. For users handling sensitive research or confidential work, that's a real distinction from most AI chatbots.
  • You're already a Brave browser user. Leo is built directly into Brave with no extra installation required. It picks up page context automatically, making web research faster with very little setup.
  • You want model flexibility. The ability to switch between Llama, Claude, Qwen, and others, or connect your own model via BYOM, gives you more control than most browser-native AI tools offer.

Don't buy it if…

  • You need AI across multiple browsers or tools. Leo only works inside Brave. If you regularly use Chrome, Firefox, or other apps, you won't have Leo available in those environments.
  • You rely on intensive daily free usage. The free tier hits its ceiling quickly during heavy use. A Premium subscription is more or less necessary for anyone using Leo throughout the working day.
  • You need enterprise features or team access. Leo is a personal assistant with no team accounts, admin controls, or organization-level management. Businesses looking to deploy it across multiple users will need individual subscriptions for each.

My time with Brave Leo AI

My first impression of Leo was how little friction there was to getting started. No account confirmation, no model selection screen, no onboarding pop-ups. Within seconds of opening the sidebar, I was summarizing a lengthy policy document open in another tab.

The sidebar stays out of the way until you need it, which I found more practical than switching to a dedicated AI app.

Automatic mode worked well in practice. Leo picked Claude Sonnet for a nuanced writing task and shifted to a faster model for a quick factual question, all without me having to intervene. I did run into rate-limit warnings during a longer research session on the free tier.

Those limits don't reset frequently enough for sustained daily use, and that was what ultimately pushed me to test the Premium plan.

The Skills feature was a useful addition for repetitive tasks. I set up a shortcut for a summarization prompt I return to frequently. After a few days, it saved real time.

New users may not find it easily, though, since it's tucked away and not highlighted in Leo's default interface.

Brave Leo AI: Features

Leo's feature set has expanded considerably since its 2023 launch. The platform covers summarization, translation, code generation, content writing, question answering, and document analysis across webpages, PDFs, Google Docs, Google Sheets, and YouTube videos. Image understanding was added more recently, and agentic browsing, which lets Leo autonomously complete multi-step tasks in an isolated browser profile, entered early access across all release channels in May 2026.

Page awareness is one of Leo's strongest practical assets. It reads whatever you're currently viewing and uses it as live context for your prompts. This works without uploading anything to a third-party server, which keeps the privacy model consistent across all use cases.

BYOM is a genuine differentiator. You can connect Leo to locally-running models via Ollama, to OpenAI-compatible endpoints, or to other third-party APIs. For developers or power users who want a specific model or prefer to keep everything on-device, this adds a level of control that most browser AI tools don't offer.

The Skills feature lets you save and trigger custom prompts with keyboard shortcuts. It's useful for repetitive workflows, though the current library of built-in skills is still relatively narrow. More customization here would strengthen the feature, and it's an area I'd like to see Brave expand.

Multi-tab context and Tab Focus Mode let Leo work across several open tabs rather than just the active one, which helps when cross-referencing multiple sources. The Brave Talk integration is a useful bonus for anyone using Brave's video conferencing tool: Leo can transcribe meetings in real time and produce summaries and action items without sharing data externally.

The one area where Leo falls behind dedicated AI platforms is memory. Leo doesn't retain context between separate sessions, so every conversation starts from scratch. Users who want a long-running assistant that remembers preferences or project history will find this limiting.

Brave Leo AI: User experience

The interface is clean and minimal. The sidebar slides open without disturbing your active page, and the full-page view at brave://leo-ai works well for longer sessions. Switching models takes a couple of clicks from the dropdown at the top of the chat.

Automatic mode removes the decision entirely if you'd rather not think about it.

The address bar integration is a small but practical touch: typing a question and selecting "Ask Leo" opens the response in full-page view without interrupting your browsing. Mobile support on Android and iOS covers the same core features as desktop, with voice input available on iOS. The experience is consistent across platforms, which isn't always the case with browser-based AI tools.

Brave Leo AI: Customer support

Brave handles Leo support through its Help Center at support.brave.app. The documentation is well-organized and covers most common scenarios, from initial access to advanced configuration options like BYOM and model settings. Articles are generally current, which is more than can be said for some AI products that update fast but leave documentation behind.

There's no live chat or dedicated support line for Leo. Community forums and the Help Center are the primary routes for getting help. For a free or modestly priced tool, this is standard, but business users with time-sensitive issues may find the self-serve model inadequate.

Brave Leo AI in action

(Image credit: Brave Browser)

Brave Leo AI: Pricing

  • Free tier: Access to open-source models (Llama, Qwen, Gemma), rate-limited usage, no account required
  • Leo Premium: $14.99/month or $149.99/year, with a 7-day free trial. Includes Claude Haiku, Claude Sonnet, DeepSeek V3.1, and other advanced models; higher rate limits; early access to new features

The free tier works for light, occasional use. You get solid open-source models and full privacy protections without signing up for anything. Rate limits are the catch: they kick in faster than you'd expect during sustained sessions, and there's no way to pay for a small top-up without committing to Premium.

At $14.99/month, Leo Premium is cheaper than ChatGPT Plus ($20/month) and sits comfortably within range for an individual AI subscription. The annual plan at $149.99 brings that down to about $12.50/month, which is reasonable given the model access on offer. There's no team or enterprise pricing.

Leo also has no public API, so external workflow integration isn't an option.

Brave Leo AI: alternatives you should consider

  • ChatGPT Atlas: A Chromium-based web browser from OpenAI with built-in access to the most widely used AI assistant. However, it's only available to macOS users for now and has now Windows version.
  • Microsoft Copilot: Built into Microsoft Edge and deeply integrated with the Microsoft 365 suite. The stronger pick for users already working in the Windows and Office ecosystem.
  • Perplexity AI: A research-focused AI that delivers sourced, real-time answers from the web. Worth considering if web research and fact-finding are your primary use cases rather than general-purpose chat.

How I tested Brave Leo AI

  • Used Leo's free tier for web research, PDF summarization, and content drafting over multiple sessions to assess response quality and the real-world impact of rate limits.
  • Tested Premium-tier models including Claude Sonnet on complex writing and analysis tasks, comparing output quality against the default open-source models.
  • Configured BYOM with Ollama, created custom Skills shortcuts, and put the multi-tab context feature through a multi-source research task.

Testing covered Brave Leo on desktop (Windows and macOS) and on Android, using both the sidebar and full-page chat modes. I evaluated response accuracy across summarization, factual questions, code generation, and writing tasks, and cross-referenced Brave's privacy claims against official documentation and third-party reporting from sources including The Register.

I compared the affordable Viltrox 90mm f/2.2 lens with Fujifilm’s legendary 90mm f/2 portrait optic — I have one surprising favorite

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO: One-minute review

If you follow my camera coverage at TechRadar, you'll need no introduction to Viltrox, a Chinese lens manufacturer who's rapidly becoming a major player by delivering high-quality and particularly affordable optics.

Viltrox's most recent efforts are the 75mm f/1.8 and 90mm f/2.2: a twin-like pair of lightweight primes for APS-C cameras from its mid-range 'EVO' series, available in Sony E, Nikon Z and Fujifilm X-mount versions.

Viltrox offered to send me a lens to test, and I strategically asked for the Fujifilm X-mount version of the 90mm f/2.2, because it was the only option with a proprietary alternative for me to pit it against: Fujifilm's XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR. A 'character rich' XF 90mm f/2 APD was also listed in a public poll earlier this year among lenses that Fujifilm would love to make — but we don't know if it will be made.

Could the Viltrox 90mm do the unthinkable — beat Fujifilm's legendary portraiture lens? I called in the Fujifilm lens, and tested the pair using a Fujifilm X-T5, and much of my test focuses on how viable an alternative the Viltrox lens is.

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens attached to a Fujifilm X-T5 camera, alongside the Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 lens

The Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens (left), alongside the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens attached to a Fujifilm X-T5 camera (Image credit: Tim Coleman)

For context, a fast aperture 90mm lens for APS-C has a 135mm equivalent focal length in full-frame terms, meaning it's a mid-telephoto focal length, delivering a highly compressed background and dreamy bokeh — the hallmarks of high-end portraits. At this focal length, you'll need the freedom of moving a decent distance away from your subject, so it's not necessarily one for tight studio spaces.

I shot self portraits controlling the camera remotely from my phone using the Fujifilm X app, and various closeups with low-lying sunlight involved, plus a range of other shots just with the Viltrox lens. Overall, I've come away majorly impressed, especially when you consider just how small, lightweight and affordable the Viltrox 90mm f/2.2 is.

The bulkier Fujifilm lens wins for the dreamiest bokeh and will be worth the extra outlay for portrait specialists. If I had the choice, I'd probably still go for this lens. However, for most people, the Viltrox is a stellar alternative, and furthermore the only one of its kind for Sony and Nikon crop-sensor mirrorless cameras, and I highly recommend it for both — after all, Nikon especially has so few options for its crop-sensor cameras such as the Z50 II.

Once again, Viltrox has delivered an excellent value autofocus prime lens.

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO: Price and availability

  • Costs $369 / £359 / Australia price TBC
  • Available in Sony E, Fujifilm X and Nikon Z-mount versions

The Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO is available in Sony E, Fujifilm X and Nikon Z-mount versions, and I tested the Fujifilm version, not least of which because Fujifilm has its own legendary 90mm lens and I was keen to see how the two compared. Sony and Nikon have no such lens for APS-C — and the closest alternative would be a full-frame optic.

Viltrox's EVO lenses are almost always way more affordable when compared to the closest proprietary alternatives. Costing $369 / £359, that's certainly the case with the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO, when you consider how the Fujifilm 90mm lens costs between 2-3x the price. It's the small, light, and affordable choice.

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO: specs

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO specs

Type:

Mid-telephoto prime

Mount:

Sony E, Fujifilm X, Nikon Z

Sensor:

APS-C

Focal length:

90mm (135mm effective)

Max aperture:

f/2.2

Minimum focus:

0.74m

Max reproduction

0.14x

Filter size:

58mm

Dimensions:

2.7 x 3.0in / 69 x 76mm

Weight:

11.3oz / 320g (bare lens without hood)

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO: Design

  • Just 11.3oz / 320g — lightweight and compact for a lens of this type
  • Modest 0.74m minimum focus distance — not one for closeup photography
  • Very well-made, with rubber sealed mount
Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens attached to a Fujifilm X-T5 camera, held by tech journalist and pro photographer Tim Coleman
The lens comes with a lens hood, and Viltrox has improved on the fiddly design of previous efforts. This one attaches easily. Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens attached to a Fujifilm X-T5 camera, held by tech journalist and pro photographer Tim Coleman
A really decent balance with the X-T5Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens attached to a Fujifilm X-T5 camera, held by tech journalist and pro photographer Tim Coleman
Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens held by tech journalist and pro photographer Tim Coleman
Tim Coleman

As an APS-C lens, the 90mm focal length is equivalent to 135mm in full-frame terms, which is a classic portraiture lens. I've tested my fair share of full-frame 135mm lenses, including Viltrox's own 135mm F1.8 LAB and indeed Fujifilm's own 90mm f/2 for APS-C, and the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO is the smallest and lightest of the lot by some margin.

I've shared some comparison photos below alongside the Fujifilm 90mm f/2 to illustrate the difference — at 11.3oz / 320g, the Viltrox lens is not far off being half the weight. When paired with an X-T5, I thought both lenses balanced well, but with a rangefinder-style camera such as the X-E5, the Viltrox would win for balance.

Don't let its size and price fool you, though — the Viltrox 90mm is very well made, with an all metal body, rubber-sealed lens mount, while both control rings handle beautifully: the focus ring is smooth and light, the knurled aperture ring precise. No doubt it would be a bigger and heavier lens if it had a larger maximum f/2 aperture like the Fujifilm.

Close up of the front lens element of the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens
The lens takes 58mm threaded filtersTim Coleman
Close up of the aperture ring of the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens
The Fujifilm version has no external controls, whereas the Sony and Nikon versions have three buttons/ switchesTim Coleman
Close up of the aperture ring of the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens
This means the X-mount version has a clicked aperture ring onlyTim Coleman
Close up of the rear lens mount of the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens
The rear mount has a rubber seal to keep out dust / water ingressTim Coleman

The metal barrel of some of the previous Viltrox lenses that I've tested has scratched easily. I didn't thrash the 90mm lens around particularly, so it remains mint. I'll update this review if I discover it also scratches easily.

Curiously, the X-mount version of the Viltrox 90mm f/2.2 EVO has no buttons or switches, whereas the Nikon Z and Sony E-mount versions (which I didn't ask to test) have three; an AF/MF switch, customizable function button and a click switch for the aperture ring.

Omitting the click switch especially is an oddity given that Fujifilm cameras also shoot video — Fujifilm X users here are stuck with a clicked aperture ring. As a result, despite being excellent value, it feels like Fujifilm users are shortchanged. That being said, however, the Fujifilm 90mm f/2 lens also has zero buttons or switches.

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens held alongside the Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 lens by tech journalist and pro photographer Tim Coleman
The Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens (left) held alongside the Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 lens (right)Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens attached to a Fujifilm X-T5 camera, alongside the Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 lens
Tim Coleman

The STM stepping motor makes light work of the 10 lens elements in 8 groups, for snappy and quiet autofocus. Of course autofocus performance accuracy and speed are affected by which camera system and autofocus mode is in use, but I never felt like the lens was slowing down the X-T5 camera's autofocus.

Minimum focus is 0.74m, which delivers a maximum 0.14x magnification. Put simply, this is not a lens for closeup photography, though neither is the 75mm f/1.8 EVO which has a 0.12x magnification, nor most 135mm lenses I've used.

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO: Performance

  • Optically very sharp
  • Smooth bokeh, but with cats-eye shaping. Minor chromatic aberration and vignetting
  • Snappy and quiet autofocus

I've included a range of photos taken with the Viltrox and Fujifilm 90mm lenses below, matching the lens settings where possible (though the Fujifilm lens has an extra photo at f/2), and you can read on for my analysis of the images.

Viltrox

Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: a single fern with dappled light coming through background foliage
Viltrox at f/2.2Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: a single fern with dappled light coming through background foliage
Viltrox at f/2.8Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: a single fern with dappled light coming through background foliage
Viltrox at f/4Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: closeup of purple hydrangea with background foliage
Viltrox at f/2.2Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: closeup of purple hydrangea with background foliage
Viltrox at f/2.8Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: closeup of purple hydrangea with background foliage
Viltrox at f/4Tim Coleman

Fujifilm

Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: a single fern with dappled light coming through background foliage
Fujifilm at f/2Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: a single fern with dappled light coming through background foliage
Fujifilm at f/2.2Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: a single fern with dappled light coming through background foliage
Fujifilm at f/2.8Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: a single fern with dappled light coming through background foliage
Fujifilm at f/4Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: closeup of purple hydrangea with background foliage
Fujifilm at f/2Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: closeup of purple hydrangea with background foliage
Fujifilm at f/2.2Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: closeup of purple hydrangea with background foliage
Fujifilm at f/2.8Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: closeup of purple hydrangea with background foliage
Fujifilm at f/4Tim Coleman

Viltrox's lens portfolio is split into various series, being topped by the LAB series of full-frame lenses, which is followed by its Pro series, and then below that the Evo series. Evo lenses are mid-range; small, lightweight, excellent value, with one or two concessions.

For me, all of the Evo lenses I've tested are an easy recommendation for enthusiast photographers, including the AF 90mm F2.2. Optically its sharp. Not the sharpest lens I've ever seen, but in a similar league as the pricier Fujifilm 90mm nonetheless.

Where sharp detail is top concern, stopping the aperture down to f/4 yields better results than wide open at f/2.2. You'll see a reduction in vignetting and chromatic aberration by doing so, too. Those lens distortions are only minor at f/2.2, but they are present.

The main topic for a wide aperture 135mm equivalent lens is bokeh — the quality of out of focus areas — and I have good news, with two caveats.

Viltrox

Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: upper body portrait of a man with backlit trees
The Viltrox lens, see the bokeh cats eye shapingTim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: upper body portrait of a man with backlit trees
Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: upper body portrait of a man with backlit trees
Tim Coleman

Fujifilm

Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: upper body portrait of a man with backlit trees
Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens — bokeh is smooth and roundTim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: upper body portrait of a man with backlit trees
Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO and Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens comparisons: upper body portrait of a man with backlit trees
Here I've dropped the aperture down to match the Viltrox's maximum f/2.2. Tim Coleman

Bokeh is deliciously smooth. You can see the smooth edges in the dappled light in my self portraits and the series of photos of a fern (above). This is the most important attribute of bokeh, and the Viltrox 90mm nails it.

Bokeh is clearly cats-eye shaped, mind you, not fully round like you might find in the very best portrait lenses, such as the Nikon Plena. Personally, I don't mind cats-eye shaping in bokeh at all, while you might think it's ugly — it's subjective. What's not subjective, is bokeh smoothness, and like I say, the Viltrox lens scores highly.

The other caveat is the maximum f/2.2 aperture, which is slightly smaller than the f/2 of the Fujifilm lens I was comparing the Viltrox lens with. While this minor difference doesn't particularly affect depth of field, I did find the Fujifilm lens' bokeh to be even bigger and rounder at f/2 compared to the Viltrox lens at f/2.2.

If bokeh is a top concern, money is no object and you don't mind a larger lens, then the Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 is the better pick (see comparisons, above).

I've included a general sample gallery and included notes with further comments on the lens quality.

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO sample images

Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: adolescent boy walking along a towpath, there are canal boats in the river, it's golden hour
I love the compression effect you get with a 135mm lens. It's possibly my favorite focal length for portraiture but also landscape photographyTim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: adolescent boy walking along a towpath, there are canal boats in the river, it's golden hour
With the aperture set to f/2.2, Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: a quaint British pub frontage, decorated with flowers and old lamps
This unedited RAW image was shot at f/2.2. Note the dark corners and then scroll to the next image. Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: a quaint British pub frontage, decorated with flowers and old lamps
The same scene at f/5.6. See how vignetting is gone, so the corners are brighter. Detail is also slightly sharperTim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: a quaint British pub frontage, decorated with flowers and old lamps
I moved to the other side of the pub sign to shoot towards bright light. The edges of the pub sign bracket and the out of focus house show minor chromatic aberration.Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: an old building at golden hour, stronf shadows cast onto the brick wall from a large street lamp
Vignetting in this image worked to my advantage because it kept the detail in the sky rather than it being overblownTim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: silhouette of a boy getting his hair cut
Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: a wooden box with brass clasps and a shipping clock on a wooden shelf
Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: upper body portrait of a man with backlit trees behind him
Tim Coleman
Viltrox AF 90mm F2.2 EVO lens image gallery: edge of a forest at first light, the trees are a vibrant red
Tim Coleman

Should you buy the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO?

Buy it if...

You want an affordable mid-telephoto prime for portraiture
At just 40% of the price of the Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 lens, which also has an equivalent 135mm focal length, the Viltrox is much more affordable, while there is no such lens for Sony and Nikon cameras.

You'd like a compact mid-telephoto prime
The Viltrox lens is particularly compact when you consider that it's a 135mm f/2.2 effective lens, especially when you see it in action alongside the bulkier Fujifilm offering.

Don't buy it if...

You want the absolute dreamiest bokeh
Given its small size and low(er) price, there had to be a compromise somewhere, and for me it's bokeh — which has a tendency for cats-eye shaping — and that maximum f/2.2 aperture, which is ever so slightly smaller than the Fujifilm's f/2.

You'd like external controls
Besides its clicked aperture ring and focus ring, there are no external controls in the Fujifilm version. Only with the Sony and Nikon versions do you get an MF/AF switch, function button, and click control for the aperture ring for smooth video transitions.

How I tested the Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO

Viltrox AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens attached to a Fujifilm X-T5 camera, held by tech journalist and pro photographer Tim Coleman

(Image credit: Tim Coleman)
  • Viltrox sent me the X-mount version of the AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens
  • I paired it with a Fujifilm X-T5 camera
  • Fujifilm loaned me the XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens at my request, to make comparisons

Viltrox sent me the X-mount version of the AF 90mm f/2.2 EVO lens and I paired it with a Fujifilm X-T5 camera. It's also available for Sony E and Nikon Z-mount cameras.

I tested the lens over the course of two weeks, alongside the Fujifilm XF 90mm f/2 R LM WR lens, which Fujifilm loaned to me at my request, and I have shot like-for-like images with both lenses to make comparisons.

As with all of my lens reviews, I have put the Viltrox 90mm through a number of real world tests, including a series of the same image at the various aperture settings, and situations where strong light could induce lens distortions such as flare and chromatic aberration.

I always shoot in both RAW & JPEG format, and turn off in-camera lens corrections, checking the unprocessed RAW files. I also use each lens for the situations that it is designed for, in this case portraiture and for isolating subjects.

First reviewed: July 2026

Apple’s app subscription bundles are too rigid and inflexible — here's how I'd overhaul them if I were CEO-to-be John Ternus

There used to be a time when you’d buy an Apple app by paying for it once and never again. Then along came the idea of app subscriptions, and slowly but surely, Apple has started selling more and more of its software products through recurring payments. From iCloud+ to Apple TV, there are many ways to spend your cash on Apple’s wares on an ongoing basis.

Today, Apple flogs bundles of its own apps to its users, with Apple One in particular offering a cluster of apps for a single monthly price. And Apple hasn’t stopped there, with the Creator Studio package being introduced a few months ago for users of its artistic apps.

But while these app groupings ostensibly give you a way to get the software you need without paying multiple subscription fees, I’m starting to worry about how they restrict your choices and force you down avenues you might not want to travel.

Not only can they be expensive, but they’re also inflexible, giving you very little ability to customize them to your needs. If subscriptions are the future of app monetization, then Apple needs to do a whole lot better.

Enter the Creator Studio

Apple Creator Studio

(Image credit: Apple)

Apple likes to portray itself as the company of creatives — think about its “Here’s to the crazy ones” or “I’m a Mac” commercials of days gone by. And the firm already sells apps made specifically for this demographic, including Logic Pro, Final Cut Pro, Pixelmator Pro, and more. So it makes sense that Apple would want to offer a software suite that grants interested users access for a single fee, instead of requiring several payments, whether one-off or ongoing.

That’s what you get with the Creator Studio, which is priced at $12.99 / £12.99 / AU$19.99 a month or $129 / £129 / AU$199 a year. In return for your cash, you get a pass for the following apps:

  • Final Cut Pro
  • Logic Pro
  • Pixelmator Pro
  • Keynote
  • Pages
  • Numbers
  • Motion
  • Compressor
  • MainStage

And yes, some of these apps — like Keynote, Pages, and Numbers — are already free, but pay the Creator Studio entry fee and you get “a library of high-quality, royalty-free photos and graphics, and powerful intelligence features” in addition to what comes with the toll-free editions, Apple says.

Considering Logic Pro alone costs $199.99 if you want to buy it outright (rather than pay an ongoing subscription), this package might seem like a rather good deal. But it’s not the price that I’m interested in — it’s the way app bundles like Creator Studio work.

Right now, there are two main app collections available from Apple: Creator Studio and Apple One. While Creator Studio contains the aforementioned creative apps, Apple One starts at $19.95 / £18.95 / AU$24.95 a month and comes with 50GB of iCloud+ storage, plus memberships to Apple TV, Apple Music, and Apple Arcade.

There are two additional tiers, with the most expensive costing $37.95 / £36.95 / AU$49.95 a month and throwing in 2TB of iCloud+ storage, Apple Fitness+, and Apple News+, in addition to what’s already in the entry-level option.

But what if you want to mix and match your apps and services from Apple? What if you want, say, Logic Pro and Final Cut Pro from Creator Studio, plus Apple Music, Apple Fitness+, and Apple News+? Well, you’re going to have to either take out the top Apple One bundle and separately buy those creative apps outright, or you’ve got to pay for memberships of two distinct ongoing subscriptions.

In this instance, combining Creator Studio with the most expensive edition of Apple One means paying $50.94 a month when all you want are five apps. The rest of the content you pay for is superfluous. Throw in AppleCare+, and you’re forking out even more.

Apple gives practically no flexibility or customization with its app collections. You can’t mix and match apps and services, and if there are some you want from both subscriptions, you’ve got to pay for both. That makes it an incredibly expensive way to go.

But with Apple seemingly getting evermore enthusiastic about subscriptions — and the revenue they bring in — don’t be surprised if this state of affairs continues.

Is there a better way?

Apple Event 2020

(Image credit: Apple)

You might feel that, since Creator Studio is relatively new, Apple is still working out the logistics of how to sell the apps and services it contains. But Apple is no stranger to subscriptions. It’s been offering the likes of Apple Music and Apple Arcade for years now, so it knows a thing or two about how to structure subscription offerings.

Is the lack of flexibility here and the absence of any way to pick and choose apps a deliberate policy on Apple’s behalf? We can’t know for sure, but it’s not a good look.

While the Creator Studio might seem like a decent bargain on its face, it becomes considerably less so if you’re not interested in everything it offers and want to pair its apps with those from the Apple One bundle.

Considering how keen Apple seems to be on subscriptions, I’m surprised it doesn’t offer individual memberships for each component app within these packages. For instance, why is there no individual subscription for Pixelmator Pro? Instead, you’ve got to choose between a one-off fee or the full Creator Studio.

If Apple were to go down this route — and it's what I'd do if I were CEO-to-be John Ternus — it would instantly solve the problem of pairing different apps from different collections. You could simply add whichever apps you wanted to your own “build a bundle” package and get exactly what you need for a more acceptable price.

But that kind of process doesn’t seem to be anywhere on the horizon. There are no rumors saying it’s coming, no telltale clues nestled in Apple’s code. Don’t hold your breath for its imminent arrival.

Until we do get something like that, Apple customers are going to continue to feel ripped off by a rigid, inflexible system that is happy to take their cash in return for apps they don’t want or need. It’s a situation that’s in desperate need of a rethink.

Why AI coding agents keep stalling before production and the governance controls that fix it

Across 100 engineering organizations, 61% already run AI agents. Yet almost none trust them enough to bring them into production.

There are a few reasons for this. Firstly, agents are prone to making mistakes that humans know to avoid through experience. They move at a much faster pace, and by their nature operate autonomously. If something goes wrong, there’s often no audit trail or visibility into what they are doing across the organisation.

This is problematic when a rogue agent inevitably leaks credentials, hits unauthorized repositories, or burns through cloud budget before anyone notices.

This unreliability is why most organizations keep agents away from anything that matters.

However, the real problem is not the agents. It’s the absence of governance around using them. The controls already exist, and have for a long time.

They are the same principles that have been applied to human engineers for years: minimal privileges, audit logging, identity management, and scoped access. Though familiar, companies struggle to apply these fundamental rules.

To ensure organizations get off to a good start with deploying AI agents, they should implement three simple governance controls: isolate, scope, and approve.

Isolate by default

Start with isolated, ephemeral workspaces. Every task that is spun up from a clean template should be erased the moment it is completed. No shared state or bleeds between runs. This means that should something go wrong, the damage will be confined to that task, and nothing beyond it.

Then from that workspace, all agents should have zero outbound access by default. Not limited. Zero. An explicit ‘allowlist’ then defines exactly which domains, methods, and paths an agent can touch. Everything else gets blocked. And even with narrow access, sensitive systems such as GitHub or Salesforce should get read-only access also.

Your agent is in an isolated workspace. Network connectivity is limited. Now it’s time to control tool calls. Model context protocol (MCP), for instance, is how agents invoke external tools, including file systems, databases, and APIs. Without airtight guardrails, an agent can reach any MCP server available to it.

The danger is that this is a significant and largely invisible attack surface. Proxies that sit in front of those tools allow administrators to define an approved list, filter at the per-tool level, and log anything that tries to reach outside the boundary.

Scope permissions and real-time monitoring

Even a well-isolated agent can cause problems if it’s running with more permissions than it needs. Agents should never inherit a user’s full credentials. API keys should only carry the permissions required for that specific task, and nothing more.

In addition to scoped identities, there must be clear visibility. Streaming every request through real-time monitoring and alerting teams when an agent makes 10x its typical API calls, contacts a new domain, or starts burning tokens unusually fast will provide timely, and actionable signals.

Identity-aware LLM routing ties it all together. Authenticating users through existing SSO, and routing all model requests through centrally managed keys solves the problem of API key sprawl. Without this measure of control, hundreds of loose keys with no attribution or clear revocation path quietly accumulate.

Approve agentic tasks with a human in the loop

Think of an agent as a talented junior employee. High output, eager to help, but not yet trusted to push to production unsupervised. AI agents should generate output but not decide what ships. This is where human approval gates, backed by existing role-based access controls, come in. Humans must be held mutually accountable for their agent’s output. This is as much a mindset as a technical control.

However, there is one area where you should assist human oversight: model selection. Not every task should go to the same model. For example, regulated data has different requirements than content generation. Routing by policy ensures that compliance requirements are met without relying on individual developers to make the correct call every time.

Full audit trails make the whole lot accountable. Every prompt, every tool call, every model interaction should be mapped to an authenticated identity and exportable to whatever observability stack is already in place. It should always be clear which authenticated user sent which prompt to which model, and why.

Embed governance in your infrastructure, not your apps

Overall, the goal is to empower organizations with the confidence to deploy their AI agents safely without slowing down their developers, agents or the business. Ensure this happens by laying down a governance layer to make AI agent adoption sustainable. But there’s a catch. Implement governance at the infrastructure layer. There are two reasons why.

Firstly, it avoids duplicating policy for every AI stack you deploy. Secondly, it ensures a consistent governance across a very fast-changing world where agents, models, and harnesses will leapfrog each other monthly. You do not want to rewrite governance policies at the pace of AI change.

Done right, infrastructure-lever governance makes AI production ready. Security teams with visibility over what agents are doing will be more inclined to approve more, compliance teams with clear audit trails will sign off faster, and developers who trust the guardrails will be able to push further.

Those enterprises that build in governance now will not just have better security posture, they’ll outpace competitors waiting for sign-off to run their first pilot.

We've reviewed and ranked the best small business software.

This article was produced as part of TechRadar Pro Perspectives, our channel to feature the best and brightest minds in the technology industry today.

The views expressed here are those of the author and are not necessarily those of TechRadarPro or Future plc. If you are interested in contributing find out more here: https://www.techradar.com/pro/perspectives-how-to-submit

HuggingChat AI review

HuggingChat is Hugging Face's free, open-source chat interface . It might be the most underrated AI tool available right now. You get access to over 120 open-weight models including Llama, Mistral, Qwen, DeepSeek, and Falcon, all without spending a cent. The newest addition is Omni, a routing layer that automatically picks the most suitable model for your request.

What makes HuggingChat worth paying attention to is the sheer scope of model access it bundles into a single free product. I've been reviewing B2B software at TechRadar Pro for the past 10 years and our team covers the AI space closely. Take a look at our 2026 best AI tools roundup and read our in-depth explainers on open-source platforms like OpenClaw and Moltbook.

What is HuggingChat?

HuggingChat is the conversational AI interface built by Hugging Face, the company behind the world's largest open-source AI model repository. Instead of locking you into a single proprietary model, it lets you chat with any of 120+ community-hosted, open-weight models directly from your browser.

It's aimed squarely at developers, ML researchers, and technically curious users who want to compare model outputs, test different architectures, or simply avoid handing their data to a closed-source provider. For anyone evaluating an open-weight model before self-hosting it internally, this is an obvious starting point.

The platform also works for general use cases: writing, coding help, document analysis, and Q&A. But it's at its best when the person on the other end knows what they're asking of each model.

HuggingChat: At a glance

Attribute

Notes

Underlying model(s)

User-selectable from 120+ open-weight models including Meta Llama, Mistral, Qwen, DeepSeek, Falcon, and Cohere Command R+

Best for

Developers testing open models, researchers, ML engineers, privacy-conscious users

Distinguishing functions

Multi-model switching, Omni routing, web search, custom Assistants, document upload

UI features

Clean single-column chat interface with persistent model selector and sidebar conversation history

Subscription costs

Free (unlimited), Hugging Face Pro at $9/month

API pricing

Via Hugging Face Inference API; pricing varies by model and hardware; starts from $0.03/hour for CPU instances

Buy it if…

  • You want to compare open-weight models side by side. HuggingChat is the fastest way to test how Llama, Mistral, and Qwen handle the same prompt without switching tools.
  • You need a free AI chat tool with no usage caps. Unlike many free tiers, HuggingChat doesn't cut you off after a certain number of messages per day.
  • Avoiding vendor lock-in matters to your organization. Every model on the platform is open-weight, meaning you can evaluate it here and self-host the exact same model later.

Don't buy it if…

  • You want a polished, feature-complete interface. There's no canvas mode, no voice input, and no image generation. That puts it behind ChatGPT and Claude for everyday productivity use.
  • Consistent response speed is critical. Inference speed varies depending on server load, and the free tier runs on shared infrastructure. Peak hours can slow things down noticeably.
  • You need mobile-first access. HuggingChat is browser-only with no dedicated iOS or Android app, which limits how well it works on the go.

My time with HuggingChat

My first impression was that HuggingChat is more of a research tool than a daily driver. The interface is minimal: a chat window, a model selector, and a sidebar. That's about it. Once I got past the expectation of feature parity with ChatGPT, I found myself appreciating how little gets in the way of just talking to a model.

The Omni routing feature is a genuine improvement. Rather than guessing which model handles a given task best, In my testing, Omni made sensible choices more often than not. For users who don't want to manage model selection manually, it reduces friction considerably.

Where I ran into friction was speed. During busier periods, response latency was noticeably longer than on paid commercial platforms. For quick back-and-forth conversations, that's tolerable. For longer document analysis tasks, it started to feel slow.

HuggingChat: Features

The model catalog is HuggingChat's biggest selling point, and it's hard to overstate how much value that represents for free. At the time of writing, you can chat with 120+ models including Llama 3.1 405B, Mistral Large 2, Qwen 2.5 72B, DeepSeek V3, Command R+ from Cohere, and several Falcon variants. The list updates regularly as new community models are released.

Web search integration is available and works well enough for pulling in current information, which helps avoid stale knowledge cutoff responses. It's not as tightly integrated as Perplexity's approach, but it does the job without requiring a separate tool.

Custom Assistants let you set system prompts, attach knowledge bases via retrieval-augmented generation, and share a pre-configured assistant via a direct link. This is particularly useful for teams who want a repeatable AI workflow without paying for an enterprise platform. Document upload is also supported, which lets you drop in a PDF or text file and ask questions against it.

HuggingChat's limitations are harder to ignore if you're coming from a commercial product. There's no image generation, no voice mode, no plugin system, and no equivalent of ChatGPT's canvas or Claude's Projects feature. For general productivity use, those gaps matter.

HuggingChat: User experience

The interface is clean and gets out of the way quickly. A new conversation starts within seconds. The model selector is easy to find, and conversation history is accessible from the sidebar once you're logged into a Hugging Face account. There's no learning curve beyond understanding what each model is good at. That knowledge gap is real for non-technical users.

Hugging Face has been transparent in interviews about positioning HuggingChat as the open-source community's answer to proprietary chat products. That framing shows in the design decisions: the priority is access and transparency over UX polish. For the target audience of developers and researchers, that's a reasonable trade.

HuggingChat: Customer support

Support for HuggingChat itself is primarily community-driven, via the Hugging Face Discord and forums. There's no in-product live chat or dedicated help desk for the free tier, which means troubleshooting usually involves hunting through documentation or community threads.

Hugging Face Pro subscribers gain access to prioritized support channels, and Enterprise customers get dedicated support. For individual users on the free plan, the documentation is thorough but the response loop can be slow if you hit an edge case.

HuggingChat interface

(Image credit: HuggingFace.co)

HuggingChat: Pricing

  • Free: Full access to all 120+ models, web search, document upload, and custom Assistants with no daily message limits
  • Hugging Face Pro ($9/month): 20x inference credits, 10x private storage, ZeroGPU priority access, Spaces Dev Mode, and early access to new features
  • Team ($20/month per user) and Enterprise ($50/month per user): Adds SSO, audit logs, storage regions, SCIM provisioning, and dedicated support

The free tier is impressively generous and covers most use cases without restriction. Upgrading to Pro makes sense if you're a developer who also uses Hugging Face's broader platform for model hosting, inference, or dataset work. The credits and storage benefits extend well beyond HuggingChat itself.

There's no standalone HuggingChat subscription. The Pro plan is a Hugging Face platform upgrade, which means you're paying for the full platform rather than just the chat product. That's either good value or unnecessary overhead, depending on how embedded you are in the HF ecosystem.

HuggingChat: alternatives you should consider

  • ChatGPT (OpenAI): The most polished AI chat product on the market, with voice mode, image generation, and a canvas editor. Better for general productivity but fully proprietary and locked behind a subscription for advanced features.
  • Claude (Anthropic): Strong at long document analysis and nuanced writing. More consistent response quality than most open-weight models, though it's closed-source and doesn't offer model selection flexibility.
  • Perplexity AI: A strong alternative if web search and real-time information retrieval are your main use cases. Less flexible on the model side but more tightly integrated with live web data.

How I tested HuggingChat

  • Ran identical prompts across Llama 3.1, Mistral Large 2, and Qwen 2.5 to evaluate output consistency and quality differences.
  • Tested web search integration, document upload, Omni routing, and custom Assistant creation over multiple sessions.
  • Ran tests across different times of day to assess latency variability on the free tier.

Testing covered both technical tasks (code generation, document Q&A) and general use cases (writing, research, open-ended reasoning) to give a representative picture of day-to-day performance.

Are VPNs under threat in Australia? FOI documents reveal plans to block age verification workarounds

  • Australian eSafety Commissioner views VPN detection as a "reasonable step" for tech companies enforcing age limits
  • The watchdog notes that service providers must prevent workarounds under new industry codes
  • Australia's position mirrors a growing global debate surrounding age assurance and VPNs

Australia's internet watchdog is keeping a close eye on VPN services as the country steps up its efforts to enforce strict online age verification rules.

According to documents obtained by The Guardian under freedom of information (FOI) laws, the Australian eSafety Commissioner expects tech platforms and service providers to actively block workarounds that allow users to bypass age-restricted content and social media bans.

The internal documents explicitly detail how the government plans to approach these privacy tools under its Unlawful Material Codes and Standards. Under the Codes, the documents state, "service providers must take reasonable steps to prevent workarounds like VPNs so eSafety will look at this when considering compliance with codes."

For everyday web users, this raises a troubling question: could turning on a virtual private network (VPN) to protect your personal data soon flag you as a circumventor?

As cybersecurity protections increasingly find themselves in the crosshairs of child safety regulations, digital privacy advocates are sounding the alarm.

The push for VPN detection

Person using laptop in cafe

(Image credit: Unsplash / Brooke Cagle)

Under the new codes, the Australian government is placing the burden directly on industry providers to prevent the exposure of age-restricted material, defined by regulators as Class 1 and Class 2 material.

Because a VPN encrypts your internet traffic and spoofs your IP address, it can easily make you appear as though you are browsing from a different country, bypassing local geoblocks and age gates. That's exactly why VPN downloads skyrocketed after Australia enforced mandatory age verification for adult content last March.

However, Australian authorities are confident that platforms can counter this.

According to the FOI documents, the government's ongoing Age Assurance Technology Trial has convinced regulators that network detection is feasible. The documents note that "the Department of Infrastructure, Transport, Regional Development, Communications, Sport and the Arts knows that tech companies can tell when a VPN is in use."

Consequently, the eSafety Commissioner is treating the detection of these tools as a fundamental requirement. The internal log clarifies that "this is similar to eSafety’s regulatory guidance for the social media minimum age, where eSafety considers VPN detection as a reasonable step to prevent underage users from having an account."

A global ripple effect?

Australia is far from the only country struggling to balance child safety legislation with the right to online privacy. The debate over whether to treat VPNs as essential security software or mere circumvention tools is heating up worldwide.

Recent analysis of Australia's age verification rules suggests that trying to plug these "loopholes" could severely compromise the digital safety of the broader population. In fact, some experts argue that demanding that platforms actively block VPN connections sets a dangerous precedent for civil liberties.

The ripple effect is already visible across Europe.

As the EU launches its own age verification initiatives, regulators are increasingly signaling that VPNs might be next in line for restrictions. Similarly, the shifting role of VPNs in the UK has prompted rigorous discussions about whether incoming social media bans could lead to VPN restrictions.

Ultimately, the eSafety Commissioner’s plan highlights a growing reality: as governments worldwide roll out strict age assurance mandates, child safety measures and VPN use are on a collision course.

Whether everyday Australians will still be able to freely protect their data on public Wi-Fi without being blocked from their favorite sites remains to be seen.

Zoom will let you add an AI receptionist at work, as 'businesses shouldn’t have to replace their phone system to benefit from AI'

  • Zoom Virtual Agent Receptionist is now available to any business
  • As a first port of call, it frees up humans to handle more valuable calls
  • Available from $24.99/month, it speaks 10+ languages and works 24/7

Zoom has announced the launch of a dedicated AI receptionist that customers can deploy within their existing business telephone system, meaning that prospective customers will no longer have to commit to migrating to Zoom Phone, as was previously the case.

By helping customers to avoid disruptive infrastructure changes and waste years of investment in other telephone solutions, Zoom could end up with even more paying customers who would otherwise have dismissed the tool due to the migration requirements.

The system is designed to supplement existing human teams by answering incoming calls and directing them to the right support channels.

Zoom's AI receptionist is now available to all, including non-Zoom Phone customers

"Businesses shouldn’t have to replace their phone system to benefit from AI," Zoom Phone GM Chris Moss wrote.

The company boasted that its virtual receptionist can speak more than 10 languages, will work around the clock and has built-in transcription to help agents later down the line.

It can automatically handle routine business questions and schedule appointments, but it will also transfer calls to the relevant people or departments wherever necessary. By pairing customers up with an AI agent first to hopefully answer some of the most basic and common questions, it frees up human workers time to handle the more valuable and complex interactions.

The virtual receptionist also promises to plug the gaps when human agents might otherwise be busy handling other calls, or our of hours when customer service would usually be unreachable.

According to the company's own data, one in two consumers say they'd switch to a competitor after a single bad experience. Around three-quarters (71%) also said they find calling a company more stressful than the issue itself.

Zoom Virtual Agent Receptionist is available now, priced at $29.99 per month for 100 minutes, or $24.99 with an annual commitment.

Google logo on a black background next to text reading 'Click to follow TechRadar'

The Westies stars J.K. Simmons and Tom Brittney clap back at fan complaints that new MGM+ mob crime thriller is 'too tame' — 'we can't put everything in the trailer'

The first two episodes of new MGM+ crime drama The Westies are now streaming, but strap in — we've still got another six installments to go.

The new show follows the real-life Irish-American crime family of the same name, who ran the streets of Hell's Kitchen for decades from the 1960s. Basically, it's the perfect warm-up act for MobLand season 2 and The Gentleman season 2, which are both set to return in September.

Led by J.K. Simmons as patriarch Eamonn Sweeney, we've got an epic cat-and-mouse game afoot between our shady leads and the FBI, who have been tasked with bringing them to justice.

The trailer set up the high-stakes drama to come, but some fans weren't entirely happy with the teaser. Scroll through the YouTube comments on the clip below, and you'll see multiple fans complaining that The Westies looks far too tame for a mobster story.

In a way, they have a point. If you're tuning in looking for glory through guts and gore, you're not going to find it. However, that doesn't mean that intense action sequences are few and far between.

Not only have lead stars Simmons and Tom Brittney (James) seen the comments, they're the first in line to disagree — and they've got pretty good reasoning as to why.

'There's some stuff that I'm surprised we could get away with'

"God, no," Brittney says when I ask if The Westies felt tame when filming. "I think I saw that comment. Someone sent something to me about going, 'oh, I think it's tame.' And I was like... well, you better watch then.

"We can't put everything that's in the show into that trailer because you wouldn't be able to show it on TV as a teaser. Especially depending on the time that you're showing it. It's a brutal one. There's some stuff in this that I was surprised that they could get away with."

From a marketing standpoint, it makes complete sense that the best parts of The Westies, which would include the grittiest and most intense fights, won't be revealed immediately. They wouldn't even be in the two-episode premiere... think of them as a reward for investing in the new series long-term.

"If I may... don't watch the trailer. Watch the show," Simmons adds. We're both in it. You know it's gonna be good! So, just watch the show. July 12th. Or you could watch it on the 13th if you want. That's the beauty. Go crazy. Watch it on the 14th, whatever. Just watch it sometime in the first week, please."

You heard the man... lock in now, and reap the benefits as The Westies continues to drop on a weekly basis.

What is the release date for X-Men 97 season 2 episode 5 on Disney+?

Hoo boy, is anybody else still coming to terms with X-Men 97 season 2 episode 4's ending? I know I am but, with a new chapter of the Marvel TV show set to drop very soon, it's time to re-compose and emotionally steel ourselves for whatever comes next.

So, when will this season's fifth entry — titled 'Weapon X, Lies, and DVDs' — make its debut on Disney+? Read on and you'll find out!

What is the launch time for X-Men 97 season 2 episode 5?

Black Widow and Wolverine looking at an off-camera Captain America in X-Men 97 season 2 episode 4

This week's installment sounds like it'll focus on James 'Logan' Howllet, aka Wolverine (Image credit: Marvel Animation/Disney+)

X-Men 97 season 2's next installment will air on Wednesday, July 15 at 12am PT / 3am ET in North and South America.

Viewers living elsewhere will also be able to catch it on Disney+, aka one of the world's best streaming services, on the same date. Depending on where you're based, though, the Marvel Cinematic Universe (MCU) adjacent TV series' next episode will come out at a different time. Check out the list below for more details:

  • US — 12am PT / 3am ET
  • Canada — 12am PT / 3am ET
  • UK — 8am BST
  • India — 12:30pm IST
  • Singapore — 3pm SGT
  • Australia — 5pm AEST
  • New Zealand — 7pm NZST

How many more episodes are there in X-Men 97 season 2?

DISC 02▶ X-MEN '97TRACK 04 00:00 ────◉─── 01:05Stream a new episode of Season 2 now, only on Disney+. pic.twitter.com/YuoCJfi484July 8, 2026

After this week's episode, there'll be four more episodes of X-Men 97's second season to enjoy.

Want to know the exact dates that the Marvel Phase 6 show's remaining entries will appear? Run your eyes over the below list for more on the schedule for the X-Men animated show's sophomore season:

  • Season 2 episode 1 — out now
  • Season 2 episode 2 — out now
  • Season 2 episode 3 — out now
  • Season 2 episode 4 — out now
  • Season 2 episode 5 — July 15
  • Season 2 episode 6 — July 22
  • Season 2 episode 7 — July 29
  • Season 2 episode 8 — August 5
  • Season 2 episode 9 — August 12

Mayor of Kingstown season 5 release date predictions resurge as Jeremy Renner and cast wrap production — here's my best guess for when new episodes will arrive on Paramount+

  • Cast confirms on social media that Mayor of Kingstown season 5 has officially wrapped production
  • No official release date has been confirmed, but predictions suggest new episodes could be seen as soon as November 2026
  • Plot details have largely been kept under wraps

If you've been keeping a close eye on all things Paramount+ in the last week, you might have noticed that Mayor of Kingstown season 5 has wrapped production.

Tobi Bamtefa, who plays Bunny on the show, confirmed the news on Instagram, adding in a caption, "To those about to start from season 1, I envy you. Your socks are about to get blown off in the best way possible. 5 seasons with no breaks!!"

New episodes of the Taylor Sheridan series are set to be the last ever, despite the crime thriller originally being mapped out to run for seven seasons.

The Hollywood Reporter speculated that the unexpected cut falls in line with other Paramount+ original series, none of which have ever exceeded a fifth season. However, the studio has never given an official statement on this.

With production now finished, thoughts turn to when we might see Mayor of Kingstown season 5 episodes released. No date has been confirmed as of writing, but that doesn't mean that we can't use context clues to hazard an educated guess.

Opinion: Mayor of Kingstown season 5 could be released as early as November 2026

A man and a woman look at each other outside prison gates

(Image credit: Paramount)

Let's look back at the Taylor Sheridan TV canon to see what sort of release schedules have come before. Landman season 2 was released in November 2025, with filming having completed in early August 2025.

Similarly, Yellowstone spinoff Dutton Ranch wrapped production in March 2026, resulting in an incredibly quick turnaround, ready for its release in May 2026.

In short, Sheridan shows that only a matter of months is needed between filming and hitting the small screen as a finished product, which means — in a best-case scenario — we could expect Mayor of Kingstown season 5 to premiere as early as November 2026.

In Sheridan's world, anything is possible, but an exact release strategy will likely depend on what else is confirmed for Paramount+'s year-on-year schedule. We're expecting Dexter: Resurrection season 2 and Yellowjackets season 4 to arrive at some point before the year is out, and I don't think seeing Landman season 3 or The Madison season 2 is too far-fetched, either.

It all comes down to how much of a priority Mayor of Kingstown season 5 is for Paramount+, and that's a question that we just can't answer. However, the editing process starts now, and that can only be a good thing.

Ireland’s data center electricity consumption rises 360% in ten years, and is set to account for as much power as every home combined — 23% of national power sent to servers despite moratorium on new data center grid connections

  • Ireland's data center electricity demand reportedly rises 360% in ten years
  • Data centers now account for 23% of the entire country's power consumption
  • New data centers can now only be constructed if certain power demand considerations are met

Ireland’s data center electricity consumption has risen 360% in ten years, and now accounts for 23% of the entire country’s electricity demand in 2026.

With total residential consumption accounting for 28%, and data center demand rising quickly, it won’t be long before the server farms overtake the consumption of Ireland’s population of just over five million.

These figures come from an Ireland Central Statistics Office report, which shows data center electricity consumption has risen 10% year over year from 2024 to 2025, despite a moratorium on new data center grid connections enacted in 2021. In total, the country’s data centers consumed 7,663 GWh last year, despite the rest of Ireland's demand rising only 2% in the same period.

Ireland battling data center power demand

The 2021 moratorium, put in place by Ireland’s Commission for Regulation of Utilities (CRU), required the national grid operator, EirGrid, to stop processing standard power applications for data centers in the Greater Dublin Area. New data centers built after this ruling were therefore required to supply their own on-site energy or construct new projects in regions not subject to this restriction.

Consumption since 2021 has risen steadily, prompting the CRU to replace the previous moratorium with the Large Energy Users (LEU) Connection Policy, which subjects new data center projects to a set of measures designed to ease the level of consumption on the national grid, while also creating new sources of energy.

Data centers over 10 MVA are now required to construct on-site, flexible power generation that covers 100% of demand, while also sourcing at least 80% of their annual electricity from new, unsubsidized renewable projects within six years.

Ireland has become a hub for big tech. Many companies have built European headquarters in the country, with hyperscalers such as AWS, Google, Meta, and Microsoft building and operating the majority of Ireland’s 89 data centers to power cloud infrastructure and AI models.

As a result of the rapid increase in demand, Ireland now has the highest electricity cost in Europe, with Irish households paying around €480 ($550) more per year compared to the EU average. Higher electricity prices have been a catalyst for data center opposition, especially in the US, where working class communities are challenging new data center projects at an unprecedented scale.

This opposition has been a leading contribution to more than half of US data centers being cancelled or delayed, with US citizens citing rising electricity costs, concerns over water consumption, and fears of AI job replacement as the main causes for opposition.

Philips Hue promises free Bridge Pro replacements after a rogue update bricked its devices — and users are impressed

  • A software update bricked Philips Hue Bridge Pro devices
  • The bug required a very specific set of circumstances
  • Philips Hue has promised free replacements to affected users

Over the last few weeks, reports have emerged of Philips Hue Bridge Pro smart home devices becoming bricked, and it looks like the culprit has now been identified. According to Philips Hue, the fault lay with a recent software update — but the company has won plaudits for what it's giving to customers in order to make amends.

The trouble started in late June when Philips Hue released software update 2071353020, which was intended to include “several small changes” that improved the product’s operations. Yet reports started flooding in that the update had caused people’s Hue Bridge Pro devices to fail and become completely unresponsive.

In a statement to Ars Technica, Philips Hue explained the very specific circumstances that caused the problem: “The issue affects users who disabled automatic software updates, remained on an older software version for an extended period, and then manually installed a firmware update after the update package had been stored on the Bridge for more than 10 days.”

As well as that, the spokesperson noted that “Our data shows fewer than 100 Philips Hue Bridge Pro devices have been impacted.”

Still, any disruption like this is a pain. If you’re affected, not only will you have to wait for a replacement to arrive, but you’ll also have to reconfigure your lights and settings from scratch. That’s the kind of disturbance that is made all the more irritating due to the fact that it occurred after users updated their software — something that people are often encouraged to do in order to get the latest bug fixes and improvements.

Free replacements

The Philips Hue Bridge Pro.

(Image credit: Philips)

While it’s always unpleasant to see a software update brick your device, Philips Hue has attracted praise for the way it’s responded. Not only has it issued a fix, but the company has promised that “We will replace affected Philips Hue Bridge Pro devices free of charge, regardless of warranty status.”

The decision has proved popular with Hue owners on Reddit, who've noted in one popular thread that it's a rare example of "big company actually making good". Another comment noted: “Considering the RAM prices too those Bridges went up in costs too. W to Philips on this one.”

If you haven’t updated your Philips Hue Bridge Pro for a while and think your device could be vulnerable according to Philips Hue's description, it might be worth getting in touch with the company first before attempting to update. The last thing you want is a bricked product on your hands.

And if you already have been affected, don’t spring for a replacement device just yet. You might be able to get a free replacement from Philips Hue, so be sure to explore that avenue first before spending a dime on anything new.

This new Hisense e-paper phone has a detachable LCD screen on the back — but I’d rather see the displays swapped

  • Hisense has announced a phone with a detachable rear screen
  • The front display is e-ink, and the rear one is LCD
  • Currently the phone has only been announced for China, so it might not be widely available

We don’t see much experimentation in smartphone design anymore, so I always applaud when companies try something new. That’s exactly what Hisense has done with its new A10 handset, as this has two screens — and one of them is detachable.

Specifically (via GoodEreader), this has a 6.13-inch monochrome e-paper display on the front (it isn't clear if this is officially an E Ink one), and a detachable color LCD screen on the back.

It runs Android 16, but most of the specs haven’t been revealed yet, other than it using an octa-core 4nm chipset, which according to leaker Experience More is a Snapdragon one. In any case, it being 4nm means this won’t be a high-end phone, but then high-end specs would arguably be wasted on an e-paper screen.

According to Experience More, the detachable LCD display will be sold separately. This makes sense, since not everyone will necessarily want two screens.

But it’s an interesting idea, potentially giving you the benefits of both e-paper and a conventional phone display — and since the second screen is detachable, you don’t have to add the bulk or fragility of the second screen when you don’t want to.

The Hisense A10

The Hisense A10 without its detachable screen (Image credit: Hisense)

The wrong way round

I can’t help but think that it would have made more sense to make the e-paper screen the detachable rear one. After all, for most people an e-paper display is more of a secondary device — one you might use to read a book or to conserve battery, but not for the majority of smartphone tasks.

There is a market for e-paper phones — those who desire simplicity or less eye strain are drawn to them for one, and they can help encourage people to use their phones less too, because there is more friction there than with an LCD or OLED display.

But they remain niche devices, and while the Hisense A10 in some ways gives you the best of both worlds, it could end up being even more niche, since it combines the niche of an e-paper screen with the niche of a dual-screen device.

So personally, I’d love to see this the other way around — giving buyers a conventional smartphone with the option of an e-paper attachment. But until a company gives us that, there’s always the Xteink X4 — a tiny ereader that can magnetically attach to the back of phones.

The trouble with this is that it doesn’t run Android or integrate with your phone’s apps, making it a bit more limited than a true dual-screen device would be. But it’s better than nothing.

As for the Hisense A10, that’s currently only announced for China, so you might have to import it.

Xbox veteran stresses Sony's all-digital future would compromise game ownership: 'Digital is convenient until someone else decides you’ve had enough'

  • One of the original Xbox founders, Laura Fryer, suggests Sony is stripping away game ownership via an all-digital future
  • It comes after PlayStation announced physical game discs won't be produced starting from January 2028
  • Fryer claims Sony let Rockstar 'take the heat' by announcing a digital-only GTA 6 first

Sony is still under fire after its latest announcement of a future all-digital future for PlayStation games, as physical game copies are due to be axed — and not only are consumers livid, some gaming industry veterans are too.

As reported by Notebookcheck, Laura Fryer, one of the original founding members of Xbox, has recently condemned Sony's announcement ending physical game discs for future PlayStation games, and highlights the threat the move poses to game ownership.

The announcement from Sony has since resulted in major backlash regarding game ownership from thousands online, including a slight pushback (or support for physical media) from indie game developers like Astrolabe Games.

In this case, Fryer hasn't been shy about noting just how dangerous the end of physical game discs will be once 2028 arrives, especially since rumors suggest Microsoft may follow in a similar direction with its next Xbox console.

"Digital is convenient until someone else decides you've had enough, and there are some games and movies where I will never have enough of them," Fryer stated, which is arguably a valid statement since Sony recently removed over 500 purchased movies from users' libraries.

It's worth noting that Rockstar Games recently opened GTA 6 pre-orders, with the announcement that there won't be a physical copy of the game, which Fryer highlights as an important step to Sony's latest plans, stating: "Sony waited for Rockstar to make the first move, take the heat, and now they're going all in to make this the new normal."

Fryer even references Don Mattrick's infamous statement regarding an 'always online' Xbox One console experience, as she suggests that this is what Sony, Microsoft, and, frankly, Hollywood are doing today.

"When was the last time you put a disc in and the game just worked without a big download? All the major players, Sony, Microsoft, even Hollywood, they're all aligned here. Digital kills the used market, and it stops your old library from competing with new games on the next console."

That 'always online' future is closer than it ever has been, and with Sony also shutting down PS3 and PS Vita stores in 2027. That means whenever the PS6 (or future PlayStation consoles) eventually becomes a retro console like the PS3, there will be no way to play games on the system unless it's via digital means — and that directly eliminates game ownership completely.

Marvel unveils new Avengers: Doomsday mural featuring its huge heroic ensemble and a menacing Doctor Doom — but it mistreats one MCU character in the worst way possible

  • Marvel has published a giant new mural for Avengers: Doomsday
  • It gives us a fresh look at its massive cast and villain-in-chief, Doctor Doom
  • One MCU character is surprisingly conspicuous by their absence

Marvel has unveiled a huge new mural for Avengers: Doomsday that features all but one of its sizeable cast.

Shown for the first time at the Chinese fan convention Bilibili World in Shanghai last Saturday (July 11), the artwork gives us another look at the highly anticipated movie's heroic ensemble.

AVENGERS: DOOMSDAY - the final full film I had the honor of leading as Director of Visual Development at Marvel Studios.This illustration commemorates that journey & reveals the characters & their looks for the first time. #AvengersDoomsday pic.twitter.com/87l95XZZ7dJuly 11, 2026

The image, which was later shared online by former Marvel Studios Director of Visual Development Andy Park, also offers a fresh glance at Robert Downey Jr's Doctor Doom.

Predictably, we don't get to see Doom's likely scarred face — a reveal Marvel is surely holding back for the film's full release. Nonetheless, his iconic mask, coupled with those piercing, ice blue eyes, indicates that the Multiverse Saga's primary villain will be an emotionally cold, calculating, and formidable foe for our heroes to overcome.

Missing in action

Cyclops screaming as he unleashes a powerful optic blast while kneeling in Avengers: Doomsday

Cyclops and the rest of the FoX-Men are part of this huge illustration (Image credit: Marvel Studios)

With San Diego Comic-Con (SDCC) 2026 — and, by proxy, this year's edition of Marvel's oft-anticipated Hall H panel — it's little surprise to see the comic giant starting to accelerate its promotional campaign for the next Avengers film.

What is eyebrow-raising about the Marvel Phase 6 flick's first official artwork, though, is the absence of a specific Marvel Cinematic Universe (MCU) character. And I'm not talking about heroes who weren't announced as part of Doomsday's initial 27-strong cast, such as Spider-Man, Wolverine, Deadpool, or Captain Marvel.

So, who is it? None other than Tenoch Huerta's Namor, aka the ocean-dwelling anti-hero and the MCU's first mutant, who was first introduced to MCU fans in Black Panther: Wakanda Forever.

Namor stares intensely at Queen Ramonda on an undisclosed beach in Black Panther: Wakanda Forever

Huerta is the only actor confirmed to appear in Doomsday who isn't part of this mural (Image credit: Marvel Studios)

Namor's absence is certainly strange, especially as the rest of Doomsday's original cast reveal is part of this mural. The inclusion of Chris Evans' Steve Rogers, who wasn't part of the movie's initial line-up, but was eventually confirmed to be part of proceedings when Avengers: Doomsday's first teaser was released last December, makes Namor's non-appearance all the more bizarre, too.

Is this a simple albeit major oversight on Marvel's part not to include him in this artwork? Or does it indicate that Namor will only have a minor role/cameo to play in Avengers 5? With Namor appearing in Avengers: Doomsday's fourth teaser, I seriously doubt it's the latter. That said, I don't believe Marvel would purposefully cut him from this illustration. Hopefully, someone at Marvel Studios will shed light on this if they're asked about it at SDCC.

In the meantime, find out everything we know so far about Avengers: Doomsday. Once you're done, get the full lowdown on Avengers: Secret Wars, aka Doomsday's sequel that'll also cap off the Marvel Multiverse Saga.

My top HP, Asus and Microsoft business laptops are up to £600 off at Currys — including powerful AI-ready models

UK tech retailer Currys has cut the price on a number of big name laptops, including models from HP, Asus and Microsoft.

The Surface Laptop 13.8", Copilot+ PC, powered by a Snapdragon X Elite processor and backed by 16GB of DDR5 memory and a 512GB SSD, sees the biggest discount. Usually priced at £1599, it's currently available for just £999, a solid £600 saving.

If that's not a big enough incentive for you, the laptop also features a Quad HD+ touchscreen and up to 20 hours of battery life, so you won't have to spend ages looking for someone to plug it in.

My top 4 business laptop deals at Currys

This Microsoft Surface Laptop runs Windows 11 and is powered by the Snapdragon X Elite X1E-80-100 processor. It features 16GB DDR5 RAM, a 512GB SSD, a sharp Quad HD+ touchscreen, and up to 20 hours of battery life.View Deal

This Asus Zenbook laptop runs Windows 11 and features an Intel Core Ultra 9 285H processor, 32GB DDR5 RAM, 1TB SSD, a sharp 2K touchscreen, and up to 15 hours of battery life for productivity daily.View Deal

This Asus Vivobook laptop runs Windows 11 and is powered by an Intel Core Ultra 5 225H processor. It includes 16GB RAM, a spacious 1TB SSD, a vibrant Full HD+ OLED display, and up to 20 hours of battery life.View Deal

This HP laptop runs Windows 11, powered by an Intel Core Ultra 5 226V processor, with 16GB DDR5 RAM, 512GB SSD storage, a responsive Full HD touchscreen, and up to 12 hours battery life daily.View Deal

Also on sale at Currys are two Asus laptops. The Zenbook 14 OLED 14" model is powered by an Intel Core Ultra 9 285H Processor and comes with 32GB of DDR5 RAM and a 1TB SSD.

It also comes with a 2K touchscreen and promises up to 15 hours of battery life, which will be more than enough to get you through a full working day

That model usually sells for £1399 but you can snap it up for £999 at Currys right now, a solid £400 saving.

If you need a larger laptop, the Vivobook S16 OLED S3607CA 16" model is powered by an Intel Core Ultra 5 225H Processor with 16GB of RAM and a 1TB SSD. It also comes with a Full HD+ OLED screen and up to 20 hours of battery life.

That model usually costs £999 but Currys has slashed the cost down to £599, which means you'll also save £400 with that one.

If you're after a laptop with a bigger-than-normal display, then HP's OmniBook 7 AI is the model you want. It features a 17-inch, Full HD touchscreen and is powered by an Intel Core Ultra 5 226V chip, backed up by 16GB of DDR5 RAM and a 512GB SSD.

That model promises up to 12 hours of battery life. It should be enough to get you through a full working day, but depending on what you're using it for, it might require a top up when you're out and about.

While the OmniBook 7 AI usually retails for £999, you can save £699 right now at Currys, which is a welcome £300 off.

For more top picks like this, these are the best business laptops we've tested and reviewed.

The Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan is a good go-anywhere fan, but you might want to play some music to drown out its drone

Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan: two minute review

Specifications

Type: desktop

Speeds: 4

Oscillation: none

Dimensions (HxWxD): 6.7 x 11 x 7.4 inches / 17 x 27.9 x 18.7cm

Controls: power and speed buttons

Battery life: 4-15 hours

Noise level: 36dB to 43dB

Dimplex makes lots of floor, table and pedestal fans, and the Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan is designed to address one of their weaknesses: they can only go where your plug sockets or extension cables can go. This affordable fan works as wired one via its USB-C port but also includes a rechargeable battery delivering up to 15 hours of air, or around four hours at full speed. That means you you can take it into the garden on a hot evening or take it to your bedroom and run it overnight.

The Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan doesn't oscillate but you can tilt it vertically up to 90 degrees, and it folds down almost flat so it's easy to keep in a drawer or toss into a bag. There are four speed settings here but the high speed one is not recommended while charging, as it depletes the battery faster than the USB-C connection charges it.

The fan works well and is fairly quiet, but it does make a noticeable drone at all speed settings; on a hot day, running the fan at high was very distracting. Of course all fans make some noise, but as this is a small fan with a 6.7 inch / 17cm diameter and 5.1 inch 13cm blades, you need to have it close to you to feel the benefit. In my home office the Dimplex on quiet setting at half a meter distance was noticeably louder than a much larger air circulator running at 50% speed one meter from me. If noise annoys, this may not be the fan for you.

The Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan on a wooden bench table

(Image credit: Future)

Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan review: price and availability

  • Launched July 2025
  • UK only
  • £34.99 (about $50 / AU$70)

The Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan, model DXRCFN, launched in the UK in July 2025. It has a recommended retail price of £34.99 (about $50 / AU$70), making it the most affordable model in the current range of Dimplex cooling fans and about £10 more expensive than a similarly sized wired desktop fan. It isn't currently available in Australia, and Dimplex doesn't sell its home cooling products in the US.

This fan has been cheaper – it was £25.45 during Prime Day 2026 – but I wouldn't expect to see any price cuts during the summer months in the UK.

Value for money: 4/5

Close up of the Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan on a wooden bench table showing the control buttons

(Image credit: Future)

Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan review: design

  • Supremely portable
  • Finger-friendly grille
  • USB-C charging

The design of the fan is rather clever. It's been made for maximum portability, folding in on itself to resemble a small squashed football for travel or storage. It charges via USB-C and takes about four hours to charge fully. Because it's USB you can charge it with a phone charger or power bank, which makes it a good option for travelling. The battery is sealed inside and is not user-replaceable.

In addition to its internal bladed fan there's a circular louvred grille on the front that rotates and enhances the airflow. Although it spins quickly, the front grille is finger-friendly and won't hurt you or a child if you or they touch it (although you can lock it in place if you don't want it to spin).

The Dimplex fan doesn't oscillate, but you can adjust its vertical tilt by up to 90 degrees by moving the fan section up or down. It stays put without having to be screwed in place. Controls are simple, with just two buttons: power and speed. There's no remote control and no smartphone/smart home features.

Design: 4/5

Side view of the Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan on a wooden bench table

(Image credit: Future)

Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan review: performance

  • Decent airflow for its size
  • Four speed settings
  • Distracting sound

There are four fan speeds — quiet, low, medium and high — and I found that for my home office desk the quiet setting delivered a nice breeze without making me feel like I was in a wind tunnel. High speed was a bit intense up close but worked well from a little further away. Dimplex recommends only using High when you're on battery power as it can still deplete the battery when you're recharging it; at its lowest, quiet setting I managed 14+ hours from a single charge.

The Dimplex moves a decent amount of air for its size and it's fairly quiet in terms of its overall volume, which ranges from 36dB to 43dB. However, it does make a noticeable and constant droning sound that rises in pitch as you increase the speed. All bladed fans make some motor noise, of course, but desk fans are designed to sit very close to you, which means any noise is much more noticeable. For me it was too distracting at any speed when I sat it on my work desk, although in the bedroom at its lowest setting it didn't keep me awake.

Performance: 3/5

The Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan on a wooden bench table with the fan folded down for travel

(Image credit: Future)

Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan review: should you buy it?

Value

Not much more expensive than a wired fan of similar size

4/5

Design

Designed for maximum portability with fold-flat design, but no oscillation feature

4/5

Performance

Good airflow for such a small fan but we found the noise a little distracting.

3/5

Buy it if...

You like to move it, move it

The Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan is super light and extremely portable, folding down small enough to put in a bag.

You get around

This fan charges via USB-C, runs for up to 15 hours and can be recharged from a power bank or phone charger.

You're in a small space

The relatively small fan blades mean this is best suited to desktop use or close-up positioning.View Deal

Don't buy it if...

Noise annoys

The fan's motor makes a noticeable drone that your reviewer found distracting.

You're far away

This fan only moves air a short distance, so you'll need something more powerful for larger spaces.

Your home's too hot

Fans like this one move air around but don't have any cooling features.

Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan review: also consider

It's twice the price, but the MeacoFan Sefte 6-inch portable air circulator is brilliant, delivering up to 22 hours of impressive airflow and whisper-quiet operation. That's £69.99, and the slightly larger and more powerful 8-inch is £79.99. Both are in high demand so if you want one you should move quickly: the same firm's 10-inch Sefte fans sold out very quickly and are currently out of stock.View Deal

Dimplex Rechargeable Cordless Desk Fan review: how we tested

I tested this Dimplex fan for a week during summery weather as both a desktop fan in my home office, and as a bedroom fan overnight. Both locations are in my house, where indoor temperatures were around 69.8°F to 75.2°F / 21ºC to 24ºC during the daytime and around 66.2°F to 68.0°F / 19ºC to 20ºC at night.

First tested July 2026

I watched the highly anticipated Evil Dead Burn but the horror movie relies too heavily on gore and neglects the lore

Evil Dead Burn is the sixth installment in the horror franchise, and unfortunately, I found the new movie to be the weakest one of the bunch. Considering the 2013 reboot wasn't great, I think that speaks to how much I'm disappointed in the most recent entry.

On the surface, Evil Dead Burn looks promising. It was directed by Sébastien Vaniček, who is most well known for his movie Infested. I liked that one a lot (mostly because spiders terrify me), and so I was excited for his take on the iconic Evil Dead series.

Vaniček's Evil Dead Burn follows a woman named Alice (Souheila Yacoub) who is grieving over the loss of her husband, William (George Pullar), as she seeks solace with her in-laws. One member of her late husband's family is played by Hunter Doohan, who stars in Netflix's Wednesday, and I must admit it was cool getting to see him in a horror movie.

One by one, the family transforms into Deadites, the malevolent, parasitic demonic spirits we've come to fear throughout the Evil Dead franchise. But it goes in a direction I really wasn't expecting.

I do want to preface my mostly negative review by pointing out that there are some good things about this movie. Horror fans with a thirst for gory set pieces will no doubt have fun, as there are indeed some great moments. Some stand-out scenes involve a dishwasher and a car door, and just thinking about them makes me cringe uncomfortably.

Unfortunately, there's not much else to it beyond some standout gory moments that will stick with you. It's not a patch on the Bruce Campbell-led movies we know and love, and pales in comparison to its predecessor, Evil Dead Rise.

Evil Dead Burn centers around a family terrorized by Deadites, but there's a lot of confusion here surrounding how people become possessed. Sometimes you need a transfer of bodily fluids, and sometimes possession takes longer than others. The inconsistency throughout the movies might frustrate fans, as sometimes, a simpler answer is best.

When the family members are possessed, horrible things happen. It is a very unforgiving movie because the Deadites are particularly cruel here, often to an extreme degree. I should warn people now that yes, there is violence towards animals if that bothers you, and the movie feels nastier than its predecessors as a result.

That's not necessarily a bad thing, as we expect to watch a horror movie to feel uncomfortable and scared. But Evil Dead Burn really struggles to balance these shocking, brutal moments with an actual story, to the point where it feels like you're just watching a montage of gory scenes.

There's also a frustrating overreliance on jump scares here, which previous Evil Dead movies steered away from. There's nothing wrong with a good scare, and horror fans love them, but when you have excessive ones you saw coming a mile away, it becomes tedious.

Sam Raimi wove a really cool horror story when he first created The Evil Dead, but this sequel adds very little to the lore. It's basically a long movie where family members brutally attack and maim each other, and by the credits, I was left with more questions than answers.

Even the post-credits scene isn't really worth waiting for, and since there was a three-year gap between Evil Dead Rise and Evil Dead Burn, it's a shame that's all we got.

Ultimately, Evil Dead Burn is another divisive horror movie that will work for some and not others. It really depends on what you want from a horror movie, and if you're content with some over-the-top gore and repeated easy-to-spot scares, then you'll definitely have fun.

If you want more lore with your gore, then you might want to revisit the previous movies instead. Evil Dead Burn doesn't add much to a long-running franchise, and I found it to be a disappointment.

OpenAI shuts down its Atlas browser after not even a year

  • Agentic Atlas browser pulled as OpenAI focuses on one single app
  • New ChatGPT desktop app includes built-in browser and agentic capabilities
  • Could this finally be the 'superapp' we were promised back in April 2026?

Not even a full year after OpenAI launched its own, dedicated agentic browser, ChatGPT Atlas has been axed amid a broader ChatGPT reinvention and the introduction of what might just be the superapp we've been teased for months.

Launched in October 2025, OpenAI has confirmed that Atlas will stop working from August 9, 2026, however it's not technically the end of the company's browser ambitions.

Instead, the browser is simply being moved into the new ChatGPT desktop app and will form part of existing AI workflows without the friction of having to move apps.

ChatGPT Atlas pulled after 10 months

In April, Chief Revenue Officer Denise Dresser described the company's future as one that stops pursuing side quests and fragmented interfaces. She teased an upcoming 'superapp', and while the company didn't explicitly describe the new ChatGPT desktop app as that 'superapp', the significant overhaul and the integration of Codex, other agentic AI tools and a browser within the single app implies this could indeed be said 'superapp'.

"We’ll begin sunsetting the standalone Atlas browser, and will share information with users about how to transition to ChatGPT," the company wrote in a recent announcement.

The new app launch coincides with the introduction of ChatGPT Work, which adds new agentic capabilities in light of the fact that many Codex users are actually knowledge workers, not coders.

ChatGPT Work bridges the gap between generative and agentic AI by enabling users to complete longer-running tasks, rather than instructing the tool prompt-by-prompt. The tool can run both locally and on the company's cloud servers, allowing access from anywhere and continues progress regardless of the primary PC's state.

Further OpenAI tools are also being made available via Chrome extensions to keep some AI available within a dedicated browser environment.

Google logo on a black background next to text reading 'Click to follow TechRadar'

❌
❌